CA3000V2 Manual

CardAccess 3000 GUI Guide Version 2
Continental Instruments 355 Bayview Avenue, Amityville, NY 11701 (631) 842-9400 FAX: (631) 842-9135 Email: [email protected] Website: www.cicaccess.com
CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Continental Instruments. 2004 Continental Instruments. All rights reserved. CardAccess is a registered trademark of Continental Instruments in the United States and other Countries. Other product and Company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Document No. xxxx
Contents
Log In, Log Out................................................................................ 4
Logging in to CardAccess .......................................................................... 4 Default Login Identity........................................................................... 4 Personal Login Identity ........................................................................ 5 Changing Password.............................................................................. 5 Logging Out of CardAccess ....................................................................... 8 Shutting down CardAccess....................................................................... 10
Alerts Grid, Events Grid................................................................. 14

Events Grid ............................................................................................... 16 Events Grid Column Bar .................................................................... 17 Column Width Adjustability ............................................................... 17 Events Grid Columns.......................................................................... 18 Column Relocation ............................................................................. 24 Events Sorting Order.......................................................................... 24 Events Grid Buttons............................................................................ 25 Events Grid Navigation Bar ............................................................... 31 Alerts Grid ................................................................................................ 33 Alerts Grid Column Bar ..................................................................... 34 Column Width Adjustability ............................................................... 34 Alerts Grid Columns........................................................................... 34 Column Relocation ............................................................................. 38 Alerts Sorting Order ........................................................................... 38 Alerts Grid Buttons............................................................................. 39 Alerts Grid Navigation Bar ................................................................ 44
CardAccess Working Modes .......................................................... 45

Monitor mode ..................................................................................... 45 Status mode......................................................................................... 47 Control Tab......................................................................................... 48 Status Tab ........................................................................................... 51 Stations Tab ........................................................................................ 55
Log In, Log Out

CardAccess 3000 SQL is a true 32 bit, multi-tier application that runs on Windows 2000, Windows 2000/XP Pro and Windows NT 4.0. CA3000 successfully integrates advanced client/server system architecture, scalable MSDE/MS-SQL database technology and advanced networking capabilities to provide an easy to program and easy to use integrated access control & facilities management system.
Logging in to CardAccess
CardAccess Log In screen will appear shortly after you start CA3000 software. For successful login into CardAccess software, valid User Name and Password have to be entered in the CardAccess Log In screen.
Fig. 1.1. CardAccess Log In screen.
Default Login Identity

If you are logging in to CardAccess for the first time, you have to use the default User Name and Password to log in successfully.
In the User name field, enter the default User Name admin, default password q and click the OK button. Note: It is strongly recommended that you change the password of the default login identity upon your first successful login. To do this, read the heading Changing password.
Personal Login Identity

After successful login in to CardAccess software using the default login identity, you can create your personal User Names and Passwords as desired. To create personal login identities, refer the section Operators in the User Guide.
Changing Password
Changing password: After typing the password in the Log In screen, the Change Password button will be displayed as indicated in the figure below.
Fig. 1.2. Change Password button displayed after password entry.
Click on Change Password button for changing the password. Upon clicking, the Change Password window will be displayed.
Fig. 1.3. Change Password window displayed upon clicking Change Password button in Log In screen.
In the Change Password window, enter a new password of choice and confirm the same. CardAccess Main Screen will be displayed shortly after successful log in. Note: For password change to take effect, you must log out and log back in to CardAccess. In case you log out and attempt to shutdown CardAccess without having logged in with the changed password, you will have to use the password that was used previously to log in to the software.
Fig. 1.4. The CardAccess main screen.
Logging Out of CardAccess

Logging out of CardAccess will enable you to exit from CardAccess main screen. However, the CardAccess software will continue to run even after logging out. There are two ways of logging out of CardAccess as mentioned below. 1. By clicking the Log out button in CardAccess tool bar.
Fig. 1.5. Log Out button in CardAccess tool bar.
2. By clicking System menu in CardAccess menu bar and choosing the Log Out menu item.
Fig. 1.6. Log Out menu item in System menu.
Both ways of Logging out will take lead to exit from CardAccess main screen into CardAccess Log In screen (refer figure 1.7). After logging out of CardAccess, the following optional functions are possible using the CardAccess Log in screen: a. The same operator can log in to CardAccess by typing in his User Name and Password. b. A different operator can log in to CardAccess by typing in his personal login identity.
8
c. The current operator who logged out of CardAccess can choose to shutdown the software by using the Shutdown button. The third function (shutdown) is explained in the next section.
Shutting down CardAccess

CardAccess software can be shutdown by clicking the Shutdown button in the Log In screen.
Fig. 1.7. Shutdown button used for shutting down CardAccess software.
Clicking the Shutdown button will display the Logout dialog.
Fig. 1.8. Logout dialog displayed by clicking Shutdown button in Log In screen.
In the Logout dialog, enter the same password that was used to log in to CardAccess and then click the OK button. Note: If CardAccess is running on a HostPC, the Confirm dialog for shutting down Communication Driver will be displayed.
10
Fig. 1.9. Confirm dialog displayed if CardAccess is running on Host PC.
Click on Yes button in the Confirm dialog to shutdown Communication Driver. The following are the effects of shutting down Communication Driver The Communication Driver stops communicating with the panels and The HostPC as well as the Workstations no longer receive real time Event/Alert messages from the panels. Shutting Down CICDataServer The final step in CardAccess shutdown is to shutdown CICDataServer on HostPC. This can be done as below: o In the system tray, right-click the Yellow icon representing the CICDataServer Launcher.
11
CICDataServer Launcher
Fig. 8.5. Yellow icon representing CICDataServer Launcher in System Tray.
Upon clicking, a pop-up menu will be displayed as below.
Fig. 8.6. Pop-up menu displayed upon clicking CICDataServer Launcher icon. o Click on Close option in the pop-up menu.
Upon clicking, Confirm dialog for shutting down CICDataServer will be displayed.
Fig. 8.7. Confirm dialog to shutdown CICDataServer.
o Click on Yes button in the Confirm dialog to shutdown CICDataServer.
12
Upon shutting down CICDataServer on HostPC, the following message will be displayed on CardAccess workstations, in case CardAccess GUI is running.
Message box displayed on CardAccess workstations.
The workstation operator must click on OK button in the message box and contact the system administrator for corrective action.
13
Alerts Grid, Events Grid

CardAccess Main Screen will be displayed shortly after successful login in to CardAccess software as explained under the heading Logging in to CardAccess.
Fig. 2.1. The CardAccess main screen showing Events and Alerts grids.
The CardAccess software regularly communicates with security panels. During the communication process, the communication driver picks up event messages from the panels and stores them in CardAccess SQL database. These messages describe every activity that the panel has been involved with since the last communication. During the setup of CardAccess software, priority values can be fixed to each of the events stored in the database to determine where to display the events in the CardAccess main screen. For more information, read the section Setting Up Priorities .
14
There are two display grids on the CardAccess main screen namely, the Events grid and the Pending Alerts grid or Alerts grid for short. These two grids are programmable. The Events grid is designed for receiving normal events that require no action from the security staff while, the Alerts grid is designed for receiving abnormal events such as an alarm input, invalid badge access etc to which the security staff will be required to respond.
15
Events Grid
The Events Grid seen in the top half of the CardAccess main screen is reserved to display normal or low priority events based on the settings in CardAccess configuration screens. See the section Setting Up Priorities for more information.
Fig. 2.2. Events grid of CardAccess main screen.
16
Events Grid Column Bar

Events grid has a number of columns. The column bar is shown below.
Fig. 2.3. Events grid columns shown by reducing the default widths of columns.
Column Width Adjustability

All the columns shown in figure 2.3 may not be visible on the CardAccess screen by default. If more information on the screen is desired, the Column widths need to be reduced. Steps for adjusting column width: 1. Select a column: Select the column whose width is to be adjusted. 2. Position mouse cursor: Position mouse cursor on the intersection line of the selected column and its adjacent until you see a double arrow form. 3. Click and hold: Hold down the left mouse button. 4. Drag: Drag the intersection line to a desired position. 5. Release: Release the cursor The columns will revert back to their default widths when CardAccess is restarted.
17
Events Grid Columns

The columns are explained below. I. Photo column: This column will be visible only if SmartView or DVR RemoteView feature is enabled in CardAccess. To display this column, click on System menu and select System Settings option. In System Settings screen, click the Edit button on the tool bar and select either Enable SmartView CCTV-View Only button or Enable DVR RemoteView button. Note: Only one of the features (SmartView/DVR RemoteView) can be selected. Archive database must be set up before enabling SmartView CCTV or DVR RemoteView features. This column will display a camera icon under the following conditions: In case Enable SmartView CCTV (View Only/Full Control) button is selected, the Photo column will display a camera icon for the highlighted Event, provided the Event has a CCTV Snapshot. For more information refer the SmartView document. In case Enable DVR RemoteView button is selected, the Photo column will display a camera icon for the highlighted Event provided the Event has a DVR recorded video. For more information on DVR recorded video, refer the document DVR RemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000.doc. Class column: Events are grouped into pre-defined classes like Badges, Doors, Inputs, System, Relays, etc. The Class column will display the predefined class names of the Events.
18
Right-Click Options Right-clicking on Class column or anywhere under the column will display the Filter button. Placing mouse cursor on Filter button will display list of options as shown in the figure below. The options allow the selection of specific event types for viewing in the Events grid. Thus, the options can be referred to as filter types as they aid in filtering the Events grid to display only those events that match the selected option.
Fig. 2.4. Filter button displayed by right clicking on Class column, options displayed by moving mouse cursor over Filter button.
The options are explained below: a. Show All: Selecting this option will show all event types in the Events grid. In other words, no filter is applied. This is the default selection for displaying events in the grid. b. Show Badges: Selecting this option will display only badge type events. Any type of badge related event is displayed, excluding vehicle tags. c. Show Doors: Selecting this option will display only reader related events (door forced, door now closed, etc.). d. Show Inputs: Selecting this option will display only input related events (input abnormal, input normal, etc.). e. Show Links: Selecting this option will display only link related events (link activate, link deactivate).
19
f. Show Relays: Selecting this option will display only relay related events (output on, output off). g. Show System: Selecting this option will display only system related event messages (panel trouble, etc.). h. Show Vehicle Tags: This option will be visible only if Vehicle Tracking option is chosen for the Badge Tagging Type field in System Settings screen. Selecting Show Vehicle Tags option will display only vehicle tag type events. i. Show NAPCO Panels: Selecting this option will display only NAPCO Panel related events. j. Show NAPCO Areas: Selecting this option will display only NAPCO Area related events. k. Show NAPCO Zones: Selecting this option will display only NAPCO Zone related events. l. Show All NAPCO Events: Selecting this option will display all NAPCO events. m. Show Auto-Acknowledge All: Selecting this option will display all auto-acknowledged events. The Events grid will revert back to default filter type (Show All) when CardAccess is restarted. II. Description column: This column gives a brief description of the highlighted event. Right-Click Options Right-clicking anywhere under Description column will display a list of options as shown in the figure below. The options allow selection of an event for viewing the configuration record of the badge holder, or the hardware device mentioned in the event.
20
The options are explained below.
Fig. 2.5. Right click options for Description column.
Note: Some of the options explained below are available as right-click options for Description column in Alerts grid also. Options that are common to both the grids are marked with a * sign. Show All: Selecting this option will show all event types in the Events grid. This is the default selection for displaying events in the grid. Show This: Selecting this option will re-filter the Events grid to display only events that mention the currently highlighted hardware or badge holder. *Show Usage: Selecting this option can lead to one of the several things depending on which Event/Alert type mentioned below is highlighted. Badge Type Event/Alert: Selecting 'Show Usage' when a badge type Event/Alert is selected brings up the Show Usage utility screen, which displays a listing of the doors that the selected badge holder has access to, along with a listing of the time schedules that the badge holder is permitted to access those doors. Reader Type Event/Alert: Selecting 'Show Usage' when a door type Event/Alert is selected also brings up the Show Usage utility screen, but you will see a listing of badge holders that have access to the door mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert. The
21
time schedules that the badge holders have access at that door are also listed. *View Record: Selecting this option will open the configuration record of the hardware device or badge holder that is currently highlighted. *Badge #: This option is not available in the pop up list unless a badge type Event/Alert is selected. Selecting this option when available will bring up the Personnel record of the badge holder mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert message.
*Tag #: This option is not available in the pop up list unless a vehicle tag type Event/Alert is selected. Selecting this option when available will bring up the Personnel record of the badge (vehicle tag) mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert message.
III. Location column: This column shows the name of the place where the highlighted Event occurred. Right-Click Options Right-clicking anywhere under Location column will display a list of options as shown in the figure below. The options allow selection of an event for viewing the configuration record of the badge holder, or the hardware device mentioned in the event.
Fig. 2.6. Right click options for Location column.
22
The options are explained below. Note: Some of the options explained below are available as right-click options for the Location column in Alerts grid also. Options that are common to both the grids are marked with a * sign. Show All: Selecting this option will show all event types in the Events grid. This is the default. Show This: Selecting this option will re-filter the events screen to display only events that mention the currently highlighted hardware or badge holder event. *Show Access List: This option applies to Badge related Events/Alerts only. Selecting this option will bring up the Access List utility screen which displays a listing of the badge holders that have access to currently highlighted door Event/Alert message. *View Record: Selecting this option will open the configuration record of the selected hardware device or badge holder. Show Video: This option will be visible only when the DVR RemoteView feature is enabled in CardAccess. Selecting this option will display the DVR recorded video of the highlighted Event. For more information on DVR recorded video, refer the document DVR RemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000.doc IV. Date column: This column shows the date and time at which the highlighted event occurred. V. Operator column: If the highlighted Event is an acknowledged Alert, the Operator column will display the name of the operator who acknowledged the Alert. If the highlighted event is a normal event of the Events grid, the Operator column will display SYSTEM by default. VI. Acknowledged At column: If the highlighted Event is an acknowledged Alert, the Acknowledged At column will show the date and time at which the Alert was acknowledged. If the highlighted Event is a normal Event of the Events grid, the Acknowledged At will show exactly the same date and time as that displayed in Date column.
23
VII. Priority column: This column displays the priority value of the highlighted Event fixed in the various configuration screens of CardAccess. The Priority Number range is 1-99, where 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority number in the range. However 99 is a special number. Events set to Priority value 99 will never report in the CardAccess system. In other words, they are suppressed. Thus, the actual usable Priority Number range is 1-98.
Column Relocation
Columns can be relocated if desired. Steps for relocating a column: 1. Select the column: Select the column to be relocated. 2. Position the Cursor: Position mouse cursor on the column name. 3. Click and Hold: Hold down the left mouse button. 4. Drag the Column: Drag the column to the required position. 5. Release: Release the mouse button. The columns will revert to their default positions when CardAccess is restarted.
Events Sorting Order

By default, the events are sorted according to Acknowledged At column as shown in figure 2.2. This column allows the events to be sorted according to the time at which the events are acknowledged. However, any column can be used for sorting. The sort criterion can be changed by clicking on the column name desired to be used for sorting. Column used for sorting will be highlighted in yellow color. A column can be sorted in ascending/descending orders alternately by clicking on the column name.
24
Upward/downward arrows seen in a column name (in yellow highlight) represent ascending/descending sort orders respectively.
Events Grid Buttons
Fig. 2.7. Events grid buttons.
Some of the buttons shown in figure 2.7 may be missing or grayed out depending on the type of event selected. Each of the buttons is explained below. Note: Most of the buttons explained below are available in the Alerts grid as well and the buttons perform similar functions. Buttons that are common to both the grids are marked with a * sign. I. Track/Browse button: The Events grid can be switched between Track and Browse modes alternately by clicking this button. Track Mode: In Track mode, the Events Grid displays each new event as it arrives. In this mode, the older events scroll up and off the screen as newer events roll in. The Events grid will have a white color background in Track mode. Browse mode: This is the default working mode of CardAccess. This mode freezes the CardAccess screen to help examine a specific event. The Events grid will have a green color background in Browse mode. II. *Respond button: Clicking this button will open the manual response screen. In this screen, an operator can write his comments on the selected Event/Alert for future references. Read the section Manual Alert Acknowledgement for more information on manual responses. III. *Map Button: Clicking the Map button will open a pop up window that contains a bitmap representation of the area mentioned in the
25
highlighted Panel/Reader/Input/Relay or Link Event/Alert provided a map has been stored in the hardware configuration record of the concerned device.
Fig. 2.8. Map Popup Window of an Event displayed by clicking Map button.
IV. *Photo button: This button may not be visible on the tool bar by default. To display this button, click on System menu and select System Settings option. In System Settings screen, click on Video Badging tab and select the Photos Only option in the Video Badging Package drop down box. Photo button in CardAccess tool bar will be enabled only when a badge type event is highlighted and that badge holder has a photo stored in his or her personnel record. Clicking the Photo button will open a pop up window that contains the bitmap photograph of the badge holder mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert.
26
Fig. 2.9. Personnel Photo Popup Window of a badge type event displayed by clicking Photo button.
V. *Video Button: Video button will be visible on the tool bar only if DVR RemoteView feature is enabled in CardAccess. The button will be active only when an Event/Alert having a DVR recorded video is highlighted in the grid. For all other Events/Alerts, the Video button will be grayed out. Clicking the active Video button will display the DVR Recorded video of the highlighted Reader/Input/Napco Zone Alert/Event. For more information on DVR recorded video, refer the document DVR RemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000.doc VI.*Control button: The control button is visible only when a door/ relay/link Event/Alert that can be controlled manually is highlighted. Clicking the Control button opens the appropriate manual control screen (door, relay or link). The device mentioned in the selected Event/Alert will be automatically selected, and will be ready to be manually activated or deactivated. VII. Recent button: Clicking the Recent button will display the most recent events that have occurred. The number of events displayed in the grid will depend on the setting in the Event Viewing tab of Operators screen. The Events grid will be sorted by Date or Acknowledged At columns alternately by clicking on Recent button.
27
VIII. Previous button: The previous button works in conjunction with the column used for sorting the Events grid. Clicking the Previous button when Class, Description, Location or the operator columns are used for sorting the Events grid, will display only those events, whose sorting column values begin with the alphabet (In English language), that precedes the first alphabet of the sorting column value, in the highlighted Event. For example let Class column be used for sorting the Events grid. Let a PANEL event be highlighted as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 2.10. Events grid displaying Events that belong to class Panel.
Clicking the Previous button will display only those events, which belong to a class, whose class name begins with the alphabet that appears before the letter P, in English language.
Fig. 2.11. Events grid showing only those Events belonging to class Link after clicking the Previous button.
Note: The same concept explained above holds good when Previous button works in conjunction with Description/ Location/Operator columns being used as the sorting columns of Events grid.
28
Clicking the Previous button when Date/Acknowledged At columns are used for sorting, will display only those events, which occurred within the time duration of twenty four hours, before the time displayed in the sorting column, of the highlighted Event. Clicking the Previous button when Priority column is used for sorting, will display only those events, with the priority number that is immediately lower than the priority number of the currently highlighted event.
IX. Next button: The Next button works in conjunction with the column used for sorting the Events grid. Clicking the Next button when Class, Description, Location or the operator columns are used for sorting the Events grid, will display only those events, whose sorting column values begin with the alphabet (in English language), that succeeds the first alphabet of the sorting column value, in the highlighted Event. For example let Class column be used for sorting the Events grid. Let an INPUT event be highlighted as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 2.12. Events grid displaying Events that belong to class Input.
Clicking the Next button will display only those events, which belong to a class, whose class name begins with the alphabet that appears after the letter I, in English language.
29
Fig. 2.13. Events grid showing only those Events belonging to class Link after clicking the Next button.
Clicking the Next button when Date/Acknowledged At columns are used for sorting, will display only those events, which occurred within the time duration of twenty four hours, past the time displayed in the sorting column, of the highlighted Event. Clicking the Next button when Priority column is used for sorting, will display only those events, with the priority number that is immediately higher than the priority number of the currently highlighted event.
30
Events Grid Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 2.14. Events grid navigation bar.
Note: The navigation bar shown in the above figure exists in Alerts grid as well. The arrows in the Alerts grid navigation bar can be used to perform similar functions as explained below for Events grid. The Events grid navigation bar can be found just below the Events/Alerts grid. The arrows in the navigation bar can be used for viewing older/newer Events/Alerts in the grid. In figure 2.14, we have numbered the arrows to provide simpler explanation. The functions of arrows are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first record of the grid. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted record.
31
Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted record. Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record of the grid.
32
Alerts Grid
The Alerts Grid is seen in the bottom half of CardAccess main screen. This grid is reserved to display only high priority events based on the settings in the various CardAccess configuration screens. See the section Setting Up Priorities for more information.
Fig. 2.15. Alerts grid of CardAccess main screen.
There are several options available for displaying alerts in the Alerts grid. They are: Displaying only the most important alerts in the grid. Displaying all events in the grid. Displaying only specific events types in the grid. The Alerts grid is not intended to display the alerts for a long period of time. It is intended that an operator should notice an alert, perform some physical action to correct the situation and then move the alert into the Events grid. The process of moving an alert to the Events Grid is referred to as Resolving/Acknowledging the Alert. There are several options for Acknowledging alerts. They are: Have the alerts stay in the Alerts grid until they are manually resolved by an operator. Have the alerts remain visible in the Alerts grid until a timeout value has expired. This timeout is set in the Operators screen. Each operator has an operator Alert Ack Time value. For more information see the Setting Up Auto-Acknowledgement section. Force the operator who responds to an alert to fill in a Manual Response Screen.
33
Alerts Grid Column Bar

Alerts grid has a number of columns. The column bar is shown below.
Fig. 2.16. Alerts grid columns shown by reducing the default widths of columns.

All the columns shown in figure 2.16 may not be visible on the CardAccess screen by default. If more information on the screen is desired, the Column widths need to be reduced. The widths can be reduced in the same way as Events grid columns are reduced. Refer the heading Column Width Adjustability explained under Events Grid. The Alerts grid columns are explained below.
Alerts Grid Columns

I. Photo column: This column will be visible on the screen only if SmartView feature is enabled in CardAccess. To display this column on the screen, click on System menu and select System Settings option. In System Settings screen, click the Edit button in the tool bar and select the Enable SmartView CCTV-View Only button. Photo column will display a camera icon for the highlighted Alert provided, the Alert has an associated CCTV Snapshot. For more information refer the SmartView document. Right-Click Option Right-clicking on Photo column or anywhere under the column will display the Acknowledge All button.
34
Fig. 2.17. Right-click option for Photo column in Alerts grid.
Clicking the Acknowledge All button leads to Alerts acknowledgement in the following ways based on operator privileges: In case of operators with administrative rights, all Alerts present in the Alerts grid are acknowledged. In case of partitioned operators, only Alerts that the operators have access to, are acknowledged. II. Class column: Alerts are grouped into pre-defined classes like Badges, Doors, Inputs, System, Relays, etc. The Class column will display the predefined class names of the Alerts. Right-Click Option Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under Alerts Grid Columns. III. Description column: This column gives a brief description of the highlighted Alert. Right-Click Options Right-clicking on Description column or anywhere under the column will display the list of options as shown in figure 2.18. The options allow selection of an Alert for viewing the configuration record of the badge holder, or the hardware device mentioned in the Alert.
35
Fig. 2.18. Right-click options for Description column in Alerts grid.
The options are explained below: View Record: This option has the same function as the View Record right-click option of Description column in Events grid. Read Description column under Events Grid Columns for this option. Show Usage: This option has the same function as the Show Usage right-click option of Description column in Events grid. Read Description column under Events Grid Columns for this option. Badge #: This option has the same function as the Badge # right-click option of Description column in Events grid. Read Description column under Events Grid Columns for this option. Tag #: This option has the same function as the Tag # right-click option of Description column in Events grid. Read Description column under Events Grid Columns for this option. Acknowledge All: Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under Alerts Grid Columns.
36
IV. Location column: This column shows the name of the place where the highlighted Alert occurred. Right-Click Options Right-clicking on Location column or anywhere under the column will display the list of options shown in the figure below. The options allow selection of an Alert for viewing the configuration record of the badge holder, or the hardware device mentioned in the Alert.
Fig. 2.19. Right-click options for Location column in Alerts grid.
View Record: This option has the same function as the View Record right-click option of Location column in Events grid. Read Location column under Events Grid Columns for this option. Show Access List: This option has the same function as the Show Access List right-click option of Location column in Events grid. Read Location column under Events Grid Columns for this option. Acknowledge All: Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under Alerts Grid Columns. V. Date column: This column shows the date and time at which the highlighted Alert occurred. Right-Click Option Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under Alerts Grid Columns.
37
VI. Priority column: This column displays the priority value of the highlighted Alert fixed in the various configuration screens of CardAccess. The Priority Number range is 1-99, where 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority number in the range. However 99 is a special number. Events set to Priority value 99 will never report in the CardAccess system. In other words, they are suppressed. Thus, the actual usable Priority Number range is 1-98. Right-Click Option Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under Alerts Grid Columns.
Column Relocation
Columns can be relocated if desired. The columns can be relocated in the same way as Events grid columns are relocated. Refer Column Relocation explained under Events Grid.
Alerts Sorting Order

By default, the Alerts are sorted according to Priority column as shown in figure 2.16. This column allows the Alerts to be sorted according to the priority values set for the Alerts in the various configuration screens. However, any column can be used for sorting. The sort criterion can be changed by clicking on the column name desired to be used for sorting. The column used for sorting will be highlighted in yellow color. A column can be sorted in ascending/descending orders alternately by clicking on the column name. Upward/downward arrows seen in a column name (in yellow highlight) represent ascending/descending sort orders respectively.
38
Alerts Grid Buttons
Fig. 2.20. Alerts grid buttons.
Some of the buttons shown in figure 2.20 may be missing or grayed out depending on the type of event highlighted and the related options being enabled/disabled. Each of the buttons is explained below. I. Acknowledge button: The Acknowledge button will be enabled only when Alerts are present in the Alerts grid. Clicking this button will acknowledge the highlighted Alert. Right-Click Option Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under Alerts Grid Columns.
II. Respond button: This button performs the same function as the
Respond button of Events grid. Refer Respond button explained under Events Grid Buttons.
III. Map Button: This button performs the same function as the Map
button of Events grid. Refer Map button explained under Events Grid Buttons. Right-Click Options The Alerts grid supports automatic popup of Map window. When this feature is enabled, the Map pop up screen will pop up under the following conditions: When an alert that has a map associated with it comes to the top of the Alerts Grid or
39
When an alert that has a map associated with it is highlighted. Right-clicking the Map button (or a left-click on the down arrow seen next to Map button) will display the options available for automatic popup of Maps window.
Fig. 2.21. Right-click options for Map button in Alerts grid.
The options are explained below. Auto-Show Off: This is the default option. Selecting this option will disable the automatic pop up of a map window for all alert types. But map pop up window can still be opened by clicking the Map button manually. Auto-Show All: Selecting this option will enable automatic pop up of a map window for all alerts. Auto-Show This Area: Selecting this option will enable automatic pop up of map window only for alerts that concern the hardware mentioned in the currently highlighted alert (door, relay, input, link). Example: Select a given door alert. Right click on the Map button, select the 'Auto-Show This Area option. From that point onwards, each alert that appears in the Alerts Grid for that door will open the map window (if a map is stored in the reader record).
40
Fig. 2.22. Automatic Popup of Map Window by selection of Auto-Show This Area right-click option.
IV. Photo button: This button performs the same function as the Photo
button of Events grid. Refer Photo button explained under Events Grid Buttons. Right-Click Options The Alerts grid supports automatic popup of Photo window. When this feature is enabled, the Photo pop up screen will appear under the following conditions: When an alert that has a photo associated with it comes to the top of the Alerts Grid or When an alert that has a photo associated with it is highlighted. Right-clicking on Photo button (or a left-click on the down arrow seen next to Photo button) will display the options available for automatic Photo popup of the badge type event.
41
Fig. 2.23. Right-click options for Photo button in Alerts grid.
The options are explained below. Auto-Show Off: This is the default option. Selecting this option will disable the automatic pop up of a personnel photo window for all alert types. But, photo pop up window can still be opened by clicking the Photo button manually. Auto-Show All: Selecting this button will enable the pop up of personnel photo window for all alerts. Auto-Show This Door: Selecting this option will enable automatic pop up of Photo window only for badge related alerts that concern the door mentioned in the currently highlighted alert. Example: Select a given door alert. Right click on the Photo button, select the 'Auto-Show This Door option. From that point onwards, each alert that appears in the Alerts Grid for that door will open the Photo window (if a photo is stored in the configuration record).
42
Fig. 2.24. Automatic Popup of personnel Photo Window by selection of Auto-Show This Door right-click option.
V. Video Button: This button performs the same function as the Video
button of Events grid. Refer Video button explained under Events Grid Buttons. Right-Click Options Right-clicking the Video button (or a left-click on the down arrow seen next to Video button) will display the options shown in the figure below.
Fig. 2.25. Right-click options for Video button in Alerts grid.
The options are explained below. 1. Auto-Show On: Choosing this option will display the DVR recorded video window automatically. 2. Auto-Show Off: Choosing this option will not display the DVR recorded video window automatically.
43
VI. Control button: This button performs the same function as the
Control button of Events grid. Refer Control button explained under Events Grid Buttons.
Alerts Grid Navigation Bar

Alerts grid navigation bar is similar to the one seen in Events grid. Refer the heading Events Grid Navigation Bar explained under Events grid.
44
CardAccess Working Modes

The CardAccess main screen has two modes of working. They are: Monitor and Status The main screen switches itself between the modes monitor and status by clicking a single button on the tool bar. This button will be displayed either as Monitor/Status depending on the mode selected.
Monitor mode
By default, the CardAccess main screen is displayed in Monitor mode. In this mode, the CardAccess main screen displays the events and alerts as and when they are gathered from the panels. The monitor screen is divided into two grids that are designed for receiving for low and high priority events, based on the settings in the various CardAccess configuration screens.
45
Fig. 3.1. CardAccess main screen in Monitor mode.
46
Status mode
Clicking the Monitor button in CardAccess tool bar will switch the CardAccess main screen over to Status mode. In this mode, the CardAccess screen displays the current status of manually controlled CardAccess system components.
Fig. 3.2. CardAccess main screen in Status mode.
47
There are three folder tabs available in the Status mode. They are: 1. Control, 2. Status and 3. Stations. The tabs are explained below.
Control Tab
The Control tab of Status screen will display a listing of all enabled hardware devices in the CardAccess system. A click on the Control tab will show three collapsed items namely Doors, Relays and Links in the Controlled Equipment area seen in the left half of the screen.
Fig. 3.3. Status screen in Control tab.
The items Doors, Relays and Links contain a listing of the enabled active Doors, Relays and Links respectively in the CardAccess system. The list of
48
enabled hardware devices can be seen by clicking on the corresponding nodes (+ sign). An item that does not have any enabled device will not display the node. In the figure below, Doors node is expanded to show the list of the enabled Doors.
Fig. 3.4. List of doors displayed by clicking on Doors node.
In the above figure, the items Relays and Links have no enabled devices and hence they do not display nodes. Double clicking on any Door, Relay or Link will open up the manual control screen of the concerned hardware device. By double clicking Front Lobby door item in figure 3.4, we have opened the Manual Door Control screen as shown in figure below. The figure shows automatic selection of the Front Lobby door check box.
49
Fig. 3.5. Manual Door Control screen opened by double clicking Front Lobby door item in figure 3.4.
Note: The Manual Door/Relay/Link Control screens can also be opened by clicking the Door/Relay/Link buttons respectively in the CardAccess tool bar.
Fig. 3.6. Doors, Relays, Links buttons in CA tool bar used for opening manual control screens.
The Map area seen on the right half of the Status screen is reserved for displaying the bitmap of the device highlighted in the Controlled Equipment area. But, it is necessary that the highlighted device has a static bitmap stored in its hardware configuration record. If the highlighted device has no bitmap stored, the Map area will remain blank.
50
Fig. 3.7. Map area on the right showing bitmap of Third Floor Emergency Stairwell device highlighted on the left.
Status Tab
The Status tab displays the current operational status (like Open/Closed, Normal/Abnormal etc) of all enabled hardware devices (like doors, inputs, relay, links) in the CardAccess system. A click on the Status tab will show the default selection None in the Category field. The options available in the Category field allow filtering of the status screen display to show only those hardware items that match the selected Event type. The available options can be seen by clicking the down arrow of the field. Selecting an option in the list will display the columns Panels, Device, Status, Last Change and Number under the Category field.
51
Fig. 3.8. Options in Category field displayed by clicking the down arrow.
Fig. 3.9. Status screen in Status tab with one of the options (All) selected in Category field.
52
The options available in the Category field are explained below. 1. None: Selecting this option will not display any hardware device in the status screen. This is the default selection. 2. All: Selecting this option will show all enabled hardware devices. 3. All Normal: Selecting this option will show all devices that are not in an abnormal state. 4. All Abnormal: Selecting this option will show all devices that are in an abnormal state. 5. All Doors: Selecting this option will display only doors that are in normal or abnormal states. 6. Doors Forced: Selecting this option will show only doors that are currently in a forced door state. 7. Doors Free Access: Selecting this option will show only doors that are currently in free access state. 8. Doors Bypass: Selecting this option will show only doors that have been bypassed. 9. Doors Manually Unlocked: Selecting this option will show only doors that have been unlocked using the manual door control screen (and are currently being held unlocked). 10. Doors Manually Locked: Selecting this option will show only doors that have been locked using the manual door control screen. 11. Doors Disabled (Manual Mode): Selecting this option will show only readers (doors) that have been disabled using the manual door control screen. 12. Doors Disabled (Schedule): Selecting this option will show only readers that are currently disabled by a time schedule. 13. All Inputs: Selecting this option will show all enabled input devices only. 14. Abnormal Inputs: Selecting this option will show only input
53
devices that have reported input abnormal. 15. Supervised Trouble: Selecting this option will show only abnormal supervised input devices. 16. Inputs Schedule Disabled: Selecting this option will show only inputs that have been disabled by a time schedule. 17. Activated Relays: Selecting this option will show only relays that are currently energized (latched). Selecting any of the above options will display the following columns: Panel: This column will display the panel number of the panel that is hosting the connected hardware device. The panel number is taken from the PnlNo field of the Panels screen. Device: This column will display the name of the hardware device. This name is taken from the Name field in the Panels, Readers, Relays, Inputs or Links screens. Status: This column will display the current status of the connected hardware device. The message displayed is related to the type of the device. Last Change: This column will display the date and time of the most recent change in status of the indicated hardware item. Number: This column will display the number of the hardware item, in the list of items, in the configuration screen where the item is mentioned. For example, if a door is mentioned on the Status tab, the number of the door record in the Readers screen is mentioned in the Number field. Thus, you have the panel number that the device is connected to in the Panel field and you have the reader number (as found in the Reader field for the Readers screen). With this information, you can easily locate the configuration record of a hardware device.
54
Stations Tab
A click on the Stations tab will show a listing of all CardAccess workstations that are currently connected to the CardAccess database and also of the operators who are currently logged in.
Fig. 3.10. Status screen in Stations tab.
The columns seen in Stations tab are explained below. Station: The Station column will contain the workstation number or name of every CardAccess workstation (and host), that is currently connected to the CardAccess database. In figure 3.10 above, there are two entries, marked Master and Master Comm. These entries refer to the Host PC and the two software components Host user screen (Master) and the Communications Server (Master Comm) that run on Host PC Name: The Name column will display the name of the operator who is currently logged in to the highlighted workstation. The
55
name displayed in this field is taken from the Name field of the operator record, in the Operators configuration screen. Logged On: The Logged on column will denote whether the highlighted to workstation is currently logged in to the CardAccess system and if it is actively accessing the CardAccess database. Yes indicates that the workstation is active and No indicates that the user has logged off.
Operator: The Operator column will display the screen name of the operator who is currently logged in to the CardAccess workstation highlighted. The screen name is taken from the Screen Name field of the Operators screen. DVR Running: This column indicates whether DVR RemoteView is running on the CardAccess system. Time: The Time field will denote when the indicated operator logged in to the CardAccess database.
56
Alert Acknowledgement
Contents
Alert Acknowledgement................................................................. 3
Manual Alert Acknowledgement......................................................... 3 No Response Required Manual Alert Acknowledgement ............. 3 Response Required Manual Acknowledgement ............................ 4 Auto- Alert Acknowledgement ............................................................ 7 Hardware Screen Controls ................................................................ 7 System Settings Screen Controls ...................................................... 7 Operator Screen Control ................................................................... 8
The Alerts grid of CardAccess main screen is not intended to display alerts for a long period of time. An operator is expected to notice the alerts, perform some physical action to correct the situation and then move the alerts to Events grid of CardAccess. The process of moving an alert to Events Grid is referred to as Alert Acknowledgement. CardAccess Alerts can be acknowledged in two ways as below: Manual and Automatic The acknowledgement methods are explained below.
Manual Alert Acknowledgement

There are two kinds of Manual Alert Acknowledgement. They are: No Response Required and Response Required.
No Response Required Manual Alert Acknowledgement

The No Response Required manual alert acknowledgement method does not require any set up in CardAccess. It can be accomplished by means of Acknowledge button provided in the Alerts grid tool bar. Clicking on Acknowledge button will move the highlighted alert from the Alerts to the Events Grid.
Fig. 20.1. Acknowledge button used for No Response Required manual alert acknowledgement.
Response Required Manual Acknowledgement

The Respond button is an optional way to acknowledge a no response required alert. Clicking on Respond button when an Alert is highlighted will open the Alert Acknowledge window, where the operator is required to enter a response in the Response Message control, and then click on Acknowledge button.
Fig. 20.2. Respond button used for Response Required manual alert acknowledgement.
Thus, in this case, the operator has elected to create a response message, although there is no need to do so.
Fig. 20.3. Alert Acknowledge window displayed by clicking on Respond button
Note: At least three characters must be entered in the response message control. Failing this and clicking on Acknowledge button directly will display the message box shown below.
Fig. 20.4. Message displayed when Acknowledge button is clicked with Response Message.
The result is the same as pressing the Acknowledge button wherein the highlighted alert moves from the Alerts Grid to the Events Grid. Note: The major reason to use Response button instead of Acknowledge button is to add comments to an event, which will be permanently linked to it. A new shift of security guards can examine specific events at a later date to see what action was taken by other guards for those events.
Auto- Alert Acknowledgement

CardAccess software can be set to resolve the Alerts automatically, without human intervention. Note: Auto acknowledgement of Alerts requires that the alerts have been set to specific priority values previously. Refer the section Settings up Priorities for priority value settings. Several screens, menus and controls are involved in setting up the AutoAcknowledgement feature for Alerts. They are as follows. Hardware Screen Controls In Panels/Readers/Inputs/Relays/Links screens, the following controls must be configured: Alert Priority and Response Required For configuring these controls refer the section Setting Up Priorities. System Settings Screen Controls In System Settings screen, the following controls must be configured: Enable Auto-Acknowledge, Auto Ack Priority Set-Point and Response Required Schedule
Fig. 21.1. Controls in Alerts tab to be configured for Auto-Acknowledgement of Alerts.
For configuring these controls refer the heading Processing Section under Alerts tab in the topic System Settings.
7
Operator Screen Control The Alert Ack Time value must be set in Operators screen. Open Operators screen by clicking Administration-> Operators in CardAccess main screen. By default Operators screen will open in General tab as shown below.
Fig. 21.2. Operators screen in General tab.
The Alert Ack Time value is a timer that represents the amount of time in seconds that an alert will remain in the Alerts Grid before it is automatically moved to Events Grid. This value is attached to each operator definition.
Fig. 21.3. Control in Operators screen to be configured for Auto-Acknowledgement of Alerts.
When there are several CardAccess workstations, the following conditions must be satisfied for auto-acknowledgement to be operational: a) At least one operator must be logged in at any computer. If no operator is logged in to CardAccess, Auto-acknowledgement feature is turned even though the software is running and alerts are coming in. b) The operator must have Alert Ack Time value set in his record. The Alert Ack Time value can be different for different operators. This means that the amount of time that an Alert stays in the Alerts Grid is not fixed. When there are several CardAccess workstations with operators logged in, each workstation will compete to automatically acknowledge alerts. The operator workstation that has the shortest Alert Ack Time set will acknowledge alerts before the other workstations. The minimum Alert Ack Time is one second and the maximum is 9999 seconds (166.65 minutes, 2.778 hours). Alert Ack Time set to zero for an operator will default to 1 second for that operator logon. The time value can be entered by Typing in a desired number in the Alert Ack Time spin control or Use up/down arrows of the spin control to choose a desired number.
When an operator logs on, the operators alert ack timer is started whenever an alert appears in the Alerts Grid. When the timer for that alert expires, the alert will automatically be moved from the Alerts Grid to the Events Grid.
10
System Settings
System Settings
The default operating characteristics of CardAccess software is set in the System Settings screen. This screen consists of a number of folder tabs. The settings in the screen are made during the set up phase of the software. After that, the settings are rarely changed. Note: Some of the settings in System Settings screen can profoundly change the behavior of the CardAccess or even disable the software. We suggest that access to System Settings be limited to Administrator level users only.
Accessing System Settings Screen

Follow the steps below: 1. In CardAccess menu bar, click on System menu to display the System menu list.
Fig. 4.1. Clicking on System menu in CardAccess menu bar.
2. Click on System Settings menu item in the list.
System Settings
Fig. 4.2. Clicking on System Settings menu item.
On clicking, the System settings screen will be displayed in the General tab.
System Settings
General Tab
By default, the System Settings screen will open in General tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 5.1. System Settings screen in General tab.
The controls of General tab are explained below. Note: Some of the controls on the System Settings screen are Local, meaning they affect the local workstation only. Some controls are Global, meaning they affect all the workstations. Some of the settings affect only the server. We have indicated where a particular control is local, global or server in each section.
System Settings
Station Name [Local]
Fig. 5.2. Station Name and Assign As This PC controls in General tab.
The implications of Station Name control have to be understood along with the Assign As This PC check box. Assign As This PC box when checked indicates that You are logged in to the CardAccess station (either server or workstation) that is currently displayed in the Station name control and That you are currently looking at the settings of that station. Figure 5.1 shows that we are currently logged in to Host PC and looking at Host PCs system settings. Note: Host PC is actually the Communications Server that communicates with the panels. When Station Name is Host PC, CardAccess will look for and start the communications driver program on startup. In the current CardAccess system, you are not allowed to have more than one computers Station Name as Host PC.
System Settings
Editing Current Workstation Settings

Click the Edit button on System Settings toolbar. Make the necessary changes. Click on Save button in the tool bar to save the settings. Note: You must be in Edit Mode in most CardAccess screens in order to change the settings of any control. You can enter edit mode by clicking the New button (to create a new record) or the Edit button (to edit an existing record). The buttons are located on the toolbar at the top. Click on Save button to save the changes made.
Viewing Settings of Another Workstation

Click the down arrow of Station Name control to view the list of CardAccess workstations available.
Fig. 5.3. List of CardAccess stations displayed by clicking the down arrow.
In the drop down list, click on the desired workstation whose settings you wish to view. Note: You need not be in Edit mode to view the settings of another workstation.
System Settings
Changing Station Name

Select a workstation as explained under the heading Viewing Settings of Another Workstation. Click the Edit button on System Settings toolbar. Select the Assign as This PC check box.
Fig. 5.4. Selection of Assign As This PC check box a must for changing Station Name.
Note: If Assign as This PC box is not checked, the new workstation assignment will not be saved. Click on Save button in the tool bar to save the changes. Restart CardAccess for changes to take effect.
Editing settings of another Workstation

Select a workstation as explained under the heading Viewing Settings of Another Workstation. Click on Edit button in the toolbar and make the required changes to the settings of the other workstation. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes.
System Settings
Modems [Server]
Fig. 5.5. Controls for Modems in General tab.
Modems are used by the CardAccess for dial out to, and dial in from the panels. If you wish to use a modem with CardAccess, the driver for that modem must be installed in Windows first. The CardAccess list of available modems is taken from the Windows modem list. Follow steps below to assign a modem: Open System Settings screen by clicking System System Settings in CA 3000 main screen. Click on Edit button in the tool bar. Click the down arrow of Line 1 Modem Name combo box (or Line 2 Modem Name combo box. Any modem can be assigned first). Select a modem in the drop down list and click on it. Click on Save button in the tool bar to save the modem(s) selected. Note: You can assign a maximum of two modems in the System Settings screen. This will make up to two modems available for use by the software. The modems are not dedicated to dial out or dial in in the System Settings screen. See the section titled Dial Up for more information. The Modems section will be seen only on the CardAccess Host PC.
System Settings
Use Facility Maps [Local]
Fig. 5.12. Facility Maps control in General tab.
The mapping engine is disabled by default. To enable it, select (click) the Use Facility Maps checkbox. Selecting Use Facility Maps check box will bring about changes in other CardAccess screens as listed below. Maps menu choice appears in the Administration menu. Map folder tab appears in the following screens: o Panels o Readers o Inputs o Relays o Links Map button appear in Events/Alerts grid toolbar. Disable Clock Synchronization [Global]
Fig. 5.11. Clock Synchronization control in General tab.
This feature is enabled by default. It keeps the clocks of all of the CardAccess workstations synchronized. This insures that timestamps attached to events, which were acknowledged from any of the CardAccess workstations, will be synchronized with a master clock.
8
System Settings
To disable clock synchronization, check (select) the Disable Clock Synchronization check box.
Databases Tab
The Databases tab of the System Settings screen is used for registering archive databases with the CardAccess software. A database must first be manually registered in Databases tab before it can appear in the list of available archive databases in any other screen. CardAccess utility screens that use the list of archive databases generated on the Databases tab include the following: Archive Tab of System Settings Screen Archive Configuration and Events Screen Reports Screen A click on Databases tab will first show a message box as in the figure below. The message box offers the options Yes/No to search for SQL Server names present on the network.
System Settings
Fig. 6.1. Message box displayed on clicking the Databases tab.
If you click the Yes option, the system will perform the search action, and list the server name(s) in the Server Names pane seen on the left side of the screen.
10
System Settings
Server Names pane showing a server name on clicking the Yes option of the message box.
If you click the No option, searching of servers will not take place, and no server name will be shown in the Server Names pane. The Database Names pane on the right is reserved for displaying the database names of the server you select in the Server Names pane. Below, we explain how you can add a database for the purpose of archiving.
11
System Settings
Adding a Database
Follow the steps below to add a database for archiving: 1. Open System Settings screen by clicking on System System Settings menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default the screen will open in the General tab. 2. Click on Databases tab. On clicking, you will see a message box. 3. Click the Yes option in the message box to display the list of Server names in the Server Names pane. Note: If you are archiving data to a Remote Server, you must first register your CardAccess database equipped SQL servers with the local CardAccess instance by using the Database Utilities application (on the Link Servers tab). Database Utilities option is found in the CardAccess tools folder. Once all of your servers have been registered, that list of servers will then be visible in the Server Name pane seen on the left side of the screen. 4. Among the server names listed in the Server Names pane, click on a desired Server Name. On selecting a server, the databases of that server will be displayed in the right pane.
12
System Settings
Fig. 6.2. Database names displayed after server selection.
In the above figure, databases of ARUNWK1 server are displayed in the right pane. 5. In the right pane of the screen, click on the Database Name that will be used for archiving.
13
System Settings
Fig. 6.3. Selecting a database name in the right pane for archiving.
In the above figure, CIDATA143_ARCHIVE database is selected. 6. Click on Edit button in the tool bar. On Clicking, the Add button (found in between the left and the right panes) will be enabled.
14
System Settings
Fig. 6.4. Add button enabled by clicking Edit button in the tool bar.
7. Click on Add button. Upon clicking, the server and database names will be added to the grid seen in the lower half of the screen.
15
System Settings
Fig. 6.5. Server and database names added to grid.
In the above figure, ARUNWK1 server and CIDATA143_ARCHIVE database are added to the grid. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the setting. Click on Close button to close the screen. Note: Similarly, other databases needed for archiving can be added to the grid.
16
System Settings
Fig. 6.6. A second database added by following similar steps.
Removing a Database
In case a database added to the grid will not be used for archiving, you can remove it by using the Delete Highlighted Database pop-up menu. Steps to remove a database from the Databases tab: 1. Open System Settings screen by clicking on System System Settings menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default the screen will open in the General tab. 2. Click on Databases tab. On clicking, you will see a message box. 3. You can click on either of the options Yes/No in the message box. On clicking, you will see the list of databases added (previously) to the lower half of the screen.
17
System Settings
4. Click on Edit button in the tool bar. 5. In the lower half of the screen, click on the row containing the database name you wish to remove.
Fig. 6.8. CIDATA132 database selected for deletion.
6. Right-click on the highlighted row to display the Delete Highlighted Database pop-up menu.
Fig. 6.9. Right-click option for deleting the highlighted database.
7. Left-click on Delete Highlighted Database pop-up menu to remove the highlighted database from the grid. 8. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save this change. 9. Click on Close button to close the screen.
18
System Settings
Archive Tab
Archive tab is used for assigning a database for auto archiving. The archive database can be any CardAccess compatible SQL server database (desktop MSDE or server) except the CardAccess main database. Note: It is recommended that you create your events archive database on the same server that is running the CardAccess database. A click on Archive tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 7.1. System Settings screen in Archive tab.
The controls provided in the tab are explained below.
19
System Settings
Server Name, Database Name The desired Server and Database names must be selected from the respective drop down boxes for auto-archiving. You need to be in Edit mode for selecting.
Fig. 7.2. Controls for selecting Server and Database names.
The Database you select will be used for archiving the existing events. Archive Event Photos By default, the Archive Event Photos check box will be checked as shown in figure 7.1. The check mark in this box will allow the associated Event snapshots (taken by SmartView application) to be archived during autoarchiving of Events.
Fig. 7.3. Control to enable archiving of Event photos.
Note: Removal of check mark will result in the loss of the associated event snapshots, when archiving takes place.
20
System Settings
Limiting Event Count The Limit the number of Events in Archive database to control is provided for limiting the number of events in the Archive database.
Fig. 7.4. Spin control for limiting event count in Archive database.
It is recommended to limit the number of events in Archive database to One million events if MSDE is used or Three millions events if SQL Server is used. The limit can be fixed by o By typing in the appropriate number in the field or o By using the up/down arrows of the spin control to choose the number. The event count in the Archive database builds up as and when autoarchiving takes place. The following Alerts will be displayed in CardAccess Alerts grid depending on the event count in the database: o When the event count in Archive database is 50,000 events lesser than the actual limit fixed, the alert 'Archive database is nearing the limit' will be displayed. o When the event count in Archive database equals the actual limit fixed, the alert Archive database has reached the limit will be displayed. o When the event count in Archive database exceeds the limit fixed, the alert Archive database has exceeded the limit will be displayed.
21
System Settings
Check Archive Database Size A click on Check Archive Database Size button will display o The physical size of Archive database and o The current event count in Archive database.
Fig. 7.5. Size and event count of Archive database displayed by clicking on the button.
22
System Settings
Printers Tab
Printers tab is used for selecting printers that will be used for printing reports and events. A click on Printers tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 8.1. System Settings screen in Printers tab.
The controls provided in the tab are explained below.
23
System Settings
Printing Reports
Reports section of Printers tab provides a control for selecting the printer that will be used for printing Reports.
Fig. 8.2. Report section in Printers tab.
The control is explained below. Report Printer [Local]
Fig. 8.3. Report Printer control.
By default, the Report Printer control will display the option None as shown in the above figure. This control is used to select printers that will be used for printing reports. The list of printers is taken from Windows printers list. Thus, at least one printer must be installed in Windows. Note: The Reports button in CardAccess main screen will be enabled only when a printer is installed in Windows.
Fig. 8.4. Reports button in CardAccess tool bar enabled when printer is installed in Windows.
24
System Settings
Selecting a Report Printer

Follow steps below to select a Report printer: Click the Edit button on System Settings toolbar. Click the down arrow of Report Printer control. Click on a printer you intend to use for printing Reports.
Fig. 8.5. Selecting a printer for printing Reports.
Click on Save button in the tool bar to save this setting.
Printing Events
The Printers tab provides controls for selecting the printer that will be used for printing Events.
Fig. 8.6. Controls in Events section for printing Event messages.
Note: The Events section will be seen only on the CardAccess Host PC. The controls are explained below.
25
System Settings
Event Printer [Local]
Fig. 8.7. Event Printer control.
Events printing is disabled by default. You can enable the event printer by selecting a printer in the Event Printer control. Once printing is enabled, the event-printing engine prints every violation and system event message that appears in the CardAccess Events Grid, 24 hours per day, every day of the year by default. Priority Level for Events Printing
Fig. 8.8. Control for fixing set point for printing Events.
The Print Events Above Priority control allows you to fix a set point for printing events. The number specified in this control refers to the priority level of the events you wish to print. For example, the control in the above figure is set to 6. This means that the event printer will print all events in the Priority range 1-5. For more information on Event priority, refer the section Setting Up Priorities.
26
System Settings
Printing Valid Events
Fig. 8.9. Control to select time schedule for printing Valid Access Events.
Valid access messages are not printed by default, in the interest of saving paper. The default selection for the control will be No Print as shown in the above figure. Since the majority of event transactions are valid access events, a considerable amount of paper could be used in a busy system. The Valid Access Events by Schedule control allows the selection of time schedules for printing valid access Events. When a time schedule is selected, the valid access events will be printed during that particular schedule. If no schedule is selected, valid access events will not be sent to the event printer and only violation and system messages will be sent to the printer. Note: A high-speed dot matrix printer will offer line by line printing capability. A laser printer will not eject a document until the entire page has been filled with text. In a case where the event printer is being used to monitor violation event traffic, a dot matrix printer is advised if action is to be taken as events are printed. If event printing is for historical purposes, the laser printer will suffice.
Enabling Event Printing

Follow the steps below to enable Event Printing: Click the Edit button on System Settings toolbar. Click the down arrow of Event Printer control and click on a printer you wish to use for printing events.
Fig. 8.10. Selecting an Event Printer.
27
System Settings
Using the spin buttons of Print Events Above Priority control, choose a set point for printing events. The number in this control refers to the priority level of the events that you wish to print. If you want to print valid events as well, click the down arrow of Valid Access Events by Schedule control and select a desired time schedule in the drop down list.
Fig. 8.11. Selecting a time schedule for printing valid access events.
Note: If there are no schedules in the drop down list, time schedules need to be created in Schedules screen. Read the section titled Schedules for creating time schedules. Click on Save button in the tool bar for saving settings. Printer Properties [Local]
Fig. 8.12. Printer Properties button
The Printer Properties button is provided as a convenience for the user. This button gives access to the settings of the printers that are chosen as Events or Reports printers. To access the printer settings, first click the printer whose settings you wish to edit and then click the Printer Properties button.
28
System Settings
Alerts Tab
The Alerts tab provides controls to make settings for the Alerts that can be generated in the CardAccess system. A click on Alerts tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 9.1. System Settings screen in Alerts tab.
29
System Settings
Processing Section
The Processing section in Alerts tab provides three controls as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 9.2. Processing section in Alerts tab.
The controls are explained below. Enable Auto-Acknowledge The Enable Auto-Acknowledge check box controls enabling/disabling of the Auto-Acknowledge feature. If the box is checked, the feature is enabled; if unchecked, the feature is disabled. When disabled, the system will not support automatic acknowledgement of alerts. Note: Enable Auto-Acknowledge check box value will be overridden by the Requires Operator Response/ Requires Alert Response/ Response Required/ Alert Requires Response check box values in the hardware screens.
Auto Ack Priority Set-Point Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control provides spin buttons (up/down arrows) for settings the priority level for auto-acknowledgement of alerts. The system uses the priority level set in this control to determine which of the alerts will stay in the Alerts Grid, and which of them will be automatically moved to the Events Grid. The acceptable priority range for the control is 1-99. Note: The priority value set in Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control will be overridden by the priority values set for the Panel/Reader/Input/Relay/Link devices in case the Response Required checkbox is selected for the devices.
30
System Settings
To set priority values for Panel/Reader/Input/Relay/Link events, refer the section Setting Up Priorities. Response Required Schedule If Response Required function is set on any event types, the default condition is that the Response Required window will display at all hours of the day (24/7/365) (refer topics Panels, Readers, Inputs, Relays, Links and Alert Acknowledgement for details on Response Required function). Response Required Schedule control allows you to set a limit on when the Response Required window will appear. Note that if the Response Required function is disabled by a time schedule, the Response Required window will not display for any type of event. To create time schedules refer the topic Schedules in the manual. Number of Viewable Events
Fig. 9.3. Control for fixing number of viewable events.
The Number of Viewable Events control works in conjunction with autoarchiving of events. The events belonging to the Event table of LIVEDATABASE are auto-archived once per hour to maintain the system performance. Only the most recent events will be left in the events table during the hourly event archive. The Number of Viewable Events control is used to set the number of events that will be retained in the LIVEDATABASE Events table. It is recommended that the number of viewable events be set to a low number (say 10,000). Smaller numbers will increase system response times. The number can be fixed by o By typing in the appropriate number in the field or o By using the up/down arrows of the spin control to choose the number.
31
System Settings
Alert Sound Generator

There are actually two sound generators included in the CardAccess. Each sound engine has its own sound(s) and its own switch to turn it on and off (see figure 9.4). Standard Bell Sound The standard bell sound is active by default every time you re-start CardAccess. It uses the standard Windows Default Beep sound.
Fig. 9.4. Standard bell sound on/off switch.
The standard Windows bell sound is not selectable from inside CardAccess. This bell rings whenever an alert is received. The time interval for this sound is also not selectable. To turn this bell on and off, go to the tool bar of Alerts Grid, right-click on the words Pending Alerts, left-click on the Silence button that appears. If the Silence button appears and it has a check mark in it, the bell sound has already been turned off.
Fig. 9.5. Standard bell sound turned off by clicking on Silence button.
32
System Settings
Alert Sound Section
Fig. 9.6. The Alert Sound section in Alerts tab.
CardAccess has a built in Alert sound generator. When alerts appear at the top of Alerts Grid, it is possible to have CardAccess play a sound that is linked to the severity of the alert priority. The Alert Sound section controls are explained below. Enable Sound
Fig. 9.7. Sound Generator enabled by checking the box.
Enable Sound check box is used to enable/disable the alert sound generator. To enable the sound generator, click the Enable Sound check box.
33
System Settings
Play Interval
Fig. 9.8. The Play Interval Spin Control.
Each sound file control has an associated Play Interval selection control. This control sets how often the associated sound will repeat (in seconds). The minimum is 0 seconds (which is constant repeat) and the maximum is 90 seconds. To select a Play Interval, click the up or down arrow buttons to the right of the preferred Play Interval control or click in the white space and type a number from 0 90 Sound File Controls
Fig. 9.9. Controls for selecting sounds files for different priority levels.
Sound File controls are provided for assigning unique sound files for events belonging to different priority ranges. The sound file controls are explained below: Sound File 5: This control selects the sound that is to be associated with alerts in the priority range 1-5.
34
System Settings
Sound File 10: This control selects the sound that is to be associated with alerts in the priority range 6-10. Sound File 20: This control selects the sound that is to be associated with alerts in the priority range 11-20. Sound File 30: This control selects the sound that is to be associated with alerts in the priority range 21-30. Note: Priorities lower than 30 (31-99) are not assigned any sound file due to the assumption that events of lower priority levels will not appear in the Alerts Grid. Response Required Events: This control selects a sound to be played whenever an alert comes to the top of Alerts Grid that has the Response Required function enabled. This sound will play on all alerts having Response Required function enabled and will override the alert priority settings in the Sound File controls mentioned immediately above.
Selecting a sound file

Selection of sound file for the available priority levels in the Alerts tab can be done as below: Click the down arrow of the Sound File control. Scroll up/down to select a desired sound file and click on it. Assign a Play Interval of 0 seconds or more for the sound file selected. If the Play Interval is set to 0, the sound will be played constantly for all alerts, in the alert priority range, of the selected sound file.
35
System Settings
Import Button
Fig. 9.10. The Import button.
The Import button opens an Explorer window that allows you to import a sound file into the CardAccess3000\Sounds folder. The CardAccess software is installed with 20 default sound files in the \CardAccess 3000\Sounds folder. However, you can import as many sound files of choice as you wish. For each file you import, a copy will be made of the original source sound file and stored in the Sounds folder. Files are expected to be in .wav format. Click the Import button to search for a file. Using Socket Alert Notify
Fig. 9.11. The Socket Notify Control
This feature is disabled by default. Socket Alert Notify is a feature that operates much like event printing. In event printing, event messages are routed to the database (they are then displayed on the screen) and copies of those event messages are sent to the event printer. When Socket Alert Notify is active, event messages are sent to the database as usual, but copies of those event messages are also sent out onto the network via a TCP socket message. The CardAccess server creates a TCP client socket that connects to IP 127.0.0.1 (loop back) and TCP port 5001.The data portion of that TCP packet is stuffed with a comma delimited string of ASCII characters (plain text), which has the following format.
Date BadgeNo Class Description Name Panel Reader
To turn on Socket Notify, select the Using Socket Alert Notify check box.
36
System Settings
Badges Tab
The Badges tab is used to make settings for the CardAccess badge records created in the Personnel screen. A click on the Badges tab will show the screen below. The tab has two subtabs namely General and Custom. The screen opens in the General sub-tab by default.
The Badges tab.
The controls of General sub-tab are discussed below.
37
System Settings
General Sub-tab
The General sub-tab under Badges tab.
The following are the controls. Max Badge Digits at Panel [Global] Max Badge Digits at Panel control is set to reflect the number of digits in the longest card number intended to be used. There are several industry standard card format types, and this control reflects the standard available types.
Fig. 5.6. Choices for maximum badge digits displayed by clicking the down arrow. 38
System Settings
The available choices are 5, 7, 9 or 19 digits. Make a desired selection depending on the type of card you use. Note: The maximum number of badge digits allowed in CardAccess is 19. Do not use badges with card numbers that are longer than 19 digits. Access Groups per Badge The Access Groups per Badge control can be used to fix the number of access groups you wish to provide for the Badge holders in CardAccess software.
The Access Groups per Badge control.
By default, the badge holders can only have two access groups. Hence, only two access group controls are seen in the Personnel screen, on the Access Groups tab. But it is possible to increase the number of access groups (a maximum of 6 groups possible) by making use of the Access Groups per Badge control in the System Settings screen. Let us see how we can make provision for more access groups in the CardAccess.
39
System Settings
Deciding the Number of Access Groups

Follow the steps below to fix the desired number of access groups (1-6 groups) for CardAccess Personnel. Open System Settings screen by clicking the System System Settings menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default the screen will open in the General tab. Click on Badges tab in the System Settings screen. By default the screen will open in the General sub-tab. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. Click the down arrow to the right of Access Groups per Badge control to view the available options.
40
System Settings
Fig. 32.30. Deciding the number of Access Groups you wish to allow in CardAccess.
Decide on the number of access groups you wish to allow for the badge holders, and click on that number in the Access Groups per Badge list (see above figure). You can choose any number from 16. Note: The choice made here is a global setting. In other words, the number of access groups you fix in the System Settings screen will apply to all badges that are created in the CardAccess Personnel screen. To be able to have more access groups than what is possible by default (two access groups), you need to have the newest version of firmware (2.x). Only the new firmware is capable of supporting access groups over two groups (the default).
41
System Settings
For our example, we will choose the maximum number six. On clicking the number, you will see the following message box.
Fig. 32.31. Message box displayed after choosing the number of Access Groups.
Read the message in the box and click the Yes button. Click the Save button in the toolbar to save this setting. Click the Close button in the toolbar to close the System Settings screen. In accordance with the setting just made, the number of Access Group controls will change in the Personnel screen Access Groups tab.
42
System Settings
Badge Tagging Type [Global] Badge Tagging Type control provides two options as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 5.7. Options available for badge tagging displayed by clicking the down arrow.
Select Not used option if you dont intend to use Vehicle Tagging or Select Vehicle Tracking if you wish to use Vehicle Tags. Selection of Vehicle Tracking option will bring about changes in other CardAccess screens as listed below. Vehicle Tag check box becomes visible in General tab of Personnel screen.
Fig. 5.8. Vehicle Tag check box in General tab of Personnel screen.
Vehicle Superterm Reader Link area becomes visible in Options tab of Readers screen.
43
System Settings
Fig. 5.9. Vehicle Tag Superterm Reader Link area in Options tab of Readers screen.
Read the section titled Readers for more details on vehicle tagging. Show Vehicle Tags filter right-option becomes available for Class column in Events grid.
Fig. 5.10. Show Vehicle Tags filter type for Class column of Events grid.
Tag # right-click option becomes available for Description column of both Events and Alerts grids
44
System Settings
Hide Personnel PIN Code [Local]
Fig. 5.13. Control provided in General tab to hide PIN Codes entered in Personnel screen.
This check box has a bearing on the PIN Code field of Personnel screen. By default, the Hide Personnel PIN Code check box in System Settings screen is unchecked, due to which, PIN Codes entered in Personnel screen will be revealed. Placing a checkmark in the Hide Personnel PIN Code box will replace the PIN Codes by asterisks, thereby concealing the PIN Codes of the Personnel. This prevents unauthorized operators from knowing the PIN Codes of the Badges. APB Control Section The System settings screen makes it possible to change the APB status of CardAccess Personnel. The APB Control area has the controls to do this.
The APB Control section.
APB Reader function was developed to enforce strict entry and exit rules for a building. Typically, one reader is set up to be an APB IN reader, and a second reader is set as an APB OUT reader. When a Badge Holder swipes his card at an APB IN Reader, that badge holders APB status is set to IN. His name will appear in the Badgeholders IN list (accessible by clicking Access Badgeholders IN menu options) meant for showing the names of all badge holders whose APB status is IN.
45
System Settings
Once APB status is IN, the concerned badge holder cannot re-enter at the same APB IN Reader until he presents his card to an APB OUT reader. When the card swiped at an OUT Reader, the Badge Holders status will be changed to OUT and consequently, his name will be removed from the Badge Holders IN list. Let us take at an example to understand the significance of APB Control section in the System Settings screen. In the routine entry and exit to a building, it so happens that the Personnel promptly swipe their cards at the APB IN Reader to enter the building in the morning. This will set their APB status to IN for that day. But in the evening, some may do away with swiping at the OUT Reader when they head home. They may take it easy and use anothers card swipe to exit in a hurry. This may seem fine for that particular day. But surely there is going to be a problem the next day, when their APB status still continues to be IN, as a result of lapse on their part in swiping at the OUT Reader. This will cause the APB IN Reader to deny admittance to such badge holders, the following day. Until now, such a problem would require the security guard to look up the Badge Holders IN list for the names of the badge holders whose APB status is IN, and then manually change the APB Setting to OUT in the Personnel screen.
The Personnel screen APB Setting area for manual resetting of APB status.
The guard would be called upon to change the APB Setting individually for all those badge holders who require a change in the APB status. This may be time consuming act. But now, there are a couple of improved features in the CardAccess to help tackle such situations better. These features are discussed below.
46
System Settings
Reset APB The System Settings APB Control section provides a button named Reset APB which helps you to collectively change the status of all badge holders needing APB status change. All you need to do is click this button.
The Reset APB button.
On clicking, you will see a message box as below.
Message box displayed on clicking the Reset APB button.
This message box indicates that all APB enabled badges (badges whose APB Setting in Personnel screen is anything other than Exempt from APB) will be set to Set-Next-Use APB status. Note: The Set-Next-Use option in Personnel screen is meant for setting a cardholders status to IN or OUT based on which type of APB reader (IN or OUT) his next card read comes from. Please read the message in the box and click the Yes button. Doing this will help the cardholders to gain admittance at APB Readers without a problem.
47
System Settings
Auto-Set APB Status The APB Control section provides another control. This control can be employed if you wish to totally avoid manual resetting of APB status for the Personnel. Using the control, the APB status can be automatically reset for all badge holders. Automatic resetting can be executed by specifying the time at which you wish to impose automatic resetting of APB status. A desired time has to be entered in the field against the words Auto-Set APB Status Daily at.
The Auto-Set APB Status Daily at field.
Please note that you need to change the default time 12:00:00 AM to some other time value. The default time will disable the Auto APB Reset feature. You can change the default time by clicking directly on the numbers required to be changed in the hour/minute/second AM/PM time format, and typing in a time value of choice.
Changing the default time to enable Auto-Reset of APB status.
Note: It is recommended that the hour you select for auto-resetting must not support any activity (entries and exits) in the building. The suggested time is after midnight. When the clock strikes the time mentioned in the field, the APB status will be automatically set to Set-Next-Use option for the personnel. This option will take care of the cardholders who may be held up for entry at APB Readers.
48
System Settings
Show Badge Re-Issue in Alert Transaction Show Badge Re-Issue in Alert Transaction area provides three radio buttons for controlling the information to be displayed for badge related events in CardAccess main screen.
Fig. 5.14. Radio buttons for controlling badge events Information displayed on CA main screen.
The functions of the buttons are explained below. Do Not Show: Selecting this option will not display the badge and issue level numbers for any of the badge events in CardAccess main screen. Show Re-Issue on Denied: Selecting this option will display the badge numbers for only those badge events that are denied for reissue. Always Show Re-Issue: Selecting this option will display the badge and issue level numbers for all badge events in CardAccess main screen. The figure below shows the result of selecting Always Show Re-Issue option.
49
System Settings
Fig. 5.15. Events grid showing badge and issue level numbers of a badge event as a result of selecting Always Show Re-Issue option in System Settings screen.
In the above figure the badge and issue level numbers are displayed in the Description column of a badge related event. The highlight contains LITZ, STEVE (383-IL 0), indicating badge number 383 and issue level 0. Note the selection of Always Show Re-Issue option in the System settings screen as shown on the right. Next, let us look at the second sub-tab of Badges tab.
50
System Settings
Custom Sub-Tab
The Custom sub-tab is provided with controls for creating custom fields that will appear in the Personnel screen. A click on Custom tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 10.1. System Settings screen in Custom tab.
Four Personnel Custom Tabs are provided in the screen as shown above. The tabs are: 1. 2. 3. 4. Personnel Custom Tab 1, Personnel Custom Tab 2, Personnel Custom Tab 3 and Personnel Custom Tab 4
51
System Settings
Each of these tabs are provided with nodes (that appear either as + or - signs). The nodes can be expanded or collapsed alternately by clicking on + or signs to view the fields contained within the tabs.
Fig. 10.2. Personnel Tabs 1, 2, 3 and 4 collapsed by clicking the nodes.
Tab 1 provides 4 fields of Alphanumeric, Numeric and Large Alphanumeric Names each. These field names are also provided with nodes. Tabs 2, 3, 4 provide 12 Alphanumeric Field Names each. None of the fields are enabled by default. To create custom fields, you need to enter a name in the field named Page Title. This is done as below.
52
System Settings
Entering Page Title

a) Click on System menu in CardAccess menu bar and select System Settings menu item. b) Click on Badges tab and then on Custom sub-tab. c) In System Settings screen, click the Edit button on the tool bar. d) Click the yellow space of the Page Title row, and type in a desired name for the Page Title. Note: You can enter any suitable name of choice in the Page Title field. A new folder tab whose name is same as the Page Title entered will appear in the Personnel screen. In the figure below we have named the Page Title of Personnel Custom Tab 1 as Medical Data.
53
System Settings
Fig. 10.3. Page Title of Personnel Custom Tab 1 entered as Medical Data.
e) Click the Save button on the toolbar to save this setting. Once you save the Page title in System Settings screen, a new folder tab having the same name as that of Page title you just saved, will appear in the Personnel screen.
54
System Settings
Fig. 10.4. New folder tab displayed on Personnel screen has the same name as Page Title.
A click on Medical Data folder tab at this point will show no items as indicated in the figure below.
55
System Settings
Fig. 10.5. Medical Data folder tab with no items.
The new tab will contain items only when at least one of the Custom tab fields (Alphanumeric, Numeric or Large Alphanumeric field) in System Settings Custom tab has an entry.
Creating Custom Fields

1. Follow steps a-c mentioned under Entering Page Tile. 2. Type in names for the desired Personnel Custom tab fields. Note: You can name only those fields you desire to use and leave the other fields blank. Fields can be named in any order. Suitable names of choice can be entered for the fields. In the figure below, only Large Alphanumeric Field 9 has been named.
56
System Settings
Fig. 10.6. Large Alphanumeric field 9 named as Blood Type.
3. Click the Save button on the tool bar to save the setting. The Personnel screen folder tab (Medical data in our example) will now display the field name(s) that was/were entered in the Custom tab.
57
System Settings
Fig. 10.7. Personnel screen displaying Blood Type field that was entered in System Settings Custom tab.
Removing Custom Fields

1. Follow steps a-c mentioned under Entering Page Tile. 2. Delete the names entered in the Custom tab fields. Note: Deleting the name entered for Page Title field will result in deletion of Personnel screen folder tab (with same name as Page Title) as well. 3. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save the changes.
58
System Settings
Video Badging Tab

Video Badging is disabled by default. The controls to enable Video Badging are provided in the Video Badging tab of System Settings screen. A click on Video Badging tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 11.1. System Settings screen in Video Badging tab.
The Video Badging Package control in the tab is explained below: Video Badging Package The Video Badging feature can be turned on or off by using the Video Badging Package control. A click on the down arrow of the control will display three options as shown in the figure below.
59
System Settings
Fig. 11.2. Options available for Video Badging.
The options in the drop down list are explained below: None: When this option is selected, Video Badging will be turned off. Photos Only: When this option is selected, Video Badging feature is turned on. But, Badge Template Editing is not available. In Photos Only mode, it is only possible to import the existing images that were created using another manufacturers software package. The following functions are not possible in Photos Only mode: o Creating a badge design o Printing/previewing a badge design o Capturing an image o Capturing a signature When Photos Only option is chosen, a new folder tab by name Photo will appear in Personnel screen. The controls of Photo tab are explained under the heading Photo Tab in the section titled Personnel. Badging 3000: When this option is selected, Video Badging is turned on along with the EPIBuilder Badging3000 Software. This software will be available for your use only if you have secured the Badging3000 licenses and activated them. For activating, refer the document Activating Badging3000. In Badging 3000 mode, photos can be captured using a camera kit. Badging 3000 mode allows the following functions in addition to importing and exporting of bitmaps:
60
System Settings
o Capturing an image (with appropriate hardware) o Capturing a signature (with appropriate hardware) o Creating badge designs o Printing and Previewing badge designs When Badging 3000 option is chosen, the following changes can be observed: o A folder tab by name Photo will appear in Personnel screen. The controls of Photo tab are explained under the heading Photo Tab in the section titled Personnel. o Photo ID menu item can be seen in Administration menu list of CA main screen. EPIBuilder Badging3000 Software can be started by clicking this menu item. Usage of this software is explained in the section titled Designer Users Guide.
Enabling Video Badging

Follow the steps below to enable Video Badging: Click the Edit button on System Settings toolbar. Click the down arrow of Video Badging Package control to display the available options. Select the desired option (Photos Only or Badging 3000) and click on it. On clicking, you see a message box indicating that you need to restart CardAccess software in order for the selected Video Badging package to take effect.
Message box displayed on changing the Video Badging Package option. 61
System Settings
Click on Save button in the toolbar for saving the setting.
CCTV Tab
The CCTV tab provides controls that can enable/disable the optional features available in the CardAccess. The optional features are: SmartView, DVR CompleteView (Salient), DVR RemoteView (Integral), DVR Force Recording (Integral) and Remote Control A click on CCTV tab will display the screen below.
62
System Settings
Fig. 12.1. System Settings screen in CCVT tab.
By default, none of the features will be enabled. Not Used will be the default selection as shown in the above figure. The various controls are explained below.
63
System Settings
CCTV/DVR Control
Fig. 12.2. Radio button controls for enabling optional features.
SmartView CCTV Controls The SmartView CCTV feature allows the snapshots of Pending Alerts to be taken automatically thereby avoiding manual intervention for snapshots. Two radio buttons provided for controlling the operation of this feature.
Fig. 12.3. Radio buttons for SmartView CCTV feature.
The buttons are explained below: Enable SmartView CCTV- View Only: Selecting this option will enable SmartView feature in View Only mode. Note: Archive database must be set up before enabling the SmartView CCTV controls (View Only/Full Control). When the Enable SmartView CCTV- View Only option is selected, your local workstation can only view the snapshots of Alerts taken by other workstations. Local workstation in View only mode will not be capable of taking snapshots. For more information refer the help file SmartViewHelp.chm located in CardAccess3000\Help folder.
64
System Settings
Enable SmartView CCTV- Full Control : Selecting this option will enable SmartView feature in Full Control mode. Note: Archive database must be set up before enabling the SmartView CCTV controls (View Only/Full Control). When Enable SmartView CCTV- Full Control option is selected, your local workstation will be capable of viewing as well as taking snapshots of the Pending Alerts. For more information refer the help file SmartViewHelp.chm located in CardAccess3000\Help folder. DVR Control
Fig. 12.4. Radio button control for enabling the DVR feature.
The third radio button control in the CCVT/DVR Control section (see figure 12.2) is reserved for the DVR feature. CardAccess software can now be integrated with two DVR applications. The applications are: - DVR caCompleteView (Salient) and DVR CaRemoteView (Integral). These options can be seen by clicking the down arrow of the combo box.
Integral and Salient DVR application options.
DVR caCompleteView: DVR caCompleteView is an application used for viewing live/recorded videos from CompleteView servers. This application allows you to remotely configure and get connected to multiple CompleteView Servers. DVR CaRemoteView: DVR CaRemoteView is an optional application used for viewing live/recorded videos from DVXi servers. This application allows you to remotely configure and get connected to multiple DVXi Servers.
65
System Settings
One of these applications can be enabled in the CardAccess for the purpose of DVR. To learn how to enable these applications, Please refer the documents Integral DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000 and Salient DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000. Note: Archive database must be set up before enabling the DVR application. Force Recording Control If you choose the Integral DVR CaRemoteView application, you can enjoy another feature called Force Recording. In Force Recording, you have the privilege of having a DVR Camera record video for Event/Alert occurrences from the hardware devices of your choice. For this to happen, you are required to mention the UNC Name of the computer that will send the command required for Force Recording. This is done in the UNC Name field, provided in the CCVT/DVR Control section.
The UNC Name field requiring a mention of the UNC name of the computer that will send the command for force recording.
Please refer the document Integral DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000 for exhaustive information on Force Recording.
Remote Control Typical CCTV switches have built-in serial interface ports. These ports are designed to be connected to an outboard device (like a computer) that can remotely control the actions of the switch. The typical CCTV switch is responsible for switching video monitors and surveillance cameras. Control over the switching actions of any switch is usually available from any one of the three places as mentioned below. The front panel you can manually switch any camera to any monitor. User programmable, automated, mini-programs (Guard Tour). External Control Most switches have a communications port built in.
66
System Settings
In order to use this communications port, you must use the manufacturers proprietary communications protocol. This protocol usually consists of ASCII command strings, which are recognized by the switch. Note: When we say ASCII protocol, we mean a message format that consists of ordinary characters (letters and numbers), plus control codes as defined in the ASCII character table. CardAccess does provide a means to send strings of these ASCII characters from any serial port of the communications server PC (USB currently not supported). Remote Control from workstations is not supported currently. The essence of how Remote Control works in CardAccess is as below: The user will enter ASCII strings in the Command String section of the System Settings screen in CCTV tab. Each of the commands defined in the CCTV tab can then be bound to a reader or input hardware device. When there is a change in the state of the reader or input, the associated Remote Control command will be sent from the designated Remote Control com port. By default, Remote Control in CardAccess software is disabled. Lets look at how to enable Remote Control in CardAccess.
Setting up Remote Control in CardAccess

1. Open System Settings screen by clicking System->System Settings in CardAccess main screen. 2. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. 3. Check the Using Remote Control check box. The System Settings screen will appear as below when Remote Control box is checked.
67
System Settings
Fig. 12.5. System Settings screen with Remote Control enabled.
4. Click the down arrow of COM Port control and select a desired COM Port. Note: Assure that the port that you want to use has been created in Windows, has been tested working, and has been physically connected to the CCTV switch. 5. If necessary, you can set the properties of the Com port by clicking the Setup COM Port button. 6. Click the white space below Command Name column and type in a descriptive name for the Command String you want to use. 7. Click in the white space below Command String column and type in a Command String that is compatible with your CCTV switch.
68
System Settings
Note:
The Command Strings used are specific to the brand and model of the CCTV switch you use. For entering more commands, press the down arrow key on your keyboard which will take you to a new command entry line.
Fig. 12.6. COM Port selected, Command Names and Command Strings entered.
8. Click on Save button in the toolbar for saving the Settings.
69
System Settings
Deleting a Remote Control Command
Fig. 12.7. Control for deleting a Remote Control command.
Follow the steps below to delete a command: Open System Settings screen by clicking System->System Settings in CardAccess main screen. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Click the Command line you want to delete. Click on Remove Entry button. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes.
Setting Up Readers and Inputs

Once Remote Control is been enabled and saved in System Settings screen, a new folder tab by name Remote Control will appear in Readers screen and Inputs screen The command strings entered in System Settings screen can automatically be sent to the CCTV switch whenever there is a change in the state of the Reader/Input. This requires that the Reader/Input be configured for Remote Control.
Configuring Remote Control for a Reader

1. Open the Readers screen by clicking on Configuration->Readers in CA main screen. 2. Click on Edit button in the Readers screen toolbar. 3. Click on Remote Control tab.
70
System Settings
Note: If Remote Control tab is not visible in Readers screen, it needs to be enabled as explained under the heading Setting up Remote Control in CardAccess.
Fig. 12.8. Remote Control tab in Readers screen visible after enabling Remote Control in System Settings screen.
4. Click the down arrow of CCTV Command Name control and select a command name in the drop down list.
71
System Settings
Fig. 12.9. Selecting a CCTV command.
Note: In case no commands are seen in the drop down list, they must be created as explained under the heading Setting up Remote Control in CardAccess. 5. Select which types of door events will send the command (selected in step 4) to the CCTV switch. You can check any or all event types listed in the CCTV Activation Conditions section.
Fig. 12.10. Desired door event selected in CCTV Activation Conditions section.
6. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings.
72
System Settings
As a result of the above settings, the occurrence of any door type event that is selected in CCTV Activation Conditions section, will cause the command selected in the CCTV Command Name control, to be sent from the com port, selected in the System Settings CCTV tab.
Configuring Remote Control for an Input

1. Open the Inputs screen by clicking Configuration->Inputs in CA main screen. 2. Click on Edit button in Inputs screen tool bar. 3. Click on Remote Control tab. Note: If Remote Control tab is not visible in Inputs screen, it needs to be enabled as explained under the heading Setting up Remote Control in CardAccess.
73
System Settings
Fig. 12.11. Remote Control tab in Inputs screen visible after enabling Remote Control in System Settings screen.
4. Click the Enabled check box.
74
System Settings
Fig. 12.12. Enabled box checked.
5. Click the down arrow of CCTV Command Name control in Abnormal/Return to Normal Condition sections and select a desired Command Name in the list. In case no commands are seen in the drop down list, they must be created as explained under the heading Setting up Remote Control in CardAccess. Note: You can assign CCTV command to either one or both of the Input conditions, in any order. You can assign the same or different command names to both normal and abnormal Input conditions.
75
System Settings
Fig. 12.13. Selecting a CCTV command for Abnormal Input condition.
6. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings. As a result of the above settings, any change in the Input state will cause the command selected in the CCTV Command Name control(s), to be sent from the com port, selected in the System Settings CCTV tab.
Control Codes
Fig. 12.14. Control Codes Legend in CCTV tab of System Settings screen.
Notice that in the System Settings there is a Control Codes key printed on the CCTV folder tab. This key is your guide to adding ASCII control codes
76
System Settings
to your CCTV strings. Some CCTV switches require these control codes to be imbedded in the command string. Table 1 below lists the function of each of the available codes. Code ASCII Equivalent ^B STX (Start of Text) ^C ETX (End of Text) ^J LF (Line Feed) ^H ^M ^W Hex On/Off CR (Carriage Return) Delay (.5 Second) Result Send Hex 02 Send Hex 03 Send Hex 0A Start/End Hex Mode Send Hex 0D Wait Second
Table 1 Control Codes.
Explanation of Control Codes

Some of the codes listed do not result in any output. Those codes are explained in more detail below. There are 32 control codes in the ASCII table (00 to 1F Hex. Control @ through Control _). They are not all represented in the legend on the CCTV tab in the System Settings. You can use all of the codes in the ASCII chart between 00 hex to 1F hex. However, some of those codes have been reassigned by Continental engineers and are dedicated to CardAccess functions. A table of those reassigned functions appears below. Code ^H ^W ASCII Equivalent BS ETB Reassigned Function Hex On/Off Delay (.5 Second) Result Start/End Hex Mode Wait Second
Table 2 Reassigned Control Codes.
77
System Settings
Hex On/Off Mode

Hex mode allows you to create hexadecimal output to a CCTV switch. Typically, if you create a CCTV command string like ABCDEF1234567890, the output will exactly be the same as the command string entered. The characters arriving at the switch will be ABCDEF1234567890. In hex mode, the CardAccess CCTV control converts characters entered in the command strings into hexadecimal output to the CCTV switch. Lets use the same command string input, but we will turn hex mode on and off. Here is the command string we enter in the CCTV screen. ^HABCDEF1234567890^HABCDEF1234567890 Output to the CCTV switch will be as below: 0A0B0C0D0F01020304050607080900ABCDEF123456789 Note that the first group of 16 characters has been converted to hex output. The first ^H turns on hex mode and the second ^H turns off hex mode. The second group of 16 characters is output exactly as it was input. When hex mode is turned on, a leading zero is added to whatever character you input, converting it into a hexadecimal character of the format 0x(where x is the character that you input). Note: The acceptable range of hexadecimal characters for Command String input is 0-9, A-F. When using Hex Mode, do not try to input characters outside this range.
Delay
When you put the characters ^W anywhere in a command string, the output of that string will pause for second. The command string A^WB will output the ASCII character A, wait second to output the ASCII character B.
78
System Settings
Entering a Control Code

Click on the Command String line of any CCTV command line Press the Shift key on your keyboard and type the number 6. Shift 6 gives the character ^ (called control). Then type the letter of the control code from the legend that you see above. For example, to add the ASCII character Line Feed, type ^J (use capitals only).
79
System Settings
NAPCO Tab
NAPCO Alarm Panels are integrated with CardAccess 3000 to Manually Arm/Disarm NAPCO Alarm Panels in the CardAccess, Receive all NAPCO Event information in the CardAccess and Know the Arm/Disarm status of NAPCO Areas in the CardAccess. The initial settings for the NAPCO integration program are done on the NAPCO Tab of System Settings screen. In this tab, the NAPCO servers that will communicate with NAPCO Alarm Panels are added. A click on NAPCO tab will display the screen below.
80
System Settings
Fig. 13.1. System Settings screen in NAPCO tab.
By default, the Use Napco Panels check box will be unchecked. NAPCO Panels can be integrated with CardAccess only if this box is checked. Below, we can learn how to add NAPCO servers for the integration program.
81
System Settings
Adding a Napco Server

Follow the steps below to add a NAPCO server. 1. Open System Settings screen by clicking on System System Settings menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default the screen will open in the General tab. 2. Click on NAPCO tab. 3. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. 4. Select (click) the Use NAPCO Panels check box. On clicking, you will see the Add NAPCO Server button.
82
System Settings
Fig. 13.2. Add NAPCO Server button enabled after selecting Use NAPCO Panels check box.
5. Click the Add NAPCO Server button. On clicking, you will see the Add NAPCO Server dialog.
83
System Settings
Fig. 13.3. The Add NAPCO Server dialog.
6. In the Add NAPCO Server dialog, type in the UNC Name of the computer that communicates with the NAPCO panel being configured.
Fig. 13.4. Entering UNC Name of the computer that communicates with the NAPCO panel.
7. After typing in the UNC name, click the OK button in the dialog. This will add the mentioned UNC Name into the Workstation Name area of the screen. 8. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save this setting. 9. Click the Close button to close the screen. The NAPCO server thus added can be used to communicate with the NAPCO Alarm Panels. Similarly, other NAPCO servers can also be added.
84
System Settings
The next stage in the integration program is to configure the NAPCO Panels, Areas, Zones and Relays you wish to include in the integration program. Please refer the document NAPCO Alarm Panel Integration with CardAccess 3000 for configuring these.
Removing a Napco Server

A NAPCO server that will not be used for communicating with the panels can be removed from the NAPCO tab. Follow the steps below to remove a NAPCO server: Open System Settings screen by clicking on System System Settings menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default the screen will open in the General tab. Click on NAPCO tab. Click the Edit button on System Settings tool bar. On clicking, the Remove NAPCO Server button gets activated. Note: The Remove NAPCO Server button gets activated only if a NAPCO server has been added previously. In the Workstation Name area of the screen, click the UNC Name of the server you wish to remove. Click the Remove NAPCO Server button. This will display the message box below.
85
System Settings
Fig. 13.5. Message displayed before removing a NAPCO server.
Note: Make sure you have selected the correct NAPCO server for removal. Because, you cannot undo the removal action even by using the Cancel button on System Settings tool bar.
Click the Yes button in the message box to remove the selected NAPCO server. This will remove the UNC name of the server from the Workstation Name area of the screen.
Click the Save button on the toolbar to save the change. Click the Close button to close the screen.
86
System Settings
Scripting Tab
A user can respond to event messages in the CardAccess system by performing system actions (like Door, Relay, Link or Alarm Panel actions). An example for this is Arming/Disarming of NAPCO Areas in response to NAPCO event messages in CardAccess. In order for events to be responded, a scripting server must be added to receive all event messages from the CICDataServer. The Script servers are added on the Scripting tab of System Settings screen. A click on Scripting tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 14.1. System Settings screen in Scripting tab.
87
System Settings
By default, the Use Scripting check box will be unchecked. Below, we can learn how to add a Script server.
Adding a Script Server

Follow the steps below to add a Script server: 1. Open System Settings screen by clicking on System System Settings menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default the screen will open in the General tab. 2. Click on Scripting tab. 3. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. 4. Select (click) the Use Scripting check box. On clicking, you will see the Add Scripting Server button.
88
System Settings
Fig. 14.2. The Add Scripting Server button enabled after checking the Use Scripting check box.
5. Click on Add Scripting Server button. On clicking, you will see the Add Scripting Server dialog.
Fig. 14.3. The Add Scripting Server dialog.
89
System Settings
6. In the Add Scripting Server dialog, type in the UNC Name of the computer that will receive the event messages from the CICDataServer.
Fig. 14.4. Entering UNC Name of the computer that will receive event messages from CICDataServer.
7. After typing in the UNC name, click the OK button in the dialog. This will add the mentioned UNC Name into the Workstation Name area of the screen. 8. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save this setting. 9. Click the Close button to close the screen. The scripting server thus added will receive event messages from the CICDataServer and will run the script required to perform system actions in response to specific events. Similarly, you can add the other Scripting servers also.
90
System Settings
Removing a Script Server

A Script server that will not be used for receiving event messages can be removed from the Scripting tab. Follow the steps below to remove a Script server: Open System Settings screen by clicking on System System Settings menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default the screen will open in the General tab. Click on Scripting tab. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. On clicking, the Remove Scripting Server button gets activated. Note: The Remove Scripting Server button gets activated only if a script server has been added previously. In the Workstation Name area of the screen, click the UNC Name of the Script server you wish to remove. Click the Remove Scripting Server button. Doing this will display the message box below.
Fig. 14.5. Message displayed before removing the Script server.
Note: Make sure you have selected the correct Script server you intend to remove. Because, you cannot undo the removal action even by clicking the Cancel button on System Settings toolbar.
91
System Settings
Click the Yes button in the message box to remove the selected Script server. This will remove the UNC name of the Script server from the Workstation Name area of the screen.
Click the Save button on System Settings toolbar to save the change. Click the Close button to close the screen.
92
COM Ports
COM Ports
The Communication Ports screen is used to configure COM Ports required for communication between the CardAccess (polling) computer and the Continental access control panels. The following connection types can be employed for communication. Cable connection - Here, CardAccess physical serial ports are used for communication. Modem connection Dial-up will be used to connect to panels. LAN connection- Here, Lantronix box (UDS-10) is used to convert the serial ASCII based panel protocol to an Ethernet TCP based protocol.
Accessing COM Ports Screen

Follow the steps below: 1. Click the Configuration menu on CardAccess main menu bar. 2. Click the COM Ports option in the menu list. On clicking, Communication Ports screen will be displayed as below.
COM Ports
Fig. 55.1. The Communication Ports screen.
It is possible to configure a maximum of 256 ports using this screen. The port connections can be Serial ports, LAN ports, Modems or a combination of all the three. Note: The port types (Serial, Modem and LAN) are mutually exclusive. That is, if a particular port is allocated to LAN port say, the same port cannot be allocated to Serial/Modem Ports, and vice versa. None of the Ports will be configured by default. The controls necessary for configuring the ports are provided in the lower half of the screen. We can learn about the controls in the following section.
COM Ports
Controls for Port Configuration

The lower half of Communication Ports screen shows a couple of columns. These columns are used for port configuration. You can configure up to 256 ports using these columns. Make use of the vertical scroll bar on the right to view all the 256 ports.
Columns provided for port configuration.
The columns are explained below. Com Port This column provides numbers from 1 to 256. Use the vertical scroll bar on the right to view all the port numbers.
COM Ports
The Com Port column.
The number you choose in this column will represent the port that will be used for communication between the concerned Continental Access Control Panel and the Host PC. Note: The ports can be configured only after the hardware supporting the ports are installed and activated in the operating system. Type The Type column is meant for specifying the connection method (Cable/modem/ Network) you wish to use employ for the selected COM port. By default, the ports will not have any connection type selected. They will show the default selection Not Used. You can choose a connection type by clicking the Type column corresponding to the Com Port of your choice. On clicking, you will see a down arrow. Click the down arrow to view the possible connection types that are supported in the CardAccess.
COM Ports
Connection options for Com Ports.
The Connection options are explained below. Not Used This is the default option selected for every Com port before configuration is attempted. This option, when selected, will disable connection to the indicated Com port. As a result, the port gets disconnected and becomes available for re-assignment. Cable Cable refers to a physical serial port. If this option is selected, the CardAccess communication driver will attempt to connect to the physical serial port indicated by the Com port number when you click on Save button. The CardAccess will also attempt to connect to each Com port that is set to cable every time the CardAccess software is started. If connection fails, there will be an error event message (see figure below).
Fig. 55.4. Com Port Open Failed event message.
If the connection is successful, there will be no such message. Modem When a Com port Type control is set to Modem, it will use Dial Up to connect to panels. However, several other items must be set before dial up will function. o At least one modem must be connected to CardAccess as configured in the Modems section of System Settings screen (see the section System Settings). o Dial Up will not take place unless at least one panel is assigned to a Dial Up Com port number. o Dial Up will not take place unless a dial up schedule is set in the Modems screen, available from Configuration menu.
COM Ports
To learn more about dial up, see the manual section titled Dial Up. Network- The Network option is meant for LAN Port connections. LAN ports in the CardAccess are configured much like serial/modem ports, but data that is sent to a LAN port is passed to the computer network card as opposed to leaving the computer via a physical serial port. The following are necessary for LAN connections: On the panel side, a Lantronix UDS-10 (mechanical adapter box) is needed to facilitate panel hardware connection to a standard Ethernet LAN network. Note: The Super-Two controller has an optional builtin LAN adapter. The Lantronix box needs to be connected to the LAN network, programmed and operating before CardAccess can connect to it. The box must have a Static IP address assigned. On the PC side, TCP protocol is needed to connect the CardAccess software to Lantronix UDS-10 interface. TCP port 3001 is used for connection between CardAccess and the Lantronix. Note: Make sure that the network infrastructure (routers specifically) must not be blocking TCP port 3001.
Baud The Baud column must be used to specify the communication speed if Cable or Modem connection Types are selected. By default, there will be no speed selection for any of the ports. To select a speed, click the Baud column corresponding to a selected port number, click the down arrow that appears, and choose a desired speed in the list.
COM Ports
Fig. 55.6. The available Baud communication speeds.
Note the following about Baud speeds: If Baud speed is set to 0, polling is turned off for the port. Baud speed selection is essential if you wish to enable the selected Com Port. The CardAccess Baud setting overrides the operating system setting. 9600 is the recommended Baud speed. Speeds 38.4K and 57.6K can be selected only for newer panels like Turbo SuperTerm and Super-Two. IP Address The IP Address column must be used to enter the static IP address of the Lantronix box if Network connection Type is selected. The IP Address can be entered by clicking the IP Address column corresponding to a selected Port number, and typing in the address as obtained from the network administrator.
COM Ports
The IP Address column.
You will need one Lantronix box (and thus, one address) per panel node (a node is a cluster of up to 63 panels). Each panel node has to be assigned to one port. The IP address of the Lantronix box for that node must be entered into the IP Address column of the selected port. Password Passwords can only be used on dial up nodes where Modem connection type is selected. Passwords are not necessary for Cable and Network connections.
COM Ports
Fig. 55.7. The Password column.
Passwords were instituted to prevent an unsolicited dial in to panels from more than one service organization. It is possible to load the wrong configuration into a panel and cause a node to become mis-programmed, denying access to valid users. In a case where the panels are Cable or LAN connected, unauthorized connection to a panel cluster is much more unlikely than with dial up, which is exposed to the public telephone network. If the Type column of the selected port is set to Modem and you desire a password, click the Password column corresponding to the selected port number and enter up to six characters (numbers, letters or symbols in any combination). Note: Password settings are ignored if the Type column of the Com Port is set to Network or Cable.
COM Ports
Compressed Mode Every Com Port is provided with a Compressed Mode checkbox.
The Compressed Mode column
Compressed mode helps in faster data download between the Continental Panel and the Host PC. If you wish to enable Compressed Mode for a Com Port, click the corresponding Compressed Mode checkbox. Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled.
10
COM Ports
Configuring Ports of Host PC

Follow the steps below to configure the Ports on CardAccess polling computer (Host PC). 1. Open Communication Ports screen by clicking on Configuration COM Ports menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Observe that the Station Name and Description fields show the default names Host PC and Host COM Ports respectively.
Fig. 55.11. Default names in Station Name and Description fields.
2. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. 3. Under the Com Port column, select a desired Port among 1-256 ports. Use the vertical scroll bar on the right to navigate to the desired port. 4. Click the Type column corresponding to the selected port, and then click the down arrow that appears. Among the options listed, select the desired connection type, and click that option.
The available connection types.
If you select Cable connection type, then go to step 5. If you select Modem connection type, then go to step 6.
11
COM Ports
If you select Network connection type, then go to step 7. 5. If the connection type selected is Cable, then a. Click the Baud column corresponding to the selected port, and select a desired communication speed.
Selecting a Baud speed.
The most recommended speed is 9600. Speeds 38.4K and 57.6K can be selected only for newer panels like Turbo SuperTerm and Super-Two. b. You can opt for faster communication between the Panel and the Host PC by clicking the Compressed Mode checkbox. c. Go to step 8. 6. If the connection type selected is Modem, then a. Click the Baud column corresponding to the selected port, and select a desired communication speed. The most recommended speed is 9600. Speeds 38.4K and 57.6K can be selected only for newer panels like Turbo SuperTerm and Super-Two.
12
COM Ports
b. A password entry is recommended for security purposes. Click the password column corresponding to the selected port, and enter up to six characters (numbers, letters or symbols in any combination).
Entering a password.
c. You can opt for faster communication between the Panel and the Host PC by clicking the Compressed Mode checkbox. d. Make sure a dial schedule is set in the Modems screen. See the manual section titled Dial Up for details. e. Go to step 8. 7. If the connection type selected is Network, then a. Click the IP Address column corresponding to the selected port, and enter the IP address of the Lantronix box used for communicating with the panel. Note: Make sure that each Lantronix box you intend to use is connected to the LAN network, programmed and operating before CardAccess can connect to them. b. You can opt for faster communication between the Panel and the Host PC by clicking the Compressed Mode checkbox. c. Go to step 8. 8. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save the Com Port settings. Similarly, the other ports can be configured as needed by following the above steps.
13
COM Ports
Configuring Ports of Remote ComServer

Two Remote (secondary) ComServers can be configured for CardAccess using the Communication Ports screen. Follow the steps below to configure the Ports of a Remote ComServer: A. Open Communication Ports screen by clicking on Configuration COM Ports menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Observe that the Station Name and Description fields show the default names Host PC and Host COM Ports respectively. B. Click the New button on the tool bar. On clicking, a message box will be displayed as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 55.17. Message box displayed before adding a Workstation COM Port definition.
C. Click the Yes button in the message box. On clicking, you will see the default selection of Workstation 1 in the Station Name field.
14
COM Ports
Fig. 55.18. Workstation 1 selected as the default workstation.
Note: The workstation selected will be configured to function as the Remote ComServer. D. If you wish to choose a different workstation, click the down arrow to the right of Station Name control, and click on a desired workstation. Workstations 1-150 are available for selection in the list. Use the vertical scroll bar on the right to view all the workstations.
Fig. 55.19. Workstations available for selection as Remote ComServer.
For our example, we will be retaining Workstation 1. E. In the Description field, type in a descriptive name for the workstation COM ports you are configuring. In the figure below, we have entered the description as Workstation 1 COM Ports.
15
COM Ports
Fig. 55.20. Descriptive name entered for Workstation 1 COM Ports.
F. Workstation Com Ports can be configured in the same way as the polling computer (Host PC) ports. Apply steps 3-8 mentioned under the heading Configuring Ports of Host PC and configure the workstation ports. After workstation port definitions are saved (the Save button clicked), the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 55.21. Message box displayed after saving workstation port definitions.
Read the message in the box, and click the OK button. Similarly, you can configure a second Remote ComServer by following the above steps, choosing a different Workstation in step D.
16
COM Ports
Editing Port Definitions

Open Communication Ports screen by clicking on Configuration COM Ports menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, select the COM Port definition you wish to edit, and click on it. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the settings made in the lower half of the screen. Note: The Station Name field of Communication Ports screen cannot be edited. Station Name once selected during port configuration is not subject to change. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save the changes. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen.
Deleting Port Definitions

Open Communication Ports screen by clicking on Configuration COM Ports menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, select the COM Port definition you wish to delete, and click on it. Click the Delete button on the toolbar. On clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
17
COM Ports
Fig. 55.22. Message box displayed before deleting a COM Port record.
Note: Delete action cannot be reversed. A record deleted once is lost forever. Make sure you have chosen the correct record for deleting. After confirmation, click the Yes button in the message box. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen.
Communication Ports Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 55.23. Communication Ports screen navigation bar.
The Communication Ports screen navigation bar can be found just above the Station Name control. The buttons of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked COM Port records in the screen. In figure 55.23, we have numbered the buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the buttons are as follows: Button 1: Placing the mouse cursor over button 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the very first COM Port record in the screen. Button 2: Placing the mouse cursor over button 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight
18
COM Ports
the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted COM Port record. Button 3: Placing the mouse cursor over button 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted COM Port record. Button 4: Placing the mouse cursor over button 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted COM Port record. Button 5: Placing the mouse cursor over button 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted COM Port record. Button 6: Placing the mouse cursor over button 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the last COM Port record in the screen. Button 7: Placing the mouse cursor over button 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking this button will bookmark the highlighted COM Port record. Button 8: Placing the mouse cursor over button 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking this button will highlight the previously bookmarked COM Port record.
19
Panels
Panels
Note: Unless otherwise stated, all functionality of the SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm and Super-4 panels are identical. The (access control) panel could be considered the single most important component in the CardAccess access control system. All physical hardware mounted at doors or in a building ultimately connects to some kind of panel arrangement. The CardAccess Host PC exists to program and communicate with panels. CardAccess workstation PCs exist in large part to configure panel hardware and monitor event messages that are broadcast from panels. The panels themselves have onboard microprocessors and have local intelligence. When panels are shipped from the factory, they are supplied with a minimal start up program (in firmware). This boot strap program provides enough programming for the panels to start up and wait for instructions from the PC. The PC uses serial, LAN or Modem communication to download configuration data to panels, and to upload event and status data from the panels. When a panel powers up for the first time after shipment from the factory, the configuration menu of that panel is blank. That is, none of the onboard hardware is activated. Activation of reader ports, inputs, relays, keypads and the like is accomplished by using the various screens of the CardAccess software to create a software configuration template for a given panel. That configuration template is then downloaded to the panel via a serial communications link (typically). Once the configuration template is received by the panel, the panel activates the hardware specified in the configuration template, with the attributes specified in the CardAccess software configuration for that panel. Thus, it is the PC and the CardAccess software that determine the configuration and operation of the panels. Ultimately, the mode of operation of any hardware connected to those panels is determined by the CardAccess software configuration. For more information on hardware devices, refer the Continental hardware manual.
Panels
The Panels screen is used to describe the panel configuration and geographical layout to the CardAccess software. This section of the manual explains the Panels screen in detail.
Accessing Panels screen

Click on Configuration menu in CardAccess main screen. Click on Panels menu option in the list. Upon clicking, the Panels screen will be displayed in General tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 49.1.The Panels screen.
The folder tabs and the various controls in Panels screen are detailed in the following section.
Panels
Panels Screen Folder Tabs

The Panels screen consists of four folder tabs- General, Priorities, Maps and Location/Remarks. The Maps tab will be visible only when the Use Facility Maps feature is enabled in System Settings screen.
Fig. 49.2. Panels screen folder tabs.
Each of the folder tabs is explained below.
General Tab This is the default tab in which Panels screen will be displayed.
Fig. 49.3. Panels General tab.
The various controls in General tab are explained below.
Panels
Name The Name field is meant for typing in a descriptive name for the panel in question.
Fig. 49.4. The Name field.
It is strongly suggested that you give your panels names that describe their location in a building or their function. The names that you assign in this field will be used in all event messages for that panel (in the Location field of the Events and Alerts Grids). Panel # The Panel Number is a number that is automatically assigned by the CardAccess software each time you create a new panel definition.
Fig. 49.5. The Panel # field.
Note: The Panel Number field must not be confused with the Panel Address field. See the heading Panel Address to learn about panel address. For a given panel, the Panel Number simply refers to the number of the panel definition in the entire list of panel definitions. The Panel column in Panels screen (see figure below) will show the number assigned to every panel in the screen.
Panels
Fig. 49.6. The Panel column showing Panel numbers.
Typically, there is no need to edit the automatically assigned Panel Numbers unless you wish to modify the panel numbering sequence. The system will let you override the automatic panel numbering sequence, if preferred. The panel number can be manually changed by o By clicking the white space of Panel # field and typing in a number of choice or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Panel # spin control and choosing the desired number. Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the current panel to a group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
Fig. 49.7. The Group control.
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign to the panel.
Panels
Panel Type The Panel Type control is used to specify the type of the given panel. By default, the Panel Type control will be inactive (you will only see the control label; but the control options will be unavailable for selection).
The Panel Type control inactive (by default).
The control gets activated on clicking the New button in the Panels screen toolbar, to offer you the panel types that are available in the CardAccess. By default, the system chooses Super 4 (see figure below) as the default panel type, for every new panel record that you attempt to create.
The Panel Type control activated on clicking New, Super 4 chosen as the default panel type.
You may have to change the default Panel Type selection in order to match the actual panel type of the given panel. To change the default selection, click the down arrow to the right of Panel Type control, for viewing the available panel types.
The available panel types in CardAccess software.
Click on the (actual) panel type, of the panel in question.
Panels
Note: The Panel Type options SuperTerm+ and a Super 4+ must be selected in case the SuperTerm and Super 4 panels are upgraded to the newest firmware version (2.x).
Superterm + and Super 4 + options apply for Superterm and Super 4 panels that are upgraded to 2.x firmware.
If you accidentally make a wrong selection, there is nothing to worry. Once you click on Save button (in the toolbar) to save the panel record, the CardAccess system will automatically correct your (wrong) selection, in order to match the actual panel type, of the given panel. Enabled The Enabled check box enables or disables the panel record. If the panel record is disabled, that panel is taken out of the list of panels to be polled and polling stops for that panel. The panel is effectively disconnected from communications. When the panel is enabled, it is put back in the list of panels to be polled and communication between the PC and the panel will resume. Enabled is the default state for any newly created panel record.
Fig. 49.8. The Enabled check box.
To enable or disable the panel, click the Enabled check box. Checked means enabled, unchecked means disabled.
Panels
Interactive Badges Interactive Mode primarily exists to support panel types with limited memory, which are installed into sites that have large numbers of badge records. There is no setting in the CardAccess that tells the software what type of panel you are connecting to. Thus, it is possible to attempt to load a database of 20,000 badges into a Microterm (that holds a maximum of 1,100 badges only). When any panels memory capacity is exceeded (such as when you try to download more badges than the panel can store), the panel will refuse to store those records that exceed its memory size. This creates a memory overflow condition. The key issue is that, when the panel memory is exceeded, there are valid records that belong at the panel that the panel cannot store. In the specific case of overflowed badge records, some badge holders will be rejected when badge records have not been stored due to lack of memory. As a temporary measure to overcome a limited memory badge overflow situation, Interactivity can be enabled. When Interactive Mode is enabled, the panel badge rejection behavior is modified.
Fig. 49.9. The Interactive Badges check box.
A panel will normally reject any badge that is not stored in local panel memory and report a violate void type error event message. When Interactive mode is enabled, the panel is forced to check the CardAccess database in addition to checking local panel memory to validate a badge. Once a badge is read by a reader connected to a given panel, a badge validation procedure is applied. The normal panel badge validation procedure and the Interactive mode badge validation procedure are explained in more detail below. Normal Badge Validation
Panels
After a badge is presented to a reader on a given panel set to normal mode, the panel logic checks the local panel memory for a badge record corresponding to the badge number read. If that record does not exist, the entry request is rejected and a denial message is sent to the CardAccess Host computer. Interactive Mode Badge Validation Procedure After a badge is presented to a reader on a given panel set to Interactive mode, the panel logic checks the local panel memory for a badge record corresponding to the badge number read. If that record does not exist, a message is sent to the Host PC inquiring if the badge has a valid record in the CardAccess database. There are several conditions that could exist, with different outcomes. The various conditions are as below: There is no CardAccess database record of the badge If this is the case, the badge is rejected with the error event message Badge Violate Void.
Panels
There is a record of the badge in the database, but the badge does not belong at any reader on the panel If this is the case, the badge is rejected with the error event message Badge Violate Void at Panel. There is a record of the badge, the badge does belong to at least one reader on the panel, but the badge is not permitted at the reader in question. If this is the case, the badge is rejected with the error event message Badge Violate Unauthorized. There is a record of the badge, the badge does belong at the panel, and the badge is permitted at the reader, but not at the current time of day. If this is the case, the badge record is downloaded to the panel but the badge is rejected with the error event message Badge Violate Time of Day. The badge record is stored at the panel, overwriting an existing badge record that has remained unused for some time There is a record of the badge, the badge does belong at the panel, and the badge is permitted at the reader, at the current time of day If this is the case, the badge record is downloaded to the panel and the door is unlocked. The badge record is stored at the panel, overwriting an existing badge record that has remained unused for some time It is important to note that, in Interactive mode the panel will communicate with the CardAccess Host PC to validate badge numbers that are not locally stored in panel memory. The panel logic will attempt to store the most frequently used badges and overwrite badge numbers that are less frequently used in an attempt to optimize memory usage. Enabling Interactive mode could increase communications traffic and slow the overall response of the system. Thus, Interactive mode should not be considered a long-term solution for a badge overflow condition. A memory or panel upgrade is the only long-term solution to lack of panel memory.
10
Panels
Note that enabling Interactive mode will not solve other types of memory overflow problems, such as Access Group or Time Schedule overflows. To enable or disable Interactive mode for the panel in question, click the Interactive Badges check box. Checked means enabled, unchecked means disabled (the default setting). Repeat Off-Line Alert When the CardAccess Host computer loses communication with a panel, an error event message is displayed that says No Response (see figure 49.10 below). That message is displayed once, several seconds after the panel fails to respond to three successive polls. If you wish to have the no response error message repeated about every 3 minutes, set the Repeat Off-Line Alert check box to enabled. You will then receive an error event message that says Still No Response, repeated indefinitely until the panel begins responding again.
Fig. 49.10. The Panel Response Event Messages.
Fig. 49.11. The Repeat Off-Line Alert check box.
To enable the Repeat Off-Line Alert feature for a given panel, click the check box. Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default setting).
11
Panels
Using Elevator Readers Elevator reader capability is disabled at all panels by default. Thus, the option to set a reader to an elevator type reader is made unavailable (grayed out) until you enable the Using Elevator Readers option for the panel that the given reader is connected to. Once the Using Elevator Readers feature is enabled for a given panel, all readers that are connected to that panel have the Elevator Reader option made available in the Readers screen (see figure 49.13). For more information see the manual section titled Readers
Fig. 49.12. The Using Elevator Readers check box.
Fig. 49.13. The Readers screen Reader Type section Elevator option selected.
To enable the Elevator Reader option for a given panel, click the Using Elevator Readers check box. Checked is enabled and unchecked is disabled (the default setting).
Enable Password Panel passwords are only used for dial up panel clusters (see the manual section titled Dial Up). Since dial up panel clusters are exposed to the outside world through the public switched telephone network, it is possible for anyone with a copy of the CardAccess software to dial in and connect to a given panel node. This raises the possibility that someone with the wrong database settings could potentially dial in to a panel cluster and accidentally change the configuration of the panels on that cluster.
12
Panels
To prevent unauthorized dial in access, panels that are known to be included in dial up panel clusters can have the Enable Password option set.
Fig. 49.14. The Enable Password check box.
Further, the actual password is entered in the Com Ports screen (for more information see the section Com Ports). Note that a password is only needed for the panel that is directly connected to the modem. All other panels in the dial up panel cluster do not need to have the password option set. Note also that the panel that is physically connected to the modem must be set to panel address 1. In a dial up configuration, panel address 1 acts as a master panel, which answers the incoming call, and negotiates the password. To enable the password feature for a given panel, click the Enable Password check box in the General tab of Panels screen. Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default setting).
Degrade Mode ON Degrade Mode is a feature that allows you to modify how a panel will evaluate badge numbers. In normal mode, a panel will examine a badge number and a facility code to determine the identity and access permissions of a given badge holder. When Degrade Mode is enabled, the panel will ignore badge numbers and time schedules. The panel will evaluate only the facility code on a badge to determine access permission. Essentially, all badge holders with the correct facility code will gain entry, at any hour of the day.
Fig. 49.15. The Degrade Mode ON check box.
13
Panels
This feature may prove useful if you are having problems reading badge numbers correctly, but the badge format is being read. Setting Degrade Mode will force the system to ignore badge numbers (while you fix the problem), but will still allow you to require badge holders to use an access badge to gain entry to secured areas. To enable Degrade Mode for a given panel, click the Degrade Mode ON check box in the General tab of Panels screen. Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default setting).
Connection Section The Connection section has settings that are important to establishing data communications between the CardAccess Host PC and the panel nodes . A panel node can be defined as a PC serial port, dial line or LAN connection supporting one or more panels. For details on the panel connection types, refer the sections COM Ports and Dial Up. The various controls in Connection section are explained below.
Fig. 49.16. The Connection section.
Panel Address There is a hardware Panel Address switch block on every panel type. The panel address will be set on this block. The Panel Address field of a given panel record must match the number set for that panel in the hardware switch block.
Fig. 49.17. The Panel Address field.
14
Panels
The Panel Address is needed to identify the panel to the CardAccess communications driver (called the Host polling program). The Host program uses a polling and response protocol to communicate with the panels. The Panel Address setting in the Panels screen works in conjunction with the Com Port setting (see heading Com Port). The Com Port setting determines what node the panels are on, and the Panel Address determines what panel the system is communicating with. Every panel that shares the same Com Port must be set to a panel address that is different from every other panel on that Com Port. For example, panel address 1 existing on Com1 and panel address 1 existing on Com2 is ok. But, two panels with panel address of 1 on Com1 will cause a conflict. The highest possible panel address that can be set on Superterm, Smarterm or Miniterm panels is 63. The highest panel address for a Microterm is 31. If the Panel Address is set to 0, the panel will not be polled. Note: If a panel has an address set to 0 and the panel is reset, the configuration of that panel will be erased. The system will assign the default Panel Address of 1 for the first panel, 2 for the second panel and so on. It is necessary that the value in the Panel Address field matches the address that is actually set in the hardware switch block of a given panel. This may require you to change the default values assigned by the system. The default values can be changed by o Clicking the white space of Panel Address field and typing the address that is set in the hardware switch block or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Panel Address spin control and choosing the correct address. Station Name The Station Name field specifies which CardAccess PC will be communicating with the selected panel. This field will show the default selection of Host Com Ports (which refers to CardAccess Host PC).
15
Panels
Fig. 49.18. The Station Name control.
If you wish to use a Secondary ComServer to communicate with the selected panel, click the down arrow to the right of Station Name control and choose a desired Secondary ComServer in the list. Note: If there are no Secondary ComServer names in the Station Name drop down list, it means that Secondary ComServers do not exist. Refer the section Com Ports to create them.
COM Port The Com Port control is used to select the communications port that the panel will be physically connected to.
Fig. 49.19. The Com Port control.
The Com Port number may not necessarily refer to a serial port. The CardAccess uses the label Com Port to refer to serial ports, LAN connected panel nodes and dial nodes. Refer the sections Com Ports and Dial Up for more information on panel connection types. The system will assign Com Port number 1 for every new panel record you attempt to create. This default value must be changed to the Com Port number that the panel is actually connected to. The default values can be changed by o Clicking the white space of Com Port field and typing in the correct Com Port number or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Com Port spin control and choosing the correct number.
16
Panels
Initialization Parameters Section When configuration data is downloaded to a panel, part of the downloading process is to set the sizes of some panel static memory buffers. Some of these buffers are adjustable from inside the CardAccess software. Three such adjustable memory buffers can be set in the Initialization Parameters section.
Fig. 49.20. The Initialization Parameters section.
Note that panel memory space is limited (unless you have added expanded memory). Thus, every buffer size that you increase using the controls below will subtract from the total memory available for badge records. Thus, you should seek to set the below controls to their smallest possible size where memory for badge storage is an issue.
Transaction Buffer Size The Transaction Buffer Size control allocates panel memory for the number of event transactions to be stored before a buffer full condition occurs. The event buffer is a circular type buffer, which means that if the panel runs out of space for event transactions, it will begin to overwrite the oldest transactions in memory. When a panel is connected to a computer serial port, event transactions are picked up every few seconds by the polling program, so it is rare that you would need to set a large Transaction Buffer Size. However, when a panel is connected to a dial line and is not dialed frequently, event buffer size could become more of an issue if the panel sees substantial traffic. Event messages could be lost if the panel is allowed to fill, then begin to overwrite the event buffer. In that case, you would want to increase the Transaction Buffer Size.
17
Panels
The default size is 1000 event transactions. The maximum is 30,000.
Fig. 49.21. The Transaction Buffer size control.
The default Transaction Buffer size can be changed by o Clicking the white space of Transaction Buffer size control and typing in a desired number or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Transaction Buffer size spin control and choosing the desired number. Time Schedule Blocks The Panels screen Time Schedule Blocks control allows you to allocate the minimum amount of memory for the storage of time schedule blocks (which will help save space for badge records if adjusted to a minimum size).
Fig. 49.22. The Time Schedule Blocks control.
The CardAccess software will permit a maximum of 128 schedules. The maximum number of time blocks per schedule is 10. The maximum setting for the Time Schedule Blocks control cannot exceed 1280 blocks (128 schedules x 10 blocks per schedule). The Time Schedule Blocks control can be set to the actual number of time schedule blocks that have been created in the Schedules screen if memory is needed for additional badge record storage. Note that the settings in the Time Schedule Blocks control is ignored by the panel if the panel is equipped with expanded memory. In that case, the panel automatically allocates the maximum memory space of 1280 time blocks.
18
Panels
To determine how many time blocks exist in your Schedules screen, visit each schedule and count the number of rows in the Time Schedule Blocks area, of each schedule created in that screen. Time Schedule Blocks control will be set to the default value 150 for every new panel record you attempt to create. The default value can be changed if required. This can be done by o Clicking the white space of Time Schedule Blocks control and typing in the desired number or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Time Schedule Blocks spin control and choosing the desired number. Max Access Groups The Max Access Groups control should be set to a value equal to the highest numbered access group, in the Access Group No field in Access Groups screen.
Fig. 49.23. The Access Group No field in Access Groups screen.
Note that the CardAccess will permit you to create a maximum of 1000 access groups. As an example, if you have created Access Group No. 1000 in the Access Groups screen, then you must set the Max Access Groups control in the Panels screen to 1000 for every panel. Scroll to the highest numbered access group to check the access group number and set that number in the Max Access Groups control in each panel definition in the Panels screen. Max Access Groups control will be set to the default value 256 for every new panel record you attempt to create.
Fig. 49.24. The Max Access Groups control. 19
Panels
The default value can be changed as needed. This can be done by o Clicking the white space of Max Access Groups control and typing in a desired number or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Max Access Groups spin control and choosing the desired number. Priorities Tab The Priorities folder tab is used to set the alert priority levels of the various Panel event messages. Every possible Panel event message is mentioned in Priorities tab.
Fig. 49.25. Panels screen Priorities tab.
Priority levels are used by the system to determine which part of CardAccess main screen (the Events or Alerts grid) each type of panel event message will be displayed. The controls in Priorities folder tab are explained below.
20
Panels
Panel Event Priorities The Panel Event Priorities section shows four labeled spin controls as shown in figure 49.25. Each label describes a panel alert type in CardAccess. The spin controls allow you to set the numeric significance of a given alert type. By default, the system loads default priority values to each of the alert types as shown in figure 49.25. The priority values aid in routing of the panel alerts to one of the two grids (Events/Alerts) in the CardAccess main screen. Note: Priority values set for the Panel alert types in Panels screen will be overridden by Auto Ack Priority Set-Point value set in the System Settings screen. The Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control is explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings. The system loaded default priority values can be changed as desired. The usable Priority Number range is 1-98, where 1 is the highest priority and 98 is the lowest priority number in the range. Priority values can be changed by o Typing in a desired number in Priority spin control or o By using up/down arrows of the spin control to choose a desired number.
Requires Operator Response Each of the panel Alert priorities has a check box labeled Requires Operator Response as shown in figure 49.25. By default this box is unchecked. If a priority has this check box selected, then, automatic acknowledgement of the concerned alert type will be disabled. So, manual acknowledgement will be required to resolve the alert upon its occurrence. In manual alert acknowledgement, the operator is forced to respond to an alert by typing in a Response Message in the Alert Acknowledge popup window and clicking the Acknowledge button to move the alert from the Alerts Grid into the Events Grid.
21
Panels
Maps Tab The Maps tab has controls that allow you to add or edit a map for the selected panel. The Maps tab is not visible unless the Use Facility Maps Option is enabled in System Settings screen.
Fig. 49.26. The Panels Maps tab.
For details on creation of maps, see the manual section titled Maps. The controls in Maps folder tab are explained below.
Facility Map for This Device This field displays the name of the map that is attached to the selected panel.
Fig. 49.27. The Facility Map for This Device field.
22
Panels
Map Description In this field, you can add a text description of the map.
Fig. 49.28. The Map Description field.
Size Image to fit
Fig. 49.29. The Size Image to fit check box.
Image bitmaps come in all shapes and sizes. The CardAccess Maps image view control is set by default to stretch the image to fit the size of the image display window. If Size Image to fit checkbox is disabled, the image will be displayed in its native size format (wherein white space may appear on the sides, or top and on the bottom). The check box is enabled by default.
View Maps
Fig. 49.30. The View Maps button.
Clicking on View Maps button will open the Configure Maps screen where it is possible to create/edit a map.
23
Panels
Remove Map
Fig. 49.31. The Remove Map button.
The Remove Map button is available only in Edit mode. Clicking on the button will delete the map in question.
Location/Remarks Tab The Location/Remarks tab can be used to mention the place of location and remarks (if any) on the selected panel.
Fig. 49.32. The Location/Remarks tab.
24
Panels
Creating a Basic Panel Definition

To create a basic, working panel record, most of the CardAccess default settings can be used. Follow the steps below to create a basic panel record. 1. Open Panels screen by clicking Configuration->Panels in CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in General tab by default. 2. Click on New button in the toolbar.
Fig. 49.33. The New button.
3. Enter a descriptive name for the panel in Name field. A name that can describe the panel location/function is recommended.
Fig. 49.34. Panel name describing the location of a panel.
4. Click the down arrow to the right of Panel Type control, locate the panel type of the given panel, and click on it.
Panel Type Selection.
5. Select the panel address for the panel from the Panel Address control. To select the address, click the spin buttons to the right of the control, or click in the white space and type in a number.
25
Panels
Fig. 49.35. The Panel Address field.
Note: The Panel Address you enter must match the address that is set in the hardware switch block of the given panel. Be aware of the following issues as well. o The available panel address range is 1 to 63 if Superterm, Smarterm or Miniterm panels are used. The available panel address range is 1 to 31 if a Microterm panel is used. o The panel address must be unique if the panel is to be connected on the same com port with other panels. o You cannot mount more than 63 total panels on any panel node. o If the panel is connected to a dial node, the panel that is physically connected to the modem must be set to panel address 1. o Pressing the panel Reset button while the Panel Address is set to 0 on any panel type will clear the panel configuration memory (called a zero reset). o If the panel is directly connected to a modem, switch 7 (the modem switch) must be rocked to the left (set to off) on a Superterm, Smarterm and Miniterm. Switch 6 must be rocked to the left for a Microterm.
6. Click the down arrow to the right of Station Name control and select the station you wish to use for communicating with the panel.
Fig. 49.36. The Station Name control.
7. Select the COM Port that the panel is to be connected to. To select the Com Port, click the arrow button to the right of the Com Port selection control, and choose a Com Port from the list by clicking it.
26
Panels
Fig. 49.37. The COM Port control.
If there are no com ports in the list, you must create some Windows Com ports using the Windows Control panel 8. Make sure that the Enabled check box is selected. The panel will not be polled unless the Enabled box is checked.
Fig. 49.39. The Save button.
Once the panel record is saved, polling will begin for that panel.
Editing a Panel Definition

Open Panels screen by clicking on Configuration->Panels menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the panel record you wish to edit and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar.
27
Panels
Make the desired changes to the controls in the folder tabs -General, Priorities, Maps and Location/Remarks. Note: o The Panel # field cannot be edited. The Panel # once set during panel creation is not subject to change. o The Panel Type field cannot be edited. The Panel Type selected during panel creation is not subject to change. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Note: The following message boxes can be displayed under the conditions listed below. o In case the Panel Address and/or Station Name was changed during the editing process, the message box shown below will be displayed.
Fig. 49.40. Message box displayed if Panel Address and/or Station Name was changed.
o A Station Name change will cause an additional message box to be displayed as shown below.
Fig. 49.41. Additional message box displayed if Station Name was changed.
You need to read the message in these boxes and click on Ok button.
28
Panels
Click on Close button in the toolbar to close Panels screen.
Deleting a Panel Definition

Open Panels screen by clicking on Configuration->Panels menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the panel record you wish to delete and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 49.42. Message box displayed before deleting a panel record.
After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen. Note: When a panel is deleted, all hardware devices (Readers, Inputs, Relays and Links) connected to it become non-functional. Observe that the Panel or Panel Name field in the configuration records of Reader/Input/Relay/Link devices that are connected to a deleted panel will be blank.
29
Panels
Panels Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 49.43. Panels screen navigation bar.
The Panels screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked panel records in the screen. In figure 49.43, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first panel record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted panel record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted panel record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted panel record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted panel record.
30
Panels
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last panel record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted panel record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked panel record.
Download Configuration Data to Panels

Panel data downloads are generally initiated automatically every time you click the 'Save' button in any of the CardAccess configuration screens. After a record has been created or changed in a configuration screen, the changed record is immediately (and automatically) queued up by the system for transmission to the appropriate panel. During the automatic data transmission, the CardAccess host computer clock is also downloaded to hardwired panels once per hour. The clock is downloaded to dial panels at the end of a dial session. The system treats changed configuration records with a very high priority and sends them to the appropriate panel as soon as possible, without human intervention. However, there may be times when you wish to initiate data download to a panel manually. This may be true in a case where the CardAccess administrator is bringing a new panel online, or in the rare case where a panel seems to be malfunctioning and a data re-download seems appropriate. The Download button is provided on Panels screen toolbar to initiate a manual data download.
Accessing Download Categories Screen

Open Panels screen by clicking Configuration->Panels in CardAccess main screen. Click on Download button in Panels screen toolbar.
31
Panels
Upon clicking, the Download Categories screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 49.44. The Download Categories screen.
The Download Categories screen provides several controls to help you download the desired configuration data. The following section explains the controls.
32
Panels
Download Categories Screen Controls

The Download Categories screen controls are explained below.
Badges When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Personnel badge records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Personnel screen)
Fig. 49.45. The Badges check box.
Readers When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Reader records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Readers screen)
Fig. 49.46. The Readers check box.
Inputs When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Input records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Inputs screen)
Fig. 49.47. The Inputs check box.
Relays When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Relay records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Relays screen).
33
Panels
Fig. 49.48. The Relays check box.
Links When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Link records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Links screen).
Fig. 49.49. The Links check box.
Badge Formats When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Badge Format records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Badge Formats screen).
Fig. 49.50. The Badge Formats check box.
Access Groups When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Access Group records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Access Groups screen).
Fig. 49.51. The Access Groups check box.
34
Panels
Time Schedules When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Time Schedule records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Schedules screen).
Fig. 49.52. The Time Schedules check box.
Facility Codes When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Facility Code records that belong at the selected panel (as seen in the Facility Codes screen).
Fig. 49.53. The Facility Codes check box.
Holidays When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all Holiday records to the selected panel (as seen in the Holidays screen).
Fig. 49.54. The Holidays check box.
Full Download When this checkbox is selected, the system will download all records, from all database tables that concern the selected panel. Selecting the 'Full Download' option is like selecting every checkbox mentioned above (except the firmware checkbox). Panel firmware will not be downloaded on a full (data) download.
35
Panels
Fig. 49.55. The Full Download check box.
Firmware Download When this checkbox is selected, the system will download panel firmware to the selected Superterm panel (note that only Superterms have downloadable firmware). The panel will be taken offline during the firmware download, but will continue to read badges and admit any card holder having a badge with the correct facility code (badge numbers are not checked during a firmware download, only facility codes are checked. The panel is put into Degrade mode when receiving a firmware download). You can elect to download firmware or data but not both simultaneously.
Fig. 49.56. The Firmware Download check box.
Download Panel Clicking this button causes the communications driver software to download the requested configuration data only to the panel that is currently highlighted in the Panels screen.
Fig. 49.57. The Download Panel button.
All Panels Clicking this button causes the communications driver software to download the requested configuration data to all panels in the panels list of the Panels screen.
36
Panels
Fig. 49.58. The All Panels button.
Abort Download Clicking this button will stop the download that has started to the selected panel(s).
Fig. 49.59. The Abort Download button.
Note: It is recommended not to stop a panel download until it is complete, especially a firmware download. The panel memory is cleared before a download, and you could leave the panel in an unstable state if the download is incomplete.
Exit Clicking this button will close the Download Categories screen.
Fig. 49.60. The Exit button.
37
Panels
Manual Data Download to Panel(s)

Follow the steps below if you wish to download the configuration data to panel(s) manually. Open Panels screen by clicking Configuration->Panels in CardAccess main screen. If you wish to download configuration data to a specific panel only, then, locate that panel record in the upper half of Panels screen and click on the record. Click on Download button in Panels screen toolbar.
Fig. 49.61. The Download button.
38
Panels
Select the desired configuration data category check box(es) depending on the configuration data type(s) you wish to download.
Fig. 49.63. Check boxes provided for various configuration data categories.
On clicking, the Download Panel and All Panel buttons will be enabled (see figure 49.65).
39
Panels
Select either the Full Download or the Firmware Download check box (refer the headings Full Download and Firmware Download to know the implications of selecting these check boxes).
Fig. 49.64. The Full Download and Firmware Download checkboxes.
Click on either Download Panel or All Panels button depending on whether the configuration data has to be downloaded to the selected panel or all of the panels in the Panels screen.
Fig. 49.65. The Download Panel and All Panels buttons.
Note: These buttons will be enabled only when at least one checkbox is selected in figure 49.63. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 49.66. Message box displayed before downloading configuration data to panel(s).
After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box to start configuration data download.
40
Readers
Readers
Readers are hardware devices that are used for reading access badges. They are physically connected to access control panels that evaluate the access permissions of all badge card reads. In CardAccess software, readers are configured in the Readers screen. Reader records cannot be created without the existence of Panel records. To learn about creating panel records, see the manual section titled Panels.
Accessing Readers Screen
Click on Configuration menu in CardAccess menu bar.
Click on Readers option in the menu list. Upon clicking, Readers screen will be displayed in General tab as shown in the figure below.
Readers
Fig. 50.1. The Readers screen.
The screen can contain several other folder tabs depending on the configuration made in System Settings screen. Detailed information on all of the tabs and their controls can be obtained under the heading Readers Screen Folder Tabs.
Readers
Reader Functional Types

A reader can be set to any of the functional types explained below by making use of controls in the Readers screen. Standard Door Reader By default, a reader will be set to perform the function of a standard door reader. It is assumed that most readers will be used for door access, and that an access badge of some type will be used to open those doors. Thus, a reader in its default settings will consist of all items needed to operate a standard door.
Badge Validator When set to Badge Validator option, a reader can perform the function of enabling or disabling Personnel badges.
Fig. 50.2. The Badge Validator control.
Upon badge presentation, a badge validator reader will either disable the badge (in case it is currently enabled) or enable the badge (in case it is currently disabled).
Fig. 50.3. Badge Validator Reader Enable & Disable Messages.
When we say enable or disable, we mean that the Enabled check box in the badge holder Personnel record will be checked or unchecked. The badge will also either be activated or deactivated by changing that badge holders Enabled status in the CardAccess database. The amended badge holder record
3
Readers
will be downloaded to the appropriate panels (or deleted from the appropriate panels). The Badge Validator functionality can be useful to a department responsible for activating badges for a company. After badge holder records have been created, a card reader mounted on a desktop can serve to activate and deactivate those badges. There would be no need to visit the Personnel screen and search for those badge records. Note: The badge validator reader will not create a new badge record for a badge. It will only enable or disable a badge record that already exists in the CardAccess badge database. When a valid enabled badge is presented to a badge validator reader that is mounted at a door, the following things happen. a) The door will be unlocked as the badge is in enabled state and b) The badge will be changed to disabled state. When a disabled badge is presented to a badge validator reader mounted at a door, the following things happen. a) The door will not be unlocked as the badge is in disabled state and b) The badge will be changed to enabled state.
Readers
Escort Reader A reader can be designated as an escort reader by selecting the Escort Enabled checkbox in Readers General tab. This check box works in conjunction with the Escorted checkbox in Personnel General tab.
Fig. 50.4. Readers Screen Check Boxes Escort Enabled Highlighted
Fig. 50.5. Personnel Screen Check Boxes Escorted Highlighted.
When the Escort option is selected in a given badge holders Personnel record, that badge holder will require a second, non-Escort enabled badge holder, to escort him through doorways, that have readers with the Escort option set. The Escort enabled badge has the following properties. If a valid Escort enabled badge is presented to a non-Escort enabled reader (and the badge holder has permission to enter that door), the badge holder will be granted access.
Readers
If a valid Escort enabled badge is presented to an Escort enabled reader (and the badge holder has permission to enter that door), the door will not be opened unless there is a second, non-escort enabled badge, presented to that same reader before the Two-Badge timer expires. The TwoBadge Timer is set in the Readers Options tab.
Fig. 50.6. The Two-Badge Timer section in Readers Options tab.
The Two Badge Timer sets the time, in seconds, that the system will wait for the presentation of a second badge, for any two badge type event (Escort, TwoPerson and Vehicle Tag). Two-Person Reader The Two Person Reader Type control allows you to activate the Two-Person function at a reader. The Two-Person function operates very much similar to the Escort function explained above.
Fig. 50.7. The Two-Person Reader Type control in Readers Options tab
In general, a Two-Person reader will wait to obtain badge reads from two valid badges before allowing entry to either cardholder. The door will not be unlocked until two valid badge reads are received. The Two-Person function software tracks how many occupants are in a given room or facility at a given point of time. The software requires that at least two badge holders enter the room together. Any two badge holders must remain in the room at all times. And the last two occupants must leave together. The application for a two person reader might be in a sensitive lab area where your firm would want a minimum of two people in that lab at all times. An entry door and an exit door would be provided. At least two badge holders would be required to be in the room at any time.
Readers
The above scenario brings up several optional methods of operating such a secure room. The Two Person Reader Type control provides the following options. In When the Two-Person IN function is assigned to a reader: o If the room in question currently has no occupants, two badges are required to open the door for the first time. Single card reads are rejected with a violation event message after a timeout period (waits for second badge read). o Once the room or facility has a minimum of two occupants, the reader behaves like a standard reader and admits individual badge holders without escort. Out When the Two-Person OUT function is assigned to a reader: o As badge holders leave the room or facility, the last two card holders are required to leave together. The reader requires two badge reads at an exit reader before the door will be unlocked. o Single card reads will be rejected by the reader at all times, with a violation event message (after a timeout), when set to Two-Person Out. Out with Override When the Two-Person OUT with Override function is assigned to a reader. o As the room is emptied, a single card read will unlock the door, but a violation message will be generated. All Two-Person functions require that two valid badge holders occupy the room at any one time. Out with Override prevents a cardholder from being stranded in a room or facility. It is possible for the last two persons in a room to present their badges at the exit door, and let one person leave. If the exit reader has the Two-Person Out setting, there is no way that the final occupant can exit. Out with Override allows the single card holder to leave, but generates a violation message so it can be determined who was in the room without escort. Always When the Two-Person Always function is assigned to a reader, there is no In or Out function. Two valid card reads are required at that door at all times.
7
Readers
Alarm Shunt Reader A reader can be set up to perform alarm shunting function by selecting the Alarm Shunt Reader check box in Readers General tab.
Fig. 50.8. Readers screen check boxes Alarm Shunt Reader highlighted.
An Alarm Shunt reader will behave as a standard door type reader (explained above) unless a Shunt enabled badge is presented. In case a Shunt enabled badge is presented, shunting will be activated and will be in the mode as described by the settings in the Personnel record (on the Control tab) of the shunt card badge holder. Refer the section Personnel for more information on alarm Shunting. The next subsequent presentation of any shunt enabled badge at the same Shunt enabled reader, will disable the shunting that was enabled by the first badge read.
Readers
Card Only Reader
Fig 50.9. The Card-Only Time Schedule selection control in Readers Door Control tab.
By default, when you create a new reader record, that reader is already in CardOnly mode. Thus, if no changes have been made to the default Reader record settings, then you will not need to apply a Card-Only Time Schedule. The Card-Only Time Schedule control is used to override another applied schedule. An example would be where you wish to have badge holders enter the building during business hours using their badges only (security personnel can identify valid card holders on sight). After hours (when there are fewer security personnel), you require badge holders to type an access PIN code into a keypad in addition to presenting a valid access card (this may prevent someone from being able to use a stolen card and sneak in unnoticed after hours). In the example above, you would create a Card-Only time schedule for use during the day, and you would create a Card & Code schedule for use at night. Thus, the mode of the reader will be switched between Card-Only and Card & Code automatically by the system.
Card & Code Reader It is possible to set a reader into a mode where you will require that any card holders that present badges to that reader also type an access PIN code into a keypad (that keypad will be connected to the same reader port). When a Card&PIN schedule is selected in the Card&PIN Schedule control, the panel reader port is set to expect a keypad entry after every badge read.
Readers
Fig. 50.10. The Card&Pin Time Schedule control in Readers Door Control tab.
The keypad port for a given reader is not enabled by default, so you must enable the keypad port for a given door before you select a Card&PIN Schedule for that door. Keypad set up is discussed later in this manual section.
Time & Attendance Reader The Time & Attendance selection control allows you to activate the Time & Attendance function for a given reader.
Fig. 50.11. The Time & Attendance Type control.
The T & A reader will behave like a standard reader, but the CardAccess will generate special event messages as badges are presented to T&A readers (see figure 50.12). T & A Readers can be set up as IN, OUT or IN&OUT readers. Time & Attendance is a passive function. That is, a T&A reader will not generate a violation message if you wish to enter or exit the same reader twice (so a card holder could clock IN or OUT more than once, for example). A cardholder will be allowed to enter or exit as many times as they wish, without restriction.
Fig. 50.12. Time&Attendance Event Messages.
10
Readers
Anti-Passback Reader The APB control section allows you to activate the Anti-Passback function of a given reader. An Anti-Passback reader functions much like the Time & Attendance reader described above, except that Anti-Passback readers can be set to deny re-entry to a given door.
Fig. 50.13. The Anti-Passback Control section in Readers Options tab.
Typically, one reader is set up to be an APB IN reader, and a second reader is set as an APB OUT reader. After a given cardholder has presented a badge to an APB IN reader, that badge will not be accepted at an APB IN reader again until it has been presented to an APB OUT reader. The APB function is designed to enforce strict entry and exit rules, which will prevent card holders fromre-entering an APB IN enabled door, until they have exited through an APB OUT enabled door. Thus, you must enable APB on at least two readers if you wish to enforce Anti-Passback.
Vehicle Tag Reader Generally, Vehicle Tagging is a function where two readers are linked together by software settings and employed to track which badge holder has exited a facility in possession of a given vehicle. Note that the Vehicle Tag function can only be enabled on a Superterm, Turbo Superterm and the Super Two controller panel types. The firmware of all other panel types does not support Vehicle Tagging. There are two readers placed at the exit point of a motor pool parking facility. One reader is at an elevation suitable to read a badge presented by the driver of a vehicle. The second reader is mounted in the roadway, directly underneath the vehicle. The second reader reads a proximity badge mounted on the vehicle chassis.
11
Readers
The two readers are linked by software so that badge events from both readers can be treated as one logical event. The Vehicle Tag Superterm Reader Link control selects the vehicle tag reader that will be associated with the badge holder reader. In other words, the link between the two readers is accomplished in the Readers screen, on the Options tab, in the Vehicle Tag Superterm Reader Link control. You link the badge holder reader to the Vehicle Tag reader (not the other way around).
Fig. 50.14. The Vehicle Tag Superterm Reader Link control in Readers Options tab
Two readers on a single panel are required. The panels may be of Superterm, Turbo Superterm and the Super Two controller types only. Besides linking two readers together, you will need to create badge holder badges and Vehicle Tag badges in the Personnel screen (see the manual section titled Personnel for more information). The badge holder badges for drivers of vehicles are not special badges. The same badges that allow door access can be used. The Vehicle Tag badge records are not special in any way either. They are created and configured just like standard badge holder records and all of the same rules apply. A Vehicle Tag badge record must have access group permissions just like a standard badge. You will want to enter names in the First and Last name fields that describe the vehicle, however. The only configuration requirement for identifying a badge as a Vehicle Tag is to check the Vehicle Tag checkbox in the badge record (figure 50.15). The Vehicle Tag badge type is created with all of the default settings of a standard cardholder badge.
12
Readers
Fig. 50.15. Personnel Screen Vehicle Tag checkbox.
Note that in all functions that involve two badge reads, the Two-Badge Timer is used. The time set in the Two-Badge Timer determines how long the system will wait for the second badge read for all two badge type events (including Vehicle Tagging).
Fig. 50.16. The Two-Badge Timer section in Readers Options tab.
Thus, you need to set a value in the timer if you will be using Vehicle Tags (the time is in seconds). If the system collects one badge read (either badge may be read first), but does not receive the second badge read before the timer expires, there will be a violation event message generated as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 50.17. Vehicle Tag Violation Event Massage.
In the specific case of a Vehicle Tag reader and its associated badge reader, you need to set a Two-Badge Timeout time for both readers. That timer will determine how long each reader will wait for the second badge read before generating an error event message. The timers do not need to be set to the same value. When either a badge or tag is read, all of the standard access control checks are performed on that badge or tag. If the badge or tag is valid, the associated door
13
Readers
strike is activated (if programmed) and the panel waits for the second reader event. When both the badge and the tag have been read successfully, only one event message is generated that mentions both the badge and vehicle tag as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 50.18. A Valid Tag Event Message.
Once two readers are linked together in a Vehicle Tag arrangement, the badges read at those readers will report as Vehicle Tag type events by default. Further, two badge reads (one at each reader) are then expected on every badge event. If only one (valid) badge is read at either reader, and the timer expires, you will get a violation event message even though the door relay was fired in response to a valid badge. However, you can override the Tag No Match error event message (see figure 50.17) for specific badges, in a case where you need to set up a situation where only one valid badge read will be permitted at either reader, and you want a Badge Valid event message generated instead of Tag No Match. For each badge that you wish to have override the vehicle tag programming, check the Tracked checkbox in that cardholders Personnel record. In the specific case of Vehicle Tag readers, the Tracked function does not set the badge to Tracked mode. When the Tracked enabled badge is presented to a Vehicle Tag reader, it causes the system to ignore the Vehicle Tag linking. At all other readers, the badge reports as Tracked.
14
Readers
Readers Screen Folder Tabs

Readers screen may contain several folders tabs as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 50.19. Readers screen folder tabs.
a) General Tab b) Door Control Tab c) Options Tab d) Priorities Tab e) DVR Tab - This tab will be visible only when Enable DVR Remote View option is selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 50.20. System Settings Enable DVR Remote View option.
f) CCTV Tab - This tab will be visible only when Enable SmartView
CCTV-Full Control option is selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 50.21. System Settings Enable SmartView CCTV-Full Control option.
g) Elevator Access Tab - This tab will be visible only under the following conditions:
15
Readers
o Using Elevator Readers checkbox is enabled in Panels screen General tab.
Fig. 50.22. The Using Elevator Readers check box.
o The reader is set to Elevator type in Readers screen General tab.
Fig. 50.23. The Readers screen Reader Type section Elevator option selected.
h) Map Tab - The Map tab will be visible only when the Use Facility Maps feature is enabled in System Settings screen.
Fig. 50.24. System Settings Use Facility Maps checkbox.
i) Remote Control Tab - This tab will be visible only when the Remote Control check box is selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 50.25. System Settings Using Remote Control checkbox.
j) Location/Remarks Tab Each of the tabs and their controls are detailed below.
16
Readers
General Tab
This is the default tab in which Readers screen will be displayed.
Fig. 50.26. Readers screen General tab.
The various controls in General tab are explained below. Panel Readers are ultimately always connected to panels. Each new reader definition must be attached to a panel through CardAccess software configuration. Selecting a panel in the Panel control attaches this reader definition to that panel.
Fig. 50.27. The Panel control.
Once the reader record is saved, a data packet is downloaded to the selected panel and the panel software automatically enables the reader port indicated by the reader record, with the options selected in the controls explained below. To connect the reader to a panel, click the down arrow to the right of Panel control and select a panel in the list of panels.
17
Readers
Note: Panels must be defined before attempting to create Reader definitions. In case Panel drop down list does not show any panel name, you need to create panel records first. Refer the section Panels to create them. Reader# The Reader # control is used to number the reader in question.
Fig. 50.28. The Reader # control.
By default, all panel reader ports are deactivated. The Reader # indicates which reader port the panel should activate, once the record is downloaded to the panel indicated in the Panel control. A reader can be numbered by o Clicking the white space of Reader # field and typing a number of choice or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Reader # control and choosing a desired number. Note: The software lets you create up to eight readers per panel. The CardAccess will not allow you to create two readers with the same reader number, on the same panel. Name The Name field is for entering a descriptive text label that you wish to give to the reader.
The name should clearly describe where the reader is located in a given building. The CardAccess software will display this name in all events relating to the reader in question. Descriptive names will aid users of the CardAccess in locating the proper door when needed.
18
Readers
Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the current reader to a group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign to the reader.
Reader Type The Reader Type control programs the panel reader port to behave in one of the three ways listed below. The difference in actual software behavior of the three reader types listed below is minimal. The primary difference between the reader types below is how the reader will be used.
Fig. 50.31. The Reader Type control
Door When the Reader Type is set to Door, the reader is configured as a standard door reader. A Door in the CardAccess system is defined as a reader with one door strike relay, one bypass input, one door contact input, and optionally one shunting relay, and one keypad. Elevator Elevator reader programming is treated quite differently from door reader programming in the following ways. A new folder tab appears in the reader record called Elevator Access
19
Readers
Fig. 50.32. The Readers Screen Elevator Access tab.
Access Group programming is extended to the Readers screen, on the Elevator Access tab. You are given the opportunity to attach extra relays to the door definition. You can assign multiple relays to activate upon the presentation of a valid access card, which is in contrast to a standard door reader that can fire up to two relays (door strike and a shunt relay) maximum. However, you are still provided with the standard door relays in addition to the elevator control relays, when you create an elevator reader definition. You can find more details on elevator control programming in the section called Elevator Control found later in this section Badge Validator When a reader is set up as a Badge Validator, badges that are presented to that reader will be toggled between Enabled and Disabled. Thus, the Badge Validator reader is used to activate and deactivate access cards (badges). Note the following rules. Badge records are not created by the Badge Validator reader. Only badge records that exist in the database can be activated or deactivated. The Badge Validator function will only change the enabled status of the badge. When you present a badge to a Badge Validator reader
20
Readers
once, the badge will be enabled (if it is currently disabled). When you present the same badge again, the badge will be disabled. When an enabled, valid badge is presented to a Badge Validator reader, the door strike is fired (if programmed) and the badge is disabled. When a disabled badge is presented to a Badge Validator reader, the door strike is not fired, and the badge is enabled.
Assign to Access Group from Reader Access groups are usually created in the Access Groups screen (see section Access Groups). The Assign to Access Group from Reader control allows you to assign a reader to an access group from the Readers screen.
Fig. 50.33. The Assign to Access Group from Reader control.
The Assign to Access Group from Reader control contains a list of readers that already belong to access groups. To assign a reader to an access group from the Readers screen, you click the arrow to the right of Assign to Access Group from Reader control and select a reader that belongs to the access group you want to attach the current reader to. The current reader will be attached to the same access group as the reader that you selected, and the current reader will be assigned the same time block as the reader you selected.
21
Readers
Enabled The Enabled check box either enables or disables the reader record.
A reader record that is saved with the Enabled box checked, will be downloaded to the panel to which, the reader is physically connected. A reader that is saved with the Enabled box unchecked will be removed from the concerned panel, thereby rendering the reader inoperative. To enable or disable the reader, click the Enabled check box. Checked means enabled, unchecked means disabled.
Report Bypass
Fig. 50.35. The Report Bypass check box.
Report Bypass is enabled (checked) by default. Each panel door connector is equipped with two inputs, which become enabled (on the panel door connector) automatically when a new Reader record is saved in the CardAccess software. One of those inputs is a Bypass Input, often called a request to exit input. On each panel door connector, the Bypass input is treated as a special input. When there is a contact closure (a short) across the Bypass input, the door strike relay is fired, opening the door. The typical use for this input is to mount a switch on the inside of a door to allow badge holders to exit a building without the need to present a badge to a reader to do so. Because the number of employees exiting the building, at the end of a workday in a large facility can generate literally thousands of requests to exit
22
Readers
event messages, some clients prefer to turn those messages off. Some security teams are less interested in who is leaving a building. To turn Report Bypass off, uncheck the check box.
Bypass Unlocks Bypass Unlocks is enabled by default. The Bypass Unlocks check box is related to the Report Bypass input explained above. The Bypass Unlocks check box determines whether the bypass switch mentioned above will be coupled to the door strike relay.
Fig. 50.36. The Bypass Unlocks checkbox.
If Bypass Unlocks is checked, a closure on the bypass input will unlock the associated door. If Bypass Unlocks is not checked, the bypass switch will be ignored.
Report Access After Open By default, when a valid badge is presented to any reader, the CardAccess system generates a Badge Valid event message immediately (no delay). The system does not wait for the door to be pulled open before reporting the badge access. Potentially, a cardholder could present a valid card and decide not to enter the door. However, an event message would still be generated, making it look like the badge holder entered the building. To prevent false door access reporting by valid badge holders, the CardAccess allows you to suppress Badge Valid event messages until the door is actually opened. The system senses the state of the door by using the door contact input (mentioned later).
23
Readers
When the Report Access After Open check box is checked, the panel software will wait for the door contact to open before sending a Badge Valid event message.
Fig. 50.37. The Report Access After Open checkbox.
With the Report Access After Open checkbox unchecked, the panel will send a Badge Valid event message immediately, every time a valid badge is presented to a reader. This event message suppression works only for Badge Valid messages. Violation messages are not affected by the Report Access After Open control, and are sent immediately.
Escort Enabled The Escort Enabled function is disabled by default (unchecked). When the Escort Enabled check box is checked, the reader becomes an Escort Reader.
Fig. 50.38. The Escort Enabled checkbox.
No essential functioning of the reader is changed. The only noticeable change in reader behavior is when an Escort enabled badge is presented to an Escort reader. When the Escort attribute is enabled for a badge, that badge works as a normal badge at any reader that is not set with the Escort Enabled function activated. When an Escort enabled badge is presented to an Escort enabled reader, the reader will refuse to grant door access unless a second, non-escort enabled badge is presented within a timeout period. More information on Escort readers can be found under the heading Reader Functional Types. To set the reader as an Escort Reader, check the check box.
24
Readers
No Transaction for Valid No Transaction for Valid is disabled on every reader by default. All events are logged to the database unless those settings are overridden. However there are some events that could be considered less significant, such as Badge Valid messages. In a standard system, the greatest majority of event messages are Badge Valid messages. You can elect not to receive Badge Valid event messages by enabling the No Transaction for Valid (check the check box) feature on a reader port.
Fig. 50.39. The No Transaction for Valid checkbox.
The benefits of not logging event messages are o Not logging Badge Valid messages would save considerable hard drive and database space. o The system would not need to pick up Badge Valid event messages from panels and would likely gain some speed improvement. The main pitfall of not logging event messages is that if you need to reference an event for a later report on valid access activity, perhaps during a selected hour or day, none of those events will be stored in the database or any archive (the events are not sent to the computer by the panel). Note that the No Transaction for Valid check box only suppresses Badge Valid messages. All other event messages are unaffected. Check the No Transaction for Valid checkbox to suppress Badge Valid event messages for one specific reader. The feature must be set on each reader where you wish suppress valid event messages. You are permitted to set the feature (or not) on any readers of your choosing.
25
Readers
Suppress OTL Warning When Suppress OTL Warning box is checked for a particular reader, all Door Open Too Long event messages generated on that reader will be suppressed. By default, the box is unchecked.
Fig. 50.40. The Suppress OTL Warning checkbox.
Door Open Too Long event messages are sent by a panel (to the PC) when there has been a valid door access (defined as a successful badge read, and subsequently the door contact was broken), but the door contact has not returned to the normal state (the door has not closed) before the Still Open Delay timer has elapsed. The Still Open Delay timer is set in the Doors section of the Options tab, found in the Readers screen (see figure below). The default value for the Still Open Delay timer is 30 seconds. Thus, the system will report that the door has been held open (which is a violation) if the door is not closed within 30 seconds.
Fig. 50.41. The Still Open Delay control in Readers Options tab.
The Suppress OTL Warning option is generally used when there is a need to hold the door open for an extended period, such as when there is a construction crew working in the building. Door Open Too Long messages are enabled by default. To suppress Door Open Too Long messages, click (check) the check box for every reader that you wish to have suppressed.
26
Readers
Time Schedule Violate Override
Fig. 50.42. The Time Schedule Violate Override checkbox.
Generally, badge holders are assigned access rights to a given reader. Those rights include the right to access a certain reader at selected time schedules during which access is possible. If a badge holder attempts to access a reader outside of a permitted time schedule, a violation error is generated by the system and access is denied. The Time Schedule Violate Override feature allows you to modify the violation behavior of the reader. If the Time Schedule Violate Override feature is enabled (check box is checked), and a valid badge holder attempts access at that reader outside of the specified time schedule, the panel will still send a violation message to the PC, but the cardholder will be admitted through the door.
Alarm Shunt Reader
Fig. 50.43. The Alarm Shunt Reader checkbox.
If the Alarm Shunt Reader check box is checked, the reader continues to behave as a normal reader. However, the reader is enhanced to treat badges that have the Alarm Shunt feature enabled differently. Alarm Shunting behavior is fully explained in the manual section titled Personnel.
27
Readers
Door Control Tab

All reader definitions are created with default settings, some of which appear in the below list. Every reader is enabled 24/7/365 by default Every reader will accept access cards only by default The Keypad port is disabled There is no Free Access schedule Degrade Mode is disabled The Door Control folder tab contains a number of controls to modify the default behavior of a given reader.
Fig. 50.44. Readers screen Door Control tab.
The Door Control tab is divided into two sections- Door Controls and Keypad Settings. The controls in the two sections are detailed below.
28
Readers
Door
Controls Section
Fig. 50.45. The Door Controls section in Door Control tab.
The controls seen in Door Controls section are explained below. Card-Only Time Schedule The Card-Only Time Schedule control is used in conjunction with the Keypad controls mentioned below. By default, all readers are created with a (concealed) card only time schedule that activates the reader 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. Also by default, the reader keypad is disabled. Note: If you are not planning on enabling a keypad at a given door, you will not need a Card Only Time Schedule. When a keypad is activated for a given reader, a Card & Code time schedule or a Code Only time schedule must be applied to the keypad to make it operational. When this keypad schedule is in effect, it overrides the default reader time schedule of card only, 24 hours per day, every day of the year. The keypad time schedule reprograms the door to require keypad entries in addition to (or instead of) card reads to allow entry. The Card-Only Time Schedule control allows you to select a schedule to return the reader to its default state, where only a card is required to gain entry.
29
Readers
Fig. 50.46. The Card-Only Time Schedule control.
All keypad time schedules are disabled by the Card Only time schedule. The keypad is ignored while the Card Only time schedule is in effect. You must decide how you wish to set up your door. You will select a Card-Only time schedule if you have a keypad enabled at the current door, and it has a Code Only or Card & Code schedule assigned to it, and you wish to have the keypad disabled during certain hours, requiring only a card to gain entry during those hours. To select a Card-Only Time Schedule click the arrow to the right of the CardOnly Time Schedule control (see figure 50.46) and select a schedule. The list of schedules is taken from the Schedules screen. If there are no schedules visible, you need to create some in the Schedules screen. Refer the section Schedules to do this. To disable the Card-Only Time Schedule, select Not Used from the CardOnly Time Schedule list.
Free Access Time Schedule
Fig. 50.47. The Free Access Time Schedule control.
During a Free Access schedule, the door control relay is activated unlocking a door for the duration of that schedule. Typically, Free Access schedules are used to unlock doors when employees enter a building in the morning, during lunch or when they leave at night. The doors are held unlocked at those times to permit easy access. To Set a Free Access Time Schedule, click the arrow to the right of the Free Access Time Schedule control and select a schedule. If no schedules are visible,
30
Readers
you must create some in the Schedules screen. Refer the section Schedules to do this. To disable the Free Access Time Schedule, select Not Used from the Free Access Time Schedule list.
Degrade Mode Time Schedule
Fig. 50.48. The Degrade Mode Time Schedule control.
When a panel is placed in Degrade mode, (by checking the Degrade Mode ON checkbox in Panels screen) readers on that panel are instructed to ignore badge numbers and admit cardholders who have the correct Facility Code (if Facility Codes are used). This feature may prove useful when badge numbers are not being read correctly by the readers. Since degrade mode ignores badge numbers, cardholders with the correct facility code can still gain entry to the building. The Degrade Mode Time Schedule control allows you to activate degrade mode for each door individually, based on the Degrade Mode Time Schedule you select. To activate degrade mode for a reader during a particular time schedule, click the arrow to the right of the Degrade Mode Time Schedule control and select the desired schedule from the list. In case there are no schedules in the list, you must create some in the Schedules screen. Refer the section Schedules to do this. To deactivate degrade mode for a Reader, select Not Used in the Degrade Mode Time Schedule control.
31
Readers
Door Sensor Input The Door Sensor Input (door contact) control sets the panel input number that the door will use as the door contact.
Fig. 50.49. The Door Sensor Input control.
By default, the system assigns the next available odd numbered input for the door contact function. Door one gets input 1; door two gets input 3, etc. The Door Sensor Input control is provided in case you wish to override the systems choice of input number for the door. When set to 0, there is no door contact for the given door. Note that any input number that gets assigned to door contact duties through this control becomes a special input. The standard input messages Input Normal and Input Abnormal messages are changed to the door input event messages Door Forced Open, Door Now Closed respectively. Further all door contact inputs have the settings of the controls of the readers screen applied, whereas standard inputs have the settings of the Inputs screen applied. Note that each door contact is enabled with some default behavior. You can override that behavior by going to the Inputs screen and creating an input definition with the same input number as the door definition input number (termed a duplicate input definition). If you check the Enabled check box in the duplicate input definition, the door contact will report with input event messages. If you do not check the Enabled check box, the settings found on the input screen will override the default door contact setting behavior, but the input will report with door contact type event messages. The Door Sensor Input Number can be set by
32
Readers
o Clicking the white space of Door Sensor Input control and typing a number or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Door Sensor Input control and choosing a number.
Bypass Input Technically, the Bypass Input control works identically to the Door Sensor Input mentioned above. However, the Bypass Input sets the input number of the Request to Exit switch.
Fig. 50.50. The Bypass Input control.
By default, all door input numbers are assigned by the system automatically. The automatically assigned Bypass Input number will be the next available even number. The Bypass Input (request to exit) control sets the panel input number that the door will use as the bypass input. This can be any available input on the panel type that you are using. The same rules apply as stated above for the Door Sensor Input. You can override the default settings of the door Bypass Input by creating a duplicate input definition in inputs. If you enable the duplicate input, event messages will report as an input instead of a door bypass. The Bypass Input Number can be set by o Clicking the white space of Bypass Input control and typing a number or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Bypass Input control and choosing a number.
33
Readers
Door Strike Relay The Door Strike Relay control selects the panel relay that will be used to operate the door strike.
Fig. 50.51. The Door Strike Relay control.
A relay selected to be a door relay becomes a special relay. Standard relay event reporting, Output On, Output Off type messages are changed to Door type access event messages. The Door Strike Relay Number can be set by o Clicking the white space of Door Strike Relay control and typing a number or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Door Strike Relay control and choosing a number.
34
Readers
Keypad Settings Section
Fig. 50.52. The Keypad Settings section in Door Control tab..
The controls seen in Keypad Settings section are explained below. Keypad Enabled The keypad Enabled control can be used to enable or disable a keypad.
Fig. 50.53. The Keypad Enabled checkbox.
If checked, the Keypad will be enabled. If unchecked, the Keypad will be disabled.
35
Readers
Disable Duress
Fig. 50.54. The Disable Duress checkbox.
Duress is a feature that works in conjunction with the Card & Code feature mentioned earlier in this section. Generally, Duress is defined as an emergency situation where a valid cardholder has an urgent need to attract the attention of security personnel (the victim is under duress). The classic access control Duress case is where a valid cardholder approaches a reader and is about to present his access card. An attacker approaches from the rear and forces the cardholder to admit them both to the building. At the typical reader only door installation, there would be no easy way for the victim to attract the attention of security personnel. However, at a door with a keypad mounted, an emergency code could be entered that would create a special CardAccess event message. This message could then attract the attention of security without alerting the attacker. You need several things in place to use the Duress feature The keypad must be enabled at all doors where the duress feature is to be made available. Each door must also have a reader installed and enabled. Each badge holder must have a numeric PIN code entered in their Personnel records (PIN codes dont have to be unique) A Card & Code schedule must be in effect on each door. Thus, you will provide a keypad and reader at the door. Badge holders will be required to present a badge and type in a PIN code on every access (while the Card & Code schedule is in effect). A Duress alarm is recognized by typing the first character of the PIN code four times. Typically, if the wrong characters are typed in for the PIN code, the door will remain locked.
36
Readers
However, after a valid card is presented at the reader for a door, if the first digit of that card holders PIN code is typed on the keypad four times, the Duress feature is activated and a violation class event message is generated (alerting security at the door), but the door is unlocked as though the correct PIN code was typed. The fact that the door is unlocked even though the PIN code was typed incorrectly allows security personnel to respond without the attacker knowing about detection. The Disable Duress check box shuts off the duress feature when the Disable Duress check box is checked. It is suggested however, that you leave Duress enabled for safety reasons.
Common Code
Fig. 50.55. The Common Code control.
The Common Code control works in conjunction with the Common Code Schedule control mentioned below. A Common Code in the CardAccess system is defined as a numeric code, known to all cardholders that can be typed into a keypad to gain admittance at a door without the need for an access badge. Thus, when a door has been set to common code mode, all cardholders will gain entry by typing the same numeric code into the appropriate keypad. That common code is entered into the Common Code control for each reader (the common code does not need to be the same for each reader). It is important to note that there are actually two modes to the common code control explained below. Common Code Mode When you fill a numeric code into the Common Code control, the Common Code feature is put in Common Code mode for that reader.
37
Readers
Common code mode is as described above. While the Common Code Schedule is in effect, the panel reader port will be expecting badge holders to type in the common code as defined in the Common Code control. Card Number Mode When you fill in the hexadecimal value FFFF into the Common Code Control, the Common Code feature is put in Card Number mode for that reader. In Card Number mode, the panel reader port expects badge holders to type in their card numbers (maximum 9 digits) as defined in each individual Personnel record, for that reader. Note the following operational issues regarding using keypad entered card numbers to access a building (where Common Code = FFFF. o It would be wise for cardholders to press the * key before entering the badge number. This clears the keypad memory of any unresolved digits that another user may have typed in and left incomplete o If facility codes are not used for a given panel, or if the facility code is set to 0 for a given badge holders record, the badge holder must type the badge number into the keypad followed by the # symbol (the enter key) to gain access o If facility codes are being used at the panel being accessed, then the badge holder must type the number 0, then the facility code (in decimal), then the badge number, then the # symbol (the enter key) to gain access. If you are using facility codes on panels that have reader ports set to allow keypad badge number access, only facility numbers 0-9 can be typed in (because the facility code must be preceded by a 0). Do not use facility numbers greater than 0009 (hex) at such panels (refer the section Facility Codes for more information).
38
Readers
Card & Pin Schedule
Fig. 50.56. The Card & PIN Schedule control.
While Card & PIN Schedule is in effect, entry will be granted to cardholders only when both of the conditions below are satisfied. A valid badge is presented at the door and A valid PIN code is entered into a keypad mounted at the same door. To select a schedule, click the arrow to the right of the Card & PIN Schedule control and click on a desired schedule. To disable Card & PIN mode (also known as card & code mode), select Not Used from the list of schedules and uncheck the Keypad Enabled check box.
Common Code Schedule
Fig. 50.57. The Common Code Schedule control.
While Common Code Schedule is in effect, badge holders will be expected to enter the common code as defined in the Common Code control (described above) for that reader, in order to gain entry through the door. Badges will be rejected. To select a schedule, click the arrow to the right of the Common Code Schedule control and click on a desired schedule. To disable Common Code mode, select Not Used from the list of schedules and uncheck the Keypad Enabled check box.
39
Readers
Options Tab
Fig. 50.58. Readers screen Options tab.
The controls on Options tab are explained below.
Doors Section
Fig. 50.59. The Doors section in Options tab.
The controls in Doors section are explained below.
40
Readers
Shunt Relay The Shunt Relay control enables the hardware shunting relay for a door.
Fig. 50.60. The Shunt Relay control.
The hardware shunting relay is generally used to bypass another manufacturers door contact switch to prevent that alarm system from false triggering each time a door is opened, as a result of valid access using the CardAccess system. The panel software is designed to activate the shunting relay a few milliseconds before the door strike relay. Input and relay numbers are not pre-assigned in the CardAccess. Thus, you can assign any relay on the panel to any door or function (excepting the console relay, #73). However, the system does automatically assign the odd numbered onboard relays for door functions and reserves the even numbered onboard relays for shunting functions. Even though you are free to change those conventions, typically you would select an even numbered relay to perform shunting functions. The shunt relay can be selected by o Using the up/down arrows to the right of Shunt Relay control and choosing a number or o By clicking the white space of Shunt Relay control and typing a number.
41
Readers
Door Strike Time/Elevator Relay Duration The dual function Door Strike Time/Elevator Relay Duration control allows you to select the amount of time (in seconds) that the door strike (or elevator relay) will energize before releasing and returning to the relaxed state. The control is dual function because, If the reader has been set up as a door reader (the default setting), this control selects the door strike time.
Fig. 50.61. The Door Strike Time control.
If the reader has been set up as an elevator reader (see above sections) this control selects the elevator relay energize time duration. The label on the control changes to reflect its function when the reader is set as an elevator reader.
Fig. 50.62. The Elevator Relay Duration control.
Intrusion Delay The Intrusion Delay control selects the amount of time (in seconds) that the system will wait before reporting a Door Forced event message.
Fig. 50.63. The Intrusion Delay control.
When this control is set to 0 (the default), door forced messages are reported immediately. When set to a number other than 0, the system will wait the specified time before reporting the door ajar. However, if the door is returned to closed status
42
Readers
before the timeout period has expired, the door forced message will not be reported. The Intrusion Delay time can be set by o Using the up/down arrows to the right of Intrusion Delay control and choosing a desired number or o By clicking the white space of Intrusion Delay control and typing a number of choice.
Still Open Delay The Still Open Delay selects the amount of time (in seconds) that the system will wait before broadcasting a Door Open Too Long event message.
Fig 50.64. The Still Open Delay control.
When a door has been opened as a result of a valid badge read, but the door was not returned to the closed position, the system will wait the amount of time selected in the Still Open Delay timer before reporting Door Open Too Long. The timer is only used for the first open too long delay. If the door remains open long term, the system will rebroadcast the Door Open Too long event messages every three minutes. The Still Open Delay time can be set by o Using the up/down arrows to the right of Still Open Delay control and choosing a desired number or o By clicking the white space of Still Open Delay control and typing a number of choice.
43
Readers
Lock Control The Lock Control selector determines when the system will release the door strike relay.
Fig. 50.65. The Lock Control control.
The control provides the following options On Open The door strike relay is released as soon as the door contact is broken. Note: You must use a door contact with this setting or the system will have no way of determining if the door has been opened. On Close The door strike relay is released when the door is closed (that is when door contact is closed). A door contact must be used for this setting as well. On Timeout The system will use the timer value found in the Door Strike Time control to determine how long to hold the activated door strike relay.
Time & Attendance Type The Time & Attendance setting determines: The type of event message generated upon a valid badge read and The In/Out status of a given badge holder.
Fig. 50.66. The Time & Attendance Type control.
44
Readers
There are three selections (and three Time & Attendance reader types). In When the Time & Attendance Type is set to In for a given reader, that reader will report Badge Clock In event messages. The In/Out status of a card holder will be changed to In after gaining valid access at a Time & Attendance In reader. Out When the Time & Attendance Type is set to Out for a given reader, that reader will report Badge Clock Out event messages. The In/Out status of a card holder will be changed to Out after gaining valid access at a Time & Attendance Out reader. In/Out The In/Out Time & Attendance function uses one reader to clock a badge holder in and out. A bi-directional capable reader (like a Weigand swipe reader) is needed, and the badge format type must be set to Insertion (see the Badge Formats section of this manual). Badge Clock In is accomplished by swiping a badge in the forward direction. Badge Clock Out is accomplished by swiping the same badge in the opposite direction, on the same reader. To select a Time & Attendance type, click the arrow to the right of Time & Attendance Type control and click your selection. There is more information on the Time & Attendance function in the manual section titled Badge Holders IN .
Two Person Reader Type
Fig. 50.67. The Two Person Reader Type control.
The Two Person Reader Type is explained in more detail under the heading Reader Functional Types. The control provides the following choices. In Reader acts as a Two Person In reader
45
Readers
Out Reader acts as a Two Person Out reader Out w/Override Reader acts as a Two Person Out reader, but permits one remaining occupant to exit through the reader alone (but generates a violation message) Always Reader always requires two badge reads to permit entry to a door. To select a Two Person reader type, click the arrow to the right of Two Person Reader Type control and click your selection.
Two Badge Timer Section
Fig. 50.68. The Two-Badge Timer section.
Second Read Timeout The Two Badge Timer is the timer value used by any reader type that requires two badge reads. The timer is started when the first badge is read. If the timer expires before the second badge is read, a violation event message is generated. Two badge functions (Escort Reader, Two-Person Reader and Vehicle Tag Reader) are explained in more detail under the heading Reader Functional Types. The Two-Badge Timer value can be set by o Using the up/down arrows to the right of Second Read Timeout control and choosing a desired number or o By clicking the white space of Second Read Timeout control and typing a number of choice.
46
Readers
APB Control Section The Anti-Passback reader function is explained under the heading Reader Functional Types. A reader with the APB function enabled requires that a badge holder present a badge to an In reader, and subsequently to an Out reader (in that prescribed order). If the badge is presented to either reader more than once, a violation condition occurs and the reader refuses re-admittance to the cardholder (a condition termed as hard Anti-Passback).
Fig. 50.69. The Anti-Passback Control section in Options tab.
The controls in the APB Control section are explained below.
APB Type
Fig. 50.70. The APB Type control.
APB Type can be set to one of the following. In The reader is set to be an Anti-Passback In reader. Out The reader is set to be an Anti-Passback Out reader. Neutral (the default) Anti Passback is disabled at the reader.
47
Readers
APB Violate Override
Fig. 50.71. The APB Violate Override checkbox.
When the APB Violate Override check box is checked, the panel will allow a badge holder to open a door protected by an APB In or Out reader multiple times, but will generate violation event messages (termed soft Anti-Passback) each time the same reader is accessed by the same badge. In other words, door re-entries are permitted but are seen as a violation by the system.
Duration Use Time
Fig. 50.72. Readers screen Duration Use Time control.
Duration Use is more fully explained in the section titled Personnel. The Readers Duration Use Time control works in conjunction with the Personnel screen Duration Use check box.
Fig. 50.73. Personnel screen Duration Use checkbox.
When a Duration Use Time value is set at an APB reader, and a badge that has the Duration Use feature enabled is used to access that reader, the card holder will be allowed to re-enter at that reader after the Duration Use Time has expired (timed Anti-Passback). However, any card holders that do not have the Duration Use feature enabled will be denied re-entry capability at every APB enabled door regardless of the Duration Use Time value.
48
Readers
Duration Use Time control accepts values in the range 1-2700 minutes. The time value can be set by o Using the up/down arrows to the right of Duration Use Time control and choosing a desired number or o By clicking the white space of Duration Use Time control and typing a number of choice.
Vehicle Tag Superterm Reader Link The Vehicle Superterm Reader Link selection control allows you to logically link the current reader with a second reader (on the same panel only) so that both readers can perform Vehicle Tag functions in conjunction with one another.
Fig. 50.74. The Vehicle Tag Superterm Reader Link control.
More information is available under the heading Reader Functional Types. In the Vehicle Tag Superterm Reader Link you will be selecting the vehicle tag reader that will be associated with the badge holder reader. To select a reader, click the arrow to the right of Vehicle Tag Superterm Reader Link control and click on a reader of choice.
49
Readers
Priorities Tab
The Priorities folder tab is used to set the alert priority level of the various Reader event messages. Priority levels are used by the system to determine which part of the CardAccess main screen (Events/Alerts grids) to display the various reader events. Every possible type of reader event message is mentioned on the Priorities tab.
Fig. 50.75. Readers screen Priorities tab.
The Priorities tab is divided into two sections- Priority Settings and Miscellaneous Priorities. The two sections and their controls are explained below.
50
Readers
Priority Settings Section

The Priority Settings section sets the priority of each type of alert that you would normally want to have displayed because they are (mostly) violation type messages.
Fig. 50.76. The Priority Settings section offering controls for violation type alerts.
The controls in the Priority Settings section are explained below.
Priority The Priority spin controls allow you to set the numeric significance of a given alert type. By default, the system loads default priority values to each of the alert types as shown in the figure below.
51
Readers
Fig. 50.77. Priority spin controls for Reader alert types.
The priority values aid in routing of the reader alerts to one of the two grids (Events/Alerts) in the CardAccess main screen. Note: Priority values set for the reader alert types in Readers screen will be overridden by Auto Ack Priority Set-Point value set in the System Settings screen. The Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control is explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings. The system loaded default priority values can be changed as desired. The usable Priority Number range is 1-98, where 1 is the highest priority and 98 is the lowest priority number in the range. Priority values can be changed by o Typing in a desired number in the Priority spin control or o By using up/down arrows of Priority spin control to choose a desired number.
52
Readers
Requires Alert Response Each of the Reader Alert priorities has a check box labeled Requires Alert Response as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 50.78. The Requires Alert Response checkboxes for reader alert types.
By default these checkboxes will be unchecked. If an alert type has this check box selected, then, automatic acknowledgement of the concerned alert type will be disabled. So, manual acknowledgement will be required to resolve the alert upon its occurrence. In manual alert acknowledgement, the operator is forced to respond to the alert by typing in a Response Message in the Alert Acknowledge popup window and clicking the Acknowledge button to move the alert from the Alerts Grid into the Events Grid.
53
Readers
Activate Console Relay
Fig. 50.79. The Activate Console Relay checkboxes for reader alert types.
When Activate Console Relay checkbox is checked for an alert type, the system will fire the Console Relay every time alerts of the type indicated are received from the reader. Note that the Console Relay (relay 73) must be enabled at the panel before it can be activated (see the manual section titled Relays)
54
Readers
Miscellaneous Priorities Section

The Miscellaneous Properties section has controls for normal door alerts, when the door is being accessed normally with permission.
Fig. 50.80. The Miscellaneous Priorities section offering controls for normal door alerts.
The controls in the Miscellaneous Priorities section are explained below.
Enable Oper Acknowledge Enable Oper Acknowledge is disabled by default. When disabled, all event types mentioned in the Miscellaneous Priorities section will go directly into CardAccess Events grid.
Fig. 50.81. The Enable Oper Acknowledge checkboxes.
55
Readers
When enabled (checked), the events will enter the Alerts grid and wait for the operator to acknowledge them. Priority The Priority spin controls allow you to set the numeric significance of a given alert type. By default, the system loads default priority values to each of the alert types as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 50.82. Default Priorities loaded for normal alerts in Miscellaneous Priorities section.
An alerts Priority value in the Miscellaneous Properties section will determine where to display the alert (CardAccess Events/Alerts grid), depending on the Enable Oper Acknowledge checkbox value of that particular alert. In case the checkbox is checked, the concerned alert will go into the Alerts grid ignoring the Priority value. On the other hand, if the checkbox is unchecked, the alert will directly go into the Events grid. Note: Priority values set for the reader alert types in Readers screen will be overridden by Auto Ack Priority Set-Point value set in the System Settings screen. The Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control is explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings. The system loaded default priority values can be changed as desired. The usable Priority Number range is 1-98, where 1 is the highest priority and 98 is the lowest priority number in the range. Priority values can be changed by o Typing in a desired number in the Priority spin control or o By using up/down arrows of Priority spin control to choose a desired number.
56
Readers
Requires Alert Response Each of the Reader Alert priorities has a check box labeled Requires Alert Response as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 50.83. The Requires Alert Response checkboxes for Miscellaneous Priorities.
Note: The Requires Alert Response checkboxes will be grayed out by default as seen in the above figure. A Requires Alert Response checkbox will be active only when the corresponding Enable Oper Acknowledge checkbox is checked. If an alert type has this check box selected, then, automatic acknowledgement of the concerned alert type will be disabled. So, manual acknowledgement will be required to resolve the alert upon its occurrence. In manual alert acknowledgement, the operator is forced to respond to the alert by typing in a Response Message in the Alert Acknowledge popup window and clicking the Acknowledge button to move the alert from the Alerts Grid into the Events Grid.
57
Readers
Manual Control Privilege
Fig. 50.84. The Manual Control Privilege control.
The manual Control Privilege control sets the manual control access level of the reader. This feature affects how the reader is displayed in the Doors manual control screen, available from the CardAccess main toolbar. See the manual section titled Manual Control for more information. The default privilege for any new reader will be set to All. To change the privilege level for the given reader, click the arrow to the right of Manual Control Privilege control and click the desired privilege level.
58
Readers
DVR Tab
The DVR tab in Readers screen is used for configuring a DVR Camera to the selected Reader. The DVR tab will be visible only when Enable DVR RemoteView option is selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 50.85. Enabling DVR RemoteView in System Settings screen.
Readers screen in DVR tab will appear as below.
59
Readers
Fig. 50.86. Readers screen in DVR tab.
The controls in DVR tab are explained below. DVR Server Name The DVR Server Name control will contain the list of all DVR Servers that are defined in CardAccess 3000 Dvr RemoteView Configuration screen (refer the document DVR RemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000 for details).
Fig. 50.87. The DVR Server Name control. 60
Readers
To select the DVR Server that supports the camera focusing the selected reader (door), click the down arrow to the right of DVR Server Name control and select the required server name in the list.
Camera The Camera control will contain the list of all camera names that are connected to the DVR Server that was selected in the DVR Server Name control.
Fig. 50.88. The Camera control.
Note: Camera drop down box will not be available unless a DVR Server is selected. The label Camera will be visible by default. But the drop down box for camera selection will be seen only after server selection. To select the camera focusing the selected reader, click the down arrow to the right of Camera control and select the required camera name in the list. Pre-Event Time, Post Event Time The Pre-Event Time control is used to set the view time you wish to allow before the occurrence of events at the selected reader. The Post Event Time control is used to set the view time you wish to allow after the occurrence of events at the selected reader. Both these controls will be assigned the default value of 50 seconds.
61
Readers
Fig. 50.89. The Pre Event and Post Event Time controls.
The default Pre-Event/Post-Event Times can be changed in the following ways: o By clicking the white space of the control (Pre/Post Event Time) and typing in a number of choice or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of the control to choose the desired number. Priority From, Priority To Priority From and To controls are used to set the priority range for the events that can occur at the selected reader. When a range is fixed, only DVR recorded videos of events whose priority values fall within that particular range can be viewed.
Fig. 50.90. The Priority From and To spin controls.
The system assigns the default priority range of 1-70. Note: Values in the range of 1-98 can be employed. The default priority range can be changed in the following ways. o By clicking the white space of the control (Priority From/To) and typing in a number of choice or
62
Readers
o By using the up/down arrows to the right of the control to choose the desired number.
Configuring DVR Camera to a Reader

Following are the steps for configuring DVR camera to a reader: Open Readers screen by clicking on Configuration->Readers menu options in CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of Readers screen, click on a reader record. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Click on DVR tab. Note: The DVR tab will be visible only if Enable DVR RemoteView option is selected in System Settings screen. The DVR tab will look similar to the figure shown below.
Fig. 50.91. Readers Screen DVR tab.
Click the down arrow to the right of DVR Server Name field and select a desired server in the drop down list.
63
Readers
Click the down arrow to the right of Camera control and select a desired camera name in the drop down list. Note: The Camera drop down box will not be available unless a DVR Server is selected. Enter the Pre Event Time (view time before the occurrence of an event at the selected reader). The time value can be entered in two ways as below. o By clicking the white space of Pre Event Time control and typing in a number of choice. o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Pre Event Time spin control and choosing a desired number. Enter the Post Event Time (view time after the occurrence of an event at the selected reader). Post Event Time can be entered in the same manner as pre-event time was entered. Enter lower limit of the priority range in the Priority From control. The lowest possible number that can be entered is 1. Note: Priority range is the range in which events of different priorities fall into. The DVR recorded video of only those events falling within this range can be viewed. Enter upper limit of the priority range in the Priority To edit box. The highest possible number that can be entered is 98. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings.
64
Readers
CCTV Tab
CCTV tab can be used to program the selected reader for SmartView CCTV feature. CCTV tab will be visible only when the Enable SmartView CCTV-Full Control option is selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 50.92. Enabling SmartView CCTV Full Control feature in System Settings screen.
Readers screen in CCTV tab will appear as below.
65
Readers
Fig. 50.93. Readers screen in CCTV tab.
The controls in CCTV tab are explained below. Enable SmartView for this Reader The Enable SmartView for this Reader checkbox is used to enable/disable the SmartView CCTV feature for a selected reader.
Fig. 50.94. The Enable SmartView for this Reader checkbox.
Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default).
66
Readers
Assign as this PC The function of Assign as this PC button is to assign the current PC as a CCTV workstation.
Fig. 50.95. The Assign as this PC button.
For assigning, click on Assign as this PC button. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 50.96. Message box displayed after clicking Assign as this PC button.
Click on Yes button in the message box for workstation assignment.
CCTV Activation Conditions The CCTV Activation Conditions section provides checkboxes for event types that can be generated in the CardAccess system.
Fig. 50.97. The CCTV Activation Conditions section.
67
Readers
Selection of a checkbox will trigger the selected CCTV function or preset upon the occurrence of an event that belongs to the selected type. Click the checkbox to select the desired event type. Note: The CCTV functions and presets are defined using the Live Video screen and Function Key Programming screen respectively. Refer the SmartView Helpfile for details.
CCTV Function to Execute The CCTV Function to Execute control stores the default and, all of the CCTV functions that are defined in the Function Key Programming screen (refer SmartView Helpfile for details). A desired CCTV function can be selected for execution upon the occurrence of the selected event types.
Fig. 50.98. The CCTV Function to Execute control.
To select a function, click the down arrow to the right of CCTV Function to Execute control and select a function of choice. Note: The CCTV Function to Execute control will be visible only after you click the Assign as this PC button, for assigning your computer as the SmartView workstation. Take CCTV Snapshot When Take CCTV Snapshot checkbox is selected, the SmartView CCTV software will take snapshots of the events (whose event type is selected in the CCTV Activation Conditions section) upon their occurrence. By default the checkbox is unchecked.
Fig. 50.99. The Take CCTV Snapshot checkbox.
Click the checkbox if you wish to take CCTV snapshots of the event types selected.
68
Readers
The snapshot taken will be stored in the database along with the event. An event having a CCTV snapshot will show a camera icon in the Photo column of the event record, in CardAccess main screen. Snapshot delay (ms) A few cameras such as the PTZ cameras need some time to move and position themselves before they can take snapshots. This time requirement is met by fixing what we call as the snapshot delay time. The Snapshot Delay field is used to set the amount of time you wish to allow for proper positioning of cameras before taking CCTV snapshots.
Fig. 50.100. The Snapshot Delay field.
Configuring CCTV SmartView for a Reader

Following are the steps for configuring CCTV SmartView feature to a reader: Open Readers screen by clicking on Configuration->Readers menu options in CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of Readers screen, click on a reader record. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Click on CCTV tab. Note: CCTV tab will be visible only when Enable SmartView CCTVFull Control option is selected in System Settings screen. The CCTV tab will look similar to the figure shown below.
69
Readers
Fig. 50.101. The CCTV tab.
Click the Enable SmartView for this Reader checkbox.
Click on Assign as this PC button for assigning your computer as the SmartView workstation and then click on click on Yes button in the message box that is displayed. Once this is done, the name of your computer will be shown against the label SmartView Workstation and a new control called CCTV Function to Execute will appear below the CCTV Activation Conditions section as shown highlighted in the figure below.
Fig. 50.102. The CCTV Function to Execute control visible after ARUNLPT is assigned as the SmartView Workstation.
In the CCTV Activation Conditions section, check the desired checkboxes provided for the event types that can be generated in the CardAccess software.
70
Readers
Click the down arrow to the right of CCTV Function to Execute and select the desired function in the list. Note: The CCTV Function to Execute control will not be visible unless you assign your computer as the SmartView workstation. The CCTV Function to Execute drop down list will show the default function (VIDEO WINDOW ON/OFF) and all of the CCTV functions that you define in the Function Key Programming screen (refer SmartView Helpfile for defining functions). If you wish to take snapshots of the selected event types, click the Take CCTV Snapshot checkbox to select it. If you wish to allow time for positioning of cameras before taking snapshots, click the white space of Snapshot Delay field and type a desired time value.
Fig. 50.103. The Snapshot Delay field.
Note: The unit of measurement for Snapshot Delay field is millisecond (1/1000 of a second). That is, in case you wish to allow 1 second for camera positioning, you will have to enter the value 1000. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings.
71
Readers
Elevator Access Tab

The Elevator Access tab will be visible only when the following options are enabled for a Reader record: The Using Elevator Readers check box is selected in Panels screen General tab.
Fig. 50.104. The Using Elevator Readers check box in Panels screen General tab.
Note: Unless the Using Elevator Readers check box is selected, the Elevator radio button option will not be available for selection in the Readers screen. The Reader type is set to Elevator in Readers screen General tab.
Fig. 50.105. The Reader Type section in Readers General tab- Elevator option selected.
A click on the Elevator Access tab will display Readers screen similar to the figure shown below.
72
Readers
Fig. 50.106. The Readers Elevator Access tab.
The tab is divided into an upper half and a lower half. The upper half lists the access groups that have the current reader included. The lower half of the screen lists all of the relays that have been defined in the Relays screen (for more information refer the section Relays). Generally, for a given reader you highlight a selected access group in the top half of the screen, and you click whichever relays you wish to activate for that access group in the bottom half of the screen. Functionally, you are first setting the mode of a given reader to Elevator. Then, you are using the Elevator Access tab to assign selected relays to selected access groups for that reader only. You have then created a situation where a card holder who belongs to a given access group can access a reader that has relays assigned for that access group, and fire each one of those relays simultaneously upon the presentation of a valid badge. In this way, elevator call buttons can be activated for selected floors. See the section titled Elevator Control at the end of this chapter for more detailed information on Elevator Control. You can elect to assign relays to all access groups listed or none of the access groups listed. First, select an access group on the top half of the screen by clicking it. Then click the checkbox for each relay that you wish to fire when a card with that access group is presented.
73
Readers
Elevator Control
Continental Instruments access control panel can be used to perform the function of Elevator Control. Elevator Control implies the following: The ability of the Continental access control panels to limit access into and out of the elevator cab (call the elevator and open and close the elevator door) The ability of the Continental panels to limit access to a given floor or set of floors (enable or disable selected floor selection buttons). In general, the above limits can be assigned on a per person basis or can permit everyone access based on a time schedule. Note: Currently the Superterm and the Smarterm access controls panel are the only Continental panels equipped with firmware capable of performing elevator control. If you intend to use a Smarterm, you must upgrade the memory to at least 256K. The Superterm comes with 256K standard, enough to handle elevator control. For the examples in this discussion we will use the Superterm panel. Before you can apply Continental hardware to an elevator control situation, it will be helpful to define the problems you wish to solve. In the case of an elevator control application, you must decide on the following: Do you need to limit access to the elevator cab? Do you need to limit access to a given floor or set of floors? Who is to have access to the elevator cab? Who is allowed access to each floor? Once the problem set is defined, Continentals line of sophisticated hardware can be applied to solve each of the elevator problems in turn. Lets create a few examples to illustrate the configuration issues.
74
Readers
Example 1 Summary Full Control In this example we want to limit access to the Elevator cab and we want to limit which floors a given rider on the elevator has access to. Example 2 Summary Limited Floor Access Only In this example, we want to allow anyone into the elevator cab, but we want to limit which floors a given rider on the elevator has access to. For both examples lets say we will have ten floor selection buttons inside the elevator. The lower five floors will be available to anyone who enters the elevator cab, and the top five selection buttons will remain unavailable unless you are specially authorized. In other words, there are a number of unrestricted floors in the building and some restricted floors too. Hardware Considerations The hardware you choose for the application will depend on the problem definition. Lets talk about some generalities first. In the simplest CardAccess installation, our panel may be connected to a switch, which is mounted at a door. When that switch is activated, the panel activates a built in relay, which is connected to an electronic door lock, which unlocks the door. So, Continental panels can be viewed as intelligent switching devices. Activate an input; the panel activates a relay based on rules you set in the CardAccess software. The type of input device used to control a Continental panel is optional. You can use a switch, a keypad or a reader. The panel is flexible enough to accept any or all of those devices as input devices. All of those input devices have but one mission inside the panel hardware when an input device is triggered, a relay or a group of relays will be activated based on rules that you as the CardAccess Administrator set up in the software. Note: Whenever you go to Configuration->Readers and create a new door definition on any panel, some automatic input and relay assignments are
75
Readers
already made for you on the Readers screen Door Control Tab. You need to keep this in mind when you start to assign relays and inputs for your elevator application. Look in the readers screen to see what inputs and relays have already been used before you try to assign them to your elevator. Read and understand the entire Superterm and Smarterm Installation and Service manuals. All the specifications and connection information for the panels and all of their accessories are in those manuals. Lets look at a typical elevator. It has a push button on the outside of the cab so you can summon the elevator. Once you enter the cab, you usually find several floor selection buttons. Thus, to add security to the typical elevator you will perhaps limit who goes into the elevator cab and/or you will limit what selection buttons are made available to a given rider.
Example Elevator Control Implementations
Example 1 Full Control General Considerations Since we want to limit access to the elevator cab in this example, we cant permit a push button on the wall outside of the cab. We will want to replace the button with a card reader or a keypad. This will require that anyone who wishes to gain access to the elevator, present the system with some means to identify them before being permitted to enter the elevator cab. Since the elevator call button is a very simple device that basically shorts two wires together, we can replace that button with a relay that performs the same function. Generally, you will disconnect and remove the elevators floor call button, and bring that call buttons wires back to a relay on the Superterm. When we activate that relay, it will short the call wires (in place of the button). When you turn off that relay it will release the short across the call button wires. The relay
76
Readers
will mimic the operation of the call button. Except now, we have software control over the function of that relay. The elevator call button input will see what we want it to see, and we will gain control over when we want it to happen. Input Considerations Our goal in example 1 is to place an input device on the wall in place of the call button. You will be required to run the appropriate wire type from the reader to wherever the panel is mounted. Regarding input device types, you have three options: Card Reader Keypad Button A card reader or keypad are commonly used. This will force anyone wanting to gain entry to the elevator to identify themselves to the CardAccess system. This is very useful for creating detailed reports of who was using the elevator, how much they used it and when. Note that you could also connect a button to the Superterm in place of a keypad or reader. You may think that this was exactly what we had originally, why do it? It is not really what we had originally. When you insert the Superterm panel in between the call button and the elevator control circuits, it allows you to have more control over the call buttons operation. You can create history files of when the button was used. You can disable the button outside of specified hours of the day. Those functions may not be available from the elevator manufacturer, so you pick up some rudimentary control of granting access to the elevator cab. By far the biggest reason to insert a CardAccess system into an elevator control application is to gain identity control capability. You can prevent unauthorized use of the elevator and you can identify who was in the elevator, at what time of day. So for example 1, since we want to be able to identify the elevator occupants, we will add a reader.
77
Readers
There are several types of card readers available. We will choose a proximity reader available from Continental Instruments (with a 36 bit output, say). Output Considerations The second half of the problem for this example stated that we wanted to control the floor selection buttons inside the elevator cab. Again, a floor selection button is simply a momentary switch. Our goal here will be to splice a relay into one wire (the hot wire, say) of each floor selection switch. We only need to put relays in the circuits of the switches that we want to control. These relays will hold the line open unless the relay is energized by the panel. With the connection between the elevator circuits and the floor selection switches now broken and normally open, the floor call button will be dead to anyone entering the elevator cab. Now we have software control over whether that switch will be active or not. In the CardAccess software, you now have several choices of how you want to approach control of these switched floor selection buttons.
Regarding the Operation of Relays Relays can be energized on a time schedule Relays can be energized based on some input change of status Relays can be made to energize when a particular badge or group of badges are presented at a reader. Relays can be made to energize on certain types of badge or door events (see the section on virtual inputs). Our example 1 project requires that we use a reader at the elevator door to activate the floor selection buttons. Since we are using access cards to gain entry to the elevator cab, lets create a situation where we activate a floor button or a group of buttons based on which cardholder presents their card.
78
Readers
What this means inside the CardAccess software is that we will program a card to activate a number of relays. If you present a valid card, and that card is allowed at that elevator, at that time of day, then we will allow the relays that are connected to (some or all of) the elevator floor selection buttons to be energized (completing the floor button circuits).
Example 2 Limited Floor Access Only General Discussion In this example, we will allow everyone access into the elevator cab. However, we want some buttons on the elevator control panel to be available to everyone, and some buttons to be available to only those riders that we authorize. Example 2 is identical in many respects to example 1, except that we will not add a card reader at the elevator entrance. We will leave the call button in place so anyone may gain entry to the elevator cab. However, we will mount a reader inside the elevator cab so that once a rider is inside the elevator, they can present an access card to that reader. We will then control which buttons become available for that user. We will not discuss the similarities to example 1, just the expected differences. The method of connecting relays, readers and inputs is identical to what you have already read in example 1. Below are the differences: Example 2 Implementation We will leave the elevator call button in place outside the elevator door. We will move the reader to inside the elevator cab. The connection for this reader is the same as example 1. There are some floor selection buttons that will be available to every elevator passenger. We will leave those floor selection buttons connected to the standard elevator controls (they will not be connected to the Superterm) As in the previous example, lets assume that we have 10 total floor selection buttons. Five of those buttons are unrestricted and five are restricted. Further, regarding those five restricted buttons, there will be some riders that
79
Readers
have permission to use restricted buttons. Lets also say that there will be no rider who has access to each of the five floors In both examples, only the 5 restricted buttons need to be connected to the Superterm
Software Setup for Elevator Control Step 1 Program the Panel for Elevator Control To set a panel up to support elevator readers, do the following. Open Panels screen by clicking on Configuration->Panels menu options in CardAccess main screen. Click on New button to create a new panel definition or the Edit button to edit an existing definition. Click the Using Elevator Readers check box (so it is checked).
80
Readers
Fig. 50.107. The Panels Screen Using Elevator Readers checkbox highlighted.
Click on Save button in the toolbar.
Step 2 Program the Reader for Elevator Control Open the Readers screen by clicking on Configuration->Readers menu options in CardAccess main screen. Click on New button to create a new reader definition or the Edit button to edit an existing definition. Click on Elevator radio button in the Reader Type section. Once Elevator is selected, the Elevator Access folder tab will become visible.
81
Readers
Fig. 50.108. Readers screen in General Tab showing Elevator button and Elevator Access tab highlighted.
Step 3 Program the Elevator Access Groups Open the Readers screen by clicking on Configuration->Readers menu options in CardAccess main screen. Assuming that you have accomplished step 2 on at least one reader, use the scrollbar to locate a reader that has a Reader Type set to Elevator. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Click on Elevator Access tab. Readers screen in this tab will look similar to the figure shown below.
82
Readers
Fig. 50.109. The Readers screen in Elevator Access tab
Notice that the Elevator Access tab is divided into an upper and lower section. The upper section is a listing of all of the access groups that have been programmed into the CardAccess software that include the reader that you are currently looking at. The object in this screen is to select one or more access groups that already belong to cardholders, to whom you wish to allow access to elevator call buttons. You select the given access group in the top part of the screen by clicking it, and then click on each relay in the Relay Call Buttons section of the screen. Each relay that has a check mark beside it will fire whenever a badge with the selected access group is presented to the reader you are currently editing.
83
Readers
Fig. 50.110. Maintenance Access Group provided access to all of the elevator call buttons by checking every Relay Call-Button.
If your access group section is blank, you need to create some in the Access Groups screen (if none are created). Refer the section Access Groups to do this. Or, if you see access groups in the Access Groups screen but none appear in the Elevator Access tab of the reader you are editing, you need to include the reader you are currently editing in some of your existing access groups. See the manual section titled Access Groups for more information. For example, in the figure above reader 2-1 is highlighted. If there were no access groups visible in the Access Groups half of the folder tab, we would open the Access Groups screen. We would then add a schedule to reader 2-1 in some existing access group(s), if there were existing access groups that we wanted to use.
84
Readers
Or, we would create a new access group where we would want to make sure that reader 2-1 did have a time schedule programmed. Once reader 2-1 appears in any access group (and has a time schedule assigned), that access group becomes visible in the Elevator Access tab of the Readers screen. The lower section of the Elevator Access tab is a listing of all of the Relays that have been programmed into the CardAccess software. If the lower half of the screen is blank, open the Relays screen, available from the Configuration menu and create some relay definitions. See the section titled Relays for more information.
Map Tab
The Map tab has controls that allow you to add or edit a map for the selected reader. The Map tab is not visible unless the Use Facility Maps Option is enabled in System Settings screen.
Fig. 50.111. The Readers Map tab.
For details on creation of maps, see the manual section titled Maps. The controls in Map folder tab are explained below.
Facility Map for This Device This field displays the name of the map that is attached to the selected reader.
85
Readers
Size Image to fit
86
Readers
View Maps
Remove Map
Remote Control Tab

The Remote Control tab for a given reader has controls that determine which types of alerts will cause the transmission of the CCTV command string mentioned in the CCTV Command Name control. The Remote Control tab will be visible only when the Remote Control checkbox is checked in System Settings screen.
87
Readers
Fig. 50.117. The Readers screen Remote Control tab.
The function of each of the controls on the Remote Control folder tab are explained below. CCTV Activation Conditions The CCTV Activation Conditions check boxes determine which types of alerts will cause the transmission of the CCTV string. You may select any or all of the conditions indicated by clicking each condition (checked means selected). CCTV Command Name This control contains the list of all CCTV commands that were created in the System Settings, CCTV tab (see the manual section titled System Settings for more information). You will select a command to be bound to the given reader. That command will be transmitted from the CCTV serial port each time an event of the type(s) detailed in the CCTV Activation Conditions section is received by the CardAccess software. To select a CCTV Command Name, click to arrow to the right of the CCTV Command Name control and click your selection.
88
Readers
Location/Remarks Tab
The Location/Remarks tab can be used to mention the place of location and remarks (if any) on the selected reader.
89
Readers
Creating a Basic Reader Definition

Following are the steps to create a basic reader record. Open Readers screen by clicking on Configuration->Readers menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. Click on New button in the toolbar.
Click the down arrow of Panel control and select a panel in the drop down list. The current reader will be connected to the panel you select.
Note: If no panel names are seen in the list, it means that panel definitions are not yet created. It is necessary that you define panels before you can proceed with reader definitions. Number the reader in the Reader # control. This can be done in two ways as below.
Fig. 50.121. The Reader # control.
o Click the white space of Reader # field and type in a number or
90
Readers
o Use the up/down arrows to the right of Reader # control and choose a desired number. Note: The software lets you create up to eight readers per panel. The CardAccess will not allow you to create two readers with the same reader number, on the same panel. Click the white space of Name field and enter a descriptive name for the reader.
Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings.
A reader thus created and saved has the following configuration items that are loaded with default values assigned by the system. Reader Type The Reader type is set to Door by default Enabled The Enabled check box is checked Report Bypass The Report Bypass check box is checked Bypass Unlocks The Bypass Unlocks check box is checked No Schedules No schedules are entered in any of the schedule controls. The reader is activated 24 hours per day, every day of the year by default, unless an override schedule is manually selected in one of the schedule controls.
91
Readers
No Keypad The available keypad interface is disabled by default. You must manually activate the keypad interface if desired. Inputs Door Sensor and Bypass inputs are automatically chosen by the system based on the reader number Door Strike Relay The Door Strike Relay is automatically chosen by the system. Options Each control on the Options tab is loaded with default values Message Priorities Event message priorities are automatically entered for each type of reader event message. CCTV CCTV is disabled DVR- DVR is disabled. Maps Maps are not assigned.
92
Readers
Readers Screen Right-Click Options

The following options are available by right-clicking on any record in the Readers screen: Show Events and Show Access List
Fig. 50.124. Right-click options for reader events.
The options are explained below. Show Events Right-Click Option Left-Clicking this option will open the Reader Events screen. This screen will show the list of all events that are generated at the reader selected in the Readers screen. The figure 50.125 below shows all events that were generated at the 4-1 Front Door reader. This event list was obtained by highlighting 4-1Front Door reader record in Readers screen, right-clicking on the highlighted reader record and then left clicking on Show Events option.
93
Readers
Fig. 50.125. The Reader Events screen.
The screen details follow.

Reader
Events Screen Controls
The Reader Events screen provides the following controls. Exclude Badges When Exclude Badges button is selected, the Reader Events screen will show only door type events that were generated at the selected reader. The Badge type events will not be shown.
Fig. 50.126. The Exclude Badges radio button.
The Exclude Badges button will be selected by default every time Reader Events screen is opened. Include Badges If you wish to view badge events in addition to door events at a selected reader, click on Include Badges radio button.
94
Readers
Fig. 50.127. The Include Badges radio button.
Only Badges If you wish to view only badge type events that have occurred at a selected reader, click on Only Badges radio button.
Fig. 50.128. The Only Badges radio button.
Refresh When Refresh checkbox is selected, the Reader Events screen will show the most current events that have occurred at the selected reader.
Fig. 50.129. The Refresh checkbox.
The check box is selected by default. Preview/Print Clicking on Preview/Print button will print the Reader Events screen that lists the events that have occurred at a selected reader.
Fig. 50.130. The Preview/Print button.
95
Readers
Close Clicking on Close button will close the Reader Events screen.
Fig. 50.131. The Close button.
Reader Events Screen Columns

The Reader Events screen consists of the following columns: Event Date The Event Date column shows the date of occurrence of the events that were generated at the selected reader. See figure 50.125. Event Class The Event Class column shows the class that the events of the selected reader belong to. See figure 50.125. Description The description column gives the description of the selected reader. The description includes the reader name and the panel that the reader is connected to. See figure 50.125. Location The Location column shows the name of the panel where the selected reader is located. See figure 50.125.
96
Readers
How Handled The How Handled column shows what action was taken on the events that were generated at the selected reader. See figure 50.125. Responses Responses column will show the date on which the highlighted event was responded (in case the event has a response message attached) and the name of the operator who responded to that event. If the highlighted event has no response message attached, then Responses column of that event will be blank. Note: The navigation bar seen in Reader Events screen works similar to the Readers screen navigation bar. Refer the heading Reader Screen Navigation Bar. Show Access List Right-Click Option Left-Clicking this option will open the Show Usage screen that lists the names of all badge holders who are allowed access at the selected reader and time schedule during which they can access that reader. The figure below shows the names of badge holders who have access to First Floor Employee Entrance reader and the time schedules during which they can access it.
97
Readers
Fig. 50.132. The Show Usage screen.
The screen also indicates the total number of badges having access at the reader and number of badges that are in Disabled state (meaning personnel records whose Enabled check box is deselected in Personnel screen). There are two button controls in the screen as explained below.
98
Readers
Preview/Print Clicking this button will print the Show Usage screen.
Fig. 50.133. The Preview/Print button.
Exit Clicking this button will close the Show Usage screen.
Editing a Reader Definition

Open Readers screen by clicking on Configuration->Readers menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the reader record you wish to edit and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the controls in the folder tabs. Note: o The Reader # field cannot be edited. Reader # once set during reader creation is not subject to change. o It is not possible to associate the selected reader with a different panel. In other words, a reader once associated with a particular panel is permanently attached to that specific panel only. The
99
Readers
system will not allow you to change the panel name in the Panel control. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
Deleting a Reader Definition

Open Readers screen by clicking on Configuration->Readers menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the reader record you wish to delete and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 50.135. Message box displayed before deleting a reader record.
After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen. Note: Deleting a reader record will remove that record from the concerned panel, thereby rendering the reader inoperative.
100
Readers
Readers Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 50.136. Readers screen navigation bar.
The Readers screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked reader records in the screen. In figure 50.136, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first reader record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted reader record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted reader record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted reader record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted reader record.
101
Readers
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last reader record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted reader record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked reader record.
102
Schedules
Schedules
The schedules screen is used for creating time schedules that can be used in other CardAccess screens. The time blocks created do not play any role unless they are connected to software components or to hardware devices. Technically, the schedule becomes valid while the time block is in effect, and becomes invalid outside the time block. A hardware device that has a schedule assigned will be activated while the schedule is in effect, and deactivated when the schedule is no longer in effect. Stated another way, the device will be activated at the Start Time, and deactivated at the End Time, for each time block created in the schedule. A schedule can contain up to ten time blocks as shown in the figure below.
Schedules
. Fig. 41.1. A schedule with multiple time blocks.
In the above figure, the schedule Every Hour, Weekdays contains ten time blocks (only 6 are visible as highlighted). A hardware device that has this schedule assigned would be activated and deactivated ten separate times, on each day of the week. Typically, a schedule will contain just one time block as shown in figure below. A hardware device with this schedule assigned would be activated and deactivated once per day for each day of the week, indicated in the schedule.
Schedules
Fig. 41.2. A schedule with a single time block.
Schedules
Accessing Schedules screen

Schedules screen can be accessed in the following two ways: 1. By clicking on Schedules button in CardAccess tool bar.
Fig. 41.3. The Schedules button in CardAccess tool bar.
2. By clicking on Administration Schedules menu options in CardAccess menu bar.
Fig, 41.4. Clicking Schedules menu item in Administration menu list.
Schedules
Creating a Schedule
1. Open Schedules screen by clicking on Schedules button or Administration Schedules menu option in CardAccess main screen. The schedules screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 41.5. The Schedules screen.
2. Click on New button in Schedules screen toolbar to create a new time schedule. Note: The Schedule No edit box will show the value 1 by default. The value will be incremented for every new schedule you create. 3. In Description field, type in a descriptive name for the schedule being created. 4. If the schedule has to belong to a group, click the down arrow to the right of Group control and select a group name in the drop down list.
5
Schedules
5. The Time Schedule Blocks area in the lower half of the screen is where the time block(s) of the schedule is created. Follow the steps below to create a time block: In the Time Schedule Blocks area, double-click under the Start Day column. Doing this will display a default time block having the value 24/7/365 (that is, MON-HOL, 12:00:00 AM-12:00:00 AM as shown in the figure below), and a down arrow under the Start Day column.
Fig. 41.6. Default time block row and down arrow displayed by double clicking under Start Day column.
Click the down arrow and select a desired day in the list for the Start Day column. Similarly, select a day for the End Day column. Note: A word about Start Days, End Days and Holidays is in order here. The following chart shows the effects of using the most common Start Day and End Day combinations. Start Day Mon Mon Hol Mon Sat End Day Hol Sun Hol Fri Sun Effect Every Day of the Year * (24/7/365) Every Day of the Year Except Holidays * Holidays Only * Weekdays Only Weekends Only
6
Schedules
Mon
Mon
Mondays Only (a one day per week schedule)
Table 1. Start Day & End Day Effects (valid if at least one Holiday is defined)
* There are no predefined holidays in CardAccess software. Holidays can be defined by the user as required. For more information on creating Holidays, see the section titled Holidays. Table 1 above assumes that at least one Holiday is defined. Table 2 below assumes that no Holidays have been defined. Start Day Mon Mon Hol Mon Sat Mon End Day Hol Sun Hol Fri Sun Mon Effect Every Day of the Year * (24/7/365) Every Day of the Year * (24/7/365) No Effect * Weekdays Only Weekends Only Mondays Only (a one day per week schedule)
Table 2. Start Day & End Day Effects (valid if no Holidays are defined)
By default, the Start Time and the End Time columns show the default value of 12:00:00 AM (see figure 41.6). Note: Start Time of 12:00:00 AM to End Time of 12:00:00 AM means, 00:00:00 oclock to 24:00:00 oclock (or 24 hours). If you want your schedule to span 24 hours, then retain the default time values. The default time can be changed as well. The change can be made by clicking on the default time display and typing in the desired time values. Start and End Times can be entered either in standard clock notation or military time. 6. If the schedule is complete, click on Save button in the toolbar to save the schedule. In case the schedule contains more than one time block, apply steps 7 and 8 below.
7
Schedules
Note: Each schedule can contain up to ten time blocks. 7. Click on New Block button (or press the down arrow key on your computer keyboard) to obtain a new time block as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 41.7. New time block displayed by clicking on New Block button.
Note: Each new time block has the default value of 24/7/365 (that is, MON-HOL, 12:00:00 AM-12:00:00 AM as highlighted in the above figure). 8. For the new time block, repeat step 5 above for fixing the Start Day, End Day, Start Time and End Time. Similarly, a maximum of ten time blocks can be created for the schedule by applying steps 7 and 8. Note: If you attempt to create more than ten time blocks, a message box will be displayed as below.
Fig. 41.8. Message box displayed on clicking New Block button after the tenth time block.
Schedules
Click the OK button on the message box and proceed to step 9. 9. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the schedule with multiple time blocks. 10. Click on Close button to close the screen.
Editing a Schedule
Follow the steps below to edit a schedule: Open the Schedules screen by clicking Schedules button or Administration Schedules menu options in CardAccess main screen. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. In the upper half of the screen, click on the schedule record you wish to edit. Make the required changes to the controls seen in the lower half of the screen.
Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen. Note: When you edit a schedule, the behavior of all devices to which the schedule is assigned, will be changed. The operation of Free Access and schedules applied to hardware devices (readers, inputs, relays and links) are other important considerations.
Schedules
Deleting a Schedule
A schedule (with either single/multiple time blocks) can be deleted by following the steps below: Open the Schedules screen by clicking on Schedules button or Administration Schedules menu options in CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, click on the schedule record you wish to delete. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 41.9. Message box displayed on clicking Delete button.
Note: When you delete a schedule, the behavior of all devices to which the schedule is assigned, will be changed. Be sure that, any access group that has the deleted schedule assigned does not deny door access to the cardholders. The operation of Free Access and schedules applied to hardware devices (readers, inputs, relays and links) are other important considerations. Click on Yes button in the message box to delete the selected time schedule. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
10
Schedules
Deleting a Time block

The time block of a schedule (having multiple time blocks) can be deleted by following the steps below: Open the Schedules screen by clicking the Schedules button or Administration Schedules menu options in CardAccess main screen. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. In the upper half of the screen, click on the schedule record whose time block you wish to delete. Upon clicking, the lower half of the screen will display the time blocks contained in the selected schedule. Click on the time block you wish to delete. Click on Delete block button to delete the highlighted time block.
Fig, 41.10. The Delete block button.
Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
11
Schedules
Schedules Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 41.11. The Schedules screen navigation bar.
The Schedules screen navigation bar can be found just above the Schedule No. control. The buttons of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked Schedule records in the screen. In figure 41.11, we have numbered the buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the buttons are as follows: Button 1: Placing the mouse cursor over button 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the very first schedule record in the screen. Button 2: Placing the mouse cursor over button 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted schedule record. Button 3: Placing the mouse cursor over button 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted schedule record. Button 4: Placing the mouse cursor over button 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the schedule record appearing after the currently highlighted schedule record. Button 5: Placing the mouse cursor over button 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted schedule record.
12
Schedules
Button 6: Placing the mouse cursor over button 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the last schedule record in the screen. Button 7: Placing the mouse cursor over button 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this button will bookmark the highlighted schedule record. Button 8: Placing the mouse cursor over button 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this button will highlight the previously bookmarked schedule record.
13
Access Groups
Access Groups
Access Groups refer to access templates that are created to control the badge holders access to specific doors in a building, at specific times. The Access Groups do not play any role unless they are attached to Personnel records. The Access Groups screen is provided for creating these access templates. The templates contain a listing of all card readers in the CardAccess system. The readers can be activated to allow access at the doors by assigning time schedules. The resulting effect is that, when an access group (comprising of a time schedule attached to a Reader) is assigned to a badge holder, he will be allowed access to the doors included in the access group, during the time schedule specified for every Reader in the group. The same access group can be assigned to other badge holders who have similar access permissions at a door. The CardAccess permits a maximum of 1000 access groups (inclusive of Dedicated Access groups).
Opening Access Groups Screen

Access Groups screen can be opened in two ways as below: 1. By clicking the Access button on CardAccess tool bar.
Fig. 42.1. Access button on CardAccess tool bar.
2. By clicking the Access Access Groups menu options in CardAccess menu bar.
Access Groups
Fig. 42.2. The Access Groups menu option in Access menu.
Both the methods will open the Access Groups screen as below.
Fig. 42.3. The Access Groups screen.
The Access Groups screen (see above figure) is divided into two halves. The top half of the screen contains the main toolbar and a view window. The
Access Groups
view window will show a list of all Access Groups created in CardAccess. In figure 42.3, the view window is empty as no access group is created yet. The bottom half of the screen contains two columns- Panels/Readers and Time Schedule. The Panels/Readers column will show the names of all Panels that are created in the Panels screen. To the left of each Panel name you will see a node (+ mark). Expanding a Panel node will show the list of all Readers that belong to the selected Panel, and whose records are created in the Readers screen. The Time Schedule column at this point will be empty.
Types of Access Groups

There are two types of access groups. They are: 1. Standard Access Groups- Standard Access Groups are created in the Access Groups screen. These access Groups can be assigned to as many badge holders as you wish. Creation of standard access Groups will be explained in detail below. 2. Dedicated Access Groups- Dedicated access groups are created in the Personnel screen. A dedicated access group is unique to a particular badge holder, and cannot be assigned to other badge holders. Refer the section Personnel for creating dedicated access groups. Note: The following are the pre-requisites for creating access groups. Readers and Time Schedule must be created in CardAccess software. Refer the sections Readers and Schedules to do this. The CardAccess administrator needs to list out all cardholders in the system, and decide who should have access to what doors, and at what times of the day.
Access Groups
Creating an Access Group

As an example, let us create an access group for the Human Resource department in a company. Let the access of the employees be limited to two Readers- First Floor Cafeteria and First Floor Employee Entrance, during Business Hours of the Weekdays. The following are the steps involved. 1. Open Access Groups screen by clicking on Access button or Access Access Groups menu options in the CardAccess main screen. 2. Click the New button located on Access Groups screen toolbar. Note: The Access Group No control will show the default value 1. The value will be incremented for every new Access Group you create. 3. In the Description field, type in a descriptive name for the access group you are creating. Note: There is no error checking on the name you assign to something. Thus, you could create a time schedule that includes only weekend hours (or no hours what-so-ever), but you could call it Weekdays, Business Hours. Therefore, when you are programming Access Groups and using schedules from the Schedules screen, you are strongly advised to check to be sure that the operation of a given schedule matches the name of the schedule. In the figure below, we have given the name Human Resource for the access group we are creating.
Fig. 42.4. Naming the Access Group.
4. If required, a group can be selected for the access group by clicking the down arrow of Group control, and selecting a desired group name
Access Groups
in the drop down list. The group names listed will be those that are created in the Groups screen. Note: In case no group names are seen in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen, on the Access Groups tab. Refer the section Groups to do this. 5. When the access group being created is assigned to badge records, there can be changes to the access permissions of the concerned badge holders. Hence, it is necessary to get the changed information to every hardware access control panel. By default, the system is set up to automatically download changed data to the panels. But, in case you are dealing with a large system, changes to thousands of badges can cause a massive download that may disable the system for a period of time. To prevent this from happening, you can check the Do Not Update Badges at Panels check box. 6. Decide on the Reader you wish to include in the current Access Group, and expand the corresponding Panel node. On expanding the Time Schedule column corresponding to that Reader will show the default selection Not Used. Note: If no Reader is seen on expanding the Panel node, you need to create Reader records newly in the Readers screen. Refer the section Readers to do this. In the figure below, we have located the Readers First Floor Cafeteria and First Floor Employee Entrance under Panel 1 node.
Access Groups
Fig. 42.5. Locating Readers that are to be included in the Access Group.
Observe that, at this point, the rows corresponding to the Readers you have located are showing the default selection Not Used. 7. Select a desired time schedule for the located Reader. This can be done as below. o Click the Time Schedule column corresponding to the located reader. Doing this will display a down arrow in the Time Schedule column. o Click the down arrow to display the list of Time schedules (previously created) in the CardAccess. Note: If no time schedules are seen in the list, you need to create them afresh. Refer the section Schedules to do this. o Select the desired time schedule and click on it.
Similarly, select time schedules for the other Readers you wish to include in the access group. In the figure below, we have selected the time schedule Weekdays, Business Hours for the readers we located earlier.
Access Groups
Fig. 42.6. Selecting Time Schedules for the located readers.
8. In case you wish to include Readers belonging to other Panels also, repeat steps 6 and 7 for the desired Panels under the Panels/Readers column. 9. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save these settings. 10. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen. An Access Group is thus created. When this Access Group is assigned to Personnel records, the concerned Personnel will be allowed access at the included Readers, during the specified Time Schedules. In our example, all Personnel who are assigned Human Resource Access Group will be allowed access at First Floor Cafeteria and First Floor Employee Entrance, during Business Hours of Weekdays. They will be denied access at every other Reader that does not have a time schedule assigned in the Access Groups screen (that is, all those readers having the default selection Not Used).
Access Groups
Personnel Screen Access Group Controls

Access groups created in the Access Groups screen become functional only when they are assigned to badge holder record(s). The figure below shows the Access Groups tab of Personnel screen that contains the Access Group controls.
Fig. 42.8. Personnel screen Access Group controls.
The Access Group controls in figure 42.8 are briefly explained below. Access Group 1-6 controls are used to select desired access groups (previously created in the Access Groups screen) for the badge holder records in Personnel screen. For details on these controls, refer the section Personnel. The Expiration Date control can be used if you wish to fix a date for removing the access group assigned to a badge holder. When the date is
8
Access Groups
reached, the badge holder can no longer access the doors that were included in the access group. For more details, refer the section Personnel. The Dedicated Access check box can be used to create a dedicated access group for the selected badge holder, in the Personnel screen. A dedicated access group is unique to the particular badge holder, and cannot be assigned to anybody else. Refer the section Personnel for creating dedicated access groups.
Access Groups
Get Template Button

While in New/Edit mode, the Access Groups screen displays a button named as Get Template.
Fig. 42.9. The Get Template button visible on clicking New/Edit button on the toolbar.
This button allows you to use the settings of a different access group (created previously), as the basis for creating/editing the access group in question. Templates serve as a time saving feature as you can conveniently load the settings of an existing access group, without having to make those settings all over again. Below we explain how to use the Get Template button to create a new access group.
10
Access Groups
Using Get Template Button

Below we will create a new access group called Engineering Staff. The new access group will allow access to the First Floor Employee Entrance Reader, the Engineering Office Reader and the First Floor Cafeteria Reader, during Business Hours of Weekdays. We will use Human Resource access group as the template, as it already has First Floor Employee Entrance and First Floor Cafeteria Readers included in the group. Following are the steps involved. Open Access Groups screen by clicking on Access button or Access Access Groups menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Click the New button on the toolbar. In the Description field, type in a descriptive name for the access group. In the figure below, we have entered the name Engineering Staff for the new access group.
Fig. 42.10. Naming an access group.
If required, a group can be selected for the access group by clicking the down arrow of Group control, and selecting a desired group name in the drop down list. The group names listed will be those that are created in the Groups screen. Note: In case no group names are seen in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen, on the Access Groups tab. Refer the section Groups to do this. When the access group being created is assigned to badge records, there can be changes to the access permissions of the concerned badge holders. Hence, it is necessary to get the changed information to every hardware
11
Access Groups
access control panel. By default, the system is set up to automatically download changed data to the panels. But, in case you are dealing with a large system, changes to thousands of badges can cause a massive download that may disable the system for a period of time. To prevent this from happening, you can check the Do Not Update Badges at Panels check box. At this point, none of the Readers listed under the Panels/Readers column will be assigned Time Schedules. You may check this by expanding the nodes (+ marks) seen to the left of the Panel names listed under the Panels/Readers column. The Time Schedule column against every Reader name will show you the default selection Not Used.
All nodes expanded.
Checking this way will help you understand the implications of selecting an access group template for the current access group. Click the Get Template button. On clicking, the Select Access Group Template dialog will be displayed.
12
Access Groups
The Select Access Group Template dialog.
In the Select Access Group Template dialog, click the down arrow of the control to view the list of available access groups in the CardAccess. Note: o The drop down list will show only names of the standard access groups that are created in the Access Groups screen. This excludes Dedicated access groups (that are created in Personnel screen). o The drop down list will show access groups names only if they are created earlier. If no access group names are seen in the list, they must be created afresh in the Access Groups screen. To do this, refer the heading Creating an Access Group located earlier in this document. In the drop down list, locate the access group name whose settings you wish to load onto the new access group, and click on it.
Selecting an Access Group that will act as a template for the current access group.
On clicking, the time schedule settings of the template will be loaded to the Readers of the current access group. In the figure below, observe the time schedule Weekdays, Business Hours loaded against the Readers First Floor Cafeteria and First Floor Employee Entrance after selecting Human Resource access group.
13
Access Groups
Fig. 42.13. Time Schedule settings after template selection.
You may now make changes to these settings, by making fresh Time Schedule assignments to the Readers of your choice. Below we are selecting a time schedule for Engineering Office reader.
Fig. 42.14. Fresh Time Schedule assignment to Reader(s) of choice.
Click the Save button on the toolbar to save these settings. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen. Thus, using a pre-existing Access Group, it is possible to create a new access group, by making use of the Get Template button.
14
Access Groups
Editing an Access Group

Follow the steps below if you wish to edit an access group. Open Access Groups screen by clicking on Access button or Access Access Groups menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, click the access group record you wish to edit. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. Make the required changes to the controls seen in the lower half of the screen. Note: An edited access group can change the access permissions of the badge holders. Hence, it is necessary to get the changed information to every hardware access control panel. By default, the system is set up to automatically download changed data to the panels. But, in case you are dealing with a large system, changes to thousands of badges can cause a massive download that may disable the system for a period of time. To prevent this from happening, you can check the Do Not Update Badges at Panels check box. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save the changes. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen.
15
Access Groups
Deleting an Access Group

Open Access Groups screen by clicking on Access button or Access Access Groups menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, click the access group record you wish to delete. Click the Delete button on the toolbar. On clicking, the following message box will be displayed to inform that, deletion of the access group can remove the other related data.
Fig. 42.16. Message box displayed before deleting an access group.
After reading the message in the box, click the Yes button to delete the selected access group. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen.
16
Access Groups
Access Groups Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 42.17. The Access Groups screen navigation bar.
The Access Groups screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen (just above the Access Group No control). The buttons of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked records in the Access Groups screen. In figure 42.17, we have numbered the buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the buttons are as follows: Button 1: Placing the mouse cursor over button 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the very first access group record in the screen. Button 2: Placing the mouse cursor over button 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted access group record. Button 3: Placing the mouse cursor over button 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted access group record. Button 4: Placing the mouse cursor over button 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted access group record. Button 5: Placing the mouse cursor over button 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted access group record.
17
Access Groups
Button 6: Placing the mouse cursor over button 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this button will highlight the last record of Access Groups screen. Button 7: Placing the mouse cursor over button 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this button will bookmark the highlighted access group record. Button 8: Placing the mouse cursor over button 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this button will highlight the previously bookmarked access group record.
18
Personnel
Personnel
The Personnel screen is used for creating badge holder records. Using this screen, it is possible to associate a badge number with a name, set access rules, and attach special attributes to the badge.
Accessing Personnel Screen

The Personnel screen can be opened in two ways as below: 1. By clicking the Personnel button on the CardAccess main toolbar.
Fig. 32.1. The Personnel button on CardAccess toolbar.
2. By clicking the Access
Personnel menu options using the
CardAccess menu bar.
Fig. 32.2. Clicking the Personnel menu option in the Access menu list.
Both the methods will open the Personnel screen in General tab as shown below.
Personnel
Fig. 32.3. Personnel screen in General tab.
The Personnel screen consists of four major sections. They are as follows: A. The Main Toolbar: The toolbar seen at the top of the screen (refer figure 32.3) provides buttons for functions such as Adding, Deleting, Editing, Searching of badge records etc. B. The View Window: The view window seen in the top half of the screen is reserved for displaying the Personnel records that are created in the Personnel screen. Records can be displayed in two ways as below.
Personnel
a. By clicking the Show All Badges button- Doing this will display all records that are created in the Personnel screen. OR b. By using a search criterion- Search criteria offer you the privilege of viewing only records of your interest (for details, refer the section Searching for Personnel Records below).
For a highlighted badge record, the columns of the view window will display the data you enter in the respective controls provided in the bottom half of the screen. If you wish to view more records in the view window, resize the Personnel screen by dragging the bottom right corner of the screen. To view the details of a specific record, use the scrollbar to the right of the View window to scroll to the desired record, and then click on the record. The settings of the selected record will then be displayed in the bottom half of the screen. C. The Settings Section: The settings section seen in the bottom half of Personnel screen has a number of controls (in the different folder tabs) for entering the badge holder information, as well as setting the operating rules for a badge holder. The settings made in the controls affect the operation of the devices that are configured in the other CardAccess screens. Each of the controls will be discussed under their respective folder tabs. D. The Status Bar: The status bar seen at the bottom of the screen provides four details as below.
Personnel
a. Filter: Against the word Filter, you will see the search criterion that is currently in effect, in the Personnel screen. For details, refer the section Searching for Personnel Records below. b. Reset Filter: Suppose you have used a search criterion to filter out the desired personnel records, and wish to cancel the current filter action, you may click the Reset Filter button. Doing this will take the Personnel screen back to its default state (figure 32.3), where no records will be seen. c. Last Edit: Against the words Last Edit, you will see the date and time at which the currently highlighted badge record was last changed. d. Total Badges: Against the words Total Badges, you will see the total count of badge records that match the search criterion that is currently in effect. This count will equal the number of badge records you see on the view window of the screen.
Personnel Records Sort Order

By default, the records in Personnel screen will be sorted according to Badge No column. This column allows the personnel records to be sorted according to badge numbers. However, any column can be used for sorting. The sort criterion can be changed by clicking on the column name desired to be used for sorting. Column used for sorting will be highlighted in yellow color. A column can be sorted in ascending/descending orders alternately by clicking the column name. Upward/downward arrows seen in the yellow colored column represent ascending/descending sort orders respectively.
Personnel
General Tab
The General tab of Personnel screen is where the general information of a cardholder is entered. The Personnel screen will be displayed in General tab by default.
Fig. 32.4. Personnel screen General tab.
The controls of General tab are explained in the following section.
Personnel
General Tab Controls

Badge Number
This field is provided for entering the badge number assigned to a particular badge. The Badge Number entry is a must for creating a basic working badge.
Fig. 32.5. The Badge Number field.
The field accepts numeric values only. Leading zeros if entered are ignored. The following message box will be displayed when you type in 0 as the first digit in the field.
Fig. 32.6. Message box displayed when 0 is entered as the first digit in Badge Number field.
The maximum number of digits that the field accepts depends on the value set for the Max Badge Digits at Panel control in the System Settings screen. A maximum of 5, 7, 9 or 19 digits can be set for this control in System Settings. Facility The field accepts numbers from 0 10. The number can be entered by o Typing the number in the field or o Using the arrow buttons to the right of the control to choose the number.
Personnel
You must set this number to the position of the facility code in the facility codes screen. See the section of the manual called Facility Codes for more information. When facility is set to zero in a badge holder record, facility codes are ignored for that badge holder (see Facility Codes for more on what that means).
Fig. 32.7. The Facility field.
Group This field is used for selecting a group for database partitioning. The default selection in this field will be None.
Fig. 32.8. The Group field.
To select a group, follow the steps below: Click on Edit button in Personnel screen toolbar. Click the down arrow of Group control. Select a group from the drop down list by clicking on it. First Name This field is provided for entering the first name of the badge holder. The field accepts any combination of letters and numbers. A maximum of 25 characters can be entered in this field.
Fig. 32.9. The First Name field.
Personnel
Last Name This field is provided for entering the last name of the badge holder. The field accepts any combination of letters and numbers. A maximum of 25 characters can be entered in this field.
Fig. 32.10. The Last Name field.
Middle Name This field is provided for entering the middle name of the badge holder. The field accepts any combination of letters and numbers. A maximum of 30 characters can be entered in this field.
Fig. 32.11. The Middle Name field.
Embossed ID Some brands of access cards (like Weigand swipe) do not have card numbers printed on the cards. Instead, they have a serial number embossed (printed) on the card. The manufacturer includes a document with a cross-reference chart that matches serial numbers to card numbers. That serial number is the only identifier on this type of card. The Embossed ID field is a notation field where the user can use this serial number for reference purposes (in case the card is lost). The Embossed ID field is not actively used by the system, it is for notation only.
Personnel
Fig. 32.12. The Embossed ID field.
Re-Issue Every badge has an associated Badge Number and a Re-Issue number. The Re-Issue number plays an important role to identify the authorized badge holder in case of badge loss. When a badge is lost, the badge holder will be issued a new badge with the same badge number. But, since the old and new badges now have the same badge number, it becomes necessary that the two badges are differentiated from each other. This is when the Re-Issue number comes into picture. To distinguish between the two badges, the Re-Issue number of the lost badge will be incremented by 1, and assigned to the new badge. When reissue numbers are enabled in a badge format (see Badge Formats for more information), the CardAccess panels will examine the badge and the re-issue numbers to determine if the card holder will be allowed access. The reissue number must match the number in the Re-issue field of the cardholders Personnel record. If the numbers dont match a Badge Violate Re-Issue error event message is generated and access is denied. In this way, numerous badges can be issued with the same badge number, but only the most current issue of the badge will gain valid access at any door. The Re-Issue number can be set by Typing in a value in the range 1-99 in Re-Issue field or , Using the arrow buttons on the right side of the Re-Issue control to choose the required number.
Fig. 32.13. The Re-Issue field.
Personnel
Pin Code The pin code is a 1-4 digit (personal) number used in applications where the badge holders are required to present two forms of identification to gain entry at a door. When the system is set up to require Card & Code access at a door, an access card must be presented to a reader and a security code must be entered into a keypad before the door will unlock. Pin codes can be common/unique for all users. Refer the section Readers for information on setting up Card & Code operation at a reader
Fig. 32.14. The Pin Code field.
Access Time Access Time is the number of seconds that a door is held unlocked (that is, open state) after a successful badge read. The Access Time control in the Personnel record can be set to override door open times for certain users, without affecting the door open times for the general population. Door open times are set in the Readers screen. Access Time values set in a badge holders record preempt settings in the Readers screen, for every door that the Badge Holder has access to.
Fig. 32.15. The Access Time field.
The Access Time can be set by Typing the desired value in Access Time field or Choosing a desired value using the arrow buttons to the right of Access Time control.
10
Personnel
Badge Use Limit The Badge Use Limit control is used to set the maximum number of times a badge can be used, before it is automatically disabled by the system. Once a badge is disabled, it cannot be used again (system wide) until the badge holder record is manually re-enabled by the system administrator. The Badge Use Limit can be set by Typing a number from 1-999 in the Badge Use Limit field or Choosing a desired number using the arrow buttons to the right of Badge Use Limit control.
Fig. 32.16. The Badge Use Limit field.
Activation Date Activation date is a means of automatically enabling a badge based on date. When a badge record is created with Activation date set to some date in the future, the system will automatically enable the badge on the indicated date. Once enabled, the system will automatically download the badge record to every panel that has doors, that the cardholder is allowed access. Activation happens at 00:00:00 oclock (midnight + n seconds, at the start of the day) of the date indicated in Activation Date field. The Activation Date can be set in the following two ways: Typing a date of choice in the Activation Date field. The date entered must be in MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY date format.
Fig. 32.17. The Activation Date field.
11
Personnel
By using the calendar to choose a desired date. This can be done by following the steps below: o Click on the calendar button (marked as 15) to the right of Activation Date field. Upon clicking, a calendar window of the current month and year will be opened, with the current date in highlight.
Fig. 32.18. Calendar window displayed by clicking on calendar button.
Note: Double left/right arrows and single left/right arrows seen at the top of the screen can be used to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of a year, for desired date selection. o Click on a desired date in the calendar.
Expiration Date Expiration date is a means of automatically disabling a badge based on date. Disabled badges are not deleted from the database; they are deactivated and can be reactivated at any time later. Note: The date entry must be in MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY date format. Once a badge record has been deactivated, the system will automatically remove that badge record from every panel where it is stored. Deactivation
12
Personnel
happens at 24:00:00 oclock (midnight, at the end of the day) of the date indicated in Expiration Date field. The Expiration Date can be set in the following two ways: Typing a date of choice in the Expiration Date field. The date entered must be in MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY date format.
Fig. 32.19. The Expiration Date field.
By using the calendar to choose a desired date. This can be done by following the steps below: o Click on the calendar button (marked as 15) to the right of Expiration Date field. Upon clicking, a calendar window of the current month and year will be opened with the current date in highlight.
Note: Double left/right arrows and single left/right arrows at the top of the screen can be used to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of a year, to select a desired date. o Click on a desired date in the calendar.
13
Personnel
Note: When a badge is disabled by means of an Expiration Date, the system will remove the check mark from Enabled check box, in the concerned Personnel record.
Enabled This control enables or disables a badge. If checked, the badge is enabled. When the badge is enabled, the cardholders badge record is automatically sent to all panels, where the cardholder will be allowed access. When the badge is disabled, the record is automatically removed from every panel, where the cardholder has access. To enable or disable the badge, click on Enabled check box.
Tracked The tracked function is usually used to track a badge holders movements throughout a building. When the Tracked check box is enabled (checked) for a particular badge record, a different priority level is assigned to the badge. Priority levels for badge card reads are set in the Readers screen (for more information, refer the section Readers). In figure 32.23, observe that the default priority for a Tracked Badge is higher than the default priority for a valid badge. This means that, even though a Tracked badge read is a valid badge read, it will be treated differently. There are two specific differences in the handling of a tracked badge versus a standard valid badge. They are: A Tracked badge read has a special event message called Badge Valid Tracked and It is usually displayed in the Alerts portion (not Events) of CardAccess screen so that, they can be noticed by security personnel easily.
14
Personnel
Click the Tracked checkbox to enable or disable the Tracked function for a given badge holder.
Fig. 32.22. The Tracked check box.
Fig. 32.23. Readers screen Priorities tab showing default priority values for Tracked Badge and Valid Access badge reads..
Escorted When Escorted box is checked for a badge, two badge reads are required at the reader for the Escorted cardholder to gain access. The second badge read must be from a non-Escorted type card. However, an Escorted card will require a second badge read only at those readers that are set up as Escort readers (for more information on setting up an Escort reader, refer the section Readers). At a non-escort reader, a badge set to Escorted is treated in the same way as any other non-Escorted badge. To enable escorted, click the Escorted check box.
Fig. 32.24. The Escorted check box.
15
Personnel
Stay on Panel This control is active only when an access panel is in Interactive Mode (to learn more about interactive mode, refer the section Panels). When Interactive Mode is enabled at a panel, all badge records that have the Stay on Panel function enabled, will be permanently stored in the panel memory, as much as space allows. Those badge records that have not been used recently, and do not have the Stay on Panel function enabled, can be deleted from panel memory, if memory space becomes an issue. When Interactive Mode is turned on at a panel, set the Stay on Panel function active for all badges that are expected regularly at readers on that panel, provided the memory space allows.
Fig. 32.25. The Stay on Panel check box.
Initial Download This control is active only when an access panel is in the Interactive Mode (to learn more about interactive mode refer the section Panels). When Interactive Mode is enabled at the panel, all badge records that have the Initial Download function enabled, will be downloaded to the panel memory, on every full panel or badge download. When Initial Download is not enabled, each badge will only be downloaded to the panel as they are presented to readers on that panel.
Fig. 32.26. The Initial Download check box.
Vehicle Tag The Vehicle Tag check box will be visible only when Vehicle Tracking is enabled in System Settings screen. This box when checked changes the type of badge holder record from cardholder to Vehicle Tag. Technically, this means that, the badge belongs to an asset and not a person. Vehicle tags are most commonly created to track company automobiles. Setting up the
16
Personnel
vehicle tagging function is explained in more detail in the Readers section. Click the check box to enable vehicle tagging.
Fig. 32.27. The Vehicle Tag check box.
Last Valid Access The Last Valid Access area automatically displays the location and date of the latest badge read, for the currently highlighted badge record.
Fig. 32.28. The Last Valid Access area.
17
Personnel
Access Groups Tab

The Access Groups tab allows you to assign Access Group(s) to the selected badge holder. Access groups are the one that determine which doors of the building a badge holder can access, and at what times of the day. By default, the Access Groups tab will have a sub-tab with the same nameAccess Groups. You will see the second sub tab only when the Dedicated Access feature is enabled for the selected badge holder. Dedicated Access is explained separately under the heading Dedicated Access. The Access Groups sub-tab will show only two standard access group controls by default.
Fig. 32.29. The default Access Groups tab in Personnel screen.
But, it is possible to have a maximum of six access groups (inclusive of a dedicated access group, if you choose to create) for every badge holder in the CardAccess. In case you wish make provision for more access groups than the default, you need to make a setting in the Access Groups per Badge control of System Settings screen.
18
Personnel
Fig. 32.30. The Access Groups per Badge control on System Settings screen Badges tab.
Please refer the section System Settings to learn the steps to be followed for providing more Access Groups to CardAccess badge holders. In accordance with the number you choose in the Access Groups per Badge control, the number of Access Group controls on Personnel screen Access Groups tab will also change. Note: In case you have kept the Personnel screen open, you need to close the screen and reopen it for the change to take effect. In the figure below, you see six access group controls in Personnel screen as we have chosen the number six (maximum) in the System Settings Access Groups per Badge control.
19
Personnel
Fig. 32.32. Change in number of access group controls on Personnel screen, depending on the setting made in System Settings screen (figure 32.30).
We shall now move on to create a basic working badge.
20
Personnel
Creating a Basic Working Badge

A badge will be functional only when the concerned badge record has a Badge Number, a Name and at least one access group. These details must be specified in their respective fields, in the Personnel screen. The other Personnel screen controls will be assigned default values when you click the New button to create the badge record. Below, we look at the steps involved in creating a basic working badge. Note: Before entering the data in the Personnel screen, you must have the badge whose record is going to be created in the screen. Open Personnel screen by clicking on Personnel button or Access Personnel menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab by default. Click the New button on Personnel screen tool bar. In Badge Number field, enter the badge number of the given badge. (see figure 32.33 below). Note: The maximum number of digits that the Badge Numbers can have is fixed in the System Settings screen. In System Settings screen, the badge numbers are allowed a maximum of 5, 7, 9 or 19 digits. Specify the name of the badge holder using the First Name, Last Name and the Middle Name fields. A maximum of 25 characters are allowed in each of these fields.
21
Personnel
Fig. 32.33. Inputs needed in General tab to create a basic working badge.
Click on Access Groups tab. Click the down arrows to the right of the desired Access group controls and select the access groups of choice in the lists. Make sure to select a different access group for each control as the system does not allow duplicate access group selections.
Fig. 32.34. Choosing Access Groups on the Access Groups tab to create a basic working badge.
22
Personnel
Note: o The access group controls 1-n (where n can be any number from 1-6 as fixed in the System Settings screen Access Groups per Badge control. See figure 32.30) can be chosen in any order for assignment. The system does not care about the order in which the controls are assigned access groups. o If no Access Groups are seen in the drop down lists, you need to create some in the Access Groups screen. Refer the section Access Groups to do this. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save these settings. Once the badge record is saved, the badge created will be automatically downloaded to the Panels that have the Readers in the assigned Access Groups.
23
Personnel
Searching for Personnel Records

When you click on Access Personnel menu options (or click the Personnel button on the CardAccess main toolbar), the Personnel screen will open in the General tab, but will not show any badge records. This happens whether/not records are present in the screen.
Fig. 32.35. The default Personnel screen not showing any badge records.
Suppose you have several badge records created in the screen and wish to view some or all of them, you can do so by using one of the methods mentioned below.
24
Personnel
Method 1: By employing the Show All Badges button to view all Personnel records. Clicking the Show All Badges button will display all records that exist in the Personnel screen.
Fig. 32.36. The Show All Badges button to view all personnel records.
You can view the settings of a desired record by clicking on that record in the view window, and observing the settings in the lower half of the screen. Method 2: By using a Search Criterion Sometimes, you may be interested in viewing only specific Personnel record(s). Here, it becomes needless to employ the Show All Badges that will return all records on the screen. The better way to go in this situation is to search for the records you are interested in, by using search criteria. A large number of edit controls on the Personnel screen serve as search criteria. The Personnel screen has five categories of edit controls. They are: Text fields, combo boxes, spin controls, date controls and checkboxes. Below, we will discuss how to use each of these categories for searching personnel records. Text Fields, Spin Controls, Date Controls All text fields (except the PIN Code field on General tab and the Remarks field on Personal tab), spin controls and date controls serve as search criteria. These controls change their color from white light blue when you click the white space of the controls. This color change is an indication that the selected control can be employed for searching records. Along with the light blue color, the selected control will also provide the Escape to Cancel option. Below, we have shown what happens when you click the white space of the Badge Number text field
25
Personnel
Fig. 32.37. Clicking the Badge Number field has changed the field color to light blue, besides providing the Escape to cancel option.
Note: The Escape to Cancel option is provided in case you change your mind and no longer want to use the selected control for record searching. In this case, you may click the Esc key on your computer keyboard to cancel the current search action. On clicking the Esc key, the selected control will revert back to its default white color. The Escape to Cancel option for all other controls will serve the same purpose of canceling the search action. On the other hand, if you wish to continue searching by the selected control (which is currently seen in light blue color, say by Badge Number field as in our example figure 32.37), you just have to input the correct data into the selected control, and press the Enter key on your keyboard.
Fig. 32.38. Entering a search criterion.
Note: Make sure the data you enter in the selected control matches the data actually present in the badge record you are searching for. Suppose you wish to search the Personnel record having badge number 59043, you must enter this number accurately into the field. On pressing the Enter key, the system will search for the requested record(s) by using the search criterion provided, and display the matching record(s) on the view window of the screen. You can now click on any desired record in the view window, and view its settings in the lower half of the screen.
26
Personnel
Fig. 32.39. Search result in view window.
The status bar seen at the bottom of the screen will indicate the search criterion currently employed, along with the total number of badges that satisfy that criterion.
Fig. 32.40. Personnel screen status bar indicating the current search criterion used, along with the total number of badge(s) that satisfy the criterion.
If you wish to clear the Personnel screen from the current search results, you may click on Reset Filter button seen on the status bar. This will revert the Personnel screen back to its default condition (see figure 32.35 above), wherein no records will be seen.
Fig. 32.41. Reset Filter button on status bar for refreshing the Personnel screen.
27
Personnel
Combo Boxes All combo boxes (except the Gender combo box on Personal tab) serve as search criteria. The combo boxes change their color from white light blue when you click the white space of the box. This color change is an indication that the selected control can be employed for searching personnel records. Along with the light blue color, you will also see the list of options that are associated with the selected combo box. Below we have shown what happens when you click the white space of Access Group 1 control, on the Access Groups tab.
Fig. 32.42. Access Group 1 control turned into blue color, along with the list of access groups, on clicking the white space of Access Group 1 control.
As far as the Access Group 1-6 controls are concerned, the Access Groups list you will see on clicking the controls will only include standard access groups (figure 32.42) that are created in the Access Groups screen. Dedicated Access Group names will be excluded from the list. The options being displayed, you are now ready to search for Personnel records by clicking a desired option in the list. Note: Clicking the Esc to cancel option will cancel the search action, returning the selected control back to its default white color. Below we are selecting Employee Access (a standard access group) as the search criterion.
28
Personnel
Fig. 32.43. Clicking an option to be used as the search criterion.
On clicking, the system will search for the requested record(s) by using the search criterion specified, and display the matching record(s) on the view window of the screen. In our example, we have three records that have Employee Access assigned to Access Group 1 control. Hence the system displays these three records on the view window. The settings of the record highlighted in the view window can be seen in the lower half of the screen.
Fig. 32.44. Search results in view window.
The status bar seen at the bottom of the screen will indicate the current search criterion used, along with the total number of badges that satisfy the selected criterion.
29
Personnel
Fig. 32.45. Personnel screen status bar indicating the current search criterion used, along with the total number of badges that satisfy the criterion.
If you wish to clear the Personnel screen from the current search results, you may click on Reset Filter button seen on the status bar. This will revert the Personnel screen back to its default condition (see figure 32.35 above), wherein no records will be seen.
Checkboxes When the Personnel screen is opened, all the checkboxes will be grayed out by default.
Fig. 32.47. Checkboxes of Personnel screen General tab grayed out by default.
When you click a grayed out checkbox, you will see a drop down list consisting of three options- Esc to cancel, NO and YES options. These options will be seen on a light blue background. As an example, we clicked the Enabled checkbox and obtained the options shown in the figure below.
30
Personnel
Fig. 32.48. Options obtained on clicking a grayed out checkbox on Personnel screen.
With the options being displayed, you are now ready to search for Personnel records by using one of the options in the list. Note: Clicking the Esc to cancel option will cancel the current search action, thereby returning the selected checkbox to its default state (grayed out). In case you click the YES option in the list, the system will search for all Personnel records that were created with the selected checkbox enabled (checked). In our example, clicking YES for Enabled checkbox, has resulted in the list of all records that were created with the Enabled checkbox selected (checked). See figure below. The settings of the record highlighted in the view window can be seen in the lower half of the screen.
Fig. 32.49. Search results in view window.
31
Personnel
In case you click the NO option, the system will search for all Personnel records that were created with the selected checkbox unchecked. The status bar seen at the bottom of the screen will indicate the current search criterion used, along with the total number of badges that satisfy the selected criterion.
Fig. 32.50. Personnel screen status bar indicating the current search criterion used, along with the total number of badges that satisfy the criterion.
Note: The YES option for a checkbox is allotted the logical value 1, and the NO option is allotted the value 0. Since we chose the option YES for Enabled checkbox, we see the search criterion as Enabled=1 in the above figure. If you wish to clear the Personnel screen from the current search results, you may click on Reset Filter button seen on the status bar. This will revert the Personnel screen back to its default condition (see figure 32.35 above), where you will see no records.
Editing a Personnel Record

Follow the steps below if you wish to edit a Personnel record. Open Personnel screen by clicking on Personnel button or Access Personnel menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab, and will not show any badge records. Select the Personnel record you wish to edit. This can be done in two ways as below.
32
Personnel
a. By clicking the Show All Badges button, and choosing the desired record in the view window or, b. Searching for the required record by using a search criterion (refer the heading Searching for Personnel Records for details). Click the Edit button on the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the controls in the different folder tabs, seen in the bottom half of the screen. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save the changes. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen.
Deleting a Personnel Record

Follow the steps below if you wish to delete a Personnel record. Open Personnel screen by clicking on Personnel button or Access Personnel menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab, and will not show any badge records. Select the Personnel record you wish to delete. This can be done in two ways as below. a. By clicking the Show All Badges button, and choosing the desired record in the view window or, b. Searching for the required record by using a search criterion (refer the heading Searching for Personnel Records for details). Click the Delete button on the toolbar. On clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
33
Personnel
Fig. 32.52. Message box displayed before deleting a badge record.
Note: The delete action cannot be reversed. Make sure you have chosen the correct record for deleting. After confirmation, click the Yes button in the message box to delete the selected record. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen. Access Group 1-6 Expiration Date The Access Group Expiration Date controls allow you to set a (future) date when the Access Group(s) will be removed from a cardholder (that is, the Access Group control(s) for the cardholder record will revert back to the default selection No Access ). This event takes place at 24:00:00 oclock (midnight at the end of the day) of the indicated date. Note: When an access group is taken away from a cardholder because the expiration date has been reached, the change is automatically downloaded to the panels where the cardholder had access. Unlike the badge Expiration Date which disables the card, removing an access group does not necessarily mean that the cardholder will no longer have access to a building. For example, if we provide a card holder with Access Groups 1 & 2 say, and we set an expiration date on Access Group 2 only, Access Group 2 will be removed from the card holder on the expiration date, but that card holder will still have access group 1. The Expiration Date for an Access Group control can be set in the following ways:
34
Personnel
Typing a date of choice in the Expiration Date field. The date entered must be in MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY date format.
Fig. 32.53. Access Group 1-6 Expiration Date fields.
By using the calendar to choose a desired date. This can be done by following the steps below: o Click on the calendar button (marked as 15) to the right of an Expiration Date field. Upon clicking, a calendar window of the current month and year will open up, with the current date in highlight.
Fig. 32.54. Calendar window displayed by clicking on number button.
35
Personnel
Note: Double left/right arrows and single left/right arrows can be used to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of a year, to select a desired date. o Click on a desired date in the calendar.
Dedicated Access The Access Groups tab has a checkbox named Dedicated Access. The purpose of this checkbox is to turn the dedicated access feature On/Off, for a selected badge holder.
Fig. 32.55. The Dedicated Access check box in Personnel screen Access Groups tab.
A Dedicated Access group is a special access group in that, it solely belongs to the selected badge holder only, and cannot be assigned to anybody else. This differs from the standard access groups that can be assigned to as many badge holders as you wish. More information on standard access groups can be sought in the section Access Groups.
Below, we explain how to create a dedicated access group.
36
Personnel
Creating a Dedicated Access Group

As an example, let us create a dedicated access group that solely belongs to the president of a company. The following are the steps involved. 1. Open Personnel screen by clicking on Personnel button or Access Personnel menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in the General tab, and will show no badge records in the view window.
Fig. 32.56. Personnel screen in General tab.
2. The foremost action to take in Personnel screen is to either search for or, create a new badge holder record (by following steps explained under Creating a Basic Working Badge) for which you wish to enable the dedicated access feature.
37
Personnel
In our example, we will consider the badge record we created earlier (with Badge Number 59043, Name John Smith and two standard access groups-All Access, Employee Access) to be the badge record of the president, for whom we will create a dedicated access group. So, we will search for this particular record (by entering the badge number, or the name in corresponding General tab field and clicking the Enter key on the keyboard). We also have the option of searching by clicking the down arrow of access group 1 or 2 control, and choosing the correct access group for that control). More details on searching can be found under the heading Searching for Personnel Records. On searching, the system will display the record sought after, in the view window of the screen.
Fig. 32.57. Badge record for dedicated access group highlighted in the view window.
3. Click on Access Groups tab. 4. Click the Edit button on Personnel screen toolbar. 5. Click the Dedicated Access checkbox to select it.
38
Personnel
On clicking, you will find yourself in the Dedicated Access sub-tab as shown in the figure below. This sub-tab will contain two columns named as Panels/Readers and Time Schedule. The Panels/Readers column will show the names of all Panels that are created in the Panels screen. To the left of each Panel name you will see a node (+ mark). Expanding a Panel node will show the list of all Readers that belong to the selected Panel, and whose records are created in the Readers screen.
Fig. 32.58. The Dedicated Access sub-tab.
6. Decide on the Reader you wish to dedicate to the selected badge holder, and expand the corresponding Panel node. On expanding the Time Schedule column corresponding to that Reader will show the default selection Not Used. Let us assume that we like to dedicate the Reader named Presidents Office belonging to the Panel 3 (see figure below) to John Smith in our example. Hence we need to expand the node corresponding to Panel 3 as we have done below.
39
Personnel
Fig. 32.59. Expanding a Panel node to dedicate a Reader.
7. Click the Time Schedule column of the selected Reader. Doing this will show a down arrow. Click the down arrow and select a desired time schedule in the list. The time schedules seen in the list are those that are created in the Schedules screen. For our example, we will select the Time Schedule All the Time for Presidents Office.
Fig. 32.60. List of Time Schedules for a selected Reader.
Note: If no schedules are seen in the list, you need to create some in the Schedules screen. Refer the section Schedules to do this. 8. Similarly, you can make time schedule selections for other Readers (belonging to the Panel selected in step 6).
40
Personnel
9. In case you wish to include Readers belonging to other Panels in the dedicated access group, repeat steps 6, 7 and 8 for the desired Panels under the Panels/Readers column. 10. By default, the Access Group Name field will show the badge number of the Personnel record in question.
Fig. 32.61. Access Group Name field showing the default selection of badge number.
You can change the default naming by typing in a descriptive name for the dedicated access group. Below we have named the access group we wish to dedicate for John Smith as John Smith Access Only
Fig. 32.62. Entering a descriptive name for the dedicated access group.
11. If required, a group can be selected for the selected badge holder by clicking the down arrow of Group control, and selecting a desired group name in the list. The group names listed will be those that are created in the Groups screen. Note: In case no group names are seen in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen, on the Personnel tab. Refer the section Groups to do this. 12. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save these settings. These settings will now allow the selected badge holder to have sole access to the mentioned Readers, during the specified Time Schedules. In our example, John Smith will have dedicated access to Presidents Office, All the Time.
41
Personnel
Note: Dedicated access group when created for a badge holder, will be automatically assigned to the first Access Group control on the Access Groups tab, for the badge holder record.
Fig. 32.63. Dedicated access group automatically assigned to Access Group 1 control.
Even if a standard access group had been assigned to Access Group 1 control previously, the dedicated access group will dominate and replace the standard access group assignment. Recall that we had previously assigned the access group All Access to Access Group 1 control for John Smith (see figure 32.34). But the dedicated access group John Smith Access Only has replaced All Access as seen in figure 32.63. The (dedicated) Access Group Expiration Date works in the same way as it does on a standard access group. For more information, refer the heading Access Group 1-6 Expiration Date. Once dedicated access groups are created, they do not appear in the standard Access Groups screen. However, every dedicated access group that is created does use up an access group number, just like a standard access group. The CardAccess permits a maximum of 1000 access groups. Every dedicated access group and standard access group that you create is subtracted from the total number available.
42
Personnel
Get Template Button The Dedicated Access sub-tab has a button named as Get Template.
Fig. 32.64. The Get Template button on the Dedicated Access sub-tab.
This button allows you to use the settings of a different access group (created earlier), as the basis for creating/editing the dedicated access group in question. Templates serve as a time saving feature as you can conveniently load the settings of an existing access group, without having to make those settings all over again. Below we explain how to use the Get Template button to create a dedicated access group.
Using Get Template Button

Below we will create a dedicated access group for Carl Blake, the vice president of a company. To do this, we will use John Smith Access Only (dedicated access group for the President we created earlier) as the template. The following steps will be involved. 1. Open Personnel screen by clicking on Personnel button or Access Personnel menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab by default. 2. The foremost action to take in the Personnel screen is to either search for or, create the badge holder record (by following steps explained
43
Personnel
under Creating a Basic Working Badge) for which you wish to create a dedicated access group. We will create Carl Blakes record by clicking the New button on Personnel screen toolbar, and entering his Badge Number and Name in the respective fields, on the Personnel screen General tab.
Fig. 32.65. Entering Badge Number and Name of the Personnel.
3. Click on Access Groups tab. 4. Click the Dedicated Access checkbox to select it. On clicking, you will find yourself in the Dedicated Access sub-tab. 5. The Access Group Name field in Dedicated Access sub-tab will (by default) show the badge number of the personnel in question.
Fig. 32.66. Access Group Name field showing the default selection of badge number.
You can change the default naming by typing in a descriptive name for the dedicated access group. Below we have named the access group we wish to dedicate for Carl Blake as Carl Blake Access Only.
Fig. 32.67. Entering a descriptive name for the dedicated access group.
6. If required, a group can be selected for the selected badge holder by clicking the down arrow of the Group control, and selecting a desired group name in the list. The group names listed will be those that are created in the Groups screen.
44
Personnel
Note: In case no group names are seen in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen, on the Personnel tab. Refer the section Groups to do this. 7. At this point, none of the Readers listed under the Panels/Readers column will be assigned Time Schedules. You may check this by expanding the nodes (+ marks) seen to the left of the Panel names listed under the Panels/Readers column. The Time Schedule column against every Reader name will show you the default selection Not Used.
Fig. 32.69. All nodes expanded.
Checking this way will help you to understand the implications of selecting an access group template for the dedicated access group in question. 8. Click the Get Template button. On clicking, the Select Access Group Template dialog will be displayed.
Fig. 32.70. The Select Access Group Template dialog.
45
Personnel
9. In the Select Access Group Template dialog, click the down arrow of the control to view the list of available access groups in the CardAccess. Note: The drop down list will show the names of standard access groups (created in the Access Groups screen) as well as Dedicated access groups (created in the Personnel screen). The drop down list will show access groups names only if they are created previously. If no access group names are seen in the list, you must create them afresh. To do this, refer the heading Creating a Dedicated Access Group above, or the heading Creating an Access Group in the section titled Access Groups. 10. Locate a desired access group in the drop down list, and click on it. In our example, we will be selecting the access group John Smith Access Only.
Fig. 32.71. Selecting an Access Group that will act as a template for the current access group.
On clicking, the time schedule settings of the selected access group will be loaded to the Readers of the current access group being created. In the figure below, carefully observe the time schedule All the Time loaded against the Reader Presidents Office on selecting the access group John Smith Access Only.
46
Personnel
Fig. 32.72. Time Schedule settings after template selection.
11. You may now make changes to these settings, by making fresh Time Schedule assignments to the Readers of your choice. Below, we have made time schedule assignment to Engineering Office Reader, belonging to Panel 2.
Fig. 32.73. Fresh Time Schedule assignments.
12. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save these settings. These settings will now allow the selected badge holder to have sole access to the mentioned Readers, during the specified Time Schedules. In our example, Carl Blake will have dedicated access to Vice-Presidents Office All the Time and to Presidents Office during Weekdays, Business Hours.
47
Personnel
Note: Dedicated access group when created for a badge holder, will be automatically be assigned to the first Access Group control, on the Access Groups tab, for that badge holder record.
Fig. 32.74. Dedicated access group automatically assigned to Access Group 1 control.
Editing a Dedicated Access Group

Follow the steps below if you wish to edit a dedicated access group: Open Personnel screen by clicking on Personnel button or Access Personnel menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in the General tab, and will not show any badge records. Select the record whose dedicated access group settings you wish to edit. Selection can be made in two ways as below. a. By clicking the Show All Badges button, and choosing the desired record or, b. Searching for the required record by using a search criterion (refer the heading Searching for Personnel Records for details)
48
Personnel
Click on Access Groups tab, and then on Dedicated Access sub-tab. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the controls on the Dedicated Access tab. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save the changes. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen.
Deleting a Dedicated Access Group

Following the steps below if you wish to delete the dedicated access group of a badge holder. Open Personnel screen by clicking on Personnel button or Access Personnel menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in the General tab, and will not show any badge records. Select the record whose dedicated access group you wish to delete. Selection can be made in two ways as below. a. By clicking the Show All Badges button and choosing the desired record or, b. Searching for the required record by using a search criterion (refer the heading Searching for Personnel Records for details) Click on Access Groups tab. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. Click the Dedicated Access check box to deselect it.
49
Personnel
Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed to inform that the delete action is irreversible.
Fig. 32.75. Message box displayed before deleting the dedicated access group of a badge holder.
After confirming, click the Yes button in the message box to delete the dedicated access group. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save this change. Click the Close button on the toolbar to close the screen.
50
Personnel
Control Tab
Controls for Anti Passback and Alarm Shunt Settings for individual badge holders are available in the Control tab. A click on Control tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 32.76. Personnel screen Control tab.
Anti Passback controls are on the left and Alarm Shunt controls are on the right sides of Control tab as shown in the above figure.
Anti Passback (APB)

Anti Passback is a mode of operation that is set at a Reader (see Readers for more information). The function of Anti Passback is to prevent a card from being presented to the same Reader twice.
51
Personnel
Controls for Anti Passback settings are provided in two screens- Readers and Personnel. Settings made in Readers screen apply to the concerned Reader at the door, as well as to all cardholders accessing the door. Whereas, settings made in the Personnel screen are applied to each cardholder individually. Personnel screen settings allow Anti Passback operation to be modified for a cardholder individually, without affecting the Anti Passback settings for the other cardholders who access the given Anti Passback enabled door. Note: Anti Passback controls in the Personnel screen work in conjunction with the Anti Passback controls in the Options tab of the Readers screen. Anti Passback processing parameters must be set in both locations or Anti Passback will not be enabled.
Personnel APB Controls

APB controls are seen on the left side of Personnel screen Control tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 32.77. APB controls for personnel.
The controls are explained below.
52
Personnel
Duration Use The Duration Use control is used in conjunction with a timer called Duration Use Time, which is set in Options tab of Readers screen. The basic operation of Duration Use is to allow the setting of a time period duration which, successive reads of the same badge will be blocked, until the timer expires.
Fig. 32.78. Personnel Duration Use Control.
Fig. 32.79. Readers screen APB controls.
The Duration Use control in a Personnel record has several modes of operation. Which mode is active, depends on settings in the Readers screen. The modes are discussed below.
Timed Re-Entry
With no Anti Passback set at the Reader (that is, Reader set to Neutral as in figure 32.79), the Reader allows unlimited badge reads of the same card, by default. When a Duration Use Time is set in the Readers screen, and the Duration Use feature is enabled in a card holders Personnel record, that card holder will be blocked from re-entering the same door until the time out period has expired. Other badge holders who do not have the Duration Use times set in their records are not blocked from re-entering the door as the Reader is not in Anti Passback mode. This type of Reader functionality is more accurately termed as Timed Re-Entry.
53
Personnel
Fig. 32.80. Duration Use box in Personnel screen checked for Timed Re-Entry.
Fig. 32.81. APB Type set to Neutral in Readers screen Options tab, for Timed Re-Entry .
Note: The alert message generated for a timed re-entry violation (Badge Violate Re-Use) is different from an Anti Passback violation.
Timed APB
With Timed APB reader functionality, one or more readers are set up as Anti Passback readers (where option IN/OUT is selected in APB Type control, as in figure 32.83). A Duration Use Time is also set on each of those readers. The Duration Use feature can then be enabled for selected Personnel records. Those badges that have Duration Use enabled, will be able to reenter an Anti Passback reader after the time out period has expired. Badge holders who do not have Duration Use set in their badge records will be denied the option of re-entering any APB enabled door (they cannot re-enter until they exit).
Fig. 32.82. Duration Use box in Personnel screen checked for Timed APB.
Fig. 32.83. APB Type set to In in Readers screen Options tab, for Timed APB. 54
Personnel
APB Setting
The APB setting is a manual method of presetting the Anti Passback status for the highlighted cardholder. When a cardholders card is presented to an Anti Passback IN reader, the status of that card holder is said to be IN. When a cardholders card is presented to an Anti Passback OUT reader, that cardholder is said to be OUT (of the building). The APB setting controls offer the CardAccess administrator a way to preset the current APB status of a cardholder. The following options are available: In: Sets the card holder status to IN the building Out: Sets the card holder status to OUT of the building Exempt from APB: Sets the cardholder to be immune from Anti Passback rules. The card acts as though Anti Passback is not enabled at any APB reader. Set IN/OUT on Next Use: Sets the cardholders status to IN or OUT based on which type of APB reader (IN or OUT) the next card read comes from.
Fig. 32.84. APB Setting controls in Personnel screen.
55
Personnel
Alarm Shunt Control

An Alarm Point by definition is (usually) a set of contacts of some type that are connected by wires to an alarm panel Input (ours or someone elses). Alarm Shunting is a term that refers to the (old technology) act of bridging a shorting wire across the contacts of an Alarm Point, to prevent that Alarm Point from triggering an alert, when an access door is opened. In effect, the system is faked into believing that the door is still closed so an alarm is not sounded. Shunting is often used with burglar alarm systems so that authorized entries and exits can be made to and from a building, without the need to disarm the alarm system. However, the explanation above that detailed using a piece of wire to short the contacts of an alarm point is highly over simplified. There is some specialized hardware and software that has been created to perform these shunting functions. There are two types of shunting used in modern access control systems such as the CardAccess. They are- hardware shunting and software shunting. Hardware shunting uses relays to accomplish hardwire bridging across input points. Software shunting is discussed in detail below. Every panel made by Continental is shipped with some number of (software programmable) alarm inputs. Since those inputs are under software control, the status of those inputs can easily be ignored by the software. Ignoring input status messages (on purpose) is called software alarm shunting. When software shunting is enabled, the software ignores the status messages of one input or a group of inputs. By enabling the shunt feature in a cardholder record, that badge holders card is set up as a shunt card. A shunt card opens doors just like a standard card, but the shunt card has an additional special feature. Once shunting is enabled in a cardholder record, that cardholder can enable or disable shunting at a reader or group of readers. What we mean when we say enable or disable shunting is, when the shunt card is presented to a reader, the door strike is activated (opening the door like a normal card), and shunting is activated. When the same card is presented again to the same reader, shunting is deactivated.
56
Personnel
The most understandable example of an application for alarm shunting happens when the access control or security system includes Programmable Infrared Sensors (PIRS). These sensors trigger every time they see moving heat (moving people). That means that when a building is fully occupied during the day, these sensors will be constantly triggering (false) alarms. Here is a case where you may not want to disable the entire access control system (because you want to maintain security at the doors), but you do want to disable the PIR inputs (or perhaps, other types of inputs that are located inside the building perimeter). The alarm shunting function was designed for just such a purpose. For example, you can set up a managers access card as an alarm shunt card. When the manager arrives in the morning to open the building and presents his or her card to a door, the door opens as normal, but the PIR inputs are turned off as well (shunting is turned on). The rest of the access control system remains operationally unchanged.
Setting Up a Shunt Card

Setting up alarm shunting at a door or group of doors is a two-step process. You need to decide which badges will be allowed to turn the shunting feature on and off and You need to decide which inputs or groups of inputs will be shunted, and by which cards Note: o Before you can shunt groups of Inputs, you must create Input Groups in the Groups screen, available from the Administration menu. See the manual section on Groups for more information o You can create a number of different shunt cards - cards that shunt different groups of inputs, a number of cards that shunt the same group of inputs, cards that turn on shunting at one door only, some cards that turn on shunting of an input group from any reader, other cards that turn on shunting at shunt designated readers only.
57
Personnel
Alarm shunting can be set up to operate in any one of the three modes. Which mode is active for a particular card is determined by the alarm shunt control settings on the Control tab of the Personnel record. There are also some companion settings that must be made in the Readers screen for some modes as explained below.
Shunt a Group of Inputs from Any Reader

In Personnel screen, if you add a Shunt Group to any card holder record, but do not enable the Shunt by Designated Reader check box, that card will turn on shunting of the selected Input group from any reader in the system. Be sure that the Alarm Shunt Reader check box remains unchecked in the Readers screen.
Fig. 32.85. Personnel screen settings to shunt a group of Inputs from any Reader.
Shunt a Group of Inputs from Shunt Designated Readers

In Personnel screen, if you add a Shunt Group to any card holder record, and you enable the Shunt by Designated Reader check box (refer figure 32.86), that card will turn on shunting from shunt designated readers only. The Alarm Shunt Reader box in Readers screen must be checked to designate a reader as a shunt reader (refer figure 32.87).
58
Personnel
Fig. 32.86. Personnel screen settings for shunting by designated reader.
Fig. 32.87. Alarm Shunt Reader box checked in Readers screen to enable shunting by designated Reader (here, Front Door Reader).
Note: Alarm Shunting can be enabled for an indefinite period of time if the selected Reader belongs to a MicroTerm, MiniTerm, SmartTerm, Super 4 or a SuperTerm panel. In case the selected Reader belongs to a newer panel such as a SuperTerm +, Turbo SuperTerm, Super 4 +, Turbo Super 4 or a Super 2 Panel, a new control named Max Shunt Time (see figure below) will be displayed after you check the Alarm Shunt Reader checkbox. This control can be used to fix the maximum shunt time you wish to allow for the selected Reader.
59
Personnel
Maximum Shunt Time control displayed when Alarm Shunt Reader checkbox is enabled for Readers connected to SuperTerm +, Turbo SuperTerm, Super 4 +, Turbo Super 4 or Super 2 Panels.
The default time shown for this control is 1 minute. The control allows you to fix up to 500 minutes of Alarm Shunting for the selected Reader. If desired, you can change the default time by o Clicking the white space of the control, and typing in a number of choice. The maximum number you can enter is 500. o Or you can use the arrow buttons of the spin control to choose a desired number. Once the Max Shunt Time specified elapses, the system will generate the Door Open Too Long event message for activities (if any) at the selected Reader.
Shunt One Door

In Personnel screen, if you enable Shunt by Designated Reader but do not add a shunt group (figure 32.88), that card will shunt the door contact of whichever door the card is presented to. All door contact messages will be suppressed at that door as long as the door remains open. This means that if the door were left open after the entry, the Door Open Too Long event message would not be broadcast. Input shunting for that door is disabled when the door contact closes.
60
Personnel
Fig. 32.88. Personnel screen settings to shunt one door only (any door).
Shunt Event Messages

When you activate or deactivate shunting using a badge at a reader, there are event messages sent from the panel to the CardAccess software (seen below in Figure 32.89). Note that the name of the badge holder who activated shunting is shown as well as the shunt group that was activated and the door where the badge read occurred.
Fig. 32.89. Shunt Event Messages in CardAccess.
Manually Activate/Deactivate Shunting

There is a way to turn the shunt feature on and off manually (in addition to turning the feature on and off using an access control badge). To manually activate or deactivate shunting, follow the steps below: Open the Personnel Screen. Click on the Control Tab. Click on the Personnel record that has shunting enabled.
61
Personnel
Note: Only badge records that have a shunt group selected have the ability to activate shunting manually. If a shunt group is not selected in a given badge record, manual shunting is not available. Click on the Words Current State.
Click Here
Fig. 32.90. Manual Shunt Control.
Upon clicking the following message box will appear.
Fig. 32.91. Shunt warning dialog.
Click the Yes button in the warning dialog. Change in alarm shunt status can be seen by closing and re-opening the Personnel screen, and highlighting the Personnel record whose shunt status you attempted to change. The status would have changed from Inactive to Shunting or vice versa.
62
Personnel
Personal Tab
The Personal tab provides a number of fields for entering personal notes about a cardholder. These fields are primarily notation fields. Although the fields are not active like those on the General tab, they are still available to reports and to the Badge Editor software. A click on the Personal tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 32.92. Personnel screen in Personal tab.
The Personal tab fields in figure 32.92 are explained below. Soc. Sec # This field is meant for entering the Social Security Number of the badge holder. The field accepts nine numeric digits only. Company ID, Department, and Location These fields are meant for entering the Company Name, Department and Location in which the badge holder works. Each of these fields accepts sixteen alphanumeric characters. These three fields are also special because as you enter names in these fields, they create a list of names already
63
Personnel
entered. After the list has been started, you can then choose a name from the drop down list instead of typing in a name. Supervisor This field is meant for entering the name of the badge holders Supervisor. The field accepts nineteen alphanumeric characters. This field is also creates a list of names as you enter them, like the above mentioned fields. Hire Date This field allows you to enter the date of hiring the personnel. The date can be entered in the following two ways: o Typing a date of choice in the Hire Date field. The date entered must be in MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY date format. o By using the calendar to choose a desired date. This can be done by following the steps below: Click the calendar button (numbered as 15) found on the right side of Hire Date control. Upon clicking, a calendar window of the current month and year will be opened, with the current date in highlight.
Fig. 32.93. Calendar window displayed by clicking on calendar button (numbered as 15).
64
Personnel
Note: Double left/right arrows and single left/right arrows are provided at the top of the screen to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of a year, to aid in desired date selection. Click on a desired date in the calendar. Hire Date is a non-active field. The date in this field is not connected to any program logic. Date of Birth This field is for entering the badge holders Date of Birth. The date can be entered in the following two ways: o Typing a date of choice in the Date of Birth field. The date entered must be in MM/DD/YYYY or MM/DD/YY date format. o By using the calendar to choose a desired date. This can be done by following the steps below: Click the calendar button (numbered as 15) found on the right side of Date of Birth control. Upon clicking, a calendar window of the current month and year will be opened with the current date in highlight.
65
Personnel
Note: Double left/right arrows and single left/right arrows are provided at the top of the screen to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of a year, to aid in desired date selection. Click on a desired date in the calendar. Gender This field is for specifying the Gender of the badge holder. The default selection for this field will be Unspecified. The Badge Holders Gender can be specified by clicking the down arrow of the Gender control and choosing a gender in the drop down list. Phone, Ext These fields are provided for entering the badge holders contact phone numbers and their extensions. The fields accept ten and eleven alphanumeric characters respectively. Vehicle/Make This field is provided for entering a description of the badge holders automobile. The field accepts a maximum of seventeen alphanumeric characters. License Plate This field is provided for entering the License Plate number of badge holders automobile. The field accepts a maximum of eleven alphanumeric characters. Remarks The remarks field is provided for entering remarks/comments on the badge holder. The field accepts a maximum of two hundred and fifty five characters.
66
Personnel
Middle Name This field is for specifying the middle name of the badge holder. The field accepts a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Photo Tab
The Video Badging software is shipped as a part of the CardAccess software package. But, the Video Badging software is disabled by default. The Photo tab in Personnel screen will be visible only if Video Badging is enabled in the System Settings screen. For enabling Video Badging, refer the heading Video Badging Tab in the section titled System Settings. Note: The CardAccess software is shipped along with the Video Badging package included. However, parts of the Video Badging package will not operate unless you have purchased and installed a hardware security key. This key attaches to the parallel printer port. Without the key, Image Capture, Badge Design Preview and Badge Printing are disabled. The Photo tab has two working modes depending on the option (Photos Only or Badging 3000) selected in the System Settings screen. The buttons visible on the tab are also dependant on the option (Photos Only or Badging 3000) you select. The tab will have lesser number of buttons in the Photos Only mode. In this section, we will only discuss the Photos Only mode. Badging 3000 mode is explained in the section Badging 3000 Interface in CardAccess.
67
Personnel
Photos Only Mode

When the Photos Only option is selected in the System Settings screen, the Photo tab in Personnel screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 32.95. Personnel screen Photo tab when Photos Only option is selected in System Settings screen.
As shown in the above figure, Photo tab will provide only three buttons in the Photos Only mode- Import, Clear Photo, and Export. Thus, in this mode it is only possible to import the existing images that were created using another manufacturers software package. It is not possible to do the following in Photos Only mode: o Creating a badge design. o Printing or previewing a badge design. o Capturing an image. o Capturing a signature. Note: o The buttons in figure 32.95 are grayed out. They can be enabled by clicking the Edit button on the toolbar.
68
Personnel
The button controls of the Photo tab in Photos Only mode are explained in the following section.
Photo Tab Controls in Photos Only Mode

The button controls of Photo tab in Photos Only mode are explained below. Import Clicking on Import button will bring up the Import A Photo Image dialog that allows searching of the hard drive or network drives for importing an image. The window supports .bmp, .jpg, .wmf and .gif type image files.
Fig. 32.96. Import A Photo Image dialog.
Export Clicking the Export button will bring up the Export Photo to File dialog that allows exporting of the badge holders image to a bitmap type file. A destination folder and a filename must be selected in the dialog.
69
Personnel
Fig. 32.97. The Export Photo to File dialog.
Clear Photo The Clear Photo button will be visible only if the selected badge record has a photo assigned to it. Clicking this button will clear the badge holders photo from the record. The system displays a warning message before deleting the image.
Fig. 32.98. The Clear Photo warning dialog.
70
Personnel
Custom Fields Tab

The Custom Fields tab will be seen on Personnel screen only if Custom Fields have been created in the System Settings screen. This tab will have the same name as the Page Title entered in the System Settings Custom tab. For creating Custom fields, refer the heading Custom Tab in the section titled System Settings. The Custom Fields tab is used in case where the user needs more notation type fields than are provided on the Personal tab. Custom fields can be titled according to the users choice.
Fig. 32.99. Personnel screen in Custom Fields tab (titled Medical Data) showing Blood Type field that was created in System Settings Custom tab.
71
Operators
Operators
Logging into CardAccess software requires a user name and password. Login names in CardAccess are called as Operators. The Operators screen is used for creating the Operator login identities. Operators screen is closely associated with Operator Privileges screen that is used for creating operator access permission templates. Each operator must be assigned an access template that will determine his permission level to the various menus, fields and controls in CardAccess software. For more information on Operator Privileges, refer the section Operator Privileges.
Accessing Operators Screen

Click on Administration menu in CardAccess menu bar. Click on Operators menu item in the list. The Operators screen will be displayed as below.
Operators
Fig. 47.1. The Operators screen.
The screen will open in the General tab and will show two default operator records. The screen names Admin or Demo are used when an operator is logging into CardAccess for the first time. The folder tabs of the screen and their controls are explained in the following section.
Operators
Operators Screen Folder Tabs

The Operators screen has three folder tabs that consist of several controls. Each of the tabs is explained in detail below.
General Tab
The General tab has controls that are used to set up the login parameters of a given operator. The controls and their functionality are explained below.
Fig. 47.2. Default settings seen in General tab when Operators screen in opened.
Name The Name field is meant for entering the full name of the operator who will be logging into the CardAccess software.
This field allows a maximum of 32 characters. Note: The name you enter in this field must be the operators actual name. This name will not be used as the CardAccess login name.
Operators
Screen Name The Screen Name field is meant for entering the operators login name. The operator will be entering this name in the User Name field of CardAccess login screen, while logging into the software.
Fig. 47.4. The Screen Name field.
This field allows a maximum of 12 characters. Any typed character is allowed. The login name will be displayed in the status bar of the CardAccess main screen, and in all status screens that show the logged in operator name. Note: In all status screens, the Screen Name will be used to refer to the operator instead of the operators actual name. New Password The New Password field is meant for entering the operators login password. The operator will be entering this name into the Password field of CardAccess login screen, while logging into the software. This field does not limit the number of characters. But it is suggested that you limit the password to a manageable length (say 10 characters) that can be easily remembered. It is further suggested that you avoid common, easy to deduce passwords. The best passwords consist of letters, numbers and symbols that do not spell any known words. Characters typed into this field are masked from view by means of asterisks.
Fig. 47.5. The New Password field.
Below we look at the methods available for changing an operators password.
Operators
Changing Operator Password

An operators password can be changed in the following ways. Changing Password within Operators screen Passwords can be set only once in the Operators screen. In case you wish to change an operators password from within the Operators screen, the only way to do it is by deleting the operator record and recreating it, entering a different password. Note that you must be logged in as an authorized operator with the correct permissions to delete an operator record. Further, an audit trail record will be logged with details of which operator deleted the original record, and who created the new one. Changing Password during Card Access Login Passwords can be changed during CardAccess login. There are two ways to do this. They are as follows: a. Using the Change Password button- An operator can choose to change his password using the Change Password button, in the Card Access Log In screen. b. Invalidating Password- The CardAccess Administrator can decide to invalidate an operators password, and then have the operator change his password during his next login. Refer the heading Invalidate Password below for details. Password change using the Change Password button is explained below.
Operators
Changing Password using Change Password Button An operator may follow the steps below to change his password during CardAccess login. Double-click the CA3000 Launcher shortcut on your desktop to start the CardAccess software.
CA3000 Launcher Shortcut on Desktop.
On double-clicking, the Card Access Log In screen will be displayed.
Card Access Log In screen.
Type in your User Name and Password correctly in the fields provided. On password entry, the Change Password button gets activated. Click the Change Password button. On clicking, the Change Password window will be seen.
Operators
The Change Password window for changing an operators password.
In the Change Password window, enter a new password, confirm it, and click the OK button. This will change the operators password. The new password has to be remembered for future CardAccess logins. Operator # The Operator Number is assigned automatically by the system. But it can be changed if you desire to have breaks in the operator number sequence.
Fig. 47.9. The Operator # spin control.
The Operator Number merely refers to the location of the operator record in the Operators screen listing. The number can be changed by Typing a desired number in the Operator # spin control or Using up/down arrow of the spin control to choose a desired number.
Operators
Alert Ack Time The Alert Ack Time is a timer that determines how long the CardAccess alerts will remain in Alerts Grid, for a particular operator. Note: The word Ack can be understood as an abbreviation for the word Acknowledge. Operators can have the same ack time or different ack times. By default, the Alert Ack Time is 5 seconds for a new operator record. But it can be changed to any value in the range 1 to 9999 seconds. If you attempt to enter a number less than 1 second, the timer will default to 1 second.
Fig. 47.10. The Alert Ack Time spin control.
The time value can be changed by Typing a desired number in the Alert Ack Time spin control or Using up/down arrow of the spin control to choose a desired number. An operators alert ack timer is started whenever an alert appears in the Alerts Grid. When the timer for that alert expires, the alert will automatically be moved from the Alerts Grid to the Events Grid. Alerts that are acknowledged using the operator's Alert Ack Time will be time & date stamped along with the currently logged in operator's screen name. Auto-Logoff Time The Auto-Logoff Time is an inactivity timer. The setting in this field determines how many minutes the CardAccess will allow the main monitoring screen to remain open, before closing the main screen down and reverting back to the log in screen. This timer is started when the user activities such as mouse clicks and keyboard entries cease in CardAccess GUI. When the timer expires, the Operator is
Operators
automatically logged out of CardAccess and a new operator login is required to regain access to CardAccess menus. This timer prevents unwanted tampering in the case where the logged in operator has walked away from the CardAccess equipped PC. Each operator can have their own unique timer setting, or all operators can be set to the same value. The selectable time range is from 1 to 99999 minutes (or 69.44 days). If set to 0, the Operator will be auto logged out in 10 minutes by default.
Fig. 47.11. The Auto-Logoff Time spin control.
The time value can be changed by Typing a desired number in the Auto-Logoff Time spin control or Using up/down arrow of the spin control to choose a desired number.
Invalidate Password When an operators password has been impersonated, the CardAccess Administrator may like the concerned operator to change his password for security reasons. Firstly, the operators current password has to be invalidated (disabled forever) by using the Invalidate Password control.
The Invalidate Password button control.
Once the password is invalidated, the concerned operator will have to change his password during his next CardAccess login.
Operators
Below we explain how a password can be invalidated. Invalidating a Password Note: It is recommended that the right to invalidate a password be given to the CardAccess administrator only. Following are the steps to invalidate an Operators password. Open Operators screen by clicking on Administration Operators menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default the screen will open in the General tab. Under the Name column in the upper half of the screen, select the Operator whose password you wish to invalidate (disable), and click on that row. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. This will activate the Invalidate Password button. Click on Invalidate Password button. On clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Message box displayed before invalidating a password.
After confirmation, click the Yes button in the message box to invalidate the password of the selected operator. Click the Save button on the toolbar. Click the Close button to close the screen.
10
Operators
Once an operator has his password disabled this way, he needs to change his password during his next CardAccess login. Password Change after Invalidation An operator may follow the steps below after his password has been invalidated in the Operators screen. Double-click the CA3000 Launcher shortcut on your desktop to start the CardAccess software.
CA3000 Launcher Shortcut on Desktop.
On double-clicking, you will see the Card Access Log In screen as below.
Card Access Log In screen.
Type in your User Name and Password in the respective fields, and click the OK button.
11
Operators
Note: The password you enter in the Log In screen must be the password that was invalidated in the Operators screen. On clicking OK, you will see the Change Password window.
The Change Password window.
In the Change Password window, enter a new password (something other than the invalidated password) confirm it, and click the OK button. A password change is thus accomplished. It becomes necessary to remember the new password for future CardAccess logins.
12
Operators
Event Viewing Tab

The Event Viewing tab determines how many events will be retained in the CardAccess Events Grid, for the current operator. Each operator is permitted to have a different setting for viewing events. The smallest number of viewable events possible is 10. The largest number of viewable events is 250. The default setting is 10. The number of viewable events can be changed by Typing a desired number in the Number of Events to Retain in View spin control or Use up/down arrow of the spin control to choose a desired number. Note: The value set in the Number of Events to Retain in View field will take effect only when the concerned operator logs out and logs back in to CardAccess again. Further, the value set in the 'Number of Events to Retain in View' field, will determine the number of events in the 'recent events view'. The recent events view is obtained by clicking the 'Recent' button on the top right side of the CardAccess main toolbar. As an example, let the Number of Events to Retain in View field be set to 100 as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 47.12. The Event Viewing tab.
13
Operators
On logging out and logging back in, the CardAccess events window will display the most recent one hundred events only. All other events in the database will be filtered out. Suppose the control is set to ten, the most recent ten events will be displayed. Thus, the display is constantly filtered to remove the view of all but the n most recent events, where n equals the number you set in the Number of Events to Retain in View control.
14
Operators
Privileges Tab
The Privileges tab is used to set the screen permissions that will be allowed for the selected operator. The controls in Privileges tab are explained below. Screen Privileges The Screen Privileges control provides options for selecting an operator privilege type, for the selected operator. An operator privilege type restricts the operators access to CardAccess menus and fields. The privilege types are created in the Operator Privileges screen. Refer the section Operator Privileges for more details. 'System Administrator is the default Privileges type selected for an operator. This Privilege type allows the operator to have access to all CardAccess menus and functions.
Fig. 47.13. The Screen Privileges control showing the default privilege type of an operator.
To select a different privilege type, click the arrow to the right of the Screen Privileges control, scroll up or down to locate the desired privilege type and click on it. Device Control Privileges The Device Control Privileges area provides a group of checkboxes that apply to the manual control of Doors, Relays and Links.
Fig. 47.14. Operators Device Control Privileges check boxes.
These check boxes work in conjunction with the Manual Control Privilege controls in the Readers, Relays and Links screens.
15
Operators
Fig. 47.15. Readers, Relays, Links Manual Control Privilege control.
Together, these controls set up a filter that is applied on a per Operator basis. This filter is designed to hide selected doors, relays or links from view in the manual control screens, to prevent selected operators from having the ability to manually activate those devices. By default, manual control filtering is disabled. That means that when you open any manual control window (by clicking the Doors, Relays or Links button on the Main toolbar), you will see a listing of all doors, relays or links. That gives any logged in operator the access to manually activate any of those devices. If you wish to implement Device Control Privileges, you will also need to visit every Reader, Relay and Link configuration record and apply a setting to the 'Manual Control Privilege' field found in each of those screens. If no value is assigned in the Manual Control Privilege field of a given hardware device, that device is visible to all operators who wish to manually control it. In theory, assigning privilege levels works very much like the CardAccess Groups function. All hardware devices (readers, relays, links) that have been assigned a Priv level of 1 belong to a group, those that have a Priv Level of 2 belong to another group, etc. However, in this case the group that each of those devices belongs to, is used for the purpose of manual control permissions. The results of the filter are seen only when you open a manual control screen. When you look at the options available for Manual Control Privilege control for readers, relays and links, you will find an option called All (in addition to Priv 1-8) as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 47.16. Manual Control Privilege options.
16
Operators
When set to All, it means that the device in question can be manually activated by an operator with any privilege level, and also if there is no privilege level set. Alternatively, when a hardware device has a Manual Control Privilege setting of Priv 1-8, that device can only be manually controlled by an operator having that specific privilege setting enabled in his or her operator profile. That device becomes invisible to any operator that does not have the privilege enabled. Note: The Device Control Privilege setting for an operator will take effect only when the operator logs out and logs back in to CardAccess again. In the Operators screen, on the Privileges tab, you can check off which privilege groups you want the operator to see in his or her manual control list. The check boxes are additive. That is, each additional check box that you select, adds one more privilege group to that operator. The hardware items from each checked privilege group will appear in every manual control screen that the operator opens. Suppose an operator is assigned only one permission level say Priv 4, that operator would be allowed to see only those devices having Priv 4 or All set in the Manual Control Privilege field of each manual control screen . Note: The Device Control Privilege setting for an operator will take effect only when the operator logs out and logs back in to CardAccess again. For example, consider Smart Relay 1 set to Priv 4 as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 47.17. Smart Relay 1 set to Manual Control Privilege 4.
17
Operators
This relay can be manually controlled by only those operators who have Device Control Priv 4 enabled in their respective profiles.
Fig. 47.18. Device Control Priv 4 enabled for an operator.
If you want an operator to have access to multiple privilege levels, you must check off multiple check boxes for enabling the various privilege levels.
Fig. 47.19. Checking multiple checkboxes.
In above figure, an operator with these settings will be able to manually activate those hardware devices that have Priv levels of 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 or All set in Manual Control Privilege field of hardware screens. Devices with Priv levels of 2, 5, or 6 will be hidden from the view of this operator. The manual control screen will open with devices 2, 5, and 6 filtered out of the list. Note: When the hardware screen has the Manual Control Privilege field set to All, checking all of the Priv check boxes in an operator profile will work identical to checking none of the Priv check boxes. In both the cases, the operator will have access to all devices in the manual control screen.
18
Operators
Creating an Operator Definition

Follow the steps below to create an operator record. 1. Open Operators screen by clicking on Administration->Operators menu options in CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in General tab by default.
Fig. 47.20. Operators screen in General tab.
2. Click on New button in the toolbar. 3. The General Tab controls must be configured as explained below. o In the Name field, enter the full name of the operator. A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.
19
Operators
Fig. 47.21. The Name field showing an operators full name.
o In the Screen Name field, enter the login name that the operator will be using to log in to CardAccess. A maximum of 12 characters are allowed.
Fig. 47.22. The Screen Name field showing an operators login name.
o In the Password field, enter the password that the operator will be using to log in to CardAccess. It is suggested that you limit the password to a manageable length (say consisting of 10 characters) that will be easily remembered. The characters typed into this field are masked from view by means of asterisks. In the Confirm field, re-enter the same password again.
Fig. 47.23. Password of an operator shown as asterisks.
Note: The Password can be set only once from inside the Operators screen. Once set, you must delete and re-create the operator record if you wish to change a password from inside the Operators screen. However, you can change the password during login. For more information, refer the heading Changing Operator Password explained under General Tab. o The Operator # field will show the number assigned to the operator, automatically by the system. This number will be incremented for every new operator record.
20
Operators
Fig. 47.24. System assigned operator number.
The default number assigned by the system can be changed if breaks are desired in the operator number sequence. The number can be changed by Typing a desired number in Operator # spin control or Using the up/down arrow of the spin control to choose a desired number. o The Alert Ack Time field will show the default value 5 assigned automatically by the system.
Fig. 47.25. Default Alert Ack Time value assigned by the system.
The Alert Ack Time is a timer that determines how long an alert will remain in the Alerts Grid before it is automatically acknowledged and sent to Events grid. The default time indicated can be changed to any number in the range 1-9999 seconds. Operators can have the same ack time or different ack times. The default time value can be changed by Typing a desired number in the Alert Ack Time spin control or Use up/down arrow of the spin control to choose a desired number. The operators alert ack timer is started whenever an alert appears in the Alerts Grid. When the timer for that alert expires, the alert will automatically be moved from the Alerts Grid to the Events Grid. o The Auto-Logoff Time field will show the default value 5 automatically assigned by the system.
21
Operators
Fig. 47.26. Default Auto-Logoff Time value assigned by the system.
The Auto-Logoff Time is an inactivity timer. The setting in this field determines how many minutes the CardAccess will allow the main monitoring screen to remain open before closing the main screen down, and reverting back to the log in screen. The operator will require a new login to regain access to the CardAccess main screen. The default time indicated can be changed to any number in the range 1-99999 minutes. The default time value can be changed by Typing a desired number in the Auto-Logoff Time spin control or Use up/down arrow of the spin control to choose a desired number. 4. Click on Event Viewing tab. Observe that the Number of Events to Retain in View control will show the default value 10.
Fig. 47.27. Default Number of Events to Retain in View as decided by the system.
The value in this control determines how many events will be retained in the CardAccess Events Grid, for the current operator. The smallest number of viewable events possible is 10. The largest number of viewable events is 250. The default value can be changed by Typing a desired number in the Number of Events to Retain in View spin control or Using up/down arrow of the spin control to choose a desired number.
22
Operators
5. Click on Privileges tab and configure the controls in the tab as explained below. o The Screen Privileges control shows the default selection of System Administrator privilege type.
Fig. 47.28. Default privilege type selected for an operator.
An operator privilege type restricts the operators access to CardAccess menus and fields. The privilege types are created in the Operator Privileges screen. Refer the section Operator Privileges for more details. The System Administrator privilege type allows access to all CardAccess menus and functions. To select a different privilege type, click the arrow to the right of Screen Privileges control, scroll up or down to locate the desired privilege type, and click on it. o In the Device Control Privileges area, select the desired check boxes to bestow device control privileges for the current operator.
Fig. 47.29. Check boxes to control Device Control Privileges of the operator.
These check boxes work in conjunction with the Manual Control Privilege controls in the Readers, Relays and Links screens.
Fig. 47.30. Readers, Relays, Links Manual Control Privilege control.
Using these control, you can set up a filter (if desired) to hide selected doors, relays or links from the operators view in manual control screens (available by
23
Operators
clicking Doors, Relays, Links buttons in CA main toolbar). This will prevent the operator from having the ability to manually activate those devices in manual control screens. Operator Device Control Privileges operate under the following rules. If no Device Control Privileges are assigned in the Operator record (which is the default setting), privilege level settings are ignored and the operator will have access to all devices listed in any of the manual control screens (doors, relays or links), provided that the Manual Control Privilege field in the hardware screens is set to All. If you assign only one permission level ( say Priv 4) to the operator, the operator would be allowed to see only those devices with Priv 4 or All selected in the Manual Control Privilege field of each manual control screen. Note: The Device Control Privilege settings for the operator will take effect only when the operator logs out and logs back in to CardAccess again. Manual control filter will work only when Manual Control Privileges are assigned to the hardware devices. This is explained below. Applying Manual Control Privileges to Hardware Devices Readers, Relays and Links can be grouped into nine privilege levels namely Priv 1-8 or All. In theory, assigning privilege levels works very much like the CardAccess Groups function. All hardware devices (readers, relays, links) that have been assigned a Priv level of 1 belong to a group, those that have a Priv Level of 2 belong to another group, etc. However, in this case the group that each of those devices belongs to, is used for the purpose of manual control permissions. The results of the filter are seen only when you open a manual control screen. Manual Control access is provided to an operator under the following rules. If you assign the selection Manual Control Privilege = All to any hardware device, that hardware device can be manually activated by the operator, regardless of his privilege level setting in Operators screen Privileges tab.
24
Operators
If you set any privilege 1-8 on a given hardware device, that device becomes hidden from the operator in case he does not have that specific numbered privilege assigned in his Operator screen profile. Follow the steps below to assign a manual control privilege to a hardware device. Open the Readers, Relays or Links screen, available from the Configuration menu in CA main screen. All the screen open in General tab by default.
Fig. 47.31. Readers, Relays and Links menu options in Configuration menu.
If you have opened the Relays and Links screens, you can locate the Manual Control Privilege control at the bottom of the screen (in General tab).
Fig. 47.32. Manual Control privilege control in Relays screen General tab. 25
Operators
If you have opened the Readers screen, you will need to click on Priorities tab to locate the Manual Control Privilege control at the bottom right corner of the screen.
Fig. 47.33. Manual Control privilege control in Readers screen Priorities tab.
Click on Edit button in the Readers/Relays/Links screen toolbar. Click the down arrow of Manual Control Privilege control to view the privilege options available.
Fig. 47.34. Manual Control Privilege options.
Note: Before assigning any of the Manual Control Privileges to the hardware devices, it is necessary to decide which of the hardware devices the operator will be allowed access in the system.
26
Operators
Click on a desired Manual Control Privilege option in the list. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings. Repeat the above steps for every hardware device that you wish to filter out of the manual control default list. Close the Reader/Relays/Links screen by clicking on Close button in the toolbar. 6. Once the controls in all the tabs (General, Event Viewing and Privileges) are configured for the operator, click on Save button in Operators screen toolbar, to save the operator record. Note: The settings for the new operator will take effect when the operator logs in to any workstation. 7. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the Operators screen.
Editing an Operator Definition

Open Operators screen by clicking on Administration->Operators menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the operator record you wish to edit and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the controls in the folder tabs -General, Event Viewing, and Privileges. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
27
Operators
Deleting an Operator Definition

Open Operators screen by clicking on Administration->Operators menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the operator record you wish to delete and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 47.35. Message box displayed before deleting an operator record.
After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
28
Operators
Operators Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 47.36. Operators screen navigation bar.
The Operators screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The buttons of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked operator records in the screen. In figure 47.36, we have numbered the buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the buttons are as follows: Button 1: Placing the mouse cursor over button 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the very first operator record in the screen. Button 2: Placing the mouse cursor over button 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted operator record. Button 3: Placing the mouse cursor over button 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted operator record. Button 4: Placing the mouse cursor over button 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted operator record. Button 5: Placing the mouse cursor over button 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted operator record.
29
Operators
Button 6: Placing the mouse cursor over button 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the last operator record in the screen. Button 7: Placing the mouse cursor over button 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking this button will bookmark the highlighted operator record. Button 8: Placing the mouse cursor over button 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking this button will highlight the previously bookmarked operator record.
30
Operator Privileges
Operator Privileges
The Operator Privileges screen is used for creating operator access permission templates. An access permission template will determine the permission level of an operator to the various menus, fields and controls in CardAccess. Every operator must be assigned an access permission template. This is done in Operators screen. The Screen Privileges control in Operators screen will store all of the access templates that are created in Operator Privileges screen. Refer the section Operators for details. An access permission template created in Operator Privileges screen can be assigned to as many operators as you wish to. A template does not play any role unless it is assigned to at least one operator.
Accessing Operator Privileges Screen

Click on Administration menu in CardAccess menu bar. Click on Operator Privileges menu item in the list. The Operator Privileges screen will be displayed in Forms Control folder tab as shown in the figure below.
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.1. The Operator Privileges screen.
By default, the system provides five operator privilege templates- System Administrator, Security Officer Etc as shown in the upper half of the screen. All these default templates (and every new template you attempt to create) are offered to you as full access templates. The full access templates will allow an operator to have complete access to all CardAccess menus, buttons and screens. If you wish to create a limited access template, you need to subtract access to selected menus, buttons and screens from the full access templates. This is explained in the following sections.
Operator Privileges
Operator Privileges Folder Tabs

There are three folder tabs in Operator Privileges screen as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 48.2. Operator Privileges folder tabs.
Each of the tabs is explained below. Forms Control Tab Forms Control is the default tab in which Operator Privileges screen is displayed. By default, all menus in CardAccess are completely accessible by any operator who log into the software. If you wish to limit the access of certain menus, you can do so by using the controls provided on Forms Control tab. This tab provides controls that are required to prevent the selected menu/menu item from being used by a given operator, or to change the access permission level of the operator with respect to the selected menu/menu item.
Fig. 48.3. Operator Privileges Forms Control tab. 3
Operator Privileges
The tab consists of Menu Items section that holds a window on the left and four button controls on the right. The buttons controls will be grayed out initially. The window in the Menu Items section gives a listing of all CardAccess menus. By default, all menus will be in collapsed state (consisting of nodes showing + marks). Clicking on a + mark will expand the selected CardAccess menu and the menu items contained in that menu are exposed in a tree form (similar that seen in Windows Explorer). In the figure below, the Access menu list is expanded by clicking on the Access node in Menu Items section.
Fig. 48.4. Access menu list exposed by clicking on Access node.
Note: It is possible that some nodes after expansion may not show all of the menu items as seen in CardAccess GUI. For such of those menu items, separate nodes have been provided in the Menu Items section. You need to scroll down the Menu Items section to find the required menu item. Also, separate nodes have been provided for CardAccess toolbar items. Examples follow. NAPCO Panels is actually a menu item seen under Configuration menu in the CardAccess GUI. But, Configuration node in Menu Items section does not show this menu item. Instead, a separate node called NAPCO has been provided. This applies to several other nodes in the Menu Items section. The figure below highlights a few of such nodes. Separate nodes have also been
Operator Privileges
provided for CardAccess toolbar items. All CardAccess Alerts grid toolbar items are included under Alerts node as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 48.5. Separate nodes for certain CardAccess menu items and toolbar items.
Changes made to a node in the Menu Items section will affect all menu items contained in that node. Whereas, changes made to an individual menu item (that does not have a + mark) will affect only that particular menu item only. Changes to a particular menu/menu item can be made by using the button controls provided on the right side of Menu Items section. The button controls are explained below. The buttons- Disable, View Only, Create Only and Create/Edit represent four states that can be applied to the menu/menu item that is selected in the Menu Items section. Initially, all these buttons are grayed out by default. They will be activated only when you enter the New/Edit modes.
Fig. 48.6. Forms Control buttons disabled by default.
Generally, you will be selecting a menu item in the Menu Items section (by clicking it), and then be clicking on one of the buttons on the right side of Menu Items section. This will apply the state indicated on the button to the selected menu item. The functionality of the individual buttons is detailed below.
Operator Privileges
Disable When this button is applied to a menu (having + mark), most or all of the menu items contained in that menu will be disabled. This is the lowest level of access permission that can be given to a CardAccess menu. A red circle is shown against the menus and menu items that are in Disable state. As an example, let us disable System menu of a particular privilege template. Doing this will disable all of the menu items contained in the System Menu as shown in the figure below. Notice that the red circle is seen against every menu item under System menu.
Fig. 48.7. All System menu items disabled on disabling the System node.
An operator who is assigned the template with the above settings will see all System menu items grayed out in CardAccess GUI except the Log Out button as shown in the figure below.
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.8. All System menu items grayed out except the Log Out option for an operator whose privilege template has System menu disabled.
In this example, the System menu will only allow the operator to Log Out of CardAccess software. This is the lowest level of access permission that can be given to an operator. On the other hand, if Disable button is applied to only a particular menu item, (not having a + mark) only that menu item will be disabled/grayed out. As an example, let us disable System Settings menu item of a particular template. Doing this will disable only this particular menu item as shown in the figure below. Notice that the red circle is seen only for System Settings menu item. All other menu items have three green arrows that allow Create/Edit access permission.
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.9. System Settings menu item disabled.
The CardAccess GUI for such a template will show only System Settings menu item disabled for the operator.
Fig. 48.10. System Settings menu item grayed out for an operator whose privilege template has System Settings item disabled.
Here, the operator can access all System menu items except System Settings.
Operator Privileges
View Only Every menu item of a CardAccess menu is capable of opening a screen in CardAccess GUI. When View Only button is applied to a menu (having + mark) in Menu Items section, the operator will only be allowed to view the screens corresponding to menu items, contained in the selected menu. But he will not have editing privileges on those screens. In other words, he will not have create/edit or delete permissions on those screens. A single green arrow will be seen against the menu items that are in View Only state. As an example, the View Only button is applied to Control menu in the figure below. Notice that the single green arrow is seen against every menu item under Control menu.
Fig. 48.11. Control menu in View Only state.
An operator who is assigned the template with the above settings can only view the screens that each Control menu item opens in CardAccess GUI. But he cannot perform create, edit and delete functions in those screens.
Operator Privileges
Create Only Every menu item of a CardAccess menu is capable of opening a screen in CardAccess GUI. When Create Only button is applied to a menu (having a + mark) in Menu Items section, the operator will be allowed to create new records and delete existing records in the screens corresponding to menu items, contained the selected menu. But he cannot edit the existing records in those screens. Double green arrows will be seen against the menu items that are in Create Only state. As an example, the Create Only button is assigned to Configuration menu in the figure below. Notice that double green arrows are seen against every menu item under Configuration menu.
Fig. 48.12. Configuration menu in Create Only state.
An operator who is assigned the template with the above settings can create new records and delete the existing records in all of the Configuration screens. But he will not be allowed to edit the existing records in those screens.
10
Operator Privileges
Create/Edit This is the default state of all menus and menu items in CardAccess. In this state, the operator can create new records, delete existing records and edit existing records in all screens. This is the highest level of access permission that can be given to an operator. Three green arrows are seen against the menu items that are in Create/Edit state. The figure below shows Forms Control tab in its default state where all menus are in Create/Edit state. Notice that three green arrows are seen against every menu in the Menu Items section.
Fig. 48.13. All menus in Create/Edit default state.
Thus, by default, an operator has complete access to all CardAccess menus. In other words, the operator can create new records, delete existing records and edit all of the existing records in every CardAccess screen.
11
Operator Privileges
Personnel Fields Control Tab By default, all fields and controls in CardAccess Personnel' screen are visible to any operator. If you wish not to show certain Personnel fields/controls to an operator, such controls can be made invisible by using the controls provided on Personnel Fields Control tab.
Fig. 48.14. Personnel Fields Control tab.
The tab consists of Form Fields section that holds a window on the left and three button controls on the right. The buttons will be grayed out initially. Unlike the Menu Items window that consists of several nodes, the Form Fields window consists of only one node called Badges. This node holds all controls of the Personnel screen. The node will be in the collapsed state (consisting of + marks) by default. Clicking on the + mark will give a listing of all Personnel screen controls as shown in the figure below.
12
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.15. Badges node expanded.
Unlike the Menu Items window, the Form Fields window does not allow you to change the state of Badges node as a whole. Here, changes are possible only by selecting the individual Personnel controls, after expanding Badges node. Change of state can be achieved by using the button controls provided on right side of Form Fields section. The button controls are explained below. The buttons- Disable, View Only and Edit represent three states that can be applied to the Personnel screen control selected in the Form Fields section. Initially, all these buttons are grayed out by default. They will be activated only when you enter the New/Edit modes.
Fig. 48.16. Personnel Fields Control buttons disabled by default.
Generally, you will be selecting a Personnel screen control in the Form Fields section (by clicking it), and then be clicking on one of the buttons on the right side of Form Fields section. This will apply the state indicated on the button to
13
Operator Privileges
the Personnel control selected. The functionality of the individual buttons is detailed below. Disable When this button is applied to a Personnel screen control, the control becomes invisible to the concerned operator in Personnel screen. This is the lowest access permission that can be given to an operator, on any control. A red circle is shown against the Personnel screen controls that are in Disable state. As an example, let us disable Badge Modify control of a particular template. Notice that a red circle is seen against this control in the Form Fields section.
Fig. 48.17. Badge Modify button disabled.
An operator who is assigned the template with the above settings will not see the Badge Modify button in Personnel screen toolbar, as shown in the figure below.
14
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.18. Badge Modify button missing in Personnel screen toolbar for an operator whose Privilege template has Badge Modify control disabled.
Hence, in this case, the operator cannot access the Batch Save screen.
View Only When View Only button is applied to a Personnel control, the concerned operator will only be allowed to view the selected control in Personnel screen. But he will not have editing privileges on that particular control. In other words, he cannot add, edit or delete the contents of the selected control. A single green arrow will be seen against the Personnel screen controls that are in View Only state. As an example, the View Only button is applied to Group control as shown in the figure below. Notice that the single green arrow is seen against this control.
15
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.19. Group control set to View Only state.
An operator who is assigned the template with the above settings can only view the data in Group control .But he will not have edit privileges on this control.
Edit This is the default state of all controls in Personnel screen. In this state, the operator can add, view, edit and delete the contents of the selected Personnel control. This is the highest level of access permission that can be given to an operator, on any control. Three green arrows are seen against the Personnel screen controls that are in Edit state. The figure below shows Personnel Fields Control tab in its default state where all of the controls are in Edit state. Notice that three green arrows are seen against every Personnel control under the Badges node.
16
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.20. All Personnel controls in Edit default state.
Thus, by default, an operator has complete access to all Personnel controls. In other words, the operator can add, view, edit and delete the contents of the every control in Personnel screen.
17
Operator Privileges
Database Partitions Tab The general goal of database partitioning is to allow several tenants to share a common database while hiding the CardAccess data viewed by each tenant, from view of the other tenants (possibly unrelated tenants). The term database partitioning is somewhat misleading. The common database is not actually divided in any way. Instead, filtering is used to block the view of records by selected operators.
Fig. 48.21. The Database Partitions tab.
The tab consists of two list windows- Available Groups and Selected Groups as shown in the above figure. The Available Groups window on the left will show the list of all Group Names that have been created previously in the Groups screen. Note: If the Available Groups window does not show any group name, it means that no groups have been created so far. Refer the section Groups to create them. The Selected Groups window on the right will show the list of all groups that are assigned to the selected Operator Privileges template. In figure 48.21, the Selected Groups window is empty as no groups have been assigned to the template yet.
18
Operator Privileges
The arrow button controls that are positioned between the two windows allow you to move the selected groups from one side to the other, and back.
Fig. 48.22. Arrow button controls in Database Partitions tab.
The buttons with the single arrow will move whichever item you select, in the direction of the arrow. The buttons with double arrows will move all items, in the direction of the arrows. Database partitioning in the CardAccess is disabled by default. If database segregation for privacy sharing is an issue, database partitioning can be enabled. Enabling it requires a number of steps as summarized below. To begin with, groups must be set up in the Groups screen (refer the sections Groups). What groups are created and how they are assigned is completely under the control of the CardAccess administrator. How many and which category of groups one will choose to create, depends on how you wish to apply the database partitioning. It is possible to create nine different categories of Groups (and an unlimited number per group) using the various tabs provided in Groups screen, as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 48.23. Folder tabs provided for nine different categories in Groups screen.
If you wish to implement full database partitioning, you have to create some number of groups in each of the nine different categories in Groups screen. You also have the option of implementing partial database partitioning.
19
Operator Privileges
You can elect to create groups in only one or more categories (say, Personnel groups only). Once you have created groups, database partitioning cannot be activated unless those groups are assigned to at least one of the nine categories (say Panels, Access Groups, Time Schedules, Personnel, DVR Cameras etc). Hence, you need to visit the screen corresponding to the category chosen, and apply groups to the selected items in the screen (Panels, Access Groups, Time Schedules, Personnel screen etc). The figure below highlights the Group control in Panels screen. The same control can be found in the other screens as well.
Fig. 48.24. The Panels General Tab Group Control
Note the following rules regarding groups and database partitioning. o If an Operator Privilege has no Groups Assigned in the Selected Groups window of Database Partitions tab That operator can see all screens irrespective of the groups assigned to each screen. This includes all screens that have no groups assigned as well. o If an Operator Privilege has Groups Assigned in the Selected Groups window of Database Partitions tab That operator can see only those screens that are assigned the groups seen in Selected Groups window AND all screens that have no groups assigned. If you wish to ensure that no operator must be able to see all screens, you must assign groups to each of the nine categories AND you must assign
20
Operator Privileges
every operator an operator privilege template that is assigned some group(s) seen in the Selected Groups window of the Database Partitions tab. Note: If you intend to create an Operator Privileges template that has full access to all of the CardAccess screens and data, you only need to accept all of the default settings. Full access is granted by default. Any changes that you make to a given template will be for the purpose of taking away access permissions.
21
Operator Privileges
Creating an Operator Privilege Template

Follow the steps below to create an Operator Privilege template. 1. Open Operator Privileges screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Privileges menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in Forms Control tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 48.25. Operator Privileges screen in Forms Control tab.
22
Operator Privileges
Observe that five templates are already available for your usage. All these default templates offer complete access to all CardAccess menus, Personnel fields and all of the CardAccess data. Click on New button in the toolbar to create a new Operator Privilege template. Note that when you click the New button, the system creates the default privilege template 6 (observe the Priv No control showing the number 6) offering complete access, similar to the five default templates already available to you. Notice the keyboard cursor blinking in the Privilege field. Note: If you like the template to have complete access, the default settings need to be retained. In this case only steps 3, 7 and 8 need to be followed. On the other hand, if you like this template to have limited access, you need to subtract access to selected menus, buttons and screens. This requires you to follow all of the steps below. 2. In the Privilege field, type a descriptive name for the template being created. In the figure below, we have named the template as Guard.
Fig. 48.26. Naming the Operator Privilege template.
3. This step can be followed if you wish to limit the access permissions of the default template (Guard in our case) to CardAccess menus/ menu items. The Forms control tab (the default tab in which Operator Privileges is displayed) provides the controls required to achieve this.
23
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.27. The Forms Control tab.
The Menu Items section of the tab lists all the menus seen in CardAccess software. The menus are provided with nodes. The nodes will be in the collapsed state (showing + mark) by default as shown in the above figure. On clicking a node, the menu items contained in the selected menu are exposed. In order to change the access permissions of the menus/menu items, four button controls are provided on the right side of Menu items section. Placing the mouse cursor over the buttons will briefly indicate the function that each button performs. Generally, a menu/ menu item will be selected in the Menu Items section (by clicking it), and then one of the buttons on the right side of Menu Items section will be used to apply the state indicated on the button, to the selected menu item. Note: Changes made to a menu (showing + mark) will affect all of the menu items contained in that menu. Whereas, changes made to an individual menu item (that does not have + mark) will affect that particular menu item only. The functions of the buttons are summarized in the table below.
24
Operator Privileges
Attribute
Function Makes the selected menu item invisible
Takes away the New and Edit buttons but lets the operator look at the screen in question. Takes away the Edit button on the screen in question, allowing the operator to create new records, but not edit the existing records. Allows full access. The New and Edit buttons are available on the screen in question.
Table. 48.28. Button controls in Menu Items section.
Follow the steps below to change the Access Permission of menus/Menu Items. o Scroll up/down the Menu Items section to locate the desired menu. If you wish to change the access permission of the entire menu, click the menu name (menus are those that show + mark). Note: Changes made to a menu will affect all menu items contained in that menu. If you intend to change the access permission of only a particular menu item under a menu, then, click on the + sign of the menu to view the list of the menu items it contains, scroll up/down to locate the desired menu item, and then click on it.
25
Operator Privileges
o Depending on the access permission you wish to grant to the selected menu/menu item, click on the appropriate button for executing the function it performs. In the figure below, we have disabled Administration menu for Guard template. Observe that the red circle is seen against every menu item under Administration menu.
Fig. 48.29. Administration menu disabled for Guard privilege template.
Thus, Administration menu will appear as below for an operator who is assigned Guard privilege template with the above settings.
26
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.30. CardAccess Administration menu of an operator whose privilege template has Administration menu disabled.
Note: In the above figure, Operator Instructions and Operator Instruction Links menu items are not disabled. This is because, these menu items are included under a separate node called OperatorInstrcutions (in Forms Control Menu Items section), which still remains enabled. Similarly, the default access permission of other CardAccess menus/menu items can be changed as desired. 4. This step can be followed if you wish to limit the access permissions of the default template (Guard in our case) to the Personnel screen controls. The Personnel Fields Control tab provides the required controls to achieve this. Click on Personnel Fields Control tab. You will see that the Form Fields section of the tab consists of a node called Badges. This node will be in the collapsed state (showing a + mark) by default.
27
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.31. The Personnel Fields Control tab.
On clicking the Badges node, all the Personnel screen controls are exposed. In order to change the access permissions of the Personnel screen controls, three buttons are provided on the right side of Form Fields section. Placing the mouse cursor over the buttons will briefly indicate the function that each button performs. Generally, a Personnel screen control will be selected in the Form Fields section (by clicking it), and then one of the buttons on the right side of Form Fields section will be used to apply the state indicated on the button, to the selected Personnel screen control. Note: Unlike the Menu Items window, the Form Fields window does not allow you to change the state of Badges node as a whole. In order to change the states, the Personnel controls have to be selected individually. The functions of the buttons are summarized in the table below.
28
Operator Privileges
Attribute
Result Makes the selected Personnel control invisible. Takes away the New and Edit buttons but lets the operator look at the screen in question. Allows full access. The New and Edit buttons are available on the screen.
Table. 48.32. Button controls in Form Fields section.
Follow the steps below to change the access permission of Personnel controls. o Click on Badges node to view the list of Personnel screen controls. o Scroll up/down to locate the desired control, and click on it. o Depending on the access permission you wish to grant to the selected control, click on the appropriate button for executing the function it performs. In the figure below we have disabled the SSN control for Guard template. Observe that the red circle is seen against SSN control in Form Fields section.
Fig. 48.33. SSN Personnel field disabled for Guard privilege template.
29
Operator Privileges
Thus, the Personnel screen of an operator who is assigned Guard privilege template with the above settings, will not show the Soc. Sec # field in Personal tab, as highlighted in the figure below.
Fig. 48.34. Soc Sec # field disabled for an operator whose privilege template has SSN menu item disabled.
Similarly, the default access permission of other the Personnel controls can be changed as necessary. 5. This step can be followed if you wish to assign Groups to the template for the purpose of database partitioning (Refer the heading Database Partitions Tab for details on database partitioning). Click on Database Partitions tab. You will see that the tab consists of two windows- Available Groups and Selected Groups. Groups can be assigned to the template by moving some or all of the group names listed in the Available Groups window, into the Selected Groups window.
30
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.35. The Database Partitions tab.
Note: The Available Groups window will list all Groups that are previously created in Groups screen. If the window does not show any group name, it means that, no groups have been created so far. Refer the section Groups to create then. If you wish to assign all of the Available Groups to the template in question, click on the double-right arrow button.
Fig.48.36. Double-right arrow button to move all Available Groups into Selected Groups window.
If you wish to assign only selected groups to the template, click on the single- right arrow button.
Fig.48.37. Single-right arrow button to move only selected Groups.
6. Once the folder tabs are configured as explained above, click on Save button in the toolbar to save the template settings. 7. Click on Close button to close the screen.
31
Operator Privileges
Editing an Operator Privilege Template

Follow the steps below to edit an operator privilege template. Open Operator Privileges screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Privileges menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in Forms Control tab. In the upper half of the screen, locate the privilege template you wish to edit, and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the template using the controls in the folder tabs Forms Control, Personnel Fields Control and Database Partitions. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
Deleting an Operator Privilege Template

Open Operators Privileges screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Privileges menu options in CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, locate the privilege template you wish to delete, and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, one of the two message boxes will be displayed under the conditions explained below. a) If the selected privilege template has been assigned to an operator, the message box shown below will be displayed.
32
Operator Privileges
Fig. 48.38. Message box displayed if the selected template is assigned to an operator.
In this case, the selected template cannot be deleted. In other words, to delete a template, it must not be assigned to any operator. So, click on Ok button after reading the message in the box. b) If the selected privilege template is not assigned to any operator, the message box shown below will be displayed.
Fig. 48.39. Message box displayed if the selected template is not assigned to any operator.
After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
33
Operator Privileges
Operator Privileges Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 48.40. Operator Privileges screen navigation bar.
The Operator Privileges screen navigation bar can be found just above the Priv No control in the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked privilege templates in the screen. In figure 48.40, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first privilege template in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last template in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted privilege template. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the template previous to the currently highlighted privilege template. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the template appearing after the currently highlighted privilege template. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first template in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted privilege template.
34
Operator Privileges
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last privilege template in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted privilege template. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked privilege template.
35
Archive and Restore Data
Archive & Restore Data

The Archive Configuration and Events screen is used to transfer Configuration/ Events data from CardAccess main database to an archive database. The resulting archive database is immediately usable as it is a fully functioning exact copy of the CardAccess main database. The screen also allows restoration of the configuration data from archive database. Before you can transfer Configuration/ Events data, you must first create an empty, CardAccess compatible database. This can be done by using CardAccess 3000 Database Utilities program available in CardAccess 3000 Tools folder. Refer the document CardAccess 3000 Database Configuration for creating a new archive database. Archive database once created can be used for various functions with the help of Archive Configuration and Events screen
Accessing Archive Configuration and Events screen

Follow the steps below: 1. Click on System menu in CardAccess menu bar. 2. Click on Archive Data menu item.
Fig. 22.1. Archive Data option in System menu list.
Note: Archive Data menu item will be displayed in System menu list only on CardAccess Host PC. Upon clicking, Archive Configuration and Events screen will be displayed as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 22.2. The Archive Configuration and Events screen.
The screen has two main tabs namely Archive and Restore. By default, the screen will open in Archive tab as shown in the figure above.
Archive tab
The Archive Configuration and Events screen in Archive tab provides two sub tabs namely Configuration and Events (refer figure xxx). The two subtabs are explained in detail below.
Configuration tab
The configuration tab is used for archiving configuration data from CardAccess main database to an archive database. This is explained below.
Archiving Configuration Data

Follow the steps below to archive the configuration data: 1. Make sure Archive tab is selected at the top of the screen. If it is not selected, click on the tab to select it.
Fig. 23.1. Archive tab selected for archiving configuration data.
2. Select the desired Destination Server and Database names from the respective drop down boxes.
Fig. 23.2. Selecting Destination Server and Database names by clicking the down arrows.
In the above figure, ARUNLPT and CIDATA_ARCHIVE are selected as the Destination Server and Database names respectively.
Note: If no name is seen in the Database drop down list, a new database must be created for archiving purposes. Refer the document CardAccess 3000 Database Configuration for creating a new archive database. The Destination Server and Database names selected will be displayed on the status bar seen at the bottom of the screen.
Fig. 23.3. Status bar showing the selected Destination Server and Database names.
3. Make sure Configuration tab is selected. If it is not selected, click on the tab to select it.
Fig. 23.4. Configuration tab selected for archiving configuration data from CardAccess main database.
4. Select the configuration items you wish to archive. This can be done in two ways as below: Clicking on All check box to select all items. Clicking the individual check boxes to select only desired items.
Fig. 23.5. Selecting all Configuration items for archiving by clicking the All check box.
5. Click on Archive Data button in the toolbar to archive the configuration items selected.
Fig. 23.6. Clicking on Archive Data button to archive the configuration items selected.
Upon clicking the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 23.7. Message box displayed after clicking Archive Data button.
Note: Before you click on Yes/No button in the above message box, make sure you have chosen the correct Destination Database as pre-existing configuration data in the Destination Database will be overwritten during archiving. 6. Click on Yes button in the message box after confirming the Destination Database. Upon clicking the screen will show the progress of Configuration Data archive.
Fig. 23.8. Progress of Configuration data archive.
After Archiving is complete, the message box below will be displayed.
Fig. 23.9. Message box displayed after archiving is complete.
7. Click on OK button in the message box to acknowledge the completion of archive. The final screen will show the details of archiving as highlighted in the figure below.
7
Fig. 23.10. Final screen showing details of Configuration Data Archive.
The above figure shows that configuration data has been transferred from CIDATA, the CardAccess main database, to CIDATA_ARCHIVE, the archive database. 8. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
Fig. 23.11. The Close button.
Events tab
The Events tab can be used to perform the following two functions: Archive events from the CardAccess main database. Archive events from CardAccess databases other than the main CardAccess database. The Alternate Source check box is provided for this function. The functions are explained in detail below.
Archiving Events from CardAccess Main Database

Follow the steps below to archive events from CardAccess main database: a) Make sure Archive tab is selected at the top of the screen. If it is not selected, click on the tab to select it.
Fig. 24.1. Archive tab selected for archiving events from CardAccess main database.
b) Select the desired Destination Server and Database names from the respective drop down boxes.
Fig. 24.2. Selecting Destination Server and Database names by clicking the down arrows.
In the above figure, ARUNLPT and CIDATA_ARCHIVE are selected as the Destination Server and Database names respectively.
Note: If no name is seen in the Database drop down list, a new database must be created for archiving purposes. Refer the document CardAccess 3000 Database Configuration for creating a new archive database. The Destination Server and Database names selected will be displayed on the status bar seen at the bottom of the screen.
Fig. 24.3. Status bar showing the selected Destination Server and Database names.
c) Click on Events tab.
10
Fig. 24.4. Events tab selected for archiving CardAccess events.
Note: The Include Photos in Archive check box will be selected by default as shown in figure 24.4. Check box when selected will allow archiving of the associated event photos, when events are archived. It is recommended that the box is checked. In case you do not prefer Photo archiving, deselect the check box by clicking on it. The Alternate Source check box in Events tab (refer figure 24.4) is used when events are archived from databases other than the CardAccess main database. This is explained under the heading Archiving Events from an Alternate Source.
11
d) Select the desired radio button control in the Backup Period area.
Fig. 24.5. Radio button controls for archiving events from CardAccess main database.
The radio button controls are explained below.
Prior To By default, the Prior To radio button will be selected, and will display the current date as shown in figure 24.5. The default Date in the control can be changed as desired. This can be done in 2 ways as below: By clicking directly on the numbers which require to be changed in mm/dd/yyyy date format and typing in a date of choice.
Fig. 24.6. Date in Prior To area requiring a new date entry is highlighted by clicking on it.
By using the calendar to choose a desired date. This can be done by following the steps below: o Click the calendar button (numbered as 15) found on the right side of Prior To control. Upon clicking, a calendar window of the current month and year will be opened with the current date in highlight.
12
Note: Double left/right arrows and single left/right are provided at the top of the screen to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of a year to aid desired date selection. o Click on a desired date in the calendar. All events prior to the date displayed in the Prior To control will be archived and purged from the CardAccess main database. All Events The All Events radio button is not selected by default. Selection of this radio button will archive and purge all events from the CardAccess main database.
Fig. 24.8. Selecting All Events radio button to archive all of the events from CardAccess main database.
Clicking on All Events control will gray out the date display in Prior To control as shown in the above figure.
13
e) Click on Archive Data button in the toolbar to archive the events. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 24.9. Message box displayed after clicking the Archive Data button.
Note: Before you click on Yes/No button in the above message box, make sure you have chosen the correct Destination Database. Events archive process will include AUDIT TRAIL archive also. This information is made known by a message box display after the completion of archive. Refer figure 24.11 for the message box. For details on Audit Trail, refer the section Audit Trail in the manual.
f) Click on Yes button in the message box after confirming the Destination Database. Upon clicking, the screen will show the progress of archiving Events.
14
Fig. 24.10. Progress of archiving events from CardAccess main database.
After Archiving is complete, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 24.11. Message box displayed after events and Autdit Trail archive is complete.
g) Click on OK button in the message box to acknowledge the completion of archive. h) Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
15
Archiving Events from an Alternate Source

Events tab provides the Alternate source check box to control the archiving of events from databases other than the CardAccess main database. Archiving of events from an Alternate Source Database is carried out as below: Follow steps a c mentioned under the heading Archiving Events from CardAccess Main Database. Check the Alternate Source check box by clicking on it.
Fig. 25.1. Alternate Source box checked in order to archive events from an Alternate Source Database.
Select the Alternate Source Server and Database names from the respective drop down boxes.
16
Fig. 25.2. Alternate Source Server and Database names selected from the respective drop down lists.
CIData132 selected in the above figure is an Alternate Source Database. Select the desired radio button control in the Backup Period area.
Fig. 25.3. Radio buttons controls for archiving events from the Alternate Source database.
The radio button controls in are explained below.
Prior To By default, Prior To radio button will be selected, and will display the current date as shown in figure 25.3. The default Date in the control can be changed as desired. This can be done in 2 ways: By clicking directly on the numbers which require to be changed in mm/dd/yyyy date format and typing in a date of choice.
17
Fig. 25.4. Date in Prior To area requiring a new date entry is highlighted by clicking on it.
By using the calendar to choose a desired date. This can be done by following the steps below: o Click the calendar button (numbered as 15) found on the right side of Prior To control. Upon clicking, the calendar of current month and year will open up with the current date in highlight.
Note: Double left/right arrows and single left/right are provided at the top of the screen to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of a year to aid desired date selection. o Click on a desired date in the calendar. All events prior to the date displayed in Prior To control will be archived and purged from the Alternate Source database.
18
All Events The All Events radio button is not selected by default. Selection of this radio button will archive and purge all events from the Alternate source database.
Fig. 25.6. Selecting All Events radio button to archive all of the events from the Alternate Source database.
Clicking on All Events control will gray out the date displayed in Prior To control as shown in the above figure. Click on Archive Data button in the toolbar to archive the events. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 25.7. Message box displayed after clicking Archive Data button.
Note: o Before you click Yes/No in the above message box, make sure you have chosen the correct destination database. o Events archive process will include AUDIT TRAIL archive also. This information is made known by a message box display after the completion of archive. Refer figure 25.9 for the message box. For details on Audit Trail, refer the section Audit Trail in the manual.
19
Click on Yes button in the message box after confirming the destination database. Upon clicking, the screen will show the progress of Archiving events from the Alternate Source Database.
Fig. 25.8. Progress of archiving events from the Alternate Source database.
After Archiving is complete, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 25.9. Message box displayed after events and Autdit Trail archive is complete.
20
Click on OK button in the message box to acknowledge the completion of archive. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
21
Restore Tab
In the event of CardAccess main database crash, it may become necessary to restore configuration data from the archive database. This can be achieved in the Restore tab. A click on Restore tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 26.1. Archive Configuration and Events screen in Restore tab.
Archive Configuration and Events screen in Restore tab provides the Configuration sub-tab. Notice the absence of Events tab in the above figure. Thus, it is possible to restore only configuration data. CardAccess Events although archived, cannot be restored from the archive database.
22
Restoring Configuration Data

Follow the steps below to restore configuration data: Make sure Restore tab is selected at the top of the screen. If it is not selected, click on the tab to select it.
Fig. 26.2. Restore tab selected for restoring the configuration data.
Select the Source Server and Database names from the respective drop down boxes.
Fig. 26.3. Selecting the Source Server and Database names by clicking the down arrows.
In the above figure, ARUNLPT and CIDATA_ARCHIVE are selected as the Source Server and Database names respectively.
Note: If no name is seen in the Database drop down list, a new database must be created for archiving purposes. Refer the document CardAccess 3000 Database Configuration for creating a new archive database. The Source Server and Database names selected will be displayed on the status bar seen at the bottom of the screen.
23
Fig. 26.4. Status bar showing the selected Source Server and Database names.
Select the configuration items you wish to restore. This can be done in two ways as below: o Clicking on All check box to select all items. o Clicking the individual check boxes to select only desired items.
Fig. 26.5. Selecting all configuration items for restoration by clicking the All check box.
Click on Restore Data button in the toolbar to restore the configuration items selected.
Fig. 26.6. Clicking on Restore Data button to restore the configuration items selected.
24
Upon clicking the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 26.7. Message box displayed after clicking Restore Data button.
Note: Before you click on Yes/No in the message box above, make sure you have chosen the correct source database as the existing configuration data in main Database will be overwritten during the restore process. Click on Yes button in the message box after confirming the source database. Upon clicking, the screen will show the progress of restoring Configuration Data.
25
Fig. 26.8. Progress of restoring Configuration data.
After restoration is complete, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 26.9. Message box displayed after data restoration is complete.
Click on OK button in the message box to acknowledge the completion of data restoration.
26
The final screen will show the details of data restoration as highlighted in the figure below.
Fig. 26.10. Final screen showing details of configuration data restore.
The above screen shows that Configuration data has been restored from CIDATA_ARCHIVE back to CardAccess main database. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
27
Audit Trail
Audit Trail
The Audit Trail screen allows viewing of system changes made in CardAccess such as logging in/out, configuration changes, adding/ deleting Personnel records etc. Every change made to CardAccess database is recorded in the Audit Trail table. The screen has controls that allow connection to any CardAccess SQL database. The Audit Trail data is archived hourly along with the autoarchive of events.
Accessing Audit Trail Screen

Click on System menu in CardAccess menu bar. Click on Audit Trail option in the menu list. Upon clicking, the Audit Trail screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 29.1. Audit Trail screen showing the system changes of CardAccess main database CIDATA.
Audit Trail
By default, the Audit Trial screen will display the system changes made in CardAccess main database (CIDATA in the above figure). The status bar at the bottom of the screen will show the currently connected CardAccess SQL server and database names.
Fig. 29.2. Status bar showing the CardAccess SQL server and main database names.
Viewing Audit trail data of an archive database is explained in the section titled Viewing Audit Trail of an Archive Database.
Audit Trail Columns
Fig. 29.3. Audit Trail columns shown by reducing the default column widths.
The changes made to the database are recorded in the columns of the Audit Trail screen. The columns are explained below: 1. Occurred On: This column shows the date and time at which a change was made. 2. Description: This column gives a short description of the change made. 3. Action: This column indicates the type of action involved in the change. 4. Operator Name: This column shows the name of the operator who made the change. 5. Station Name: This column shows the name of the station from which the change was made. 6. Table Name: This column shows the database table name that was affected by the change.
2
Audit Trail

All the columns shown in figure 29.1 may not be visible on the Audit Trail screen by default. If more information is desired on the screen, the Column widths need to be adjusted. Steps for adjusting a column width: 1. Select a column: Select the column whose width is to be adjusted. 2. Position mouse cursor: Position mouse cursor on the intersection line of the selected column and its adjacent until you see a double arrow form. 3. Click and hold: Hold down the left mouse button. 4. Drag: Drag the intersection line to a desired position. 5. Release: Release the cursor The columns will revert back to their default widths when the screen is reopened.
Column Relocation
Columns can be relocated if desired. Steps for relocating a column: 1. Select the column: Select the column to be relocated. 2. Position the Cursor: Position mouse cursor on the column name. 3. Click and Hold: Hold down the left mouse button. 4. Drag the Column: Drag the column to the required position. 5. Release: Release the mouse button.
Audit Trail
The columns will revert back to their default positions when the screen is reopened.
Audit Trail Sort Order

By default, the Audit Trail data is sorted according to Occurred On column. This column allows the records to be sorted according to the date and time at which the changes were made. However, any column can be used for sorting the Audit Trail data. The sort criterion can be changed by clicking on the column name you desire to use for sorting. The sort column will be highlighted in yellow color. A column can be sorted in ascending/descending orders alternately by clicking on the column name. Upward/downward arrows seen in the column name (in yellow highlight) represent ascending/descending sort orders respectively.
Fig. 29.4. Action column used for sorting in ascending order.
Audit Trail Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 29.5. The Audit Trail navigation bar.
The Audit Trail navigation bar can be found just above the status bar at the bottom of the screen. The arrows of Audit Trail navigation bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked records in the screen. In figure 29.5, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows:
Audit Trail
Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first record of the grid. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted record. Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record of the grid. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked record.
Audit Trail
Viewing Audit Trail of an Archive Database

By default, the Audit Trail screen will display Audit Trail data of CardAccess main database (refer figure 29.1). In order to Audit Trail data of an archive database, follow the steps below. Firstly, click the down arrow of Server control to display the list of CardAccess SQL server names. Among the names, click the server name of the archive database whose Audit Trail data you wish to view.
Fig. 29.6. Selecting a server name in the drop down list.
Click the down arrow of Database control to display the list of archive databases. Note: Database names will be seen in the drop down list only when a server is selected in the Server control. Among the names, click the database name whose Audit Trail data you wish to view.
Fig. 29.7. Selecting a database name to view the Audit Trail data.
Upon clicking, the Audit Trail screen will display the Audit Trail data of the archive database selected.
Audit Trail
Fig. 29.8. Audit Trail data of archive database selected.
Note: After connecting to the archive database, the status bar will display the archive database name as highlighted in the above figure.
Printing Audit Trail

Follow the steps below to print the Audit Trail data: Open the Audit Trail screen by clicking on System->Audit Trail. Click on Print Button in Audit Trail screen toolbar. Note: The Print button will be enabled only when a Report Printer is selected in the System Settings screen. To select a Report Printer, refer the heading Printers tab in the section CardAccess 3000 System Settings.
Backup and Restore Database

The CardAccess Database Backup/ Restore utility is used to Backup and Restore the entire CardAccess database. During the Backup process, the database will be backed up to a data file (.dat extension). The same data file is used to restore the database when need arises. Backup and Restore functions are necessary to recover from disasters like database crash.
Database Backup
Follow the steps below to backup a database: 1. Run the CardAccess Database Backup/Restore utility by clicking C:\Program Files\CardAccess 3000\Tools\CABackup.exe in succession. By default, the screen will open in the Backup tab.
Fig. 27.1. The CardAccess Database Backup/Restore utitlity in Backup tab.
2. Make sure that the Backup tab is selected at the top of the screen as shown in figure 27.1. If it is not selected, click on the tab to select it. 3. Click the down arrow of Database control and select the database in the list you want to backup. The list includes all database names that are taken from the SQL server on your local machine
Fig. 27.2. CaDBMain database chosen for backup action.
Note: Database selections are limited to the local SQL server only. You cannot select databases that are not installed on the PC you are working from. 4. In the Name control, you have to enter a name for the data file that will be created during the backup of the selected database.
Fig. 27.3. Backup data file named as CaDBMain_Backup.
Note The name you enter should not contain spaces or special characters. After backup action is completed, a data file (in .dat format), having the same name as entered in the Name control will be stored in the Destination Directory you select in the next step. The Backup file having the same name entered in the Name control must be selected in the OPEN Database backup file
dialog (refer figure 28.5), during the restoration of the backed up database. 5. By default, the data file will be stored in c:\ as shown in figure 27.1. You can change the Destination Directory by clicking the Select Directory button.
Fig. 27.4. The Select Directory button used to change the default directory of backupfile.
Upon clicking, the Browse For Folder dialog will be opened. Using this dialog, you can change the default directory by navigating to a desired folder.
Fig. 27.5. Browse for folder used for choosing a desired directory.
We recommend the data file be saved in C:\Program Files\CardAccess 3000\Backup folder as shown in the above figure.
Click the OK button in Browse For Folder dialog after selecting the desired directory. Upon clicking, the CardAccess Database Backup/Restore utility will show the changed directory as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 27.6. The Destination directory for CaDBMain_Backup file.
6. Click on Backup button seen at the bottom of the screen for backup action to take place.
Fig. 27.7. The Backup button.
Upon clicking, the Confirm dialog will be displayed as below.
Fig. 27.8. Confirm dialog displayed after clicking Backup button.
7. After confirming that no user is connected to CaDBMain database, click on OK button in the Confirm dialog.
Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 27.9. Message box displayed after backup action is complete.
8. Click on OK button to acknowledge the completion of backup action. 9. Click on Close button (next to Backup button) to close the screen.
Database Restore
Database restoration requires that the backed up database (CaDBMain in our case) be detached from the SQL Server. The backed up database can be detached in the Detach tab of CardAccess 3000 Database Utilities screen as shown below.
Fig. 28.1. CaDBMain detached in CardAccess 3000 Database Utilities screen to perform restore action.
For more information on detaching database, refer the section Detaching a Database in the document CardAccess 3000 Database Configuration. Follow the steps below after detaching the backed up database: 1. Open CardAccess Database Backup/ Restore utility by clicking C:\Program Files\CardAccess 3000\Tools\CABackup.exe in succession. By default, the screen will open in the Backup tab. 2. Click on Restore tab.
Fig. 28.2. The CardAccess Database Backup/Restore screen in Restore tab.
3. Click the down arrow of Restore as Database control and select the database name in the list, into which, you want to restore the database that was backed up earlier (we had backed up CaDBMain database). The list includes all database names, taken from the SQL server on your local machine.
Fig. 28.3. Choosing CaDBMain2 database for restoring CaDBMain database that was backed up.
Note
Database selections are limited to the local SQL server only. You cannot select databases that are not installed on the PC you are working from. The Restore action is destructive. It will overwrite all data present in the database you are restoring into (in our case CaDBMain2). 4. Click on Browse button.
Fig. 28.4. The Browse button used for opening the database backup file.
Upon clicking, the OPEN Database backup file dialog will be displayed. The dialog will contain the list of all backup data files.
Fig. 28.5. The OPEN Database backup file dialog.
5. In the OPEN Database backup file dialog, click on the backup data file you named while backing up the database, that you are now restoring. We had named the backup data file as CaDBMain_Backup. Refer figure 27.3.
Fig. 28.6. Selecting the backup data file name specified in figure 27.3 while backing up CaDBMain database.
6. Click on Open button in OPEN Database backup file dialog after selecting the correct backup data file.
Fig. 28.7. Open button in OPEN Database backup file dialog.
The Restore database from field of CardAccess Database Backup/Restore utility will now display the directory of the backup data file selected in previous step.
Fig. 28.8. Directory of the backup data file displayed in CardAccess Database Backup/Restore utility.
Note: The directory displayed in the Restore database from field for the database being restored will match the destination directory, selected while backing up the same database. Here, directory in figure 28.8 matches with the directory in figure 27.6. 7. Click on Restore button seen at the bottom of the screen. Upon clicking, the Confirm dialog will be displayed as shown below.
Fig. 28.9. Confirm dialog displayed after clicking on Restore button.
10
Note: The Restore action is destructive. It will overwrite all data present in the database you are restoring into. 8. After confirming the database selection in the Restore as database field, click on Yes button in the Confirm dialog. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 28.10. Message box displayed after restore action is complete.
9. Click on OK button to acknowledge the completion of database restoration. 10. Click on Close button (next to Restore button) to close the screen.
11
Badge Formats
Badge Formats
Badge formats are not pre-programmed into the Continental access control panels. The formats are created in the Badge Formats screen of the CardAccess software, and then downloaded (as serial data) to the panels. Once the formats are stored at the panels, the panels will be programmed to recognize the badge format types.
Accessing Badge Formats Screen

Click on Administration menu in CardAccess main menu bar. Click on Badge Formats menu item in the list. Upon clicking, the Badge Formats screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 60.1. The Badge Formats screen.
A few standard formats are preprogrammed into the Badge Formats screen (see the records in upper half of figure 60.1 above). These formats can be used without the need to create badge formats from scratch.
Badge Formats
On the other hand, the CardAccess system designer can design and implement a completely unique badge format as well. The system will allow you to design badge formats from scratch, program these formats onto cards, and have the access panels recognize the proprietary formats. A general discussion on Badge Formats follows below.
What is a Badge Format?

In order to understand badge formats, we must first look at what actually happens when the system reads a badge. An access control system typically, has some kind of card reader connected through wires to an access control panel, and that panel is in turn connected through wires to a computer. In the case of Continental Instruments designed access control systems, the panel is programmed with local intelligence. It is the panel that locally makes all of the decisions on who will gain access through a given door. The PC connection mostly exists to receive history and status messages from the panel about what access attempts have taken place. The access scenario most often seen at an entry door is, a cardholder steps up to a reader with an access card, and presents that card to a card reader. But what is actually happening at the reader? How does the reader get data from the badge? (For the purpose of this discussion, we assume that the card type used is designed to match the reader type used. That is, we get a successful read each time). Every access card is encoded with some kind of data string. Essentially, some information is programmed into the card, and that information is dumped to the reader when the card is presented to the appropriate reader type. The reader (somehow) activates the card (the technology used to activate the card varies with the reader and card design) and the data content of that card is dumped to the reader memory (the card activates, dumps its data contents, then shuts off). The reader then forwards that data stream to the panel, which evaluates it. The data that is actually sent from the card to the reader is an unintelligible string of data bits that looks like figure 60.2 below.
Badge Formats
101110111000111110000111110101111111 Fig. 60.2. A typical string of card data bits from a 36 bit format.
It is the badge format that gives description to this meaningless string of data bits. The badge format tells the panel how to divide the data bits into several logical (sub) groups of bits. Each sub- group of data bits is assigned a meaning, which is defined by the badge format. At this point, its helpful to look at the type of information that gets conveyed from the badge to the access control panel. What things might we want to know about a badge holder from the data stream on his access card? The answer to that question will define a badge format. The total number of bits needed on the badge will depend on how many data fields are needed on that badge. As an example, let us examine the (standard) 36-bit format. Embedded in this format are a Facility Code (16 bits), a Badge Number (16 bits) and an Issue Level (2 bits). Notice that we have not accounted for two bits out of the 36 total bits (16 badge number bits+ 16 facility code bits+ 2 issue level bits= 34 bits only). The first bit and the last bit of this format are part of a checking calculation. We will discuss how this calculation is performed later in the manual section.
P FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB I I P
Fig. 60.3. 36 Bit (Weigand) Format.
In figure 60.3 above, the 36-bit format graphic shown is divided into five subsections. The system knows to parse the bit stream into the subsections shown above, because that information is programmed into the Badge Formats screen (see figure 60.4 below). The 36 bit example we have been discussing is taken from the actual badge Format 1 which is one of the predefined badge formats that Continental has created for you. Figure 60.4 is a picture of the definition for Format 1, from the Badge Formats screen.
Badge Formats
Fig. 60.4. 36- bit format.
The controls seen in figure 60.4 are explained below. Format No The Format No control will show the number assigned to the badge format in question.
Fig. 60.5. The Format No field.
Note: A maximum of 10 badge formats are allowed in the screen. Name The Name field is used to enter a descriptive text label you wish to give to the badge format in question.
Badge Formats
Badge Format Type Four badge format types are available for selection in the Badge Formats screen. Selection can be made by clicking the down arrow to the right of Badge Format Type control, and then clicking on a desired format type.
Fig. 60.7. The available badge format types in CardAccess software.
Each of the format types is briefly explained below. a) ABA ABA is a format type created by the American Banking Association. b) Non ABA A format not adhering to the ABA standard. c) Insertion A bi-directional format designed to be used with swipe or Insertion type readers. d) Key - A format designed to be used with Weigand key badges. Bit/Char Length Non-ABA badge formats are decoded as bits. Whereas, the ABA formats are decoded as characters. The Bit/Char Length control is used to specify the total number bits or characters present in a given badge format.
Fig. 60.8. The Bit/Char Length control.
Badge Formats
For non-ABA formats you will enter the number of bits, and for ABA formats, you will enter the number of characters in this control. All Types Section The All Types section provides controls for specifying the string location (Offset) and the length of the Badge ID, Facility and the Issue that are fixed for a particular badge format. For information on string Length and Offset, refer the heading Bit Position, Offset and Length.
Fig. 60.9. The All Types section.
Note: The length of Badge ID, Facility and Issue for non-ABA formats must be specified as number of bits. Whereas, the length for ABA formats must be specified as number of characters. Non ABA Type Section The Non ABA Type section will be visible when the badge format in question is of Non-ABA type.
Fig. 60.10. The Non ABA Type section.
Badge Formats
This section provides controls for specifying the string location (offset) and the length for Even and Odd Parity calculations, for a particular Non-ABA type badge format. Refer the heading Parity Calculation for more information. ABA Types Section The ABA Types section will be visible when the badge format in question is of ABA type.
Fig. 60.11. The ABA Types section.
This section provides controls for specifying the string location (offset) and the characters for Start Sentinel, End Sentinel and the Field Separator characters seen on a particular ABA badge format. Bit Position, Offset and Length The terms Bit Position, Offset and Length can be explained with the help of figures 60.12 and 60.13 below. Both figures 60.12 and 60.13 below depict the same 36-bit format. Both figures are identical except for the bit position numbering method used. Figure 60.12 shows the count of bits from left to right numbered sequentially, starting with the leftmost bit as bit #1. Figure 60.13 is also numbered sequentially from left to right, but the count starts at 0. The reason for this is that, in the bit offset method of counting bits, the leftmost bit (bit 0 location) is used as a reference point to locate the rest of the bits in the string.
Badge Formats
Each bit is counted as being so many places to the right of the first, or zero bit. So offset means offset to the right of the first bit in the bit string (the first bit has a zero offset, the second bit is offset one bit to the right of the first bit, the third bit is offset two bits to the right of the first, etc).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Fig. 60.12. Bit Positions 36 Bit Format. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Fig. 60.13. Bit Offsets 36 Bit Format.
When you type in the Offset and Length in the Badge Formats screen (figure 60.4), what you are really saying to the software is, when you see a bit stream from a badge, count n bits to the right of the leftmost bit. Then count off the next n bits, stop counting, and use the bits you have just stored as the Badge Number (or the Facility Code, etc.). In the specific case of the standard, Continental supplied 36-bit format, the first bit is a parity check bit. Then you count one bit to the right of the first bit, and you are located on the first bit of the Facility Code. You then count 15 more bits to the right and you find the last bit of the Facility code information. If you then count off the next 16 bits, you will find the Badge Number. The next two bits are the Reissue number. The last bit is another parity check bit (see figure 60.14 below).
P Facility Code Badge Number Issue P
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Fig. 60.14. 36 Bit Badge Data Format with Fields Delineated and Labeled
If we now take a close look at figure 60.4 and compare what you see in each field of figure 60.4 to figure 60.14, you will see that both figures represent two different ways to describe the same data structure. Figure 60.4 describes the badge data string using numeric coordinates. Figure 60.14 is a graphic representation of the numeric coordinates described in figure 60.4. The information that is filled into the Offset and Length fields of a badge format, tells the (panel) software where in the badge data string to look for the Facility Code, the Badge Number and other data items included in the data string.
8
Badge Formats
So, when we are creating badge formats (in the Badge Formats screen), we are actually telling the system how to decode strings of data bits from the readers. The system does this by counting the bits as they are received and then parsing those bits into groups of bits. What those groups of bits represent is described in the Badge Formats screen by the titles on each of the fields (Badge ID, Facility, Issue, etc.). When you set up your system, it is imperative that you have a badge format in the Badge Formats screen that exactly matches the type of badge you intend to use. If one bit is unaccounted for in your format, the entire system may not read badges. This means that you must know what type of badge format you intend to use for your system, and you must be sure it is programmed correctly. Fortunately, the CardAccess software already has a few standard, time tested badge formats pre-programmed into the Badge Formats screen. Lets examine them in the following section.
Predefined Badge Formats

On opening the Badge Formats screen, you will see a few badge format records in the upper half of the screen. These are the standard badge formats that are preprogrammed and shipped with the CardAccess software.
Fig. 60.15. Badge Formats screen view window showing standard badge formats available by default in CardAccess software.
A short explanation of each format follows.
Badge Formats
Format 1 Insertion 36 Bit Format On highlighting Format 1 record in the Badge Formats screen view window, the lower half of the screen will show the following settings.
Fig. 60.16. Settings for format 1 - 36 bit insertion format.
Referring to these settings, the data structure for the format can be constructed as below.
Odd Parity Calculation Even Parity Calculation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Facility Code Badge Number Issue
Fig. 60.17. Data structure for format 1 - 36 bit Weigand/HID.
Specifications for this format are as follows: The badge format type is set to Insertion. This data format is 36 bits long. The data string starts (read left to right) with an odd parity bit. The odd parity calculation is performed on the left most eighteen bits. The next sixteen bits are the facility code. The next sixteen bits are the badge number.
10
Badge Formats
The next two bits are the issue level. The data string ends with an even parity bit. The even parity calculation is performed on the right most eighteen bits. This 36 bit format can be used with Weigand swipe readers, HID 36 bit proximity readers and Recognition systems 36 bit Biometric hand and fingerprint readers. Any device using the 36 bit format will work using this predefined format. A reader does not have to be an Insertion type to work with this 36 bit format. See below for more details. The Insertion badge format type (historically) refers to a type of Weigand brand reader that has a slot in it, which accepts an access badge. This type of reader is unique because it is one of several designs of readers that allow the bit stream from a badge to be read forward and backward (one simply turns the card around, and inserts it the opposite way around). Note that the (Weigand) swipe type reader also allows you to read a badge bit stream forward and backward (swipe in the opposite direction, as opposed to turning the card around). Time and Attendance logging is a CardAccess related application where reading a bit stream backwards would be helpful. When setting up the system for Time and Attendance logging, you have the option to use two separate readers, one set up as an IN reader, and one set up as an OUT reader. However, using one reader to read both the IN and OUT card swipes would lower the total cost of the access control project. Using one reader for T&A IN and OUT is permitted by the system. So, if you were to use a swipe type reader for this application, when clocking IN you would swipe your badge in a forward motion, when clocking out you swipe your badge in the opposite direction. When you create a badge format and set it as Insertion type, the Continental access control panels become programmed to evaluate the badge bit stream as swiped in either direction (left to right or right to left). The ability to evaluate a badge when swiped backward is the primary difference between the Insertion badge format type and other types. Other badge format types do not allow backward swiping of badges. That is, if the badge format stored at the panel is not an Insertion type, the panel will not attempt to read the bit stream backward. A backward badge read will be thrown away as an error.
11
Badge Formats
Parity Calculation In figure 60.16, on the lower right side of the diagram, there are two fields that concern parity calculations. One is called Odd Parity and the other is called Even Parity. The entries in these fields tell the software how to check the incoming badge data string to make sure it has not been corrupted during transmission. The parity check digit is a standard method of checking a data string to be sure that it has not been corrupted during its journey through wires. A parity check digit or bit is added to a data string (usually at the end) and that digit or bit is used as a reference to check the integrity of the rest of the data bits. To create the parity check bits that are used for the 36-bit format, the 36-bit format is divided into two, 18-bit formats. A calculation is made on each 18-bit format individually (figure 60.17). One bit is added as the first bit in the data string, to cause the first half of the data string to have an odd number of ones. A second bit is added as the last bit in the data string. This causes the second half of the data string to have an even number of ones. This odd and even parity is checked on every card read to be sure that the data has not been corrupted between the reader and the panel. Note Corrupted badge reads are thrown away by the panel without any other action, and with no error messages of any kind from the panel to the PC. There are two alternate ways to set the parity calculation for the 36-bit format. The above-mentioned method suggests dividing the format into equal halves. This will work with most 36-bit cards. However, if you are using Motorola/Indala cards, they will not work with this parity calculation. They require the parity settings as seen in figure 60.18 below. If you install your system and all the settings seem to be right, but the system is not reading cards correctly, try the parity settings as seen in figure 60.18.
12
Badge Formats
Fig. 60.18. Alternate weigand 36 bit format parity settings.
Format 2 ABA 19 Character Format On highlighting Format 2 record in the Badge Formats screen view window, the lower half of the screen will show the following settings.
Fig. 60.19. Settings for format 2 19 character ABA format.
SS Facility FS Badge ID Not Used ES B 1 2 3 4 5 D 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 F Fig. 60.20. Data structure for format 2 19 character ABA magnetic stripe format.
13
Badge Formats
Specifications for this format are as follows: This data format has 19 total characters. The data string starts with a Start Sentinel, which will always be the letter B (capital). The facility code consumes the next 5 digits. The next character is a Field Separator, which will always be the letter D (capital). The next 6 characters are the badge number (note the maximum 6 digit badge number). The five characters following the badge number are not used. The last character is the End Sentinel. This will always be the letter F (capital). There is no check character programmed into this format. The ABA 19-character format is generally used when encoding magnetic stripe or barcode type cards. The ABA standard was developed for the American Banking Association for use with ATM and credit cards. In the access control application, some of the data characters available in this format are not used. In this card format, the data structure is expressed in characters instead of number of bits (as it was above, in Format 1). Format 3 Non-ABA 26 Bit Format On highlighting Format 3 record in the Badge Formats screen view window, the lower half of the screen will show the following settings.
Fig. 60.21. Settings for format 3 - 26 bit non-ABA format. 14
Badge Formats
Even Parity Calculation Odd Parity Calculation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Facility Code Badge Number
Fig. 60.22. Data structure for format 3 26 bit non-ABA format.
Specifications for this format are as follows. The badge format type is set to Non ABA. This data format is 26 bits long. The data string starts (read left to right) with an even parity bit. The even parity calculation is performed on the left most thirteen bits. The next eight bits are the facility code. The next sixteen bits are the badge number. Issue level field is not used. The data string ends with an odd parity bit. The odd parity calculation is performed on the right most thirteen bits.
The 26-bit format is a well-known standard format and is identical in many ways to the 36-bit format, Format 1. This format has parity bits at the beginning and ends of the data string and is a Non ABA type (like Format 1). This format is used by Motorola (Indala) readers. The Recognition Systems hand and finger type biometric readers and HID proximity readers are also available with 26-bit output and can use this format with no changes. Note that the data string is divided into two halves, and parity is calculated separately on each half (like Format 1). Note that Even parity is calculated on the left half of the data string and that Odd parity is calculated on the right half of the string which is opposite of the way it is done in Format 1. Note that the standard 26-bit format does not provide an Issue Level field.
15
Badge Formats
Format 4 Non-ABA 31 Bit Format On highlighting Format 4 record in the Badge Formats screen view window, the lower half of the screen will show the following settings.
Fig. 60.23. Settings for format 4 - 31 bit non-ABA format.
Odd Parity Calculation Even Parity Calculation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Issue Facility Badge Number
Fig. 60.24. Data structure for format 4 31 bit non-ABA format.
Specifications for this format are as follows. The badge format type is set to Non ABA. This data format is 31 bits long. The data string starts (read left to right) with an even parity bit. The even parity calculation is performed on the left most seventeen bits. The next two bits are the issue level.
16
Badge Formats
The next eight bits are the facility code. The next sixteen bits are the badge number. The data string ends with an odd parity bit. The odd parity calculation is performed on the right most seventeen bits.
Note that the parity calculation for this format is different from formats 1 and 3 explained above. Here, there are three bits in the center of the format that are used for both parity calculations. These three bits overlap both the odd and the even calculations.
Creating Badge Formats

If you are creating a badge format, there are basically two things to consider. Are you creating your own custom badge format (for use with barcode or magnetic stripe cards), or are you creating a format for a card type that you have purchased from a supplier (a standard format). The approach you take will be quite different for each method. Essentially, there are only two kinds of access cards - those that have preprogrammed data, and those that are programmable by the user. Preprogrammed Access Cards Weigand cards, HID proximity cards and Motorola/Indala cards are the examples of preprogrammed access cards. The badge data string is encoded into each card by the manufacturer. These cards are well known and the formats for cards from these manufacturers are already programmed into the CardAccess software. Preprogrammed cards have some advantages and disadvantages as listed below. Preprogrammed Access Card Advantages There is no need to get data on these cards. The badge data string will be encoded into each card by the manufacturer. This proves to be time saving. Badge formats are well known and already programmed into the CardAccess software.
17
Badge Formats
Preprogrammed Access Card Disadvantages Unit price is higher. It is much harder to get cards with duplicate badge numbers and higher issue levels. Programmable Access Cards Examples of programmable access cards are magnetic stripe cards and barcode cards. Magnetic stripe cards are plain PVC plastic cards with an electronically programmable magnetic stripe embossed on the card. You can encode magnetic stripes with a special card printer available from Continental Instruments. Barcode is printed on blank, plain PVC plastic cards using a standard card printer, also available from Continental Instruments. Programmable Access Card Advantages You can exercise complete control on what data gets programmed on the card. Initial price per unit is lower. You can use a standard badge data format or create your own proprietary format. Badges can be made to work with multiple manufacturers systems (such as CardAccess and a Time and Attendance system). It is easy to reissue cards with the same badge number (reissue levels). You can print as many or as few cards as you need, when you need them.
18
Badge Formats
Programmable Access Card Disadvantages More time is needed to program these cards. More technical complexity is involved. The CardAccess administrator must create badge programming data strings in the badge editor software. He will be responsible to ensure that the badge format is entered correctly and is working properly. Note: There are essentially two kinds of badge data types; ABA and Non-ABA. Both data types have the same data fields available to them Badge ID, Facility and Issue. If you are using magnetic stripe cards or barcode cards, you must include Badge ID (it is a required field) in your badge format. Facility and Issue are optional. There are two things you should do before trying to create any kind of badge format. If you have purchased access cards from a supplier, ask that supplier to provide you with a description of the badge format. Before trying to create a custom or standard badge format in the Badge Formats screen of CardAccess, draw a diagram of your badge format (see figure 60.25 below). This will act as your guide and will make it easy to count characters or bit places as you create the format. Remember that if you misstate even one bit of the badge format in your description, it is likely that the system will reject all card reads. The format that you create in the Badge Formats screen must be exact.
19
Badge Formats
Creating a Standard Format

There are numerous different types of access control cards. Weigand, HID, Motorola/Indala, 26 bit, 36 bit and more. The place to start is to be sure what format of card you are buying, since we have to describe that badge format to the system. If you purchase all of your supplies from Continental Instruments, the readers and cards will be a matched set and the badge format will be well known to Continental technicians, who can help you set up the system. The 36-bit format (Format 1) and the 26-bit format (Format 3) are the most commonly used because they are widely adopted standards. Format 2 is most often used with magnetic stripe cards and barcode cards. Note: If some or all of the CardAccess predefined badge formats are missing or corrupted, you can restore them quickly by clicking the Default button at the top of the Badge Formats screen.
Below are the steps to create a 36-bit format. 1. Draw a diagram of your badge format.
Odd Parity Calculation
Even Parity Calculation
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 Facility Code Fig. 60.25. Diagram of 36-bit Badge Format. Badge Number Issue
2. Open the Badge Formats screen by clicking on Administration Badge Formats menu options in the CardAccess main screen. 3. Click the New button in Badge Formats screen toolbar.
20
Badge Formats
4. In the Name field, enter a descriptive name for the badge format you are creating.
5. Click the down arrow to the right of Badge Format Type control and choose a desired format type. Insertion type is selected in the figure below.
Fig. 60.27. The available badge format types.
6. In the Bit/Char Length control, set the total bit length of the format equal to 36.
Fig. 60.28. The Bit/Char Length spin control.
There are two ways to set the number. o Clicking the white space of Bit/Char Length control and typing in the number. o Using the up/down arrows to the right of the spin control to choose the required number. 7. Click the Offset field for Badge ID, and type in the number 17. Similarly enter the Length for Badge ID as 16.
21
Badge Formats
Fig. 60.29. Offset and Length fields for Badge ID.
8. Click the Offset field for Facility, and type in the number 1. Similarly enter the Length for Facility as 16.
Fig. 60.30. Offset and Length fields for Facility code.
9. Click the Offset field for Issue, and type in the number 33. Similarly enter the Length for Issue as 2.
Fig. 60.31. The Offset and Length fields for Issue.
10. Click the Offset field for Even Parity, and type in the number 18. Similarly enter the Length for Even Parity as 18.
Fig. 60.32. Offset and Length fields for Even Parity.
11. Click the Offset field for Odd Parity, and type in the number 0. Similarly enter the Length for Odd Parity as 18.
Fig. 60.33. Offset and Length fields for Odd Parity.
22
Badge Formats
On clicking the Save button, the format will be automatically downloaded to the concerned panel(s). Note: You cannot create two very similar badge formats. The system will have a logical error trying to differentiate which format it should use. The two formats must be uniquely different enough for the system to recognize. As a general rule, do not create two formats with the same number of bits or characters.
Creating a Custom Format

When creating a custom format, you will be limited to using cards that do not have a preprogrammed format on them. Barcode and magnetic stripe cards are the only two types of cards that can be considered. There will be nothing different about the badge format that you create for magnetic stripe cards vs. barcode cards. Both will use the ABA badge format type. Within the framework of the ABA type, certain start and stop characters are required (not optional). Also you must include the badge number as a required field. However, Badge Number is the only required field. Facility Code and Issue Level are optional. Note: The total number of bits read from any badge cannot exceed 255. Therefore any custom non-ABA format Bit/Char length cannot exceed 255 bits, and any custom ABA format cannot exceed 53 characters (each ABA character is 5 bits) You will need to follow the steps below in order to create a custom format. Make a diagram of your proposed format. SS Facility FS Badge ID
B 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Not Used
13 14 15 16 17 18
ES
F
Fig. 60.34. Data structure for the standard 19- character ABA format.
When creating your data structure diagram, bear in mind that there are some required items and some optional items. You can modify the above standard data structure for your own use, but consult the requirements lists below before creating your format.
23
Badge Formats
Custom Format Required Items The Start Sentinel and the End Sentinel are required. The position of those fields in the data structure must be at the beginning and at the end of the data string. However, the characters themselves can be any characters 0-9 or A-F (any hexadecimal character). We will use the standard characters in these examples. The Badge ID field is required. The position of this field in the data string is optional, it can be placed anywhere in between the Start and End Sentinels. Note: The system will allow a maximum of 9 badge digits. The Badge field in ABA formats cannot exceed 9 digits, and the Badge field in non-ABA formats cannot exceed 27 bits. Custom Format Optional Items The order of the data fields does not matter. As long as required fields are included in the data string, which field appears in the string first is not important, except for the Start and End Sentinels which must be placed at the extreme ends of the string. The Field Separator character is optional. If you wish to adhere to the ABA standard you will include the field separator character. However, it can be eliminated without penalty. The Facility code field and the Issue level field are both optional. They can be eliminated from the badge format with no penalty.
24
Badge Formats
Fig. 60.35. The standard 19-character ABA Format.
Note: When you set any of the data fields to Offset = 0 and Length = 0, or if you leave them blank, it means that those fields are not used. Lets create two example custom formats to illustrate the process. Custom Badge Format Example 1 The constraints for this badge design are: - we will allow a 5-digit badge number on the badge and there will be no other data encoded on this badge. This would represent the simplest badge format the system will allow. First, lets construct a data diagram.
SS Badge ID ES B 12345 F
Fig. 60.36. A custom 7- character badge format.
Now lets construct the above format in the Badge Formats screen.
25
Badge Formats
Fig. 60.37. Custom 7- character badge format created.
Follow the steps below. Open the Badge Formats screen by clicking on Administration Badge Formats menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Click the New button in Badge Formats screen toolbar. Copy the values seen in figure 60.37 above into the respective fields. Give the badge format a descriptive name in the Name field. Note: o Observe that the total Bits/Char length is seven characters, not five (see figure 60.37). The length calculation includes the Start and End Sentinels. In an ABA format, the count is in number of characters, not bits. o Observe that the Start Sentinel begins at offset zero and the End Sentinel begins at offset six (see figure 60.37). Each Sentinel is one character wide. Sentinel characters in custom formats are not limited to B and F. Sentinels can be any character 0-9, or A-F, but the Start and End Sentinels cannot be the same character Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings.
26
Badge Formats
Custom Badge Format Example 2 In this format, we will allow a five-digit badge number. We will also allow a onedigit issue level field and an 8-character field for future use. There will be no facility code for this format. Again, lets construct a data diagram first.
SS Badge ID Not Used IS ES
B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 F Fig. 60.38. A custom 16- character badge format.
Now lets construct the above format in the Badge Formats screen.
Fig. 60.39. Custom 16- character badge format created.
Follow the steps below. Open the Badge Formats screen by clicking on Administration Badge Formats menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Click the New button in Badge Formats screen toolbar. Copy the values seen in figure 60.39 above into the respective fields.
27
Badge Formats
Give the badge format a descriptive name in the Name field. Note: o Observe that the total Bits/Char length is sixteen characters. The length calculation includes the Start and End Sentinels (see figure 60.39). In an ABA format, the count is in number of characters, not bits. o Observe that the Start Sentinel begins at offset zero and the End Sentinel begins at offset fifteen (see figure 60.39). Each Sentinel is one character wide. Sentinel characters in custom formats are not limited to B and F. Sentinels can be any character 0-9, or A-F, but the Start and End Sentinels cannot be the same character. o Observe that we have added eight characters to the data string that are not used by the CardAccess (see figure 60.38). These characters could potentially be used by another device that can read a bar code or magnetic stripe. o Observe that we have limited the Issue level to 1 character (see figure 60.39). That means that we will allow up to 9 total re-issues (1-9). In case 2 characters were entered, a maximum of 99 re-issues were possible. Note that when you encode a badge that has never been reissued, the Issue level is set to 0. Magnetic stripe and bar code cards make it easy to replace lost cards with cards that have the same card number. You simply create another identical card. This is called reissuing the card. Issue level refers to how many times the card has been reprinted for the user. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings.
28
Badge Formats
Deleting a Badge Format

Open the Badge Formats screen by clicking on Administration Badge Formats menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, locate the badge format you wish to delete and click on it. Note: Deleting a Badge Format could disable all badges in the system! Select only unused badge formats for deleting. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 60.40. Message box displayed before deleting a badge format.
After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close Badge Formats screen.
29
Badge Formats
Badge Formats Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 60.41. The Badge Formats screen navigation bar.
The Badge Formats screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked badge format records in the screen. In figure 60.41, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first badge format record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted badge format record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted badge format record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted badge format record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted badge format record.
30
Badge Formats
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last badge format record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted badge format record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked badge format record.
Restoring Default Badge Formats

If you accidentally delete one or all of the default badge formats that are available in CardAccess, you can restore them by following the steps below. Note: The steps below will delete all of the existing formats in the screen, and restore only the default formats that are available in the software. Open the Badge Formats screen by clicking on Administration Badge Formats menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Click on Default button in the toolbar.
Fig. 60.42. The Default button.
On clicking the following message box will be displayed.
31
Badge Formats
Fig. 60.43. Message box displayed on clicking the Default button.
Click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the Badge Formats screen. The default formats will be automatically downloaded to all panels after restoration.
Downloading Badge Formats to Panels

If you are having problems reading badges, you may need to download the badge formats to the concerned panel(s) manually. The following steps will be involved. Open the Panels screen by clicking on Configuration Panels menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Click on Download button in the Panels screen toolbar.
Fig. 60.44. The Download button.
32
Badge Formats
In the Download Categories screen, click on Badge Formats check box.
Fig. 60.46. Badge Formats checkbox selected.
On checkbox selection, the Download Panel and the All Panel buttons will be enabled (see figure 60.47 below).
33
Badge Formats
Click on Download Panel button if you are downloading badge formats to only a particular panel or click on All Panels button if you are downloading badge formats to all panels in the system.
Fig. 60.47. The Download Panel and All Panels buttons.
Note: These buttons will be enabled only after the Badge Format checkbox is selected (see figure 60.46 above). On clicking one of the buttons, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 60.48. Message box displayed before downloading badge formats to panel(s).
After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box to start the download. At this point, badge format downloading would have begun if communications to the panel is operating. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the Panels screen.
34
Badge Holders IN
Badge Holders IN
The purpose of the Badge Holders IN screen is to display a list, commonly called a muster list, of all badge holders that have entered a building. This list might generally be helpful in an emergency situation where the building would need to be evacuated. The muster list could be printed out and used as a check list to be sure that all tenants in a given building have been evacuated safely, and have rallied together at a muster point.
Accessing Badge Holders IN Screen

o In CardAccess menu bar, click on Access menu to display the menu options. o Click on Badge Holders In menu option. The Badge Holders In screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 38.1. The Badge Holders IN Screen.
Badge Holders IN
Concept behind Badge Holders IN Screen

In figure 38.1, several badge holders are listed in the view area of the screen. It is important to note that the CardAccess system (and Badge Holders IN List) needs to have some way to determine who has passed into a given building and who has passed out of that building. In a standard access control system, an access card is read at a door and that door is opened, but no note is made as to whether, the access was into or out of the building. All that is known is that, the cardholder has accessed a door. The way to be more certain who has entered a building and who has left that building is, to adopt a more disciplined approach to access. In the more disciplined approach, we establish one door as an IN door, and a second door as an OUT door. We require all entrants to a building to enter through the IN door and to leave via the OUT door. This makes logging who is in the building and who is not, somewhat easier. The CardAccess system has settings to establish a door as an IN door or as an OUT door. Those settings are found in the Readers screen, on the Options tab. Readers are being discussed at this point because, the Badge Holders IN screen and the Readers screen are linked. At least one IN reader must exist before the Badge Holders IN screen will begin logging badge holder activity.
T & A, APB Readers

As stated, the Badge Holders IN List will not operate unless at least one reader is set up as an IN reader. The IN List is gathered from system event messages that are received from all readers that have been set up as Time and Attendance (T&A) or Anti-Passback (APB) readers. The messages from other types of readers are ignored by the Badge Holder In screen. The Readers screen allows setting up of two types of IN & OUT readers. Note: APB and T&A functions cannot be set active on the same reader. A reader must be set to one of the two types only.
Badge Holders IN
Time & Attendance IN Reader The Time and Attendance function is applied to a reader if you wish to have a passive notation that a badge holder passed through an IN or OUT type reader. T&A readers do not restrict the number of times you can enter or exit through the same reader, but they do generate an event message for every attempt that is made. When you pass through a T&A reader, two things happen. o A special event message is generated Badge Clock-IN or Badge Clock-OUT o A database notation is made as to whether the badge holder that passed through the reader is IN the building or OUT of the building
Fig. 38.2. The Readers Screen T&A Control T&A Type Set to IN.
Anti-Passback IN Reader The Anti-Passback function is more stringent than the T&A function. With APB, you can set up the readers to refuse multiple card reads from the same card. You can force a badge holder to exit through an exit reader before entering through an entry reader. When you pass through an APB reader, several things happen. o A special event message is generated Badge Entry or Badge Exit. o A database notation is made as to whether the badge holder that passed through the reader is IN the building or OUT of the building. o The badge holder is prevented from re-entering the same door.
Badge Holders IN
Fig. 38.3. The Readers Screen APB Control APB Type Set to IN.
The following options are available in the Time&Attendance Type and the APB Type controls. Using the options, you can set up a T&A or an APB reader as an IN Reader: When the card is swiped, the system logs that card as IN. OUT Reader: When the card is swiped, the system logs that card as OUT. In addition to the above options, the Time&Attendance Type control has a third option, as explained below. IN & OUT Reader: When the card is swiped once, the system logs that card as IN. When the card is swiped again at the same reader, in the opposite direction the system logs that card as OUT. Once readers are designated as IN and OUT readers (T&A or APB does not matter), the Badge Holders In list automatically begins logging which badge holders are (technically) IN. If a badge holder passes through an IN reader, that badge holder is considered IN by the system. If that same badge holder subsequently passes through an OUT reader, that badge holder is considered OUT by the system. If a badge holder is considered IN by the system, that badge holders name will appear in the Badge Holders IN screen. When the badge holder passes through an OUT reader, that badge holders name is removed from the Badge Holders IN screen. The Badge Holders IN screen updates automatically when new badge holders are admitted through an IN Reader. Thus, if you leave the screen open, you will see names added or deleted from the IN list dynamically.
4
Badge Holders IN
Badge Holders IN Screen Controls

The controls in Badge Holders IN screen are discussed below.
Select Reader Button Any number of doors can be designated as IN doors in the Readers screen. When the Badge Holders IN screen is opened, the screen will display the badge holder status messages from all IN readers in the system (by default). You may wish to filter the screen to view the badge holder IN status messages from just one reader. Follow the steps below to filter the Badge Holders IN screen: o Click the Select Reader button
Fig. 38.4. The Select Reader Button.
Upon clicking, a popup window will be displayed as below.
Fig. 38.5. Popup window displayed on clicking Select Reader button.
o Click the down arrow of Select Reader/ Reader Group control to display the list of readers. The default select in the control will be All as shown in figure 38.5. o Scroll up or down the Reader list to locate the reader whose badge holder IN status that you wish to view. o Click on a desired Reader in the list.
5
Badge Holders IN
o Click on Ok button in the popup window (see figure 38.5) after reader selection. The screen will now be filtered to display badge IN status messages of card holders, from the selected reader only.
Preview/Print Button Clicking this button prints a hard copy of the Badge Holders IN screen.
Fig. 38.6. Badge Holders IN screen Preview/Print button.
Note: The Preview/Print button is enabled only when o There are badge holders listed in the view window of Badge Holders IN screen. o A printer is installed in Windows and selected in the Report Printer control in System Settings screen.
Auto Refresh Check Box If Auto Refresh checkbox is enabled (that is, when the box is checked), the screen will update every 8 seconds and refresh the display to include the most recent badge holder entries and exits. If the box is not selected, the refresh engine is turned off. Then, the only way to refresh the screen is, to close and reopen it, or, select a different reader from the Select Reader control.
Fig. 38.7. Badge Holders In screen Auto Refresh Check Box.
Badge Holders IN
Exit Button Clicking this button closes the Badge Holders In screen
Fig. 38.8. Badge Holders In screen Exit Button.
Status Bar The status bar seen at the bottom indicates the total number of badge holders listed in the view window of Badge Holders In screen. This is helpful in the case of an emergency to know the total number of people to be accounted for.
Fig. 38.9. Badge Holders IN screen status bar.
Batch Save Utility
Batch Save Utility

The Batch Save utility can be used to create/modify Personnel records in batches. Using the utility, an entire range of records (say badge numbers 1-500) can be created at the same time, in a single batch, with all records having the same preset values. The utility can be made to visit every Personnel record and change the settings of one or more fields. Performing badge creation/modification operations in batches will save considerable time, by avoiding the need to create Personnel records individually.
Accessing Batch Save Screen

Open Personnel screen by clicking on Personnel button or Access-> Personnel menu options in CardAccess main screen. Click on Batch Modify button seen in Personnel screen toolbar. The Batch Save screen will be displayed as below.
Batch Save Utility
Fig. 37.1. The Batch Save screen.
The controls on Batch Save screen are explained in the following section.
Batch Save Utility
Batch Save Screen Controls

The controls in Batch Save screen are explained below. Badge Range The 'Badge Range' (from, to) fields are used set the range of badge numbers that the Batch Save utility will operate on. You can set the range anywhere from one badge (by putting the same badge number in the 'from' and 'to' fields) to as many badges as you like.
Fig. 37.2. The Badge Range Fields.
Note: o It is a must that the utility be supplied with a badge number range. The badge number range is the one required key field for the utility. All other fields are optional. o In the Badge Range fields, the 'from' number (on the left) must be less than or equal to the to number (on the right). o The utility will visit each Personnel screen badge record that fall in the badge number range you specify. Each record may or may not be affected, depending on the option that you select in the 'How to Handle a Range' area.
Batch Save Range Selection Three radio buttons are provided in the How to Handle a Range section of the screen. These radio buttons control the operation that the Batch Save utility will be performing, on the personnel records. The button controls are explained below.
Batch Save Utility
Fig. 37.3. The Batch Save Range Selection Controls
Create and/or Modify All For a given badge number range, selection of this option can perform two functions simultaneously. They are: o The selected fields of the existing personnel records in the specified range will be modified according to the selections made in Include, Value to be Set and Batch Criteria columns, of the Batch Save screen. For details on these columns, refer the heading Batch Save Columns. o In case of missing records in the specified range, new personnel records will be created according to the selections made in Include, Value to be Set and Batch Criteria columns of the Batch Save screen. For example, consider there are badge records existing with badge numbers 1, 3 and 5, and no badge records existing with badge numbers 2 & 4. Let Enabled box (seen under Item column of Batch Save screen) be checked. Selection of 'Create and/or Modify All' option will perform the following functions: The existing records of badge numbers 1, 3, and 5 will be modified (wherein 'Enabled' box will be checked, in case unchecked previously). New badge records for badge numbers 2 & 4 will be created (with Enabled box checked).
Batch Save Utility
Create New Only (Ignore Existing) Selecting this option for a given badge number range will only create new records for the badge numbers in the specified range. Any existing record in the range will remain unaffected. Selecting this option in the above example will create two new badges with numbers 2 & 4, while the existing badges 1, 3 & 5 will remain unchanged.
Modify Existing Only Selecting this option for a given badge number range will not create any new badges in the specified badge range. The utility will only modify existing badge records with the selected settings in Include, Value to be Set and Batch Criteria columns of the Batch Save screen. Note: Be very careful which option you set in the How to Handle a Range section of Batch Save screen. An incorrect option can alter fields in records that you did not intend to alter.
Batch Save Utility
Batch Save columns
Fig. 37.4. The Batch Save Columns.
Columns in figure 37.4 are explained below.
Item Column The 'Item' column contains a listing of every field found in the Personnel screen. By default, none of the personnel fields are included in the batch save. The fields to be included in the batch save must be selected individually, by clicking the Include check box (explained below) found adjacent to every field label in the Item Column.
Include Column The 'Include' column contains check boxes which are associated with the field labels present in the Item column. Any or all check boxes may be selected to include the selected fields in the batch save. Checked is included, unchecked is not included.
Value to be Set Column The 'Value to be Set' column contains controls that can be used to set a value for every field included in the batch save. The value specified in this column will be loaded into the selected field of every personnel record in the selected badge range. Recall that the list of fields (under Item column) in the Batch Save utility actually represent every field found in the Personnel screen. If no selection is made in the Value to be Set column for a given field, the default value as decided by the Batch Save utility will be loaded into that field
Batch Save Utility
There are five types of controls found in the Value to be Set column. They are: Spin field: This is usually a numeric field. Click the arrow buttons to the right of the field to select a number.
Fig. 37.5. A spin control field
Text field: A line of text must be entered in this field.
Fig. 37.6. A text field.
Combo field: The combo field control contains a list of options. Click the arrow to the right of a combo field to display the options, and select a desired option.
Fig. 37.7. A combo field control.
Check Box field: Click a check box field to enable an option (checked is enabled).
Fig. 37.8. A check box field.
Calendar field: A calendar field is used to provide a fixed date value to the selected field. You may manually type in a date (of the form MM/DD/YY), or you can use the built in calendar by clicking the button (marked as 15) to the right of the calendar field control, and choose a desired date.
Fig. 37.9. A calendar field control.
Batch Save Utility
Batch Criteria Column The fields found in the 'Batch Criteria' column are used when you wish to search the personnel records for a particular value, and modify only those records where the value is found. Note that all records that do not match the search criteria will remain unaffected. Stated another way, the Batch Modify utility will search every personnel record for the values specified in the Batch Criteria column fields. If any record(s) are found to have the specified values, only those record(s) will be changed to the settings made in 'Include' and 'Value to be Set' columns. All other records will remain unaffected. The Batch Criteria column also has Combo fields and Calendar fields as explained under Value to be Set column.
Send Badges to Panels Check Box The Batch Save utility can be used to modify thousands of personnel records. Some of the changes made to the records can change the access permissions of the badge holders. Hence it is necessary to get the changed information to every hardware access control panel at the earliest. In a large system, changes to thousands of cards can cause a massive download that may disable the system for a period of time. To take care of such a situation, the system is set up not to automatically trigger a badge data download at the end of the batch save operation. This means that you will need to manually download each panel (or all panels at once) to get the changed personnel data to the panels. The Send Badges to Panels check box (seen at the bottom of the screen) can be used to control, when to download the updated badges, to the access control system. If you prefer to automatically download changed badge records to the panels on completion of Batch Save operations, click the 'Send Badges to Panels' check box (checked means that the utility will trigger an automatic download).
Batch Save Utility
Fig. 37.10. The Send Badges to Panels Check Box.
Execute Button Execute button is seen at the bottom of the screen. Clicking this button will start the batch operation.
Fig. 37.11. The Execute button.
Cancel Button The Cancel button is seen at the bottom of the screen. Clicking this button will stop the batch operation. The Batch Save screen will be closed on clicking Cancel button. It is strongly recommended not to click on Cancel button during a batch operation. Let the operation be completed to prevent unexpected consequences.
Fig. 37.12. The Cancel Button.
Batch Save Utility
Running a Batch Save

Running a batch save operation will create or modify a 'range' of badge records. The following are the steps to run a batch save operation: 1. Open the Batch save screen by clicking on Batch Modify button in Personnel screen toolbar.
Fig. 37.13. The Personnel Screen Batch Modify Button.
2. In the 'Badge Range' (from, to) fields, set the range of badge numbers that the Batch Save utility will operate on. The 'from' number (on the left) must be less than or equal to the to number (on the right).
Fig. 37.14. The Badge Range Fields.
Note: The badge number range is the one required key field for the utility. All other fields are optional. 3. Select the required option in the 'How to Handle a Range' section.
Fig. 37.15. The How to Handle a Range section.
4. Select the Items in Item column you wish to change, by clicking the Include check box, provided by the side of every item. Items that are not included will remain unaffected.
10
Batch Save Utility
Fig. 37.16. The Item and Include Columns.
5. Items whose Include box is checked can be set to desired values using the controls provided in Value to be Set column. The new values set for the included items will be placed in the respective Personnel screen fields when the batch save takes place.
Fig. 37.17. The Value to be Set column.
Note: Every personnel record that falls within the selected badge number range will be given the value that is set in the Value to be Set column.
11
Batch Save Utility
6. In case you wish to modify settings of only those Personnel records having a specific value, such of those records can be searched by indicating specific values using 'Batch Criteria' column controls. If any selection is made in the batch criteria column, the utility will search for Personnel records that have the selected batch criteria, and will modify the fields of only those records. The records that do not match the search criteria will be ignored.
Fig. 37.18. The Batch Criteria column.
7. Click the 'Execute' button to start the batch operation.
After execution, a message box will be displayed to inform about the batch save operation that took place.
12
Batch Save Utility
Fig. 37.20. Message box displayed after the executing the batch save operation.
8. Click on Ok button in the message box. 9. Click on Close button found at the bottom to close the Batch Save screen.
13
CardAccess 3000 Main Screen
Log In, Log Out

CardAccess 3000 SQL is a true 32 bit, multi-tier application that can run on Windows 2000, Windows 2000/XP Pro and Windows NT 4.0. CA3000 successfully integrates advanced client/server system architecture, scalable MSDE/MS-SQL database technology and advanced networking capabilities to provide an easy to program and easy to use integrated access control & facilities management system.
Logging into CardAccess

CardAccess Log In screen will appear shortly after you start the CA3000 software. For successful login to CardAccess software, a valid User Name and Password have to be entered in the Log In screen.
Fig. 1.1. CardAccess Log In Screen.
Default Login Identity

If you are logging into CardAccess for the first time, you have to use the default User Name and Password to login successfully. Enter the default User Name admin, and default password q, and click the OK button. Note: It is strongly recommended that you change the default password after the first login. To do this, read below the heading Changing password.
1
Personal Login Identity

After successful login to CardAccess software using the default login identity, you can create your personal User Names and Passwords as desired. To create personal login identities, refer the section titled Operators.
Changing Password
After typing in the password in the Log In screen, the Change Password button will be displayed as highlighted in the figure below.
Fig. 1.2. Change Password button displayed after password entry.
Click on Change Password button for changing the current password. On clicking, the Change Password window will be displayed.
Fig. 1.3. Change Password window displayed on clicking the Change Password button in the Log In screen.
In the Change Password window, enter a new password of choice and confirm the same. CardAccess Main Screen will be displayed shortly after successful log in. Note: For password change to take effect, you must log out and log back in to CardAccess. In case you log out and attempt to shutdown CardAccess without having logged in with the changed password, you will have to use the password that was used previously to log into the software.
Fig. 1.4. The CardAccess main screen.
Logging Out of CardAccess

Logging out of CardAccess will enable you to exit from CardAccess main screen. However, the CardAccess software will continue to run even after logging out. There are two ways to log out of CardAccess as mentioned below. 1. By clicking the Log out button on CardAccess main toolbar.
Fig. 1.5. Log Out button on CardAccess toolbar.
2.
By clicking the System menu on CardAccess menu bar, and choosing the Log Out menu item.
Fig. 1.6. Log Out menu item in System menu.
Both ways of Logging out will result in exit from CardAccess main screen, to the CardAccess Log In screen (refer figure 1.7). After logging out of CardAccess, the following optional functions are possible using the CardAccess Log In screen. a. The same operator can log into CardAccess by typing in his User Name and Password.
b. A different operator can log into CardAccess by typing in his personal login identity. c. The current operator who logged out of CardAccess can choose to shutdown the software by using the Shutdown button. The third function (shutdown) is explained in the next section.
Shutting down CardAccess

CardAccess software can be shutdown by clicking the Shutdown button on the Log In screen.
Fig. 1.7. Shutdown button used for shutting down the CardAccess software.
Clicking the Shutdown button will display the Shutdown dialog.
Fig. 1.8. Shutdown dialog displayed by clicking the Shutdown button on Log In screen.
In the Shutdown dialog, enter the same password that was used to log into CardAccess, and then click the Shutdown button. Note: If CardAccess is running on a HostPC, the Confirm dialog for shutting down Communication Driver will be displayed.
Fig. 1.9. Confirm dialog displayed if CardAccess is running on Host PC.
Click on Yes button in the Confirm dialog to shutdown Communication Driver. The following are the effects of shutting down Communication Driver The Communication Driver stops communicating with the panels and The HostPC as well as the Workstations will no longer receive real time Event/Alert messages from the panels. Shutting Down CICDataServer The final step in CardAccess shutdown is to shutdown CICDataServer on HostPC. This can be done as below: o In the system tray, right-click the Yellow icon representing the CICDataServer Launcher.
CICDataServer Launcher
Fig. 1.10. Yellow icon representing CICDataServer Launcher in System Tray.
On clicking, a pop-up menu will be displayed as below.
Fig. 1.11. Pop-up menu displayed on clicking the CICDataServer Launcher icon.
o Click on Close option in the pop-up menu. On clicking, the Confirm dialog for shutting down CICDataServer will be displayed.
Fig. 1.12. Confirm dialog to shutdown CICDataServer.
o Click on Yes button in the Confirm dialog to shutdown CICDataServer.

8
On shutting down CICDataServer on the HostPC, the following message will be displayed on CardAccess workstations in case they have the CardAccess GUI still running on them.
Fig. 1.13. Message box displayed on CardAccess workstations.
The workstation operator must click on OK button in the message box and contact the system administrator for corrective action.
Events Grid, Alerts Grid

CardAccess Main Screen will be displayed shortly after successful login to CardAccess software as explained under the heading Logging into CardAccess.
Fig. 2.1. The CardAccess main screen showing Events and Alerts grids.
The CardAccess software regularly communicates with security panels. During the communication process, the communication driver picks up event messages from the panels and stores them in CardAccess SQL database. These messages describe every activity that the panel has been involved with since the last communication. During the setup of CardAccess software, priority values can be fixed to each of the events stored in the database to determine where to display the events in the CardAccess main screen. For more information, read the section Setting Up Priorities .
10
There are two display grids on CardAccess main screen. They are: - Events grid and Pending Alerts grid or Alerts grid for short. These two grids are programmable. The Events grid is designed for receiving normal events that require no action from the security staff. Whereas, the Alerts grid is designed for receiving abnormal events such as an alarm input, invalid badge access etc to which the security staff will be required to respond.
Events Grid
The Events Grid seen in the top half of CardAccess main screen is reserved for displaying normal or low priority events based on the settings in the CardAccess configuration screens. See the section Setting Up Priorities for more information.
Fig. 2.2. Events grid of CardAccess main screen.
Below, we discuss the Events grid columns.
11
Events Grid Column Bar

Events grid has a number of columns. The column bar is shown below.
Fig. 2.3. Events grid columns shown by reducing the default widths of the columns.

All columns shown in figure 2.3 may not be visible on the Events grid by default. If you wish to see all the columns, then you need to reduce the Column widths. Steps for adjusting column width: 1. Select a column: Select the column whose width is to be adjusted. 2. Position mouse cursor: Position mouse cursor on the intersection line of the selected column and its adjacent until you see a double arrow form. 3. Click and hold: Hold down the left mouse button. 4. Drag: Drag the intersection line to a desired position. 5. Release: Release the mouse button. The columns will revert back to their default widths when CardAccess is restarted.
12
Events Grid Columns

The columns are explained below. I. Photo column: This column will be visible only if the SmartView, DVR RemoteView or the DVR CompleteView feature is enabled in the CardAccess. To display this column, click on System menu and select the System Settings option. In System Settings screen, click the Edit button on the toolbar and select either o Enable SmartView CCTV-View Only/ Full Control radio buttons or o The third Enable radio button with either the DVR caRemoteView-Integral or DVR caCompleteVIew-Salient option selection in the drop down list. Note: Only one of the features (SmartView/DVR RemoteView) can be selected. Archive database must be set up before enabling SmartView CCTV or DVR RemoteView features. This column will display a camera icon under the following conditions: In case SmartView CCTV (View Only/Full Control) feature is selected, the Photo column will display a camera icon for the highlighted Event, provided the Event has a CCTV Snapshot. For more information refer the SmartView Document. In case the DVR feature is selected, the Photo column will display a camera icon for the highlighted Event provided the Event has a DVR recorded video. For more information on DVR recorded video, refer the documents Integral DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000 or Salient DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000.
13
Class column: Events are grouped into pre-defined classes like Badges, Doors, Inputs, System, Relays, etc. The Class column will display the predefined class names of the Events. Right-Click Options Right-clicking on Class column or anywhere under Class column will display a button named Filter. Placing the mouse cursor on this button will display list of options as shown in the figure below. The options allow the selection of specific event types for view in the Events grid. Thus, the options can be referred to as filter types as they aid in filtering the Events grid to display only those events that match the selected option.
Fig. 2.4. Filter button displayed by right clicking on Class column, options displayed by moving mouse cursor over Filter button.
The options are explained below: a. Show All: Selecting this option will show all event types in the Events grid. In other words, no filter is applied. This is the default selection for displaying events in the grid. b. Show Badges: Selecting this option will display only badge type events. Any type of badge related event is displayed, excluding
14
vehicle tags. c. Show Doors: Selecting this option will display only reader related events (door forced, door now closed, etc.). d. Show Inputs: Selecting this option will display only input related events (input abnormal, input normal, etc.). e. Show Links: Selecting this option will display only link related events (link activate, link deactivate). f. Show Relays: Selecting this option will display only relay related events (output on, output off). g. Show System: Selecting this option will display only system related event messages (panel trouble, etc.). h. Show Vehicle Tags: This option will be visible only if Vehicle Tracking option is chosen for the Badge Tagging Type field in System Settings Badges tab. Selecting Show Vehicle Tags option will display only vehicle tag type events. i. Show NAPCO Panels: Selecting this option will display only NAPCO Panel related events. j. Show NAPCO Areas: Selecting this option will display only NAPCO Area related events. k. Show NAPCO Zones: Selecting this option will display only NAPCO Zone related events. l. Show All NAPCO Events: Selecting this option will display all NAPCO events. m. Show DVR Notification Video Events: Selecting this option will display the events generated from the Integral DVR servers that have the DVR Notification feature enabled. n. Show Auto-Acknowledge All: Selecting this option will display all auto-acknowledged events. The Events grid will revert back to default filter type (Show All) when CardAccess is restarted.
15
II. Description column: This column gives a brief description of the highlighted event. Right-Click Options Right-clicking anywhere under the Description column will display a list of options as shown in the figure below. The options allow selection of an event for viewing the configuration record of the badge holder, or the hardware device mentioned in the event. The options are explained below.
Fig. 2.5. Right click options for Description column.
Note: Some of the options explained below are available as right-click options for Alerts grid Description column also. Options that are common to both the grids are marked with a * sign. Show All: Selecting this option will show all event types in the Events grid. This is the default selection for displaying events in the grid. Show This: Selecting this option will re-filter the Events grid to display only events that mention the currently highlighted hardware or badge holder. The Description column will be in red highlight when this option is selected.
16
Description column highlighted in red color as Show This right-click option is in effect.
In the above figure, the Date column is in yellow highlight. This is because, the Events grid is sorted by the Date column. Please see the heading Sorting Events below for details on sorting. Note: If you were to select the Show This right-click option when Description column itself was used for sorting, the system will change the Description columns yellow highlight (indicator for sort column) to red color (indicator for Show This option) soon after you select the option. Also, sorting will automatically revert back to Date column (default sort column for Events grid), and you will see the Date column in Yellow highlight. *Show Usage: Selecting this option can lead to one of the several things depending on which Event/Alert type mentioned below is highlighted. o Badge Type Event/Alert: Selecting 'Show Usage' when a badge type Event/Alert is highlighted brings up the Show Usage utility screen, which displays a listing of all doors that the selected badge holder has access to, along with a listing of the time schedules that the badge holder is permitted access to those doors. o Reader Type Event/Alert: Selecting 'Show Usage' when a door type Event/Alert is highlighted also brings up the Show Usage utility screen, but you will see a listing of badge holders that have access to the door mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert. The time
17
schedules during which the badge holders can access that door are also listed. *View Record: Selecting this option will open the configuration record of the hardware device or the badge holder that is currently highlighted. *Badge #: This option is not available in the pop up list unless a badge type Event/Alert is selected. Selecting this option will bring up the Personnel record of the badge holder mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert message.
*Tag #: This option is not available in the pop up list unless a vehicle tag type Event/Alert is selected. Selecting this option will bring up the Personnel record of the badge (vehicle tag) mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert message.
III. Location column: This column shows the name of the place where the highlighted Event occurred. Right-Click Options Right-clicking anywhere under the Location column will display a list of options as shown in the figure below. The options allow selection of an event for viewing the configuration record of the badge holder, or the hardware device mentioned in the event.
Fig. 2.6. Right click options for Location column.
18
The options are explained below. Note: Some of the options explained below are available as right-click options for Alerts grid Location column also. Options that are common to both the grids are marked with a * sign. Show All: Selecting this option will show all event types in the Events grid. This is the default option. Show This: Selecting this option will re-filter the Events grid to display only events that mention the currently highlighted hardware or badge holder event. Location column will be in red highlight when this option is selected.
Location column highlighted in red color as Show This right-click option is in effect.
In the above figure the Date column is in yellow highlight. This is because, the Events grid is sorted by the Date column. Please see the heading Sorting Events below for details on sorting. Note: If you were to select the Show This right-click option when Location column itself was used for sorting, the system will change the Location columns yellow highlight (indicator for sort column) to red color (indicator for Show This option) soon after you select the option. Also, sorting will automatically revert back to Date column (default sort column for Events grid), and you will see the Date column in Yellow highlight. *Show Access List: This option applies to Badge related Events/Alerts only. Selecting this option will bring up the Access
19
List utility screen which displays a listing of badge holders that have access to the door mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert message. *View Record: Selecting this option will open the configuration record of the selected hardware device or badge holder. Show Video: This option will be visible only when the DVR feature (Integral DVR caRemoteView or Salient DVR caCompleteView) is enabled in the CardAccess. Selecting this option will display the DVR recorded video of the highlighted Event. For more information on DVR recorded video, refer the documents Integral DVR Interface in CardAccess or Salient DVR Interface in CardAccess. Date column: This column shows the date and time at which the highlighted event occurred. This is the default column used for sorting the Events grid. The default sort order for the column will be descending order. Right-Click Options Right-clicking on Date column or anywhere under Date column will display the Date Sort Selection window. Note: The Sort order of Date column will change to ascending order after you right-click. The Date Sort Selection window will show the calendar of a month in the current year, and specify the current date against the word Today.
20
Date Sort Selection window obtained by right-clicking on Date column.
You can use this window to select a date of interest, and view the events that have occurred on the selected date. The left and right arrows at the top of the window can be used to scroll backwards/forwards through the months of a year. You may click on a desired date in the window, and then click the OK button to view all the events that have occurred on the selected date. Below, we have obtained the list of all events that have occurred on 5/24/2005.
Filtering event occurrences of a particular date.
In case you wish to display the latest events list again, you need to obtain the Date Sort Selection window (by right- clicking the Date column), and click the Cancel option provided in the window. IV. Operator column: If the highlighted Event is an acknowledged Alert, the Operator column will display the name of the operator who acknowledged the Alert. If the highlighted event is a normal event of the Events grid, the Operator column will display SYSTEM by default.
21
V. Acknowledged At column: If the highlighted Event is an acknowledged Alert, the Acknowledged At column will show the date and time at which the Alert was acknowledged. If the highlighted Event is a normal Event, the Acknowledged At column will show the same date and time as shown in the Date column. Right-Click Options Right-clicking on Acknowledged At column or anywhere under Acknowledged At column will display the Date Sort Selection window. Note: On right-clicking, the Acknowledged At column will be made the sort column. This is indicated by the Yellow highlight in the column name. Also, an up arrow will be seen in the yellow highlight which indicates ascending sort order for the column. The Date Sort Selection window will show the calendar of a month in the current year, and specify the current date against the word Today.
Date Sort Selection window obtained by right-clicking on Acknowledged At column.
You can use this window to select a date of interest, and view the events that were acknowledged on the selected date. The left and right arrows at the top of the window can be used to scroll backwards/forwards through the months of a year. Click on a desired date in the window, and then click the OK button to view all the events that were acknowledged on the selected date. Below, we have obtained the list of all events that were acknowledged on 5/24/2005.
22
Filtering the events that were acknowledged on a particular date.
In case you wish to display the latest events list again, you need to obtain the Date Sort Selection window (by right-clicking the Acknowledged At column), and click the Cancel option provided in the window. VI. Priority column: This column displays the priority value of the highlighted Event as fixed in the various configuration screens of CardAccess. The Priority Number range is 1-99, where 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority number in the range. However 99 is a special number. Events set to Priority value 99 will never report in the CardAccess system. In other words, they are suppressed. Thus, the actual usable Priority Number range is 1-98.
23
Column Relocation
CardAccess columns can be relocated if desired. Steps for relocating a column: 1. Select the column: Select the column to be relocated. 2. Position the Cursor: Position mouse cursor on the column name. 3. Click and Hold: Hold down the left mouse button. 4. Drag the Column: Drag the column to the required position. 5. Release: Release the mouse button. The columns will revert to their default positions when CardAccess is restarted.
Sorting Events
By default, the events are sorted according to Date column in the Descending Order.
Events sorted by Date column in the descending order.
24
The Date column allows the events to be sorted according to the date and time at which the events were generated at the concerned panel. However, any column can be used for sorting. You can change the sort column by clicking on the column name you wish to use for sorting. The sort column will be highlighted in yellow color. A column can be sorted in ascending/descending orders alternately by clicking on the column name. Upward/downward arrows seen in a column name (in yellow highlight) represent ascending/descending sort orders respectively. The sort column supports searching of events by a key-press on the computer keyboard. This is discussed below.
Events Searching by Key-Press

Suppose the Class, Description, Location or the Operator column is used for sorting, you can key in an alphabet of choice on the keyboard for displaying all events that begin with the keyed in alphabet. That is, the system will search for all events whose first character happens to be the alphabet that was pressed on the keyboard. Suppose you want to search for all events that belong to the class System, then first click on Class column to make it the sort column. The Class column should have the yellow highlight (sort column indicator). Then press the key labeled S on your keyboard. Immediately after the key-press, you will see the list of events with the name System under the Class column. We have obtained a similar list in the figure below.
25
Class column showing Events beginning with the letter S as a result of key-press.
Suppose the Priority column is used for sorting, you can key in a number of choice for displaying all event occurrences that have the priority value beginning with the number keyed in. Suppose you want to search for all events with the priority value in the range 20-29 say, you may first click the Priority column to make it the sort column. The Priority column should have the yellow highlight (sort column indicator). Then press the key labeled 2 on your keyboard. Immediately after the key-press, you will see the list of events whose priority value begins with the number 2, under the Priority column. We have obtained a similar list in the figure below.
Priority column showing the Events whose priority value begins with the number 2.
26
Events Grid Buttons
Fig. 2.7. Events grid buttons.
Some of the buttons shown in figure 2.7 may be missing or grayed out depending on the type of event selected. Each of the buttons is explained below. Note: Most of the buttons explained below are available in the Alerts grid as well and the buttons perform similar functions. Buttons that are common to both the grids are marked with a * sign. I. Track/Browse button: The Events grid can be switched between Track and Browse modes alternately by clicking this button. Track Mode: In Track mode, the Events Grid displays each new event as it arrives. The number of events displayed in this mode will be equal to the Number of Events to Retain in View setting for the logged in operator, as fixed in the Operators screen. In this mode, the older events scroll up and off the screen as the newer events roll in. The Events grid will have a pale yellow color background in the Track mode. Browse mode: This is the default working mode of CardAccess. This mode freezes the CardAccess screen to help examine a specific event. The Events grid will have a green color background in this mode. Only fifteen events are visible per page in this mode. Older and newer events can be viewed by using the Previous Page and Next Page buttons provided on the toolbar. II. *Respond button: Clicking this button will open the manual response screen. In this screen, an operator can write his comments on the selected Event/Alert for future references. Read the section Manual Alert Acknowledgement for more information on manual responses.
27
III. *Map Button: Clicking the Map button will open a pop up window that contains a bitmap representation of the area mentioned in the highlighted Panel/Reader/Input/Relay or Link Event/Alert provided a map has been stored in the hardware configuration record of the concerned device.
Fig. 2.8. Map Popup Window of an Event displayed by clicking the Map button.
IV. *Photo button: This button may not be visible on the toolbar by default. To display this button, click on System menu and select System Settings option. In System Settings screen, click on Video Badging tab and select the Photos Only/Badging 3000 option in the Video Badging Package drop down box. Photo button in CardAccess toolbar will be enabled only when a badge type event is highlighted and that badge holder has a photo stored in his or her personnel record. Clicking the Photo button will open a pop up window that contains the bitmap photograph of the badge holder mentioned in the highlighted Event/Alert.
28
Fig. 2.9. Personnel Photo Popup Window of a badge type event displayed by clicking on Photo button.
V. *Video Button: Video button will be visible on the toolbar only if the DVR feature (DVR caRemoteView or DVR caCompleteView) is enabled in the CardAccess. The button will be active only when an Event/Alert having a DVR recorded video is highlighted in the grid. For all other Events/Alerts, the Video button will be grayed out. Clicking the active Video button will display the DVR Recorded video of the highlighted Reader/Input/Napco Zone Alert/Event. For more information on DVR recorded video, refer the documents Integral DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000 or Salient DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000. VI.*Control button: The control button is visible only when a door/ relay/link Event/Alert that can be controlled manually is highlighted. Clicking the Control button opens the appropriate manual control screen (door, relay or link). The device mentioned in the selected Event/Alert will be automatically selected, and will be ready to be manually activated or deactivated. VII. Recent button: Clicking the Recent button will put the CA main screen in Track mode to display the most recent event occurrences. The number of events displayed in the grid will depend on the setting in the Event Viewing tab of Operators screen, for the currently logged in
29
operator. The Events grid can be sorted by Date or Acknowledged At columns alternately by clicking on the Recent button. VIII. Previous Page When the CA main screen opens, the Events grid shows the latest fifteen events sorted by the Date column. These fifteen events constitute an Events Page. The sort column can be changed if desired. The sort column will be indicated by a yellow colored highlight. Refer the heading Sorting Events to learn more about sorting. When the Previous Page button is clicked, the system will display the previous page consisting of fifteen events, sorted by the column in yellow highlight. Note: The Previous Page button will be visible only when the CA main screen is set to Browse mode. IX. Next Page When the CA main screen is opened, the Events grid shows the latest fifteen events sorted by the Date column. These fifteen events constitute an Events Page. Sort column can be changed if desired. The sort column will be indicated by a yellow colored highlight. Refer the heading Sorting Events to learn more about sorting. When the Next Page button is clicked, the system will display the next page consisting of fifteen events, sorted by the column in yellow highlight. Note: The Next Page button will be visible only when the CA main screen is set to Browse mode.
30
Events Grid Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 2.14. Events grid navigation bar.
Note: The navigation bar shown in the above figure exists in Alerts grid as well. The buttons in the Alerts grid navigation bar can be used to perform similar functions as explained below. The Events grid navigation bar can be found just below the Events grid. The buttons of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer Events in the grid. In figure 2.14, we have numbered the buttons to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the buttons are as follows: Button 1: Placing the mouse cursor over button 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the very first record of the grid. Button 2: Placing the mouse cursor over button 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted record. Button 3: Placing the mouse cursor over button 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted record. Button 4: Placing the mouse cursor over button 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted record.
31
Button 5: Placing the mouse cursor over button 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted record. Button 6: Placing the mouse cursor over button 5 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the last record of the grid.
32
Alerts Grid
The Alerts Grid is seen in the bottom half of CardAccess main screen. This grid is reserved to display only high priority events based on the settings in the various CardAccess configuration screens. See the section Setting Up Priorities for more information.
Fig. 2.15. Alerts grid of CardAccess main screen.
There are several options available for displaying alerts in the Alerts grid. They are: Displaying only the most important alerts in the grid. Displaying all events in the grid. Displaying only specific events types in the grid. The Alerts grid is not intended to display the alerts for a long period of time. It is intended that an operator should notice an alert, perform some physical action to correct the situation and then move the alert into the Events grid. The process of moving an alert into the Events Grid is referred to as Resolving/Acknowledging the Alert. There are several options for Acknowledging alerts. They are: Have the alerts stay in the Alerts grid until they are manually resolved by an operator. Have the alerts remain visible in the Alerts grid until a timeout value has expired. This timeout is set in the Operators screen. Each operator has an operator Alert Ack Time value. For more information see the Setting Up Auto-Acknowledgement section. Force the operator who responds to an alert to fill in a Manual Response Screen.
33
Alerts Grid Column Bar

The Alerts grid has a number of columns. The column bar is shown below.
Fig. 2.16. Alerts grid columns shown by reducing the default widths of columns.

All the columns shown in figure 2.16 may not be visible on the CardAccess screen by default. If more information on the screen is desired, the Column widths need to be reduced. The widths can be reduced in the same way as Events grid columns are reduced. Refer the heading Column Width Adjustability explained under Events Grid. The Alerts grid columns are explained below.
Alerts Grid Columns

I. Photo column: This column will be visible on the screen only if the SmartView feature is enabled in the CardAccess. To display this column on the screen, click on System menu and select System Settings option. In System Settings screen, click the Edit button in the tool bar and select the Enable SmartView CCTV-View Only/ Full Control radio button. Photo column will display a camera icon for the highlighted Alert provided, the Alert has an associated CCTV Snapshot. For more information refer the SmartView Document.
34
Right-Click Option Right-clicking on Photo column or anywhere under the column will display the Acknowledge All button.
Fig. 2.17. Right-click option for Photo column in Alerts grid.
Clicking the Acknowledge All button leads to Alerts acknowledgement in the following ways based on operator privileges: o In case of operators with administrative rights, all Alerts present in the Alerts grid are acknowledged. o In case of partitioned operators, only Alerts that the operators have access to, are acknowledged. II. Class column: Alerts are grouped into pre-defined classes like Badges, Doors, Inputs, System, Relays, etc. The Class column will display the predefined class names of the Alerts. Right-Click Option Refer Acknowledge All button explained above for Photo column under the heading Alerts Grid Columns. III. Description column: This column gives a brief description of the highlighted Alert. Right-Click Options Right-clicking on Description column or anywhere under the column will display the list of options as shown in figure 2.18. The options allow selection of an Alert for viewing the configuration record of the badge holder, or the hardware device mentioned in the Alert.
35
Fig. 2.18. Right-click options for Description column in Alerts grid.
The options are explained below: View Record: This option has the same function as the View Record right-click option for Description column in the Events grid. Refer Description column explained under the heading Events Grid Columns. Show Usage: This option has the same function as the Show Usage right-click option for Description column in the Events grid. Refer Description column explained under the heading Events Grid Columns. Badge #: This option has the same function as the Badge # right-click option for Description column in the Events grid. Refer Description column explained under the heading Events Grid Columns. Tag #: This option has the same function as the Tag # right-click option for Description column in the Events grid. Refer Description column explained under the heading Events Grid Columns. Acknowledge All: Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under the heading Alerts Grid Columns.
36
IV. Location column: This column shows the name of the place where the highlighted Alert occurred. Right-Click Options Right-clicking on Location column or anywhere under the column will display the list of options as shown in the figure below. The options allow selection of an Alert for viewing the configuration record of the badge holder, or the hardware device mentioned in the Alert.
Fig. 2.19. Right-click options for Location column in Alerts grid.
View Record: This option has the same function as the View Record right-click option for Location column in the Events grid. Refer Location column explained under the heading Events Grid Columns. Show Access List: This option has the same function as the Show Access List right-click option for Location column in the Events grid. Refer Location column explained under the heading Events Grid Columns. Acknowledge All: Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under the heading Alerts Grid Columns. V. Date column: This column shows the date and time at which the highlighted Alert occurred. Right-Click Option Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under the heading Alerts Grid Columns.
37
VI. Priority column: This column displays the priority value of the highlighted Alert as fixed in the various configuration screens of CardAccess. The Priority Number range is 1-99, where 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority number in the range. However 99 is a special number. Events set to Priority value 99 will never report in the CardAccess system. In other words, they are suppressed. Thus, the actual usable Priority Number range is 1-98. Right-Click Option Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under the heading Alerts Grid Columns.
Column Relocation
Columns can be relocated if desired. The columns can be relocated in the same way as Events grid columns are relocated. Refer Column Relocation explained under Events Grid.
Sorting Alerts
By default, the Alerts are sorted according to Priority column in the ascending Order. See figure 2.16. The Priority column allows the Alerts to be sorted according to the priority values set for the Alerts in the various configuration screens. However, any column can be used for sorting. You can change the sort column by clicking on the column name you wish to use for sorting. When the sort column is changed for the first time, you will see a message box as shown below.
38
Message box displayed on attempting to change the sort column for the first time.
Please read the message in the box to make sure if you really intend to change the sort column. On confirming, click the Yes button to begin sorting of Alerts by the new sort column. The column used for sorting will be highlighted in yellow color. A column can be sorted in ascending/descending orders alternately by clicking on the column name. Upward/downward arrows seen in a column name (in yellow highlight) represent ascending/descending sort orders respectively.
Alerts Grid Buttons
Fig. 2.20. Alerts grid buttons.
Some of the buttons shown in figure 2.20 may be missing or grayed out depending on the type of event highlighted and the related options being enabled/disabled. Each of the buttons is explained below. I. Acknowledge button: The Acknowledge button will be enabled only when there are pending Alerts in the grid. Clicking this button will acknowledge the highlighted Alert.
39
Right-Click Option Refer Acknowledge All button explained for Photo column under the heading Alerts Grid Columns.
II. Respond button: This button performs the same function as the
Respond button of Events grid. Refer *Respond button explained under Events Grid Buttons.
III. Map Button: This button performs the same function as the Map
button of Events grid. Refer *Map button explained under Events Grid Buttons. Right-Click Options The Alerts grid supports automatic popup of Map window. When this feature is enabled, the Map pop up screen will pop up under the following conditions: When an alert that has a map associated comes to the top of the Alerts Grid or When an alert that has a map associated is highlighted. Right-clicking the Map button (or a left-click on the down arrow seen next to the Map button) will display the options available for automatic popup of Maps window.
Fig. 2.21. Right-click options for Map button in Alerts grid.
The options are explained below. Auto-Show Off: This is the default option. Selecting this option will disable the automatic pop up of a map window for all alert types. But map pop up window can still be opened by clicking the Map button manually.
40
Auto-Show All: Selecting this option will enable automatic pop up of a map window for all alerts. Auto-Show This Area: Selecting this option will enable automatic pop up of map window only for alerts that concern the hardware mentioned in the currently highlighted alert (door, relay, input, link). Example: Select a given door alert. Right click on the Map button, and select the 'Auto-Show This Area option. From that point onwards, each alert that appears in the Alerts Grid for that door will open the map window (if a map is stored in the reader record).
Fig. 2.22. Automatic Popup of Map Window by selection of Auto-Show This Area right-click option.
IV. Photo button: This button performs the same function as the Photo
button of Events grid. Refer *Photo button explained under Events Grid Buttons.
41
Right-Click Options The Alerts grid supports automatic popup of Photo window. When this feature is enabled, the Photo pop up screen will appear under the following conditions: When an alert that has a photo associated comes to the top of the Alerts Grid or When an alert that has a photo associated is highlighted. Right-clicking on Photo button (or a left-click on the down arrow seen next to the Photo button) will display the options available for automatic Photo popup of the badge type event.
Fig. 2.23. Right-click options for Photo button in Alerts grid.
The options are explained below. Auto-Show Off: This is the default option. Selecting this option will disable the automatic pop up of a personnel photo window for all alert types. But, photo pop up window can still be opened by clicking the Photo button manually. Auto-Show All: Selecting this button will enable the pop up of personnel photo window for all alerts. Auto-Show This Door: Selecting this option will enable automatic pop up of Photo window for only badge related alerts that concern the door mentioned in the currently highlighted alert. Example: Select a given door alert. Right click on Photo button, and select the 'Auto-Show This Door option. From that point onwards, each alert that appears in the Alerts Grid for that door will open the Photo window (if a photo is stored in the configuration record).
42
Fig. 2.24. Automatic Popup of personnel Photo Window by selection of Auto-Show This Door right-click option.
V. Video Button: This button performs the same function as the Video
button of Events grid. Refer *Video button explained under Events Grid Buttons. Right-Click Options Right-clicking the Video button (or a left-click on the down arrow seen next to the Video button) will display the options shown in the figure below.
Fig. 2.25. Right-click options for Video button in Alerts grid.
The options are explained below. 1. Auto-Show On: Choosing this option will display the DVR recorded video window automatically.
43
2. Auto-Show Off: Choosing this option will not display the DVR recorded video window automatically.
VI. Control button: This button performs the same function as the
Control button of Events grid. Refer *Control button explained under Events Grid Buttons.
Alerts Grid Navigation Bar

Alerts grid navigation bar is similar to the one seen in Events grid. Refer the heading Events Grid Navigation Bar explained under Events grid.
44
CardAccess Working Modes

The CardAccess main screen has two working modes. They are: Monitor and Status The main screen switches itself between monitor and status modes by clicking a button on the toolbar. This button will be labeled Monitor/Status depending on the current mode of the screen.
Monitor mode
By default, the CardAccess main screen is set to Monitor mode. In this mode, the screen displays the events and alerts as and when they are gathered from the panels. The monitor screen is divided into two grids that are designed for receiving low and high priority events, based on the settings in the various configuration screens.
45
Fig. 3.1. CardAccess main screen in Monitor mode.
Please refer the heading Events Grid and Alerts Grid for detailed information on CardAccess screen in Monitor mode.
46
Status mode
Clicking the Monitor button on CardAccess toolbar will switch the CardAccess main screen over to Status mode. In this mode, the CardAccess screen displays the current status of manually controlled CardAccess system components.
Fig. 3.2. CardAccess main screen in Status mode.
47
There can be four folder tabs in the Status mode. They are: 1. Control- This tab is seen by default. 2. Status- This tab will be seen only when the Use Facility Maps checkbox is selected in the System Settings screen. 3. Stations- This tab is seen by default. 4. NAPCO Status- This tab is seen only if the Use NAPCO Panels checkbox is selected in the System Settings screen. The tabs are explained below.
Control Tab
The Control tab of Status screen will display a listing of all enabled hardware devices in the CardAccess system. A click on the Control tab will show three collapsed items namely Doors, Relays and Links in the Controlled Equipment area seen in the left half of the screen.
48
Fig. 3.3. Status screen in Control tab.
The items Doors, Relays and Links contain a listing of the enabled active Doors, Relays and Links respectively in the CardAccess system. The list of enabled hardware devices can be seen by clicking on the corresponding nodes (+ sign). An item that does not have any enabled device will not display the node. In the figure below, Doors node is expanded to show the list of the enabled Doors.
49
Fig. 3.4. List of doors displayed by clicking on Doors node.
In the above figure, the items Relays and Links have no enabled devices and hence they do not display nodes. Double clicking on any Door, Relay or Link will open up the manual control screen of the concerned hardware device. By double clicking Front Lobby door item in figure 3.4, we have opened the Manual Door Control screen as shown in the figure below. The figure shows automatic selection of the Front Lobby door check box.
50
Fig. 3.5. Manual Door Control screen opened by double clicking the Front Lobby door item in figure 3.4.
Note: The Manual Door/Relay/Link Control screens can also be opened by clicking the Door/Relay/Link buttons respectively on the CardAccess toolbar.
Fig. 3.6. Doors, Relays, Links buttons in CA tool bar used for opening manual control screens.
Please refer the sections titled Manual Door Control, Manual Link Control and Manual Relay Control to learn about how you can control the respective hardware devices manually. The Map area seen on the right half of Status screen (see figure below) is reserved for displaying the bitmap of the device highlighted in the
51
Controlled Equipment area. But, it is necessary that the highlighted device has a static bitmap stored in its hardware configuration record. If the highlighted device has no bitmap stored, the Map area will remain blank.
Fig. 3.7. Map area on the right showing bitmap of Third Floor Emergency Stairwell device highlighted on the left.
Status Tab
The Status tab displays the current operational status (such as Open/Closed, Normal/Abnormal etc) of all enabled hardware devices (such as doors, inputs, relay, links) in the CardAccess system. A click on the Status tab will show the default selection None in the Category field. The options available in the Category field allow filtering of the status screen display to show only those hardware items that match the
52
selected Event type. The available options can be seen by clicking the down arrow of the field. Selecting an option in the list will display the columns Panels, Device, Status, Last Change and Number under the Category field.
Fig. 3.8. Options in Category field displayed by clicking the down arrow.
Fig. 3.9. Status screen in Status tab with the options All selected in the Category field.
53
The options available in the Category field are explained below. 1. None: Selecting this option will not display any hardware device in the status screen. This is the default selection. 2. All: Selecting this option will show all enabled hardware devices. 3. All Normal: Selecting this option will show all devices that are not in an abnormal state. 4. All Abnormal: Selecting this option will show all devices that are in an abnormal state. 5. All Doors: Selecting this option will display only doors that are in normal or abnormal states. 6. Doors Forced: Selecting this option will show only doors that are currently in a forced door state. 7. Doors Free Access: Selecting this option will show only doors that are currently in free access state. 8. Doors Bypass: Selecting this option will show only doors that have been bypassed. 9. Doors Manually Unlocked: Selecting this option will show only doors that have been unlocked using the manual door control screen (and are currently being held unlocked). 10. Doors Manually Locked: Selecting this option will show only doors that have been locked using the manual door control screen. 11. Doors Disabled (Manual Mode): Selecting this option will show only readers (doors) that have been disabled using the manual door control screen. 12. Doors Disabled (Schedule): Selecting this option will show only readers that are currently disabled by a time schedule. 13. All Inputs: Selecting this option will show all enabled input devices only. 14. Abnormal Inputs: Selecting this option will show only input
54
devices that have reported input abnormal. 15. Supervised Trouble: Selecting this option will show only abnormal supervised input devices. 16. Inputs Schedule Disabled: Selecting this option will show only inputs that have been disabled by a time schedule. 17. Activated Relays: Selecting this option will show only relays that are currently energized (latched). Selecting any of the above options will display the following columns: Panel: This column will display the panel number of the panel that is hosting the connected hardware device. The panel number is taken from the PnlNo field of the Panels screen. Device: This column will display the name of the hardware device. This name is taken from the Name field in the Panels, Readers, Relays, Inputs or Links screens. Status: This column will display the current status of the connected hardware device. The message displayed is related to the type of the device. Last Change: This column will display the date and time of the most recent change in status of the indicated hardware item. Number: This column will display the number of the hardware item, in the list of items, in the configuration screen where the item is mentioned. For example, if a door is mentioned on the Status tab, the number of the door record in the Readers screen is mentioned in the Number field. Thus, you have the panel number that the device is connected to in the Panel field and you have the reader number (as found in the Reader field for the Readers screen). With this information, you can easily locate the configuration record of a hardware device.
55
Stations Tab
A click on the Stations tab will show a listing of all CardAccess workstations that are currently connected to the CardAccess database and also of the operators who are currently logged in.
Fig. 3.10. Status screen in Stations tab.
The columns seen in Stations tab are explained below. Station: The Station column will contain the workstation number or name of every CardAccess workstation (and host), that is currently connected to the CardAccess database. In figure 3.10 above, there are two entries, marked Master and Master Comm. These entries refer to the Host PC and the two software
56
components Host user screen (Master) and the Communications Server (Master Comm) that run on the Host PC. Name: The Name column will display the name of the operator who is currently logged in to the highlighted workstation. The name displayed in this field is taken from the Name field of the operator record, in the Operators configuration screen. Logged On: The Logged on column will denote whether the highlighted to workstation is currently logged into the CardAccess system and if it is actively accessing the CardAccess database. Yes indicates that the workstation is active and No indicates that the user has logged off.
Operator: The Operator column will display the screen name of the operator who is currently logged into the highlighted CardAccess workstation. The screen name is taken from the Screen Name field of the Operators screen. Time: The Time field will denote the time at which the indicated operator logged into the CardAccess database.
NAPCO Status Tab

The NAPCO Status tab can be used to check the Arm/Disarm status of
NAPCO Areas in the CardAccess system. Please refer the section titled NAPCO Alarm Panel Integration with CardAccess 3000 for details on this tab.
57
CardAccess Events History

The CardAccess Events History screen allows viewing of archive event data. The typical use of this screen is to scan archive events from past months or years to look for some notable event(s). The screen will only allow the review of events. It is not possible to review database information such as configuration or System Settings. The screen has controls that allow connection to any CardAccess SQL database.
Accessing CardAccess Events History Screen

Click on System menu in CardAccess menu bar. Click on View History option in the menu list. On clicking, the CardAccess Events History screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 30.1. The CardAccess Events History screen showing events history of CardAccess main database.
By default, the Events History screen will display the archive event data of the CardAccess main database (CIData143 in the above figure). Hence, the Events History screen will be displaying the same data as in the CardAccess Events Grid. The status bar at the bottom of the screen will display the currently connected CardAccess SQL server and database names.
Viewing Events history of an archive database is explained in the section titled Viewing Events History of an Archive Database below.
Note: The Events History can be filtered to show only specific event types that are generated during a specific time period. This is explained under the headings Filter Based on Date-Time and Filter Based on Event Type below. First, let us look at the screen details.
Events History Columns
Fig. 30.3. CardAccess Events History Columns.
The Events History columns are explained below. Photo: This column will be visible only when the SmartView (View Only/ Full Control) or the DVR feature (DVR caRemoteView or DVR caCompleteView) is enabled in the System Settings screen. The column will show a camera icon for events whose hardware devices are configured to take CCTV snapshots or if the devices support DVR Recorded Videos. Date: This column shows the date and time at which the highlighted event occurred. Acknowledged: If the highlighted Event is an Alert that was acknowledged, the Acknowledged column will show the date and time at which the Alert was acknowledged. If the highlighted Event is a normal Event in the CardAccess, the Acknowledged column will show the same date and time as that shown in the Date column. Class: Events are grouped into pre-defined classes like Badges, Doors, Inputs, System, Relays, etc. The Class column will show the predefined class names of the Events. Description: The Description column gives a brief description of the highlighted event. By default, this is column is used as the sort column for the screen, and hence the column is shown in Yellow color highlight. Location: This column shows the name of the place where the highlighted Event occurred.
Priority: This column shows the priority value of the highlighted Event as fixed in the various configuration screens of CardAccess.
Right-Click Options
There are two right-click options for the Events History screen based on the option enabled in the System Settings screen, on the CCTV tab. The rightclick options are explained below. Show Video If the System Settings CCTV tab has the DVR caRemoteView-Integral or the DVR caCompleteView-Salient option enabled, then the Events History screen will offer the Show Video right-click option. This option will be visible when you right-click on a desired event in the screen.
Show Video right-click option available when DVR RemoteView or CompleteView feature is enabled in System Settings.
Left-clicking on the Show Video button option will show the DVR Recorded video of the selected event provided, the concerned hardware device (Reader/Input/NAPCO Zone that generated the event) was configured to support DVR Recorded videos. Note: Make sure that the Events Selected section at the bottom left corner of Events History screen has the Readers, Inputs or the NAPCO radio
4
button selection. This is because, CardAccess supports DVR Recorded videos of event occurrences from these devices only. The Photo column will show a camera icon in case the concerned device is configured for DVR Recorded video. Refer the document Integral DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000 or Salient DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000 for more information on DVR Recorded Video feature. Show Photos If the System Settings CCTV tab has the SmartView CCVT View Only/Full Control option enabled, then the Events History screen will offer the Show Video right-click option. This option will be visible when you right-click on a desired event in the screen.
Show Photos right-click option available when SmartView CCTV View Only/Full Control option is enabled in System Settings.
Left-clicking on Show Photos button option will show the CCTV snapshot associated with the selected event provided, the concerned hardware device (Reader/Input) is configured to take CCTV snapshots for the selected event type. Note: Make sure that the Events Selected section at the bottom left corner of Events History screen has the Readers or the Inputs radio button selection. This is because, CardAccess allows CCTV snapshots to be taken for event occurrences from these devices only.
The Photo column will show a camera icon in case the concerned device is configured to take CCTV snapshots. For more information, refer the heading CCTV Tab in the sections Readers and Inputs.
Column Relocation
Columns can be relocated if desired. Steps for relocating a column: 1. Select the column: Select the column to be relocated. 2. Position the Cursor: Position mouse cursor on the column name. 3. Click and Hold: Hold down the left mouse button. 4. Drag the Column: Drag the column to the required position. 5. Release: Release the mouse button. The columns will revert back to their default positions when the screen is reopened.
Events Sorting
By default, the events are sorted according to Description column, in the ascending order. This column allows the events to be sorted in the alphabetical order of the Events description in the column.
Fig. 30.5. Default sort column of Events History screen.
However, any column can be used for sorting. The sort criterion can be changed by clicking on the column name you wish to use for sorting. The sort column will be highlighted in yellow color. A column can be sorted in ascending/descending orders alternately by clicking on the column name. Upward/downward arrows seen in a column name (in yellow highlight) represent ascending/descending sort orders respectively.
Viewing Events History of an Archive Database

By default, the CardAccess Events History screen will display the events data of the CardAccess main database (refer figure 30.1). In order to view events data of an archive database, follow the step below. Click the down arrow of Server control to display the list of CardAccess SQL server names. Among the names, click the server name of the archive database whose Events History data you wish to view.
Click the down arrow of Database control to display the list of archive databases. Note: Database names will be seen in the drop down list only when a server is selected in the Server control. Among the names, click the database name whose Events History you wish to view.
Fig. 30.7. Selecting a database name to view Events History.
Note: After connection is made to the archive database, the status bar will display the archive database name as highlighted in the figure below. The screen will display the System type events stored in the selected archive database. Observe the System radio button selected by default in the Events Selected section at the bottom left corner of the screen.
Fig. 30.8. Events History of the selected archive database.
But, you may wish to view events of other types (other than System events) or you may be interested in viewing events that have occurred during a particular time period. This can be achieved by applying filters. Below, we discuss the filter controls available in the screen.
Filter Based on Date-Time
Fig. 30.9. Default date and time selections.
Date and time selection controls act as filters. When a date and time range is set, the Events History screen will filter out any events from view that do not fall within the specified date and time range. Every time the Events History screen is opened, the date and time controls will show some default selections. You can change the default selections as desired. Setting Date and Time Range Two calendar controls and two spin controls are provided to set the date and time range. The Time From control on the left is used for setting the start date and start time, while the Time Thru control on the right is used for setting the end date and end time. Follow the steps below to set the date and time range: A. i. Setting Start Date Click the down of Time From control. On clicking, a calendar window will be displayed as shown below.
Fig. 30.10. Calendar window displayed by clicking the down arrow of Time From control.
By default, the current date will be highlighted in the calendar. ii. Note: o The Today button (refer figure 30.10) can be used to choose the current date. o The Clear button (refer figure 30.10) can be used to cancel a date selection. o The left/right arrows at the top of the calendar window (refer figure 30.10) can be used to scroll backwards/forwards through the months of a year. B. Setting Start Time The Time From spin control will show the default Start Time of 00:00 (0 hour or 12 midnight). Click on a date of your choice (for start date) in the calendar window.
Default Start Time shown in Time From spin control.
You can change the default time if desired. This can be done in two ways as below: i. In the Time From spin control, click directly on the numbers required to be changed in the Hour/Minute time format, and type in the time of choice or Highlight the numbers in the current time display, and use the up/down arrows of the spin control to change the time. Repeat steps A and B if you wish to change the default End Date and End Time selections in the Time Thru controls. When the Date and Time ranges are thus specified, click the Run button to filter the Events History screen for viewing the events that have occurred during the specified period.
ii.
C.
D.
10
The Run button for executing Filter based on Date-Time.
Filter Based on Event Type

The Events Selected area of CardAccess Events History screen provides radio buttons controls to allow selection of specific Event types for viewing.
Fig. 30.11. Radio button controls for filtering events.
Selection of the radio button provided for a particular event type will filter out all other events that do not match the selected type. By default, the System radio button will be selected as shown in figure 30.11. To change the default selection, click on the button control of the event type you wish to view. The button controls are explained below: All radio button: Selecting this button control will display all events types of the CardAccess database. Badges radio button: Badges radio button can be selected for viewing badge type events. Selecting this button control will display the following additional controls. Badge Event Type Badge Search Columns o Badge # o Last Name o First Name
11
o Group o Dept These additional controls aid in filtering of badge events.
Fig. 30.12. Additional controls for filtering badge events displayed by clicking on Badges radio button.
If no changes are made to the additional controls, then all badge events will be displayed on CardAccess Events History screen. Note: It is necessary to click on Run button (refer figure 30.12) to refresh the screen for displaying the badge events. The additional badge controls are explained below. Badge Event Type It is possible to view specific badge events using the options provided by the Badge Event Type control. Click on the down arrow of the control to view the available options.
Fig. 30.13. The Available badge event types for selection.
Scrolling down, you can see that there are fourteen badge event types available. Each of these options acts as a filter, and when selected, will display only those badge events that match the specific type. For example, selection of Valid Access option in the list will display only valid access badge events on the CardAccess Events History screen. If none of the
12
options are selected in the drop down list, the screen will display all badge events (the default), which is the same as selecting the All option in the list.
Badge Search Columns
Fig. 30.14. Badge search columns for filtering badge events.
Note the following points for all badge search columns shown in figure 30.14. Column entries are case insensitive. To specify a search criterion in any field, click in the white space and type the name of the item you like to search. A badge search column can be used individually or in combination with other column(s) for filtering the events. If none of the columns are used for filtering, the CardAccess Events History screen will display all badge event types (unless a specific event type is selected in the Badge Event Type drop down list). The badge search columns are explained below: Badge #: If a badge number is entered, only events specific to that badge number will be displayed. Last Name: If a last name is entered, only events containing the specified last name will be displayed. First Name: If a first name is entered, only events containing the specified first name will be displayed. Group: If a group name is entered, only events specific to that group will be displayed.
13
Dept: If a department name is entered, only events specific to that department will be displayed.
Run Button For Badge events filtering to take effect, you must click on Run button after making change(s) to the filter control(s)
Fig. 30.15. The Run Button.
The CardAccess Events History screen will display the filtered badge events if matching records are found for the selected filter type. The screen will be blank if there are no matching records. Readers radio button: Selecting this button control will display all door related messages (bypass, door open too long, forced door, etc.) on the CardAccess Events History screen. Inputs radio button: Selecting this button control will display all Input related messages (normal, abnormal) on the CardAccess Events History screen. Relays radio button: Selecting this button control will display all Relay related messages (Output on/off) on CardAccess Events History screen. Links radio button: Selecting this button control will display all Link related messages (Link activate/deactivate) on CardAccess Events History screen. System radio button: Selecting this button control will display all system related event messages (download started/complete, power fail etc) on CardAccess Events History screen. This is the default selection. NAPCO radio button: Selecting this button control will display all NAPCO event messages on CardAccess Events History screen. VIDEO radio button: Selecting this button control will display all events that were generated from the DVR Servers having the DVR
14
Notification feature enabled. The user has the privilege of viewing the DVR Recorded video of any desired event by using the Show Video right-click option. Refer the heading Right-Click Options above for further details.
Printing Events History

Follow the steps below to print the Events History data. Open the CardAccess Events History screen by clicking on System View History menu options. Click on Print/Preview button in the Events History screen toolbar. Note: The Print button will be enabled only when a Report Printer is selected in the System Settings screen. To select a Report Printer, refer the heading Printers Tab in the section System Settings.
15
CardAccess Usage Utility

The CardAccess Usage Utility is a multi-purpose utility that will allow you to generate a variety of system statistics.
Opening CardAccess Usage Utility Screen

Click on Access menu in CardAccess main menu bar. Click on CardAccess Usage Utility menu option in the list. On clicking, the CardAccess Usage Utility screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 62.1. The CardAccess Usage Utility screen.
Observe that the right hand side of the screen has three distinct sections namely Counts, Time Schedules and Access Groups. The controls provided in these sections can be used to display CardAccess related information, on the left hand side of the screen, which serves as the result window. The sections and their controls are discussed in separate sections below. First, we begin with the Counts section.
Counts Section
This section can be used to query the CardAccess database and display the number of badges and access groups, to be stored at a given panel.
Fig. 62.2. The Counts section.
The controls in this section are explained below. Panel In the Panel field, you are required to enter the panel number of the panel, whose badge count and access group count you are interested to know.
Fig. 62.3. The Panel field.
The required panel number has to be obtained from the PnlNo column, in the Panels screen, available from Configuration menu.
Fig. 62.4. Panel Number column from Panels Screen.
Total badges The Total Badges field will indicate the total number of badges to be stored at the panel, that has been specified in the Panel field. You are required to click on (any) one of the blue colored fields in the Counts section, for obtaining this count.
Fig. 62.5. The Total Badges field.
Total Access Groups The Total Access Groups field will indicate the total number of access groups to be stored at the panel, that has been specified in the Panel field. You are required to click on (any) one of the blue colored fields in the Counts section, for obtaining this count.
Fig. 62.6. The Total Access Groups field.
Total Blocks The Total Blocks field will indicate the total number of access group blocks to be stored at the panel, that has been specified in the Panel field. You are required to click on (any) one of the blue colored fields in the Counts section, for obtaining this count.
Fig. 62.7. The Total Blocks field.
Read the section Panel Statistics below for more information.
Panel Statistics
The general process of examining panel statistics is to verify that the data reported by a given panel matches the database programming for that panel. In a case where the two reports dont match, it means that, the configuration data for that panel may not have downloaded properly, a situation that would certainly warrant immediate corrective action. Regarding the general analysis of panel statistics and panel data downloads, there are three panel error conditions that the CardAccess administrator should be aware of. Overflow Panel data overflow conditions generate warning alert messages in the CardAccess main screen, usually in the Alerts Grid. Overflows occur when the host computer attempts to send more configuration data than a panels memory can store. This problem has most commonly occurred when panel memory size has not been increased, and the download of an excess number of badges records is attempted. Underflow This condition occurs when the panel has not stored all of the configuration data that the database indicates should be downloaded to that panel. This can be typically due to a communication error. This problem can be located by using diagnostic tools. But, there may not be error event messages associated with it. Logic Error This condition occurs when the panel logic has been disrupted and configuration memory gets corrupted or lost. A power spike or dip coupled with low backup battery voltages may set the stage for this type of problem. The panel might then possibly begin misreporting statistical numbers, and possibly denying previously valid cardholders. Thus, when it becomes necessary to examine panel configuration memory behavior, you will find the CardAccess Usage utility, Counts section, useful. The CardAccess Usage utility will only report the database programming settings for a given panel. To read statistical counters from the actual panel memory, you need to use the CardAccess Communications Driver window (see figure below).
Fig. 62.8. The CardAccess Communications Driver window.
The Communications Driver data is obtained by directly querying the panel (request for status messages). The CardAccess Usage utility screen information is obtained by querying the database (SQL query). This gives you the ability to compare how many badges and access groups a given panel claims are stored, against what the database says there actually should be. Lets look at how to use these two tools in conjunction with each other. To open the CardAccess Communications Driver window, follow the steps below. a) Locate the Satellite icon in your Windows system tray, and double click it.
Fig. 62.9. The satellite icon in system tray.
Doing this will display the application title CardAccess Comm, on the Windows taskbar.
Fig. 62.10. The CardAccess Comm application title seen on taskbar.
b) Left-click the CardAccess Comm application title seen on the taskbar.

6
On clicking, the CardAccess Communications Driver window will open, revealing the statistics on every active panel in the system.
Fig. 62.11. The CardAccess Communications Driver window.
Observe that the window contains several columns. The meaning of each column in the window is briefly explained below.
Fig. 62.12. Column values of an active panel.
Panel This column will indicate the panel number of the panel (the number is taken from the Panels screen).
Version This column will indicate the firmware version of the panel firmware. State This column will indicate the panels current communication status. TZ Blks This column will indicate the number of time zone blocks stored at the panel. Max Cards This column will indicate the maximum number of badge records that can be stored by the panel memory.
Card Cnt This column will indicate the actual number of cards stored at the panel. Exp Mem This column will indicate the total number of expanded memory blocks (each block represents 4k bytes) at the panel. Xacts This column will indicate the number of event transactions that are being buffered in panel memory, waiting to be sent to the CardAccess host polling computer. AG Blks This column will indicate the total number of Access Group blocks that are stored at the panel. Retrys This column will indicate the total number of times the panel was polled but did not respond. Retry Fail This column will indicate the total number of times the panel failed to respond to a group of three successive polls. In order to compensate for possible communications line problems, the panel is polled three times before being considered non-responsive (a Retry Fail). For the purposes of this discussion about the CardAccess Usage utility, we will be interested only in the data found under the columns marked Card Cnt and AG Blks,, in the CardAccess Communications Driver window. The reason being, these fields are also represented in the CardAccess Usage Utility as Total Badges and Total Blocks respectively. The following sections explain the steps involved in obtaining panel statistics from the CardAccess Usage Utility and comparing them with the CardAccess Communications Driver window values.
Obtaining Panel Statistics

Following are the steps to obtain panel statistics, in the CardAccess Usage Utility screen. 1. Decide on the panel whose statistics (total badge count and total access group count) you are interested to know; go to Panels screen (available from Configuration menu) and note down the panel number of that panel under the PnlNo column.
Fig. 62.13. Noting the panel number in Panels screen Panel Number column.
2. Open CardAccess Usage Utility screen by clicking on Access Find Usage menu options in the CardAccess main screen. 3. In the Counts section Panel field, type in the panel number you have noted in step 1.
Fig. 62.14. Panel number entered in Panel field of Counts section.
4. Click on any of the blue colored fields (that is, Total Badges, Total Access Groups or Total Blocks fields), in the Counts section.
Fig. 62.15. Click on any of the blue colored fields.
On clicking, the system will go busy momentarily, and then will provide the results in, each of the three fields.
Fig. 62.16. Panel statistics obtained by clicking one of the blue colored fields.
Comparing with Communications Driver

After you have brought up the panel database settings in the CardAccess Usage Utility screen, proceed to the following steps. a) Open the CardAccess Communications Driver window. The following steps are involved in opening. o Locate the Satellite icon in your Windows system tray, and double click it.
Fig. 62.17. The satellite icon in system tray.
Doing this will display the application title CardAccess Comm, on the Windows taskbar.
Fig. 62.18. The CardAccess Comm application title seen on taskbar.
o Left-click the CardAccess Comm application title seen on the taskbar. On clicking, the CardAccess Communications Driver window will open, revealing the statistics on every active panel in the system.
10
b) Under the Panel column in the CardAccess Communications Driver window, locate the panel number you have entered in the CardAccess Usage Utility Counts section (step 3 under previous heading), and (here in the Communications Driver window), note down the corresponding Card Cnt and AG Blks column values, for that particular panel number.
Fig. 62.19. Noting the values under the columns Card Cnt and AG Blks for the panel in question
c) Compare the Card Cnt and AG Blks values respectively with the Total Badges and Total Blocks values, obtained in the CardAccess Usage Utility screen. It is necessary that the values match with each other.
Fig. 62.20. Comparing Card Cnt and AG Blks with Total Badges and Total Blocks values in Counts section
d) In case the values dont match, you need to re-download data to the concerned panel. To do this, refer the heading Manual Data Download to Panel(s), in the section titled Panels.
11
Next, we will be dealing with the Time Schedules section, in the 'CardAccess Usage Utility screen.
Time Schedules Section

The Time Schedules section can be used to examine how the (CardAccess) time schedules are assigned in the CardAccess database. You may wish to know which of the hardware devices use a particular time schedule or, which of the time schedules have been created, but, not yet been assigned to any of the hardware devices.
Fig. 62.21. The Time Schedules section.
The controls in this section are explained below. Time Schedules Drop Down Box The drop down box seen in the Time Schedules section stores all of the time schedules that are created in the Schedules screen.
Fig. 62.22. The Time Schedules drop down box.
Clicking the down arrow will provide the list of time schedules. You will be selecting a desired schedule in the list, for knowing its usage in the CardAccess software.
12
Show Schedule Usage On clicking the Show Schedule Usage button, the left hand side of the screen will display the list of all CardAccess hardware and software items that have been assigned the time schedule selected in the Time Schedule drop down box.
Fig. 62.23. The Show Schedule Usage button.
The example figure below shows that the schedule Weekdays, Business Hours is assigned to two readers (CardAccess hardware devices) and three access groups (CardAccess software items). Out of them, Blake Carl and Smith John are dedicated access groups.
13
Fig. 62.24. Time Schedule Usage information obtained by clicking on Show Schedule Usage button.
Note: In case the selected schedule is not assigned to any CardAccess item (either software or hardware), then, the result window will be empty. In the example figure below, the result window is empty as the schedule Weeknights, 10 PM-12 AM is not assigned to any CardAccess item.
14
Fig. 62.25. Result window empty as the selected time schedule is not assigned to any CardAccess item.
Unused Time Schedules You may click on Unused Time Schedules button if you wish to know which of the schedules (created in the Schedules screen) have not been assigned to any item in the CardAccess software.
Fig. 62.26. The Unused Time Schedules button.
On clicking this button, the left hand side of the screen will show the list of all unused time schedules in CardAccess.
15
Fig. 62.27. Unused Time Schedule information obtained by clicking on Unused Time Schedules button.
16
Finding Time Schedule Usage

Follow the steps below to obtain Time Schedule Usage information in CardAccess software. Open CardAccess Usage Utility screen by clicking on Access Find Usage menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Click the down arrow of Time Schedules drop down box, locate the desired time schedule, and click on it.
Fig. 62.28. Selecting a desired time schedule to find its usage in CardAccess.
Note: The drop down list will show all schedules created in the Schedules screen. If no schedule is seen in the list, it means that time schedules have not been created so far. Refer the section Schedules to create them. Click on Show Schedule Usage button.
Fig. 62.29. The Show Schedule Usage button.
Upon clicking, the left hand side of the screen will display the usage information of the selected time schedule. The information will include the software as well as hardware items of the CardAccess database that use the selected time schedule. The figure below informs that the schedule Weekdays, Business Hours is used by two readers (hardware device) and three access groups (software item). Out of them, Blake Carl and Smith John are dedicated access groups.
17
Fig. 62.30. Time Schedule Usage information of a selected time schedule.
Note: In case the selected schedule is not assigned to any CardAccess item, then the result window will be empty. Next, we deal with the Access Groups section.
18
Access Groups Section

The Access Groups section can be used to examine how the (CardAccess) Access Groups are assigned in the CardAccess database. You may wish to know which badges (or how many) use a particular access group, or which of the access groups have been created, but not yet been assigned to any of the badge holders.
Fig. 62.31. The Access Groups section.
The controls in this section are explained below. Access Groups Drop Down Box The drop down box seen in the Access Groups section stores all of the access groups that are created in the Access Groups screen.
Fig. 62.32. The Access Groups drop down box.
Clicking the down arrow will provide the list of access groups. You will be selecting a desired access group in the list, for knowing its usage in the CardAccess software.
19
Show Access Group Usage On clicking the Show Access Group Usage button, the left hand side of the screen will display the list of all badge holders who are assigned the access group selected in the Access Groups drop down box.
Fig. 62.33. The Show Access Group Usage button.
All badges that appear in the results window have the selected access group assigned in the Access Group 1 or Access Group 2 field (or both) in the Personnel screen (see Personnel for more information). The example figure below shows the list of all badge holders who are assigned the access group All the Time. Note that badge numbers as well as cardholder names are listed. The total number of badges using the selected access group is also indicated (see the highlight in the figure below).
20
Fig. 62.34. List of badge holders who are assigned the access group All the Time.
Note: In case the selected access group is not assigned to any badge holder in CardAccess, then the result window will be empty. In the example figure below, the result window is empty as the selected access group is not assigned to any badge holder in our system.
21
Fig. 62.35. Result window empty as the selected access group is not assigned to any badge holder.
Unused Access Groups You may click on Unused Access Groups button to know which of the access groups (created in the Access Groups screen) have not yet been assigned to any badge holder, in the CardAccess software.
Fig. 62.36. The Unused Access Groups Button
On clicking this button, the left hand side of the screen will show the list of all unused access groups.
22
Fig. 62.37. Unused Access Group information obtained by clicking on Unused Access Groups button.
23
Finding Access Group Usage

Follow the steps below to obtain Access Group Usage information in CardAccess software. Open CardAccess Usage Utility screen by clicking on Access Find Usage menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Click the down arrow of Access Groups drop down box, locate the desired access group, and click on it.
Fig. 62.38. Selecting a desired access group to find its usage in CardAccess.
Note: The drop down list will show all access groups created in the Access Groups screen. If no access group is seen in the list, it means that access groups have not been created so far. Refer the section Access Groups to create them. Click on Show Access Group Usage button.
Fig. 62.39. The Show Access Group Usage button.
On clicking, the left hand side of the screen will show the usage of the selected access group. All badges that appear in the results window have the selected access group assigned in the Access Group 1 or Access Group 2 field (or both) in the Personnel screen (see Personnel for more information).
24
The example figure below shows the list of all badge holders who are assigned the access group All the Time. Note that badge numbers as well as cardholder names are listed. The total number of badges that use the selected access group is also seen (see the highlight in the figure below).
Fig. 62.40. Access Group Usage information of a selected access group.
Note: In case the access group selected is not assigned to any badge holder, then the result window will be empty.
25
Dial Up
Dial Up
Configuration of dial nodes is performed in the Setup Dialup screen. Each record created in this screen describes one Dial Node. Conceptually, a Dial Node is a software macro that is ultimately a coupling of three things. It joins phone numbers, time schedules and panels together to form an action macro that the software will execute later. The dial node macro begins to perform activities once you create, enable and save it. Once activated, a dial node macro will wait for the time schedule to go into effect. The CardAccess communications driver will then dial the phone number indicated in the dial node record. The communications driver will attempt to establish a data communications link with the panels selected in the node record. The reason for the existence of dial nodes is to have the CardAccess communications driver connect to selected panel clusters periodically for the following purposes. Uploading Event Messages All models of Continental panels store event messages in a memory buffer. When the CardAccess communications driver polls a given panel, panel event messages are purged from panel memory and are sent to the CardAccess host. On a dial node, the panels will not be polled until a dial connection is established. The panels will continue to store event messages until the memory buffer is filled, then overflowed. The default size of the panel event message buffer is set to 1000 events (adjustable in the Transaction Buffer Size field in the Panels screen, on the General tab). When full, the events buffer begins to overwrite itself. The oldest event messages can be lost if the CardAccess PC does not dial a given panel cluster frequently enough. Downloading Configuration Changes When configuration changes are made in the CardAccess software, such as adding a badge or changing an access group, those changes are sent to dial node panels on the next available dial connection. Thus, dial panels must be connected through dial up before they can receive configuration changes. However, configuration changes for any dial panel cause the system to dial the associated dial node as soon as the change is made, automatically. The system does not wait for the next valid schedule to send configuration changes.
Dial Up
Accessing Setup Dialup Screen

Click on Configuration menu in CardAccess main menu bar. Click on Modems option in the menu list. Upon clicking, the Setup Dialup screen will open in the General tab as below.
Fig. 63.1. The Setup Dialup screen.
The controls in the screen are explained below.
Dial Up
General Tab
The controls on the General tab are used to set the operating settings for the dial node.
Fig. 63.2. The Setup Dialup screen General tab.
The controls are explained below. Node Number Each node you create must be assigned a unique number. The system will automatically increment the node number every time a new record is created.
Fig. 63.3. The Node Number control.
If you wish to set the Node Number manually, click the arrows to the right of the Node Number control or, click in the white space and type in a number from 1 to 512.
Dial Up
Panel Dial In Phone Numbers The Workstations (Incoming) section is where you can enter up to two phone numbers that the panels will use to dial back the CardAccess host PC.
Fig. 63.4. The dial back phone numbers section.
First, you will select the CardAccess station name for which you intend to define dial nodes. The Station control will contain the (Description) of all workstations (ComServer as well as Secondary ComServers) that are defined in the Communication Ports screen. A click on the down arrow will show the list of ComServers.
Fig. 63.5. Station control showing ComServers that are defined in Communication Ports screen.
The two phone number fields, Telephone No. Line 1 and Telephone No. Line 2, represent the phone numbers of the PC side modems connected to the CardAccess host PC and software.
Fig. 63.6. Telephone No. Line 1 and Line 2 fields.
These will be the modems that you connected to the CardAccess in the System Settings screen.
Dial Up
Fig 63.7. The System Settings screen Modems section.
Note that the System Settings screen has fields for Modem Line 1 and Modem Line 2 (see figure 63.7 above). These fields let you connect up to two modems for use by the CardAccess communications driver. There is no prioritizing of the fields, so you can connect one modem to Line 2, and no modem to Line 1 if you prefer (This not recommended though. It is far less confusing to use Line 1 first and then Line 2 if you need a second modem). Note that the field called Telephone No. Line 1 in the Setup Dialup screen is permanently linked by software to the field called Line 1 Modem Name in the System Settings screen (on the General Tab). The field called Telephone No. Line 2 in the Setup Dialup screen is also permanently linked to the Line 2 Modem Name field in the System Settings screen. When you select a modem in the Line 1 field of the System Settings, that modem becomes known to the CardAccess software as Modem Line 1. The software does not use the modem name to refer to the modem. It uses whatever modem is assigned in the Line 1 Modem Name field of the System Settings and is known to the system as Modem Line 1. The same is true for the Line 2 modem. This is an important concept in CardAccess dial node set up. Because, in the CardAccess configuration screens, all references to the dial modems are expressed as Line 1 or Line 2, not as modem name xyz. Thus, the field called Telephone No. Line 1 in the Workstations (Incoming) section of the Setup Dialup screen, refers to the phone number of the phone line that is connected to the modem referred to in the field called Line 1 Modem Name, of the System Settings (in the Modems section, on the General tab). And, Telephone No. Line 2 refers to the telephone number of the Line 2 Modem Name modem in the System Settings. To enter a phone number, click in the white space of either of the Telephone No. fields and type a phone number. Each field will hold up to 30 digits.
Dial Up
Panel Dial Out Phone Numbers The CardAccess software needs to know the phone number of the panel side modem, for the currently selected dial node. You will supply that phone number by typing it into the Telephone No. field of the Panels section, in the Setup Dialup screen.
Fig. 63.8. The Telephone No field.
Each node record in the Setup Dialup screen represents one dial node. That dial node could represent 1 panel or up to 63 panels. The phone number entered into the Telephone No field represents the phone number of the modem that is physically connected to the first panel in the selected cluster. There will be one record in the Setup Dialup screen for each dial up panel cluster that you have constructed (in this case a cluster is one or more panels, with one of those panels connected to a modem). Each panel node record will have a unique telephone number in the Telephone No field, because each node record represents a different cluster of panels, each with its own modem and phone line. There is an additional field provided in the Panels section called Modem Init Strings.
Fig. 63.9. The Modem Init Strings field.
Here, you can fill in an initialization string that will be sent to the panel side modem. This string will be downloaded to the panel memory just after the CardAccess communications driver hangs up every call. This will allow you to reprogram the remote panel modem behavior from any CardAccess workstation, possibly saving a trip to the remote site.
Dial Up
Once an initialization string has been downloaded to panel memory, the panel will send that string to the panel side modem on either of the two occasions. o When the panel hangs up just after a connection or o When the panel is manually reset Note that when there is no initialization string specified in the Modem Init Strings field of the Setup Dialup screen node record, the panel connected to the modem still sends a default initialization string to the modem of ATQEV. The meaning of this string is as follows. AT The attention command. Instructs the modem to enter command mode Q (Q0) Return result codes E (E0) Echo Off V (V0) Return numeric result codes This default string will ensure the minimum modem compatibility with Continental access control panels. The panels require that numeric result codes be returned from the modem. The panel uses these result codes to determine the dial and answer status of the modem. Thus, whatever custom initialization string you create for your modem, at the minimum that string must include Q0, E0 and V0 as parameters. Note that the default initialization string is permanently stored in panel EPROM, so you dont need to enter it in the Modem Init Strings field. If you wish to expand on that string, then the Modem Init Strings field is available.
Dial Up
Manual Connect
Fig. 63.10. The Manual Connect button.
Generally, there are two ways to request that the CardAccess connect to a given dial node. o Dial By Schedule This is the standard way to have the CardAccess connect to dial nodes. You select a schedule in the Setup Dialup screen for each dial node that you create. The system will then automatically dial a given node when the schedule goes into effect o Manual Connect You have the option of manually connecting to any dial node at any time by using the Manual Connect feature. Generally, you highlight the desired node and click the Manual Connect button (figure 63.10 above). This brings up a manual connection screen, which provides controls that will allow you to force the communications driver to dial the selected node immediately.
Fig. 63.11. The Manual Connect Screen.
The manual connect screen controls are explained below. Node Using the Node field, you can select the name of a node to manually dial. The Node field will be focused on the name of the node that was highlighted when you clicked the Manual Connect button, on the Setup Dialup screen. However, once the Modem Connections screen is open, you can select any node that you wish to dial by selecting it in the Node control.
Dial Up
Fig. 63.12. The Node selection control.
To select a node, click the arrow button to the right of the Node control, scroll up or down to locate the desired node, and click on it. Modem As stated above, there are two possible dial lines available in the CardAccess software. The manual connect screen needs to know which modem line (Line 1 or Line 2) you wish to use, to dial out.
Fig. 63.13. The Modem selection control.
To select a modem line to dial out, click the arrow to the right of the Modem control, and select Modem Line 1 or Modem Line 2. Dial Click the Dial button to force the CardAccess communications driver to dial the selected dial node.
Fig. 63.14. The manual connect screen Dial button.
Hang Up The Hang Up button has been provided as a means to cancel a manual dial out request. After you click the Dial button, the CardAccess communications driver will attempt to force the selected modem off hook and dial the selected panel cluster. You can click the Hang Up button at any time during the connection, to cancel the dial request and hang up the line.
Fig. 63.15. The Hang Up button.
Note: Once a connection has been established to a dial panel cluster, you must be careful not to hang up the connection while panels are in the middle of a data download. The panels clear their configuration memory prior to a data download, and partial downloads can disable the panel. Note though, that all dial connections do not result in data downloads.
9
Dial Up
Cancel If you click the Cancel button, all changes will be discarded and the manual connect window will be closed.
Fig. 63.16. The manual connect screen Cancel button.
The Cancel button will not cause the communications driver to hang up a currently active call. Stay Connected The Stay Connected check box allows you to override the default behavior of the CardAccess communications driver. For economy, the communications driver is set by default to hang up all dial connections (manual or automatic), once there is no more data to transmit or receive. When checked, the Stay Connected check box tells the communications driver to remain connected indefinitely once a manual dial call is connected. The Stay Connected check box applies to the manual dialing feature and does not apply to the dial by schedule function.
Fig. 63.17. The manual connect screen Stay Connected checkbox.
Check the Stay Connected check box to remain connected. Uncheck the check box to always disconnect after the data transfer is complete (the default). Node Name Enter up to thirty characters in the Node Name field to describe your dial node.
Fig. 63.18. The Node Name field.
It is strongly suggested that you use names that accurately reflect the location or use of the dial node. Any typed character is accepted in this field.
10
Dial Up
Dial On Schedule
Fig. 63.19. The Dial Frequency section.
Fig. 63.20. The Time Schedule selection control.
The Dial Frequency controls (figure 63.19) and the Time Schedule selection field (figure 63.20) of the Setup Dialup screen work in conjunction with one another. As stated previously, dial out to panel clusters can be set up to happen automatically based on a time schedule, or you can force a manual dial by using the Manual Connect button on the Setup Dialup screen. The Dial Frequency radio buttons set how frequently the selected node will be automatically dialed by the CardAccess system. You have the following choices. o By Schedule The selected node is dialed according to the time schedule selected in the Time Schedule field (figure 63.20). To select the dial by schedule option, click the By Schedule option in the Dial Frequency section of the General tab. Next, click the arrow to the right of the Time Schedule field (also on the General tab) and scroll up or down to select a schedule. If there are no schedules visible in the list, you need to go to the Schedules screen and create some. Refer the section titled Schedules to do this. o On the Hour The selected node is dialed every hour, at the top of the hour. To select the dial on the hour option, click the On the Hour option in the Dial Frequency section of the General tab.
11
Dial Up
Make sure the selection in the Time Schedule control is blank or says Not Used. The Time Schedule control is only used in the Dial By Schedule setting. o Twice Daily The selected node is dialed twice daily. Once at noon and once again at midnight. To enable this, click the Twice Daily option in the Dial Frequency section of the General tab. Make sure the selection in the Time Schedule control is blank or says Not Used. The Time Schedule control is only used in the Dial by Schedule setting. o Daily The selected node is dialed once per day, at midnight only. To enable this, click the Daily option in the Dial Frequency section of the General tab. Make sure the selection in the Time Schedule control is blank or says Not Used. The Time Schedule control is only used in the Dial by Schedule setting. Note: Panel event buffers have limited capacity. You will want to select a dial schedule for a panel cluster that picks up buffered event messages before panel event buffers overflow. If overflow occurs, the oldest event messages will be overwritten with newer events. You could lose event messages if a panels event buffer is allowed to overflow. Busier panels require more frequent dialing.
12
Dial Up
Panels Tab
The goal of a dial node macro is to establish communications with the panels selected on the Panels tab of the dial node record. The Panels tab is where you will tell the CardAccess which panels will belong to the current dial node. The list of panels that appears in the Panels tab contains only panels that are known to be dial up panels. You select the panels that you wish include in a given dial node, by clicking the check boxes. When you click the Panels tab in the Setup Dialup screen for a given dial node record, you will not see any panels represented there (see figure below), unless you have created some dial panels first.
Fig. 63.21. Setup Dialup screen Panels tab- No panels listed as panels are not yet configured for dial up function.
To begin the process of creating dial panels, you must start by going to the Communication Ports screen. You need to create at least one Com Port that has the Type field set to Modem option (see figure below).
Fig. 63.22. Communication Ports screen COM 1 port set to Modem type.
13
Dial Up
After you have created a modem enabled Com port, you can then assign that Com Port to one or more panels in the Com Port field of each selected panel record, in the Panels screen.
Fig. 63.23. The Panels screen Com Port selection control.
Once a given panel has been assigned to a modem enabled Com port, it becomes a dial up panel. Only dial up enabled panels are shown on the Panels tab of the Setup Dialup screen (see figure below). Therefore, if you have not assigned a Modem type Com Port to any panel, the list will be empty (see figure 63.21 above).
Fig. 63.24. Setup Dialup screen Panels tab showing dial up enabled panel names.
Note that the Panels tab of the Setup Dialup screen lists all panels that are assigned to modem enabled Com Ports. The list is simply a listing of all panels that have been assigned to dial up Com ports. None of those panels have been assigned to any dial nodes, until you assign them by clicking the check boxes. So, when you create a dial node, you are telling the CardAccess software which panels in the list of all dial enabled panels, you have connected together on the same remote panel modem.
14
Dial Up
The controls on the Panels tab of the Setup Dialup screen allow you to select the panels that will belong to a given dial node. You can also select which of the two CardAccess modem lines will be used for dialing out by the CardAccess host PC, or which modem lines will be used by the selected panels for dialing in from the currently selected dial node. Note that all selections in a given node record affect only that node. There are no global settings available from the Setup Dialup screen that will affect all dial nodes. The Panels tab controls are explained below.
Panel Selection The Panels selection area (see figure below) is where you will select panels that will belong to the current dial node. You simply click the check box of each panel that you wish to include in a given node. All of those panels that dont have checks in the check boxes will not be polled when the currently selected node is connected.
Fig. 63.25. Panels selected by clicking checkboxes.
Note that in the Setup Dialup screen, we are creating a macro that will dial a given cluster and poll the panel addresses of the panels that we have selected on the Panels tab. It is important to be sure that all of the panels selected in the Panels area of a given node are in fact, actually physically connected together, and are connected to the modem whose phone number is specified in the Telephone No. field of the selected node. Since the panels list is a list of all dial up panels, it would be easy to mistakenly include a panel that belongs to a different node by checking the wrong box. Beware of this.
15
Dial Up
To select a panel for inclusion with the selected node, click the check box for that panel. Checked means the panel is included, unchecked means excluded.
Dial Out Modem Line The Dial- Out Line radio buttons are used to select which modem the currently selected dial node will use to dial out from the PC to the panels.
Fig. 63.26. The Dial-Out Line radio buttons.
By selecting one of the above options, you are telling the CardAccess which modem listed in the System Settings (see figure 63.7 above) it should use for dialing out to the panels when the current node is contacted. Click the modem line you wish to select (the system will only let you select one of the modems lines).
Dial In Modem Line
Fig. 63.27. The Dial-In Line radio buttons.
The Dial-In Line radio buttons enable two things. o Dial In Phone Numbers The Dial-In Line radio buttons are used to select which dial in phone numbers will be sent to the currently selected panel cluster. If you select Modem Line 1, only the phone number from the Telephone No Line 1 field (on the General Tab) will be sent to the panels in the selected cluster. Thus, they will only be aware of the one dial back phone line and will use that phone number exclusively for dial back.
16
Dial Up
Similarly, if you select Modem Line 2, only the phone number from the Telephone No Line 2 field will be sent to the panels. If you select Both Modem Lines, both of the phone numbers from the Workstations (incoming) section of the General tab will be sent to all panels in the selected cluster. A panel wishing to connect to the CardAccess host PC will dial Modem Line 1 first. If that line is busy, the panel will dial Modem Line 2. The panel will continue to cycle between Modem Line 1 and 2 indefinitely until it achieves a connection. o Modem Monitoring Your selection in the Dial-In Line area of the Panels tab also enables CardAccess monitoring of the modem lines selected, waiting for incoming calls. Once you make a Dial-In Line selection, the CardAccess connects to the selected modem(s) to monitor for incoming connection requests. The CardAccess may still dial out from the selected modems, but those modems will not be available to any other Windows programs. To make a selection, click Modem Line 1, Modem Line 2 or Both Modem Lines (the system will only allow one selection)
Alpha Sort By default, the list of panels in the list on the Panels tab is sorted in the panel number order (taken from the PnlNo column of the Panels screen). If you wish to sort the panels list in alphabetical order instead, click the Alpha Sort check box.
Fig. 63.28. The Alpha Sort check box.
Checked means sorted in alphabetical order, unchecked means sorted in panel number order. You dont need to be in edit mode to use this feature.
17
Dial Up
Creating a Basic Dial Node Definition

1. Open Setup Dialup screen by clicking on Configuration Modems menu options in the CardAccess main screen. On clicking, the screen will open in the General tab. 2. Click on New button in the toolbar. 3. In the Node Name field, type a descriptive name for the node being created. Any typed character is accepted in this field. It is strongly recommended that you create a name that accurately describes the location or the intended use of the node.
Fig. 63.29. The Node Name field.
4. Click the down arrow to the right of Station control (seen in Workstations (Incoming) section), locate the ComServer for which you wish to define dial nodes, and click on it.
Fig. 63.30. Choosing a desired ComServer.
5. Enter a Dial In Phone Number Two fields are provided in the Workstations (Incoming) section for specifying the dial in phone numbers. Each field represents one of the modems that is selected for use by the CardAccess software, as indicated in the CardAccess System Settings. The Dial In Phone Number fields will contain the phone numbers of the two modems that are connected to the CardAccess host PC. These numbers will be downloaded to the panel(s) indicated in the current node record. The panel(s) will then store these numbers and use them to dial in to the CardAccess PC where necessary. The numbers in these fields are optional. If you will not need to have any panel in the selected node dial the CardAccess host PC, you dont need to
18
Dial Up
supply any dial in phone numbers. Also, you may elect to use only one modem, which can be either modem 1 or modem 2. However, whichever number you provide (modem line 1 or 2), there must be a modem selected for that modem line in the System Settings (see the manual section on the System Settings for more information, also refer the heading Panel Dial In Phone Numbers explained under General tab above). To enter a phone number, click in the white space and type in the number.
Fig. 63.31. The dial-in telephone number fields.
6. Enter a Dial Out Phone Number The Telephone No field in the Panels section is where you will type in the phone number of the panel side modem for the current panel cluster. This number will be used by the CardAccess communications driver each time the selected panel node is dialed. To enter a phone number, click in the white space and type in the number.
Fig. 63.32. The dial-out telephone number field.
7. Modem Init String If preferred, you are permitted to enter modem initialization strings into the Modem Init Strings field (see figure 63.33 below). These strings will be downloaded to the panel that is connected to the remote modem (the panel whose address is set to 1gets the string stored). That panel will store the initialization string in memory and will send that string to the (panel side) modem after each connection event is terminated (shortly after each hang up). The string will also be sent from the panel to the panel side modem each time the panel is manually reset. To enter a string, click in the white space of the Modem Init Strings field (figure 63.33) and type in your string. The string must begin with the AT command (the modem attention command). You will not need AT on the second line (if you use it). The system sees both lines of the field as one
19
Dial Up
contiguous string. You may separate each command with a space if preferred for readability. Spaces are ignored.
Fig. 63.33. The Modem Init Strings Field.
8. Select a Schedule The schedule is a key element of the dial node definition. The schedule determines when, and how frequently the CardAccess communications driver will connect to the dial node defined by the current node definition. You have the following choices. o By Schedule The CardAccess will dial the node according to the schedule selected in the Time Schedule field. If you elect to use this option, you must also select a time schedule in the Time Schedule field.
Fig. 63.34. The Time Schedule selection control.
o On the Hour The CardAccess will dial the node every hour, at the top of the hour. o Twice Daily The CardAccess will dial the node twice daily, once at midnight and once at noon. o Daily The CardAccess will dial the node once per day, at midnight. If you are not sure which option to select, as a baseline use the Twice Daily option if the system is busy 24 hours per day. Use the Daily option for systems that are moderately busy during the day, but are quiet at night. To select an option, click on it. If a black dot is shown in the circle, the option is selected.
20
Dial Up
Fig. 63.35. The Dial Frequency selection radio buttons.
9. Click on the Panels tab. 10. Select Panels You will need to add some panels to your dial node. By default, the software shows you a list of all panels that are known to be dial up panels, but no panels are added to your new dial node automatically. You must select each panel that you wish to include in the current dial node. You will only select panels that you know are physically connected together and are on the same modem. The CardAccess communications driver will then poll the panel addresses of each selected panel, each time the currently selected dial node is connected. To select a panel, click the check box of the panel in question. Checked means selected, unchecked means not selected.
Fig. 63.36. Panels selected by clicking checkboxes.
11. Select a Dial Out Line Since the CardAccess allows you to assign up to two modems for use by the dial engine (in the System Settings screen), the software needs to know which of the two modems you would prefer this dial node to use for dialing out to the panel cluster indicated by the currently selected node record.
21
Dial Up
To select a Dial Out Line, click the radio button to the left of the Modem Line 1 or Modem Line 2 labels. A black dot in the circle means selected. It is recommended that you check the System Settings General tab to verify which modem line is assigned to the modem you wish to select. You are permitted to select either line but not both.
Fig. 63.37. The Dial-Out Line radio buttons.
12. Select a Dial In Line You will only need to select one or more Dial In Lines if you are planning on having the panels dial in to the CardAccess PC in response to an input, relay or link activation. If you have not set this option in any of the Inputs, Relays or Links screens, you may skip this section. If you wish to have one or more panels in the currently selected dial node dial in to the CardAccess, you need to supply those panel(s) with the dial line phone number(s) of the CardAccess host PC modem(s). The CardAccess host PC can support up to two modems (in the System Settings). Each of those modems can be assigned to dial in or dial out duties. However, when you select a modem for dial in duty, that modem port is placed in monitor mode. The CardAccess software will monitor the port waiting for a ringing indication, then will answer the call. You can assign up to two modems for dial in duty if you prefer. The CardAccess will monitor both modems and answer whichever line is ringing. A modem can be assigned to dial out and dial in duty simultaneously. To select a Dial In Line, click the radio button to the left of Modem Line 1, Modem Line 2 or Both Modem Lines. A black dot in the circle means selected. You are only permitted to select one of the three options.
22
Dial Up
Fig. 63.38. The Dial-In Line radio buttons.
13. Click on Save button in the Setup Dialup screen toolbar to save the settings. When you have saved your node record, the CardAccess will activate that node. Once the node is activated, the CardAccess will wait for the time schedule selected in that node to go into effect, and will then dial the remote nodes modem as requested. Once the CardAccess is successfully connected to a panel cluster through a dial line, it will remain online with the panels indicated in the node record until there are no more event messages received from those panels. The CardAccess communications driver will then hang up the call and dial the next dial node, if it is programmed to do so.
Editing a Dial Node Definition

Open Setup Dialup screen by clicking on Configuration Modems menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab. In the upper half of the screen, locate the dial node record you wish to edit, and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Make desired changes to the controls in the General and Panels tabs of the screen. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes.
23
Dial Up
Click on Close button to close the screen.
Deleting a Dial Node Definition

Open Setup Dialup screen by clicking on Configuration Modems menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, select the dial node record you wish to delete, and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 63.39. Message box displayed before deleting a dial node record.
Note: Delete action cannot be reversed. A record deleted once is lost forever. Make sure you have chosen the correct record for deleting. After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
24
Dial Up
Setup Dialup Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 63.40. The Setup Dialup screen navigation bar.
The Setup Dialup screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked dial node records in the screen. In figure 63.40, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first dial node record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted dial node record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted dial node record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted dial node record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted dial node record.
25
Dial Up
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last dial node record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted dial node record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked dial node record.
General Modem Setup

Generally, you will need at least one dial modem for the CardAccess host PC (up to two are permitted). An external modem is recommended, as there have been cases where a modem has locked up, preventing dial out. The only way to reset an internal modem is to reboot the host computer, which will also take the entire CardAccess system down. You will also need to provide an additional modem for every dial node (panel cluster) that you wish to construct. A dial node will consist of a modem with one or more panels serially connected, attached to each other, and ultimately one panel in the cluster is attached to the modem. Note: The panel that is directly attached to the modem must have the modem switch set to Off (switch #7 on a SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm, SmartTerm and MiniTerm, switch #6 on a MicroTerm). This switch enables panel control of the modem through AT commands. The modem to panel link will not work correctly if the modem switch is set to On (the default). The various CardAccess system dial modems do not have to be the same brand or model. That is, you can mix modem brands in the same system, but it is not recommended. Because modems are designed to industry standards, theoretically you should be able to make any modem talk to another modem. In practice, this will only be true if the modem installer is highly skilled at setting up modems and in telecommunications in general. It makes more sense to use
26
Dial Up
the same modem brand and model for every connection point to permit ease of setup and insure 100% compatibility. All modems, regardless of brand have programmable parameters that are accessible by sending configuration command codes through the modem serial port. These command codes are generally referred to as the Hayes AT Command Set due to the fact that the modem command language was first used by the Hayes modem company, and due to the fact that every command string must begin with the letters AT. AT is the attention command for a modem, and puts all modems into configuration mode. The modem expects that some number of recognizable command codes will follow the AT command. Every modem has a specific list of AT commands that the modem will respond to. Any commands that are outside of that list are ignored by the modem. Unfortunately, the Hayes command set was not officially adopted as a fixed standard. Manufacturers are free to reassign modem control codes to any modem function as they see fit. Thus, you will find that each modem comes with a chart of command assignments, which is unique to that brand or model of modem. However, modem manufacturers do attempt adherence to the Hayes command set for the most part. You will find that most modem command mnemonics are the same from brand to brand, with only minor variations. But it is important to be forewarned that a command string that works for one modem may not work for another modem, even if that modem is a different model made by the same manufacturer. The general setup guidelines for modems that will be used with the CardAccess system are the same for all modem brands. The Host PC side modem requires no special setup and the panel side modem will require some compensation for the fact that the panels do not provide any hardware handshaking signals on the RS232 interface. Below are the general features that you will want to set up on any modem (regardless of brand or model) that you intend to use with the CardAccess system.
27
Dial Up
Host PC Side Modem Use Factory Defaults There is no set up necessary for the PC side modem. Set the modem to the factory default settings and connect the modem to the PC using the standard modem cable. The factory setup works because modems are designed to be connected to PCs, so the optimal settings for that type of connection have been stored in the modems memory in advance by the manufacturer. Panel Side Modem You will need to enable the following features on any modem that you intend to connect to a Continental designed access control panel. Modem Feature Name DTR Normal/Override Option RTS Override Carrier Detect Override Option Echo Off/On Option Result Codes On/Off Option Verbal/Numeric Result Codes Auto Answer On/Off Option Answer On One Ring Fix Modem DTE Speed Load from NV Ram or Factory AT Commands Accept/Ignore Select This Option DTR Always On Ignore RTS Carrier Detect Normal Echo Off Display Result Codes Numeric Result Codes Auto Answer Enable S0 = 1 9.6K or 19.2K Baud Load From NV Ram Accept AT Commands*
Table- 63.41. The required modem features for panel side modems.
*Note: If you find that the panel side modem is picking up the line then hanging up right away, set the AT Command option on the panel side modem to Ignore AT Commands (or Dumb Mode depending on the modem model). However, be warned that disabling AT commands on the panel side modem means that the panel will no longer be able to dial back the CardAccess PC (if set up to do so). Each option listed in Table 63.41 can be set on a given modem by sending an AT command string, or in some cases by setting dipswitches. Note that it is strongly recommended that you use only modems that have been tested with the CardAccess software. Continental Instruments tech support will be limited on
28
Dial Up
modem brands that have not been approved for use with the CardAccess system. Note the below modem connection issues: Modem Cables o PC Side The PC side cable will be a standard RS232 modem cable. o Panel Side Continental has designed a modem cable that provides the correct pin outs and jumpers needed to support the panel side modem. As we stated previously, the panel provides connections for RD, TD and GND (receive, transmit data and ground) but the panel does not provide any hardware handshake signals (DTR, RTS) to the modem. However, the modem requires these RS232 handshake signals to control carrier and dialing. Inputs like Request to Send and Data Terminal Ready are commonly sent by computer equipment to the modem. When a Continental Instruments panel is connected to a modem, these signals are not available. Since these signals must be provided, we must find a way to do so. There are two methods available to provide handshake signals to a modem. Software Jumpers Modem manufacturers have provided a means to use initialization strings to set the software of the modem to ignore the electrical states of some hardware inputs like RTS and DTR. When the modem is set to ignore selected RS232 inputs, this is commonly referred to as the software jumpering of those inputs. If you are not providing hardware jumpers (see below), then you must provide software jumpers for RTS and DTR. If DTR is not provided, the modem may not answer an incoming call. If RTS is not provided, the modem may not raise transmit carrier once the call has been answered. The initialization codes used to set the above options can vary from manufacturer to manufacturer. Consult the manufacturers documentation for more information.
29
Dial Up
Hardware Jumpers Hardware jumpers have been the traditional method of providing missing RS232 signals for the decades since the modem was first invented. A hardware jumper (also known as a hardwire jumper) is nothing more than a piece of wire used to short two or more pins of the RS232 interface together, for the purpose of fooling the modem into thinking that the proper voltage level is supplied to selected pins. Using jumper wires to short pins on the RS232 interface is also known as faking out the signals. Essentially, you find a pin on the interface that has a voltage level that you need to provide for another pin, and you short one pin to the other. You bridge the pin that has the voltage with a pin that needs a voltage. It is important to be sure that, the pin that you have selected to feed the voltage to other pins does not change state unexpectedly (go from high to low, say). You must be sure that, the pins that you select for hardware jumpers provide a constant voltage to pins that you wish to fake. There are a number of tried and true RS232 jumper configurations that have proven their worth over years of trials, and those will be the ones we will tend to recommend. Other jumper configurations are possible, but require knowledge of the RS232 interface to successfully implement. For example, the recommended method for the hardware jumper faking of RTS and DTR are as follows: Signal RTS DTR Pin 4 20 TO TO Pin 5 6 Signal CTS DSR
Table- 63.42. Standard RS232 RTS and DTR faking jumpers.
In the specific case of Continental Instruments panels, you would employ these jumpers on the modem side of the panel to modem cable. The Request To Send and Data Terminal Ready pins are expected to be +12 volts at the modem if a DTE device (computer or panel in this case) is connected.
30
Dial Up
The modem signal CTS (clear to send) is held high (+12vdc) when the modem has receive carrier. Thus, if you jumper RTS and CTS, when the panel side modem connects to the CardAccess host PC side modem, CTS will go high (+12Vdc) and CTS will drive RTS high as well. Thus, the modem creates the needed RTS signal by deriving it from its own CTS signal. The modem signal DSR (data set ready) is held high once the modem power is turned on and the modem has passed its self-test. Thus if you short DSR to DTR, then DTR will always be held high as long as the power to the modem is on. Again, we use DSR to derive DTR. Note: Beware of connecting too many pins together as you create your hardware jumpers. If you attempt to drive too many input signals from only one output pin, the output pins voltage will drop and that output may be stressed to the point of failure. Thus, it is strongly recommended that you bridge no more than two pins together as suggested above. It is recommended that you consider software jumpers to be somewhat unreliable. The reasoning for this is that software jumpers relies on settings stored in programmable areas of modem memory, areas which have the potential of being corrupted if the modem is hit by a power spike. Therefore, to insure absolute reliability, you will want to add hardware jumpers either in addition to software jumpers, or instead of software jumpers. If the modem is hit by a spike, the potential exists (and it has happened) that the modem will revert to its factory programming (stored in non-programmable EPROM). The factory settings of most modems set the RTS and DTR functions to the normal, non-jumpered state. In the case where the modem has reverted to factory defaults and the hardware jumpers have not been provided, the modem may stop answering incoming calls and may require a site visit to restore the software jumpers to modem memory. Hardware jumpers become cheap insurance of continued operation in that case. Continental Instruments Systems offers a modem cable that comes equipped with the correct hardware jumpers for connections between Continental panels and all brands of dial modems. This cable is strongly recommended for all panels to dial modem connections.
31
Dial Up
Hardware AT Switches Earlier in this section we discussed the fact that modem settings can be modified by sending AT commands to the modem through the serial port. Some modem models also provide a switch block that allows you to preset some AT functions by using hardware switches. Each time the modem powers up, the switch block is read and the appropriate initialization parameters are loaded from modem EPROM. It is important to note that the power on switch settings will always override any contrary software initialization strings that are stored in modem configuration memory. For example, in the case of the US Robotics V.Everything modem, if you set switch 5 to Off, the modem will auto-answer on one ring regardless of the setting in the S0=n parameter (which is interpreted by the modem as pick up on n rings). Also note that you can use AT commands to temporarily override the settings of hardware switches if required. If you power up the modem and wait for it to fully initialize, then send AT commands that concern parameters that are handled by the switch block, those AT commands will override the modem switch settings. However, these modified settings will only remain in effect as long as the power is applied to the modem. When you remove the power, all temporary initialization parameters are lost.
Continental Approved Modems

The US Robotics V.Everything and the US Robotics Sportster modems have been tested and have been approved for use with the Continental Instruments access control system. The V.Everything modem offers high performance at somewhat higher cost. The Sportster modem is bargain priced and offers reasonable performance for access control applications. Other brand modems can be used to provide dial up access for the CardAccess system, but since they have not been officially tested and approved by Continental Instruments Systems, support and in-house knowledge of your specific modem will tend to be limited. The primary difference between the V.Everything and the Sportster modems lies in the error correction capability of the modem on questionable phone lines.
32
Dial Up
In our experience, the business class V.Everything modem has succeeded to connect on questionable phone lines where other lesser quality modems have failed with regularity (including the Sportster). Generally, the performance of the V.Everything will tend to be more predictable than the Sportster, but it costs considerably more. So, where price is an issue, you will want to select the Sportster modem. Where reliability is an issue, the additional cost of the V.Everything modem is offset by the fact that it is more adaptable and stable than its lower priced cousin.
US Robotics Courier V.Everything Modem

The superior error correction circuitry of the Courier V.Everything modem makes it ideal for use as a general-purpose dial modem for access control applications involving Continental Instruments equipment. The additional cost of the V.Everything modem is offset by the fact that the modem has superior performance on marginal quality phone lines. The properly configured V.Everything modem has been proven to have fewer support issues on sub-par phone lines, as compared to standard modems. The approach to setting up the V.Everything modem is no different than any other modem that one would consider using for a CardAccess dial application. The Host PC side modem can generally be used with the factory default settings, but the panel side modem will require special set up due to the fact that Continental panels do not provide any hardware handshake signals to the modem. Note that the V.Everything modem has a switch block located on the underside of the modem (see figure below).
33
Dial Up
Fig. 63.43. The V.Everything modem switch block.
The ten switches on the switch block correspond to ten AT configuration parameters that are stored in the modems configuration memory. Those parameters can be changed by switch or by software AT command. However, the switch settings will override the software settings except as noted in the above section titled Hardware AT Switches. The recommended switch settings and AT command setup for the US Robotics Courier V.Everything modem follow below. Note the separate sections for the PC side modem setup and the panel side setup.
34
Dial Up
PC Side Modem The recommended switch settings for the PC side modem are seen in Table 63.44 below. Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Setting Off = DTR Normal Off = Verbal Result Codes On = Display Result Codes Off = Echo Offline Off = Auto Answer Enable* Off = Carrier Detect Normal Off = Display Result Codes On = Accept AT Commands On = Disconnect With +++ On = Load Factory Settings Modem Option DTR Normal/Override Verbal/Numeric Result Codes Result Codes On/Off Echo Off/On Auto Answer On/Off Carrier Detect Override Result Codes Ignore AT Commands Disconnect Mode Load from NV Ram or Factory
* Set Auto-Answer to Off (sw 4 to On) if panels will not be dialing in to the host PC Table- 63.44. The recommended PC side V.Everything modem switch settings.
No additional initialization strings are needed for the PC side modem. Use the factory settings.
Panel Side Modem The switch settings for the Panel Side modem are found below in Table 63.45. As mentioned above, you will need to provide a DTR and an RTS signal to the modem. Error! Reference source not found.Table 63.45 shows the settings for software jumpering of the modem. However it is strongly suggested that you add hardware jumpers in addition to software jumpers (see the manual section titled Continental Approved Modems for more information).
35
Dial Up
Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Setting On = DTR Always On On = Numeric Result Codes On = Display Result Codes On = Echo Off Off = Auto Answer Enable On = Carrier Detect Always On Off = Display Result Codes On = Accept AT Commands* On = Disconnect With +++ Off = Load From NV Ram
Modem Option DTR Normal/Override Verbal/Numeric Result Codes Result Codes On/Off Echo Off/On Auto Answer On/Off Carrier Detect Override Result Codes Ignore AT Commands Disconnect Mode Load from NV Ram or Factory
* If the panel is picking up then hanging up set to Ignore AT Commands, but only if the panel is not set to dial back to the host PC Table- 63.45. The recommended panel side USR V.Everything switch settings.
On the panel side modem, in addition to the switch settings above you will need to modify the factory initialization strings settings by sending the following initialization string to the modem. AT&N6&R1S0=1&W Command AT &N6 &R1 S0 = 1 &W Description The Modem Attention Command Connect Speed Maximum = 9600 Ignore the RTS Signal Answer On 1 Ring Store Profile in NV Ram Location W0
Table- 63.46. The USR V.Everything panel side modem additional command strings.
You can use the Windows HyperTerminal utility (available from the Accessories program group) to send the initialization strings to the modem.
36
Dial Up
US Robotics Sportster Modem

The US Robotics Sportster modem provides reasonable performance for access control applications at an affordable price. The Sportster will perform very well in all applications that do not include marginal phone lines (where you will select the Courier modem instead). The configuration of the Sportster is very similar to the Courier mentioned in the previous section. The Sportster provides a switch block on its rear panel that allows you to program some initialization parameters, much like the Courier. However, the Sportster has fewer initialization parameters available from switches. The recommended PC side and panel side modem switch settings and initialization strings appear below. PC Side Modem The recommended switch settings for the PC side modem are seen in table 63.47 below. Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Setting Up = DTR Normal Up = Verbal Result Codes Down = Display Result Codes Up = Echo Offline Commands Up = Auto Answer Enable* Up = Carrier Detect Normal Down = Load Factory Settings Down = Accept AT Commands Modem Option DTR Normal/Override Verbal/Numeric Result Codes Result Codes On/Off Echo Off/On Auto Answer On/Off Carrier Detect Override Load from NV Ram or Factory Ignore AT Commands
* Set Auto Answer to Off (sw 4 to On) if panels will not be dialing in to the host PC Table- 63.47. The recommended PC side Sportster modem switch settings.
No additional initialization strings are needed for the PC side modem. Use the factory settings.
37
Dial Up
Panel Side Modem The switch settings for the Panel Side modem are found below in table 63.48. As mentioned above, you will need to provide a DTR and an RTS signal to the modem. Table 63.48 shows the settings for the software jumpering of the modem. However it is strongly suggested that you add hardware jumpers in addition to software jumpers (see the manual section titled Continental Approved Modems for more information). Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Setting Down = Override Down = Numeric Down = Yes Down = Off Up = On Down = CD Override Up = Load NV Ram Modem Option DTR Normal/Override Verbal/Numeric Result Codes Result Codes Yes/No Echo Off/On Auto Answer On/Off Carrier Detect Override Load from NV Ram or Factory
Down = Smart Mode* Ignore AT Commands
* If the panel is picking up then hanging up set to Dumb Mode, but only if the panel is not set to dial back to the host PC Table- 63.48. The recommended panel side USR Sportster switch settings.
On the panel side modem, in addition to the switch settings above, you will need to modify the factory initialization strings settings by sending the following string to the modem. AT&F&B1&H&N6&U6S0=1S28=255Y&W&W1 The meaning of the above string follows.
38
Dial Up
Command AT &F &B1 &H &N6 &U6 S0 = 1 S28 = 255 Y0 &W0 &W1
Description The Modem Attention Command Load Generic Template (No Flow Control) Fixed Serial Port Rate Flow Control Disabled Connect Speed Maximum = 9600 Connect Speed Minimum = 9600 Answer On 1 Ring Answer Only at 9600, V.32 Default Profile = W0 Store Profile in W0 Store Profile in W1
Table- 63.49. The recommended USR Sportster initialization strings.
You can type the command string as one contiguous string as seen above or you can enter the commands individually as below. AT&F (hit enter), AT&B1 (hit enter), AT&H (hit enter), etc. You can use the Windows HyperTerminal utility (available from the Accessories program group) to send the initialization strings to the modem.
39
Duplicate Definitions
The CardAccess software automatically assigns inputs and relays to doors by default. Each input and relay that is assigned to a door is enabled with certain default operational settings as seen below.
Input Default Settings

The input is enabled* The input is active 24 hours per day, every day of the year including holidays (default 24/7/365 enable schedule). The input reports with door event messages (Door Forced, Door Now Closed, Door Open Too Long), not input event messages (Input Abnormal, Input Normal). The input is set to normally closed mode* The input is set to unsupervised mode* The input is set with no Alert Delay and no Alert Reset time. The input is set to no Response Required. The input is set to no Alert Reporting. The input is set to not activate the console relay. The input is set not to dial up on any condition.
Relay Default Settings

The relay is enabled* The relay is available to be activated 24 hours per day, every day of the year. Relay is set to be normally de-energized* The relay can be activated by a valid badge, or from the manual control screen only. The Alert Requires Response function is disabled. The Dial Up on Change function is disabled. The alert priorities are set by settings in the readers screen. Relay is not assigned to a group. Relay has no Track Schedule assigned. The door strike time is set to 5 seconds by default. Relay is released when the door contact input opens (set to On Open). The manual control of a relay which is associated with a reader is possible from the Doors manual control screen, not the Relays manual control screen. It is important to note that the above settings for inputs and relays that have been automatically assigned to readers by the CardAccess software are stored in the CardAccess database. However, those automatically assigned settings are not accessible from any configuration screen inside the CardAccess software. Thus, if you need to change some selected operational settings of a reader input or relay, you must create what is termed a duplicate input or relay definition. A duplicate input or relay definition is created by going to the Inputs or Relays screen and creating an input or relay that has the same input or relay number as an input or relay that has been previously assigned to a reader, in the Readers screen.
For example, input 1 (on panel 1, say) is typically assigned to door 1 as the door contact. To create a duplicate definition for this input, you would go to the Inputs screen and create an input record for the input #1 on panel 1. This sets up a situation where the input is defined in two places, in the Readers screen and the Inputs screen (hence the term duplicate definition). The same rules apply to duplicate relay definitions. There are a limited number of settings that can be changed by a duplicate input or relay definition. All of the controls in the Inputs or Relays record for the selected input or relay record do not apply to a door input or relay. The door input and relay settings that can be changed by a duplicate definition are as follows.
Inputs
You may wish to set the reader input to either of the modes shown below. The only way to accomplish that is through the creation of a duplicate input definition. o Normally Open Mode By default all inputs are created in normally closed mode. To select normally open mode you must create a duplicate input definition and check the Normal Open check box.
Fig. 53.1. Inputs screen Normal Open checkbox.
o Supervised Input Mode By default all inputs are created in unsupervised mode. To select supervised input mode you must create a duplicate input definition and check the Supervised check box.
Fig. 53.2. Inputs screen Supervised checkbox.
Relays
By default all relays are created in the off-state de-energized mode. The only way to set a reader relay to the off-state energized mode is, through the creation of a duplicate relay definition. o Off-State Energized To select off-state energized you must create a duplicate relay definition and check the Off-State Energized check box.
Fig. 53.3. Relays screen Off-State Energized checkbox.
The above settings are the only reader input or relay settings that are affected by the duplicate input or relay definitions. The other settings in the Inputs or Relays screens are ignored by the reader input or relay. Note: The duplicate input or relay definition should not have the Enabled box checked. Once you enable the duplicate input or relay definition, the input or relay begins sending input or relay event messages in addition to door related event messages.
Automatic Input and Relay Numbering

For your convenience, below in Table 53.4 is a review of how the CardAccess system automatically assigns input and relay numbers to readers. The chart below assumes that no inputs or relays have been previously assigned in the Inputs or Relays screens. Note that the lowest numbered two inputs available are assigned to the door contact and bypass switch (respectively). Regarding relays, the lowest odd numbered relay is assigned to the door strike. Input and relay number assignments are handled identically on every panel type. To use the chart below for your panel, simply locate the number of doors and ignore the remaining chart. For example, the Miniterm has two reader ports, so you would use the Door 1 and Door 2 portion of the chart, and ignore the rest.
4
Door Number Door 1 Door 2 Door 3 Door 4 Door 5 Door 6 Door 7 Door 8
Door Contact 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
Bypass 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Door Strike 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
Table 53.4. Input and Relay Automatic Numbering Assignments.
Salient DVR Interface in CardAccess 3000
Introduction
CompleteView
CompleteView is a comprehensive PC-based system for performing Digital Video surveillance and recording. It can control many different models of pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras from a wide variety of manufacturers. CompleteView is comprised of a client-server software suite, a Dell OptiPlex workstation, and video capture hardware. When the Dell OptiPlex is configured with the video capture hardware and the CompleteView recording software, the system is referred to as a CompleteView Server. To Setup the CompleteView Server, please refer the Salient Systems CompleteView Administrators Guide, which comes along with CompleteView Standard/Enterprise bundled System.
DVR caCompleteView
DVR caCompleteView is an optional application used for viewing live/recorded videos from CompleteView servers. This application allows you to remotely configure and get connected to multiple CompleteView Servers. The integrated DVR caCompleteView will run with the CardAccess GUI, and will support CardAccess 3000 database partitioning. It will run only as long as the CardAccess 3000 GUI runs, and will shutdown once the user logs out of CardAccess.
Note: It is recommended not to run DVR caCompleteView on a Host PC where CICDataserver and Com Server (HostNT) are running. For better performance, DVR caCompleteView should run on a CardAccess 3000 workstation, according to the workstation requirements. The DVR caCompleteView and the DVR caRemoteView applications cannot run on the same PC.
Scope
This document covers the configuration and integration of DVR caCompleteView with CardAccess 3000.
Purpose of DVR caCompleteView

DVR caCompleteView can be used to serve the following purposes: 1. DVR caCompleteView configured in CardAccess 3000 can be set to view live video of any camera connected to a CompleteView server. 2. DVR caCompleteView can trigger recording of video from a specific camera and CompleteView server. The trigger can be a reader event, an alarm input or a Napco Zone alert. Indication of associated recorded video is noted on the CA 3000 event database. Viewing of this recorded video is available directly from the CA 3000 events, if the recorded video remains on the CompleteView server. 3. DVR caCompleteView can search and play recorded video according to Date, Time, CompleteView server and camera selections.
DVR caCompleteView Feature

DVR caCompleteView enables simultaneous viewing of live videos from a maximum of 9 different cameras, connected to (the same or different) CompleteView Servers.
Enabling DVR caCompleteView in CardAccess

Following are the steps to enable DVR caCompleteView application in CardAccess 3000: 1. In the CardAccess main screen, click on System System Settings menu options to open the System Settings window. 2. In the System Settings window, click on the CCTV tab.
Fig. 6.1. System Settings CCTV tab.
3. Click on Edit button in the tool bar. 4. In the CCTV/DVR Control section (see figure 6.1 above), click the down arrow to the right of Enable combo box (corresponding to the third radio button control), and click the option DVR caCompleteView-Salient.
Fig. 6.2. The DVR caCompleteView-Salient Option.
5. Click the third radio button in the CCTV/DVR Control section to enable the selected option, caCompleteView.
Fig. 6.3. Radio button selection to enable caCompleteView.
6. Click the Save button in the tool bar to save these settings.
Running DVR caCompleteView in CardAccess

Once DVR caCompleteView application is enabled in the CardAccess as explained above, you can run the application by clicking on View DVR button in the CardAccess main tool bar.
Fig. 6.4. The View DVR button for running DVR caCompleteView application in CardAccess.
On clicking this button, you will see the DVR caCompleteView window on the bottom right side of CardAccess main screen.
Fig. 6.5. DVR caCompleteView window displayed at the bottom right side of CA main screen after clicking View DVR button.
It is possible to relocate this window to other positions on the CA main screen. This is explained below under the heading DVR caCompleteView Window Placement.
Disabling DVR caCompleteView

For disabling DVR caCompleteView application in the CardAccess, you need to follow the below steps. 1. In CardAccess main screen, click on System System Settings menu options to open the System Settings window. 2. In the System Settings window, click on CCTV tab. 3. Click on Edit button in the tool bar.
4. Select the radio button control Not Used.
Fig. 6.6. The Not Used option for disabling DVR CompleteView application in CardAccess.
5. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes.
Configuring CompleteView Servers

For viewing live or recorded videos of cameras that are connected to CompleteView servers, the CompleteView servers need to be configured first. This can be achieved in the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen (see figure 6.9 below). The caCompleteView Server Configuration screen can be accessed in one of the two ways mentioned below: 1. Accessing from the CardAccess main screen or 2. Accessing from the DVR caCompleteView window Let us look at the two methods.
Accessing from CardAccess Main Screen You need to follow the below steps if you wish to open the caCompleteView Server Configuration using the CardAccess main screen. 1. Click on Configuration menu in the CardAccess main screen. 2. Click on DVR configuration menu item to display the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen (see figure 6.9 below).The screen will open in the General tab by default.
Fig. 6.7. The DVR Configuration menu item in CardAccess 3000 to open the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen.
Accessing from DVR caCompleteView Window Following are the steps if you wish to open the caCompleteView Server Configuration using the DVR caCompleteView window: a. Click on Select menu in the DVR caCompleteView window. b. Click on DVR Configuration menu item to display the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen ( see figure 6.9 below). The screen will open in the General tab by default.
7
Fig. 6.8. The DVR Configuration menu item in the DVR caCompleteView window to open the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen.
Fig. 6.9. The caCompleteView Server Configuration screen in General tab.
The caCompleteView Server Configuration screen has two folder tabs. They are: 1. General tab and 2. Camera Setup tab The two tabs are explained below.
General Tab
The General tab allows the user to add/edit/delete a CompleteView server. The changes you make in the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen will be stored in the CardAccess 3000 database. DVR Server Name, DVR Server IP Address, DVR User Name and Password that you enter in this screen must exist in the CompleteView Server. Adding a New CompleteView Server Follow the steps below to add a new CompleteView server record. 1. Click the New button in the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen toolbar. 2. Enter the CompleteView server information in the General tab fields. The Server information includes DVR Server IP, DVR Server Description, DVR User Name and Password. Contact the network administrator for the correct Server IP, User Name and Password. Below, we have entered the information for a CompleteView server named Salient Server.
Fig. 6.10. Server information entered in the General tab fields.
Note: By default, the Enabled check box will be selected. This box must be selected in order to view the live/recorded video of the camera connected to a particular server. 3. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings. On clicking Save, you will automatically be taken to the Camera Setup tab (see figure 6.11 below), where you will see a listing of all cameras connected to the server in question. The video shown on the bottom right side of the screen will be the live video of the camera placed first in the camera list.
10
Fig. 6.11. Live video of Front DayNight Cam (first camera in the camera list) on clicking Save button, after entering CompleteView Server information in General tab.
11
Editing a CompleteView Server Record Follow the steps below to edit a CompleteView server record. 1. In the upper half of caCompleteView Server Configuration screen, click the CompleteView Server record you wish to edit. On clicking, the General tab fields will display the information of that server. 2. Click on Edit button in the toolbar to edit the server information. 3. Make the necessary changes to the General tab fields. 4. Click the Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Deleting a CompleteView Server Record Follow the steps below to delete a CompleteView server record: 1. In the upper half of caCompleteView Server Configuration screen, click the CompleteView Server record you wish to delete. 2. Click on Delete button in the toolbar to delete the selected server record. Note: Delete action cannot be reversed. A record deleted once is lost forever. Make sure you have chosen the correct record for deleting. On deleting, the server record will be deleted ONLY from the CardAccess 3000 database, but NOT from the CompleteView Server.
12
Camera Setup Tab

The Camera Setup tab will give a listing of all cameras connected to a particular CompleteView Server. You can view the live video of any desired camera by clicking the camera name in the listing. Note: The New and Delete toolbar buttons will be disabled when you click on Camera Setup tab. You can update the list of cameras by clicking on Update Camera List button seen on the bottom right side of the screen. Below are the steps to access the list of cameras connected to a CompleteView server and viewing live video from any desired camera: 1. Select a DVR Server Name in the upper half of caCompleteView Server Configuration screen. 2. Click on Update Camera List button (seen at the bottom right corner of the screen) to update the list of cameras connected to the selected server. Below, we can see the updated list of cameras connected to Salient Server.
13
Fig. 6.12. Updated list of cameras connected to Salient Server.
Note: Groups column in the Camera Setup tab is used for CardAccess database partitioning. 3. Click on the desired camera name under the Camera Name column, and view the live video from that camera on the bottom right side of the screen. Below, we have obtained the live video of Front DayNight Camera by clicking on that camera name under the Camera Name column.
14
Fig. 6.13. Live video of Front DayNight Camera (connected to Salient Server) obtained by clicking on the camera name under the Camera Name column.
15
Navigation Bar
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fig. 6.14. Navigation bar seen in caCompleteView Server Configuration screen.
The caCompleteView Server Configuration screen provides a navigation bar at the middle of the screen. The buttons of this bar can be used for viewing older/newer/refreshed CompleteView Server records in the screen. In figure 6.14, we have numbered the buttons of the navigation bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the buttons are as follows: Button 1: Clicking this button will highlight the very first CompleteView Server record in the screen. Button 2: Clicking this button will highlight the last record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted CompleteView Server record. Button 3: Clicking this button will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted CompleteView Server record. Button 4: Clicking this button will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted CompleteView Server record. Button 5: Clicking this button will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted CompleteView Server record. Button 6: Clicking this button will highlight the last CompleteView Server record in the screen. Button 7: Clicking this button will refresh the list of CompleteView Server records seen in the upper half of the screen.
16
DVR caCompleteView Window Placement

By default, the DVR caCompleteView window will be displayed on the bottom right side of the CardAccess main screen (see figure 6.5 above). If preferred, you can relocate the screen to other positions on the CA main screen. You may follow the below steps to do this. Left-click the screen title DVR caCompleteView, and hold down the left mouse button. Drag the screen to a desired position on the CA main screen. Release the left mouse button. Alternatively, you can place the screen in a couple of other pre-defined locations by using the Window menu (figure 6.15 below) on the DVR caCompleteView window.
Fig. 6.15. The Window menu options.
Let us look at the individual Window menu options. Align The Align menu item provides many submenu options for placing the DVR caCompleteView window in a preferred pre-defined location, on the CA main screen. These options can be made visible by placing the mouse cursor on the arrow pointing rightward, next to the Align menu item.
17
Fig. 6.16. Align sub menu options.
The functions of the submenu options are as below: Bottom Right: By default, this option will be enabled. This option places the DVR caCompleteView window on the bottom right side of the CA main screen. Bottom Left: Selecting this option will place the DVR caCompleteView window on the bottom left side of the CA main screen. Top Right: Selecting this option will place the DVR caCompleteView window on the top right side of the CA main screen. Top Left: Selecting this option will place the DVR caCompleteView window on the top left side of the CA main screen. Full Screen: Selecting this option will enlarge the DVR caCompleteView window to occupy the entire screen on your monitor. Minimize
Fig. 6.17. The Minimize menu item under Window menu.
Selecting this menu item will minimize the DVR caCompleteView window. To see the screen back again, you need to click the window name DVR caCompleteView (seen above the system taskbar) to popup a menu, and then click on the Restore option.
18
Live Video
The DVR caCompleteView window (see figure 6.18 below) can be made to display the live video of any desired camera connected to a CompleteView Server. This requires the server to be configured previously in the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen. Refer section Configuring CompleteView Servers above for server configuration. The section below explains the steps to obtain live video on the DVR caCompleteView window. How to Display Live Video Consider the blank DVR caCompleteView window showing no video.
Fig. 6.18. The blank DVR caCompleteView window.
Below are the steps to obtain live video on this window.
19
The left hand side of the screen has a button named DVR Server List. Place the mouse cursor on this button to expose the DVR Server List sliding window for DVR CompleteView Server and Camera selection.
Fig. 6.19. The DVR Server List Sliding Window.
Click the down arrow of the DVR Server List control to obtain the list of DVR CompleteView servers, as configured in the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen. Note: Only servers whose Enabled box is checked in the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen will find a place in the DVR Server List.
Fig. 6.20. List of DVR CompleteView Servers added and enabled in the caCompleteView Server Configuration screen.
Click on a desired CompleteView server name in the list. This will show you the list of all cameras that are connected to the selected server.
20
Fig. 6.21. List of cameras connected to Salient Server.
Click on a desired camera name in the list to view the live video of that camera. Live video will be seen on the right half of DVR caCompleteView window as shown below.
Fig. 6.22. Live video on the right side obtained by clicking on a desired camera name.
Click the video display on the right side to increase the view area of the video.
21
Fig. 6.23. Live Video on the entire DVR caCompleteView window.
(If desired) Resize the DVR caCompleteView window to view an enlarged video display. The enlarged video will show the exact time of live video on the bottom right side of the window (see figure 6.24 below), and the name of the camera on the top left side of the window (see figure 6.24 below). You may follow the below steps to resize the DVR caCompleteView window. Resizing DVR caCompleteView Window a. Place your mouse on a selected side of DVR caCompleteView window. You will see a double headed arrow. b. Hold down the left mouse button. c. Drag that side of the window to a desired position. d. Release the left mouse button. e. You may repeat the above steps for the other sides of the window as well.
22
Fig. 6.24. Resized DVR caCompleteView window showing enlarged live video of Front DayNight Camera on 3/10/2005, at 4:42:46 PM.
23
Multi-View
It is possible to simultaneously view live videos from a maximum of 9 different cameras connected to (the same or different) CompleteView Servers. The View Multi-View option in the DVR caCompleteView window enables this feature.
Fig. 6.25. Multi-View option under View menu.
Clicking this option will open the caCompleteView -Multi-View window as shown below.
24
Fig. 6.26. The Multi-View window.
This window consists of two folder tabs- 4 Cameras and 9 Cameras. By default, the window open in the 4 Cameras tab. The 4 Cameras tab is divided into four Video Panels (refer above figure). Each Panel when configured is capable of showing live video of a camera connected to a CompleteView server. The 9 Cameras tab which is divided into 9 Video Panels is capable of showing live videos of 9 different cameras connected to (the same or different) CompleteView Servers.
25
Note: The user preferences of Multi-View settings will be saved in the Ini file for each workstation. Let us learn how to display live video from a camera, on a chosen MultiView Video Panel. We will take 9 Cameras tab for our example below. 1. Open the Multi-View window by clicking on View Multi-View menu options in the DVR caCompleteview screen. By default, the Multi-View screen will open in the 4 Cameras tab. 2. Click on the 9 Cameras tab.
Fig. 6.27. Multi-View window in the 9 Cameras tab. 26
3. Click the down arrow to the right of DVR Server control, and click on a desired DVR CompleteView server in the list.
Fig. 6.28. Choosing a CompleteView Server.
4. Click the down arrow to the right of DVR Camera control, and click on the camera name whose live video you wish to display on a MultiView Video Panel.
Fig. 6.29. Choosing a DVR Camera connected to the selected CompleteView Server.
5. Click the down arrow to the right of Video Panel control, and choose the panel number of a desired Video Panel, on which you wish to display the live video. Below, we have selected Video Panel 5 for we wish to display the video in the middle of Multi-View screen.
Fig. 6.30. Choosing a Video Panel.
6. Click on Assign Video button to display the live video from the selected camera.
27
Fig. 6.31. The Assign Video button.
On clicking, you will see the live video of the selected camera on the Video Panel chosen. Also, the name of the selected camera will be indicated on the status bar below the live video display.
Fig. 6.32. Multi-View window with the fifth Video Panel showing the live video from Front DayNight Camera.
28
7. Follow steps 3, 4, 5 and 6 (with selections of different Camera, Server and Video Panel each time) to assign the remaining Video Panels to the live videos from the selected cameras. Note: If you wish to clear the video assigned to any Video Panel, select that particular Video Panel number from the Video Panel control, and then click on Clear Video button seen at the bottom side of the screen. Closing and reopening the Multi-View window will show the Video Panels displaying live videos from the cameras that were last assigned to them. There is no rule as such for the assignment of cameras to Video Panels. Any camera can be assigned to any Video Panel, in the Multi-View window.
DVR Recorded Video

There are two aspects to know about DVR Recorded videos. They are as follows: You can search for DVR Recorded video of a camera connected to a CompleteView server, in a given time duration. The caCompleteView Search Video window (see figure 6.34 below) accessible by clicking the Search menu (see figure 6.33 below) on DVR caCompleteView window, enables this feature. Refer the section Searching for DVR Recorded Video below to learn about this feature. In the CardAccess, it is possible to view the DVR Recorded videos of Reader/Input/Napco Zone Events/Alerts. This requires the corresponding Readers/Inputs/Napco Zones to be configured for supporting DVR Recorded Videos. Refer the section DVR Recorded Video for CardAccess Events/Alerts below, to learn about this feature.
29
Searching for DVR Recorded Video

The Search menu (see figure 6.33 below) in the DVR caCompleteView window is capable of opening the caCompleteView Search Video window (see figure 6.34 below), which allows searching (and viewing) the DVR Recorded Video of a camera, connected to a CompleteView server, in a given time duration. Below are the steps to search for a DVR Recorded video. 1. Open the caCompleteView Search Video window by clicking on the Search button in the DVR caCompleteView window.
Fig. 6.33. The Search button used for opening caCompleteView Search Video window.
30
Fig. 6.34. The caCompleteView Search Video window obtained by clicking on Search button.
2. Enter the start date and start time in the first and second combo boxes of the From area respectively. The date can be entered in two ways as below: a. By clicking directly on the numbers which require to be changed in the MM/DD/YYYY date format, and typing in a date of choice.
31
Fig. 6.35. Date in From area requiring a new date entry is highlighted by clicking on it.
b. By clicking the down arrow of the combo box and choosing a required date in the calendar window. The left/right arrows found in the calendar window can be used to scroll backward/forward through the different months of a year.
Fig. 6.36. Calendar window obtained by clicking on down arrow of From area combo box.
Start time can be entered in two ways as below: a. By clicking directly on the numbers required to be changed in the hour/minute/second AM/PM time format and typing in the time of choice or b. By highlighting the numbers in the current time displayed, and using the up/down arrows to change the time. 3. Similarly, enter End date and End time in the first and second combo boxes of the To area respectively. 4. Select a DVR Server and a Camera from their respective drop down boxes on the screen.
32
5. Click the Search Video button.
Fig. 6.37. The Search Video button.
On clicking, you will see the video recorded by the selected Camera, during the specified time period.
Fig. 6.38. Video recorded by Front DayNight Camera between 4 PM-7PM on 3/10/2005.
Note: The Search Video window can be enlarged (similar to the live video window) to note the exact time at which the video was recorded, as well as the concerned camera name.
33
Additional Functions for Recorded Video The recorded video displayed on the caCompleteView Search Video screen (see figure 6.38 above) can be played by using the Play button found under the recorded video display.
Fig. 6.39. The Play button for playing the DVR Recorded Video.
On clicking the Play button, the recorded video will be played frame by frame. The video being played can be stopped when needed by using the Stop button. The video can also be rewound and forwarded using the Rewind and Forward buttons respectively. The recorded video can also be captured by clicking the Capture button. A message box will be displayed when you click on Capture button. It will indicate the directory path where the video is stored.
Fig. 6.40. Message box displayed on clicking Capture button.
34
DVR Recorded Video for CardAccess Events/Alerts

It is possible to view the DVR Recorded Videos of Reader/Input/Napco Zone Events/Alerts provided, the corresponding Readers/Inputs/Napco Zones are configured to support DVR Recorded Videos. So, let us first learn how to configure Readers and Inputs for DVR Recorded Videos. Note: To configure Napco Zones for supporting DVR Recorded Videos, refer the document NAPCO Alarm Panel Integration with CardAccess 3000.
Configuring a Reader to Support DVR Recorded Video

A Reader can be configured to support DVR Recorded Videos (of the Events/Alerts that it can generate), by making use of controls in the Readers screen, on the DVR tab.
Fig. 6.41. Readers screen in DVR tab.
35
Following are the steps for configuring a Reader to support DVR recorded videos. 1. Open Readers screen by clicking on Configuration Readers menu options in the CardAccess main screen. 2. In the upper half of the screen, select the Reader to which you wish to associate a DVR camera, and click on that record. 3. Click on the DVR tab. 4. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. 5. Click the down arrow to the right of DVR Server Name control, and click on a desired [SALIENT] server.
Fig. 6.42. Selecting a [SALIENT] server.
On selecting, the Camera control will be populated with all cameras that are connected to the selected Salient server. 6. Click the down arrow to the right of Camera control, and select the DVR camera you wish to associate with the Reader selected in step 2.
36
Fig. 6.43. Choosing a DVR Camera.
Enter the Pre Event Time in its edit box either by typing a number of choice, or by using the up/down arrow to choose a desired number. (Pre-event time is the view time before the occurrence of an event, from the selected Reader).
Fig. 6.44. The Pre Event Time control.
Enter the Post Event Time in its edit box either by typing a number of choice, or by using the up/down arrow to choose a desired number. (Post-event time is the view time after the occurrence of an event, from the selected Reader).
Fig. 6.45. The Post Event Time control.
Enter the lower limit of the priority range in the Priority From edit box. The lowest number you can enter in this edit box is 1.
Fig. 6.46. The Priority From control.
37
Note: Priority range is the range in which events of different priorities fall into. The DVR recorded video of only those events falling within this range can be viewed in CardAccess. Enter the upper limit of the priority range in the Priority To edit box. The highest number you can enter in this edit box is 98.
Fig. 6.47. The Priority To control.
Click the Save button in the toolbar to save the settings. From now onwards, you will be able to view the DVR recorded video of any Event/Alert generated by the selected Reader, provided, the Event/Alert falls within the specified priority range. Go to section Viewing DVR Recorded Video of CardAccess Events/Alerts below to learn the various methods of viewing DVR Recorded videos.
38
Configuring an Input to Support DVR Recorded Video

An input can be configured to support DVR recorded videos (of the events/Alerts that it can generate), by making use of controls in the Inputs screen, on the DVR tab.
Fig. 6.48. Inputs screen in DVR tab.
Following are the steps for configuring an Input to support DVR recorded videos. 1. Open Inputs screen by clicking on Configuration Inputs menu options in the CardAccess main screen. 2. In the upper half of the screen, select the Input to which you wish to associate a DVR camera, and click on that record. 3. Click on the DVR tab. 4. Click the Edit button on the toolbar.
39
5. Click the down arrow to the right of DVR Server Name control, and click on a desired [SALIENT] Server.
Fig. 6.49. Choosing a [SALIENT] server.
On server selection, the Camera control will be populated with all cameras that are connected to the selected Salient Server. 6. Click the down arrow to the right of the Camera control, and select the DVR camera you wish to associate with the Input selected in step 2.
Enter the Pre Event Time in its edit box either by typing a number of choice, or by using the up/down arrow to choose a desired number. (Pre-event time is the view time before the occurrence of an event, from the selected Input).
Enter the Post Event Time in its edit box either by typing a number of choice, or by using the up/down arrow to choose a desired number.
40
(Post-event time is the view time after the occurrence of an event, from the selected Input).
Click the down arrow to the right of Event Type control, and choose the event type for which you wish to see the DVR Recorded video, for the input in question.
Fig. 6.53. Event Type Selection Control.
Note: o If you choose event type Normal, you will be able to see the DVR Recorded video whenever the input in question changes its state from Abnormal-Normal. o If you choose event type Abnormal (the default), you will be able to see the DVR Recorded video whenever the input in question changes its state from Normal-Abnormal. o If you choose the option Both, you will be able to see the DVR Recorded video for either kind of status change -Abnormal-Normal or Normal-Abnormal, for the selected Input. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings. From now onwards, you will be able to view the DVR recorded video of any Event/Alert generated by the selected Input, provided, the Event/Alert is of the event type specified (Normal/Abnormal/Both). Go to section Viewing DVR Recorded Video of CardAccess Events/Alerts below to learn the various methods of viewing DVR Recorded Videos.
41
Viewing DVR Recorded Video of CardAccess Events/Alerts

DVR recorded video can be viewed ONLY for Reader/ Input/ Napco zone Alerts/Events in the CardAccess. Below we look at the various methods for viewing the DVR Recorded videos.
Viewing Recorded Video of Events

There are three methods to view the DVR Recorded video of a Reader/Input/Napco zone Event in the CardAccess. The methods are explained below. Method 1- Using the Events grid Video button To view the Recorded video of an Event using the Video button, you need to follow the below steps. Select a desired Reader/Input/Napco zone Event in the CardAccess Events grid, and click on that event record. Click the Events grid Video button to display the DVR Recorded Video window. See figure 6.54 below.
42
Fig. 6.54. The Video button in Events grid toolbar used for displaying DVR recorded video of a highlighted Event.
Note: The Events grid Video button will be active for a highlighted event only when the corresponding Reader/Input/Napco zone has been configured to support DVR Recorded Videos. The Recorded Video window will be displayed with concerned Reader/Input/Napco zone name as the window title.
43
Fig. 6.55. DVR Recorded Video window title showing the name of the concerned Reader.
When the Recorded Video window is on display, the occurrence of a new Event will flash the window twice, replacing the existing recorded video with the recorded video of the new Event. Video replacement depends on the priority value (in case of a Reader Event) or Event type (in case of an input Event) of the new Event. Method 2- Using the Show Video Right-Click Option To view the Recorded video of an Event using the Show Video right-click option, you need to follow the below steps. Select a desired Reader/Input/Napco zone Event in the CardAccess Events grid, and click on that event record. Right-click on Location column of the selected Event to see a pop up menu. Left-click the Show Video option to display the recorded video of the selected Event.
44
Fig. 6.56. The Show Video right-click option used for viewing the DVR recorded video of a highlighted Event.
Method 3- Using the Event Response Window Double-Clicking the Reader/Input/Napco zone Event in the Events grid will display the Event Response window. This window will have an embedded Recorded Video provided the corresponding Reader/Input/Napco Zone supports DVR Recorded Videos.
45
Viewing Recorded Video of CardAccess Alerts

There are three methods to view the DVR Recorded Video of an Alert in the CardAccess. The methods are explained below. Method 1- Automatic Display If you wish that the DVR recorded video gets displayed automatically whenever an alert enters the Alerts grid, you need to enable the Auto-Show On right-click option, for the Alerts grid Video button. To do this, first right-click on the Alerts grid Video button, and then leftclick the Auto-Show On option.
Fig. 6.57. Auto-Show On option to allow automatic display of DVR Recorded Video.
Once this is done, you will be able to see the DVR Recorded Video of the Alerts provided the corresponding Readers/Inputs/Napco Zones support DVR Recorded Videos. Method 2- Using the Alerts grid Video button Note: This method works when the Auto-Show Off right-click option (the default option) for Alerts grid Video button is in effect. Follow the steps below with the default option Auto-Show Off for Alerts grid Video button: Select a desired Reader/Input/Napco zone Alert in the Alerts grid, and click on that Alert record. Click the Alerts grid Video button to display the DVR Recorded Video window of the selected Alert.
46
Fig. 6.58. Clicking the Video button (with the default right-click option Auto-Show Off) to display DVR Recorded Video.
Method 3- Using the Event Response Window There are two methods to open the Event Response window for an alert. This window will have an embedded Recorded Video provided, the corresponding Reader/Input/ Napco zone supports DVR Recorded Videos. The methods are as follows. A. Automatic Display In case the selected alert has the Response Required check box enabled in the concerned hardware screen, there will an automatic display of the Event Response window, showing the embedded Recorded Video of the Alert in question. B. Using Respond Button This method can be used for alerts that do not have the Response Required checkbox enabled. Select a desired Reader/Input/Napco zone Alert in the Alerts grid, and click on that alert record. Click the Respond button in the Alerts grid tool bar to display the Event Response Window.
Fig. 6.59. Respond button of Alerts grid used to display Event Response window.
47
Event Response
Event Response
The Event Response screen is generally used to attach response messages to CardAccess Events/Alerts. This screen allows the user to either type in new response messages in or attach pre-defined messages for the Events/Alerts selected in CardAccess main screen (refer the section Operator Responses for creating pre-defined operator response messages).
Accessing Event Response Screen

The Event Response screen can be accessed in the following two ways: 1. Double-clicking on an Event/Alert in CardAccess main screen. 2. Clicking on the desired Event/Alert, and then clicking on Respond button.
Fig. 46.1. Respond button of CardAccess Event and Alerts grids.
Note: If the event belongs to Events grid, then, Respond button above Events grid must be used. If the event belongs to Alerts grid, then, Respond button above Alerts grid must be used.
1
Event Response
Both the methods will open the Event Response screen for the selected event as below.
Fig. 46.2. The Event Response screen for DOOR FORCED OPEN event.
By default, the screen will open in Event tab as shown in the above figure. A few other folder tabs may also be visible depending on the type of event you select, and on the options that are enabled in System Settings screen previously. The folder tabs are explained in the section Event Response Screen Folder Tabs.
Event Response
Attaching Response Message to Event

Response message can be attached to an Event by following the steps below: Open Event Response screen by double-clicking on the event (or alternatively by highlighting the event and clicking on Respond button) in CardAccess main screen. Note: If the event belongs to Events grid, then, Respond button above Events grid must be used. If the event belongs to Alerts grid, then, Respond button above Alerts grid must be used. The screen will open in Event tab by default, and the keyboard cursor will be seen blinking in the Response Message control. Apply one of the two methods below to attach a Response Message to the selected event. 1. Type in a new message in the Response message control, and click on Accept button.
Fig. 46.3. Typing a new response message.
Fig. 46.4. The Accept button.
Note: The Accept button will be enabled only after you type in the response message.
Event Response
The new response Message thus attached to the event will be added on to Response List window (see figure 46.14) of the selected event. Refer the heading Response History for details. 2. A Pre-defined response message can be attached to the event by following the steps below: a. Click the down arrow to the right of Response Message control to view the list of pre-defined response messages.
Fig. 46.5. Pre-defined response messages.
Note: Response messages seen in the drop down list are those that are previously created in Operator Responses screen. If the list is empty, it means that no pre-defined response messages have been created yet. Read the section Operator Responses to create them. b. Select a desired response message in the list, and click on it. c. Click on Accept button.
Note: The Accept button will be enabled only after a response message is selected in the drop down list. The pre-defined Response Message thus attached to the event will be added on to Response List window (see figure 46.14) of the selected event. Refer the heading Response History for details.
Event Response
Event Response Screen Folder Tabs

The Event Response screen will open in Event tab by default.
Fig. 46.7. Events Response screen in Event tab.
A few other folder tabs may be visible on the screen depending on the type of event selected and the options previously set in System Settings screen. Each of the folder tabs are explained below.
Event Response
Event tab Event is the default folder tab of Event Response screen. This tab shows the details of the selected event. Note: The Event tab is always visible regardless of the type of event selected. The Event tab has three sections namely Alert, Archive Information and Response (see figure 46.7). These sections are explained below. The Alert section shows details related to the person and/or the location of the selected event.
Fig. 46.8. The Alert section of Event tab
The Archive Information section shows the system information.
Fig. 46.9. The Archive Information section of Event tab.
The Response section provides controls that are needed to attach and view response messages for the selected event.
Event Response
Fig. 46.10. The Response section.
The controls of Response section are explained below.
Response Message, Accept The Response Message control and the Accept button are used for attaching a response message to the selected event. Using the Response Message control, you can either type in a new message or select a pre-defined response message for the event.
Fig. 46.11. The Response Message control.
After you type in or select a response message, you must click on Accept button to attach the response message to the event.
Refer the heading Attaching Response Message to Event for more details.
Event Response
Response History The Response History button can be used to view the list of all response messages attached to a particular event.
Fig. 46.13. The Response History button.
Clicking on this button will open the Response List window of the selected event. The window shows the list of all response messages attached to the selected event. The figure below shows the Response List window for DOOR FORCED OPEN event.
Fig. 46.14. Response List window for DOOR FORCED OPEN event.
To close the Response List window, click on Close button seen at the bottom right corner of the window.
Fig. 46.15. The Response List Close button.
Event Response
Recent Responses The Recent Responses button can be used to view the list of all events associated with a specific badge or hardware item, that have response message(s) attached.
Fig. 46.16. The Recent Responses button.
Clicking on this button will open the Recent Responses window of the selected badge/hardware item. This window contains the list of all events associated with the selected badge or hardware item that have response message(s) attached. The Recent Responses window in the figure below shows all of the events associated with 4-1 Front Door reader that have response message(s) attached.
Fig. 46.17. The Recent Responses window for 4-1 Front Door reader.
Event Response
Clicking on a particular event in the window will display the history list of response messages attached to that event. The lower half of Recent Responses window in the figure below, shows the history list of response messages attached to DOOR FORCED OPEN event.
Fig. 46.18. Recent Responses window showing the History list of response messages attached to DOOR FORCED OPEN event.
The Recent Responses window in the figure below shows all events of a badge (badge holder Edwards, Terry) that have response message(s) attached.
Fig. 46.19. The Recent Responses window for a selected badge. 10
Event Response
Clicking on a badge event in the window will display the history list of response messages attached to that badge event. The lower half of Recent Responses window in the figure below, shows the history list of response messages attached to BADGE VIOLATE UNAUTHORIZED (Trk) event.
Fig. 46.20. Lower half of Recent Responses window showing the History list of response messages attached to BADGE VIOLATE UNAUTHORIZED (Trk) event.
To close the Recent Responses window, click on OK button seen at the bottom right corner of the window.
Fig. 46.21. The Recent Responses OK button.
11
Event Response
Exit To close the Event Response screen, click on Exit button seen at the bottom right corner of the screen.
Fig. 46.22. The Event Response Exit button.
DVR Recorded Video in Event Tab The Event tab will show the DVR recorded video of the selected event under the following conditions: DVR RemoteView has been enabled in System Settings CCTV tab and The selected event is a Reader/Input/Napco zone event that has been configured to display the DVR recorded video.
Fig. 46.23. Event Response window showing the embedded DVR recorded video. 12
Event Response
Map Tab The Map tab can be used to view the map assigned to the hardware device mentioned in the selected event. Map tab will be visible only under the following conditions: The selected event involves a hardware device (Panel, Reader, Input, Relay, Link) and The Use Facility Maps box is checked in System Settings screen.
Fig. 46.24. Event Response Map tab showing map assigned to a hardware device.
If the Map tab is visible but empty, it means that no map has been assigned to the hardware device.
13
Event Response
Photo Tab The photo tab can be used to view the photo of a particular badge holder. Photo tab will be visible only under the following conditions: The selected event is a badge related event and The Photos Only/ Goddard option is selected in System Settings Video Badging tab.
Fig. 46.25. Event Response Photo tab showing the photo assigned to Terry Edwards.
If the Photo tab is visible but empty, it means that no photo has been assigned to the concerned badge holder.
14
Event Response
CCTV Tab The CCTV tab can be used to view the CCTV snapshot of the selected event. CCTV tab will be visible only under the following conditions: The selected event is a Reader/Input event and SmartView CCTV ( View Only/Full Control) option is enabled in System Settings CCTV tab. If the CCTV tab is visible but empty, it means that no CCTV snapshot is taken for the selected event.
Fig. 46.26. CCTV tab showing CCTV snapshot of the selected Event.
For details on the various controls seen in the above figure, refer the explanation provided under Figure 21 & 22 in SmartView Helpfile.
15
Facility Codes
Facility Codes
It is possible for two clients of an access badge manufacturer to buy card lots with the same card number range. If the buildings for these two clients happened to be next door to each other, then cardholders from one building could gain unauthorized access to a neighboring building. Without some second level of security, badge holders from other companies, could gain unauthorized access to your facility. The facility code is an additional number that is encoded on the badge, in addition to the badge number. The facility code and the badge number are read together and treated as one number. When these two numbers are combined together, they form a unique combination that is more secure than a badge number alone. Facility codes are generally associated with batches of cards. When you buy a batch of access control cards, those cards are programmed with a badge number range (say 1 500). They also have a facility code programmed that is the same on every card in that batch. The code will generally be written on a label attached to the box that your cards were shipped in. Some card types have a spec sheet inserted inside the box that has the facility code on it. Note: If you are using magnetic cards, then you will most likely be programming the cards mag track. When you program the facility code on the badge, you must convert the hexadecimal value to decimal and encode the decimal equivalent on the mag track, not the hexadecimal value. Using the Windows calculator, set to scientific mode, makes the conversion process easy. Each Continental Instruments access control panel can store up to ten facility codes. This means that a given panel is capable of storing identical card numbers from up to ten different batches of cards. The need for using facility codes becomes important when you have a campus of several buildings and you want to prevent cardholders from accessing whole buildings on the campus. Each building can be assigned its own facility code. This makes it easy to prevent the cardholders from entering each
Facility Codes
others buildings. However, all cardholders will need to have an access group for accessing the doors in their respective buildings.
Accessing Facility Codes Screen

Click on Administration menu in CardAccess main menu bar. Click on Facility Codes option in the menu list.
Upon clicking, the Facility Codes screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 59.1. The Facility Codes screen.
The controls in the screen are explained in the following section.
Facility Codes
Facility Codes Screen Controls

The controls in Facility Codes screen are explained below. Panel The Panel control consists of panel names that are created in the Panels screen. Using this control, you have to select the panel of your interest, for which, you wish to set facility code(s).
To select a panel, click the down arrow to the right of Panel control, locate the desired panel, and click on it. Codes section The Codes section provides ten fields numbered from 1-10. These field numbers are referred to as facility numbers. Initially, all fields 1-10 show the default value 0 as in the figure below.
Fig. 59.3. The Codes section showing fields 1-10 with default facility code = 0.
Each of these fields accepts a four digit hexadecimal value. As an example, we have entered the hexadecimal value 2FA1 in field 1.
Facility Codes
Fig. 59.4. Hexadecimal facility code 2FA1 entered in field 1.
Similarly, hexadecimal facility codes can be entered in the other fields (fields 2-10), for a selected panel. A given panel can thus be set to ten different hexadecimal facility codes, in the Facility Codes screen. To get these facility codes actually working at the selected panel, you must associate the badges that may attempt access at the selected panel with, the facility codes that are entered in the Facility Codes screen. The Personnel screen Facility control is used to do this.
Fig. 59.5. Personnel screen Facility control.
What you enter in the Personnel screen Facility control is not the actual hexadecimal code entered in the Facility Codes screen. Instead, you will be entering the facility number (1-10) that corresponds to the hexadecimal code you wish to assign to the badges. Suppose you wish to assign the facility code 2FA1 (see figure 59.4) to a badge, you have to enter the value 1 (because, 2FA1 was entered in field 1, in our example) in the Personnel screen Facility control, for that badge record.
Facility Codes
Setting Facility Codes

Setting facility codes is a two-step process, involving two CardAccess screens as mentioned below. a) The Facility Codes screen- In this screen, hexadecimal facility codes must be entered (using fields numbered 1-10), for a selected panel. b) The Personnel screen- In this screen, badges that may attempt access at the selected panel must be associated with facility codes that are entered in the Facility Codes screen. This association is made in the Facility control, of the badge records. The steps to be followed in these screens are explained in the following sections.
Entering Hexadecimal Codes in Facility Codes Screen

1. Open Facility Codes screen by clicking on Administration Facility Codes menu options in the CardAccess main screen. 2. Click on New button in Facility Codes screen toolbar to create a new definition. Ten facility codes can be entered in a single definition. 3. Click the down arrow to the right of the Panel control, locate a desired panel name in the list, and click on it.
Fig. 59.6. Selecting a panel in Panel control.
Ten facility codes can be entered for the selected panel.
Facility Codes
4. In the Codes section of the screen, click on a desired field (among fields numbered 1-10), and type in a four digit hexadecimal value.
Fig. 59.7. Four digit hexadecimal code 2FA1 entered in field 1.
Note: All facility codes you enter must contain 4 digits. If a facility code has leading zeros, you must enter those leading zeros as well. When you save the record, the leading zeros will not display (observe the values in figure 59.8), but they will be stored in the database. Similarly, you can enter (if necessary), hexadecimal codes in fields numbered 2-10, for the selected panel. To navigate to a desired field, make use of the Tab button on your computer keyboard, or the mouse to click on a desired field. 5. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings. Facility codes can thus be set for all panels that you use in your CardAccess system, by following the above steps. In the figure below, we have entered facility codes in fields 1-3, for three of the panels used in our system.
Facility Codes
Fig. 59.8. Facility codes entered in fields 1-3, for three of our panels.
Once saved, the facility codes set for a particular panel will work only when, the codes are associated with the badges that attempt to gain access at that panel. This association is made in the Personnel screen, as explained in the following section.
Facility Codes
Entering Facility Number in Personnel Screen

1. Open Personnel screen by clicking on Access Personnel menu options or by clicking the Personnel button in the CardAccess main toolbar.
Fig. 59.9. The Personnel screen.
2. In the upper half of the screen, select the personnel record to which, you wish to assign a facility number. In the figure below, we are selecting the personnel Blake, Carl.
Facility Codes
Fig. 59.10. Selecting a personnel record.
Note: o The badge of the personnel you select will have a facility code encoded on the badge, in addition to the badge number. Access at any panel is decided by the validity of both the parameters. o If no personnel records are seen in the upper half of the screen, create the records newly by clicking on New button in the toolbar, and entering the basic details like badge number, personnel name etc. Refer the section Personnel to learn about creating personnel records. 3. Click on Edit button in the Personnel screen toolbar. 4. Obtain the facility number from the Facility Codes screen. The following steps are involved in noting the facility number, in the Facility Codes screen. a) In the upper half of Facility Codes screen, locate the panel you want the selected personnel to have access, and click on that record. Upon clicking, you will see facility codes (hexadecimal values) set for that panel in the lower half of the screen. b) Among the codes, select the facility code you wish to assign to the personnel record in question.
Facility Codes
c) Note down the facility number (among 1-10 numbers) corresponding to that particular facility code. In the figure below, we have selected facility code 110F of Panel 1 (which Blake, Carl will access in our example), and noted the corresponding facility number as 2.
Fig. 59.11. Noting the facility number of a desired hexadecimal facility code.
5. In the Facility field (see control highlighted in the figure below) of the selected personnel record, enter the facility number that you have noted from the Facility Codes screen. In the figure below, we are entering the facility number 2 for the personnel Blake, Carl.
10
Facility Codes
Fig. 59.12. Entering facility number in Personnel screen Facility field.
The facility number can be entered by o Clicking the white space of Facility field and typing in the facility number you have noted or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Facility spin control and choosing the number equal to the facility number you have noted. 6. Click the Save button on Personnel screen toolbar to save the setting made for the selected personnel record. 7. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the Personnel screen.
11
Facility Codes
Editing Hexadecimal Facility Codes

Open Facility Codes screen by clicking on Administration Facility Codes menu options in CardAccess main screen. Under the Panel column in the upper half of the screen, locate the panel whose facility codes you wish to edit, and click on it. On clicking, the lower half of the screen will show the hexadecimal facility codes entered for that panel. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. In the Codes section, change the existing codes as necessary by clicking their respective fields, deleting the current codes (by using the Backspace/Delete buttons on your keyboard), and entering new codes in their place. Also, you can add codes to empty fields, if any. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. The changes made will be updated in the Facility columns seen in the upper half of the screen. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
12
Facility Codes
Deleting Facility Code Definitions

Open Facility Codes screen by clicking on Administration Facility Codes menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, select the facility code record you wish to delete, and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 59.13. Message box displayed before deleting a facility code record.
13
Facility Codes
Facility Codes Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 59.14. Facility Codes screen navigation bar.
The Facility Codes screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked facility code records in the screen. In figure 59.14, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first facility code record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted facility code record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted facility code record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted facility code record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted facility code record.
14
Facility Codes
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last facility code record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted facility code record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked facility code record.
15
Groups
Groups
Groups are primarily used by the system to filter the display in CardAccess GUI and in reports. This display filtration is known as Database Partitioning. Firstly, groups are created in the Groups screen. The created groups then assigned to hardware items, personnel, time schedules and so Access to these groups can be controlled by setting up a filter in Operator Privileges screen. Each Operator Privilege template can assigned one or more groups (refer the heading Database Partitions in section Operator Privileges). are on. the be the
Operators whose privilege templates do not have groups assigned, can access all of the groups by default. In effect, their display will show all of the hardware items, personnel, time schedules etc. Whereas, operators whose privilege templates do have groups assigned, can access only those specific groups. In effect, the hardware items, personnel, time schedules etc that do not belong to the operators groups are filtered out of display. This display filtration is known as Database Partitioning. Groups are used as a vehicle to accomplish Database Partitioning. Groups are also used to filter reports. The user can run reports filtered by a group.
Accessing Groups Screen

Click on Administration menu in CardAccess menu bar to display the menu options. Click on Groups menu option. Upon clicking, Groups screen will be displayed in Personnel tab as below.
Groups
Fig. 40.1. The Groups screen.
Figure 40.1 shows that, the lower half of Groups screen provides nine folder tabs (Personnel, Panels, Readers etc) for nine categories of groups (the complete name of the last tab DVR Cameras can be seen by clicking the right arrow next to DVR. Once you click the right arrow, the Personnel tab becomes invisible. Clicking on the left arrow will make it visible again).
Creating a Group
Follow the steps below to create a group. Open Groups screen by clicking Administration->Groups in CardAccess main screen. By default, Groups screen will be displayed in Personnel tab. Click on the folder tab (Personnel, Panels, Readers etc) for which you wish to create a group. Click on New button in the toolbar.
Groups
In the Group Name field at the bottom of the screen, enter a descriptive name for the group being created. In case you like the group records to be listed alphabetically (in the upper half of the screen), check the List Alphabetically check box. Note: The value of List Alphabetically check box (that is, checked/unchecked) applies to every folder tabs in Groups screen. Click the Save button to save the group settings. Click the Cancel button at any time to cancel without saving. Click the Close button to close the screen. Similarly groups of other categories (such as Panels, Readers etc) can be created by going into the appropriate folder tabs provided in the screen. Note: An unlimited number of groups can be created in each category.
Editing a Group
Open Groups screen by clicking Administration->Groups in CardAccess main screen. By default, Groups screen will be displayed in Personnel tab. Click on the folder tab (Personnel, Panels, Readers etc) of the group you wish to edit. In the upper half of the screen, click on the group record to be edited. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Make the necessary changes. Click on Save button to save the changes. Click the Cancel button at any time to cancel without saving. Click Close button to close the screen.
Groups
Deleting a Group
Open Groups screen by clicking Administration->Groups in CardAccess main screen. By default, Groups screen will be displayed in Personnel tab. Click on the folder tab (Personnel, Panels, Readers etc) of the group you wish to delete. In the upper half of the screen, click on the group record to be deleted. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 40.2. Message box displayed before deleting the group.
After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click the Close button to close the screen.
Groups Groups Screen Navigation Bar 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 40.3. The Groups screen navigation bar.
The Groups screen navigation bar can be found just above the List Alphabetically check box. The arrows of Groups screen navigation bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked records in Groups screen. In figure 40.3, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first group record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted group record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted group record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted group record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted group record.
5
Groups
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record of Groups screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted group record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked group record.
Holidays
Holidays
There are no predefined holidays in CardAccess software. Instead, a screen called Holidays is provided for creating holidays. Using this screen, any day of the year can be designated as a Holiday.
Accessing Holidays Screen

Follow the steps below to open Holidays screen: Click on Administration menu in CardAccess menu bar to display the menu options. Click on Holidays menu option. Holidays screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 39.1. The Holidays screen.
Holidays
Creating a Holiday Record

Follow the steps below to create a new holiday: 1. Open the Holidays screen by clicking Administration->Holidays in CardAccess main screen. 2. Click on New button in the toolbar to create a new Holiday. Upon clicking, the screen will display a default holiday record with Date column showing the current date, and Start and Stop Times spanning 24 hours.
Fig. 39.2. Default holiday record displayed in upper half of the screen on clicking New button.
To define a holiday, the date and time duration of the holiday must be specified. This can be done by following the steps below.
Holidays
3. Fix the date for the holiday in the Date control. This can be done in two ways as below. By typing a date of choice in the Date control. The date must be in MM/DD/YY or MM/DD/YYYY date format.
Fig. 39.3. The Date control.
By clicking on the calendar button (marked as 15) and selecting a desired date in the calendar window.
Fig. 39.4. The Calendar window.
Note: o By default, the calendar window will show the current date in highlight. Double left/right arrows and single left/right arrows are provided at the top of the calendar window to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of a year, to aid in desired date selection. o You can create holidays for future years as well. However, only holidays for the current date + the next 365 days will be downloaded to the panel. Holidays beyond 365 days from the date of the last holiday data download are not stored at the panel.
4. The default time Start and Stop Times loaded by the system span 24 hours (that is, 12 AM- 12 AM as in figure 39.2). If the default time values are acceptable, move to step 5.
3
Holidays
In case the holiday has to span less than a day, click the Start Time and Stop Time fields and change them to the required values. Either clock notation or military time can be used. 5. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings. 6. Click the Cancel button anytime if you do not wish to save the settings. 7. Click the Close button to close the screen.
Editing a Holiday record

To edit a holiday record, follow the step below: Open the Holidays screen by clicking Administration->Holidays in CardAccess main screen. Click on the holiday record you wish to edit. Upon clicking, the lower half of the screen will show the details of the selected holiday record. Make the desired changes to Date, Start Time and Stop Time controls. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button to close the screen.
Deleting a Holiday Record

Open the Holidays screen by clicking Administration->Holidays in CardAccess main screen. Click on the holiday record you wish to delete. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Holidays
Fig. 39.5. Message box displayed before deleting a holiday record.
Click on Yes button in the message box to delete the selected holiday record. Click on Close button to close the screen. Note: Deleting a holiday record in Holidays screen will automatically delete the corresponding record stored at the panel.
Holidays Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 39.6. The Holidays screen navigation bar.
The Holidays screen navigation bar is seen at the bottom of the screen, above the status bar. The arrows of the navigation bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked Holiday records in the screen. In figure 39.6, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first holiday record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last holiday record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted Holiday record.
5
Holidays
Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the holiday record previous to the currently highlighted holiday record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the holiday record appearing after the currently highlighted holiday record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first holiday record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted holiday record. Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last holiday record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted holiday record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked holiday record.
Inputs
Inputs
Note: Unless otherwise stated, all functionality of the SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm and Super-4 panels are identical. An Input can typically be defined as some form of dry contact switch, connected to a pair of wires, which are ultimately brought back to two input contacts on a Continental Instruments designed access control panel. A small voltage is generated by the panel on each input two-wire circuit as a means to monitor the state of the input contacts. When the contacts are broken, the circuit is interrupted, causing an alert violation by the panel logic. There are several categories of inputs as explained below. Door (Reader) Inputs These are hardware inputs whose input connections are mounted on the door connectors of each panel. The panel design assumes that you will prefer to assign two inputs per door, so those input connectors are collocated with the reader and keypad connections. Auxiliary Inputs These are hardware inputs that are usually mounted along the periphery of the panel PC board. The use for these inputs is to connect auxiliary devices such as motion detectors, fire detectors and the like. Virtual Inputs Virtual Inputs are software inputs. There are no hardware connections for virtual inputs. Essentially, virtual inputs are linked by software to door event messages. See the section titled Virtual Inputs for more information. Expansion Inputs Expansion inputs are accessory inputs obtained by adding input or relay expansion cards to a panel. The SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm and SmartTerm panels support expansion cards; the MiniTerm and MicroTerm do not. Each input expansion card provides 16 additional supervised or unsupervised inputs. Each relay expansion cards provides 8 expansion inputs. You can mount 3 expansion cards of any type to a SuperTerm and Turbo SuperTerm, and 4 expansion cards to a SmartTerm.
Inputs
A maximum of 81 inputs is supported on any panel. Input #81 is reserved for the Tamper input on all panel types and may not be used for any other purpose once enabled. See below for more details. The typical use for the on board panel inputs for each panel type is shown below in 51.1. However, remember that all panel input assignments are completely programmable. This means that any input can be assigned to any function (or any door). Below is a listing of how the inputs are typically assigned by the system.
SuperTerm & Turbo SuperTerm 1-16 17-24 25-72 81 Doors Auxiliary (on board) Expansion Cards Tamper Only SmarTerm 1-8 Doors 9-16 Auxiliary (on board) 17-80 Expansion Cards 81 Tamper Only MiniTerm 1-4 Doors 5-8 Auxiliary (on board) 81 Tamper Only MicroTerm 1-2 Doors or Auxiliary (on board) 81 Tamper Only
Table 51.1. Standard Panel Input Assignments
The Inputs screen is used to create configuration records that activate the above explained input categories.
Inputs
Accessing Inputs Screen
Click on Inputs option in the menu list. Upon clicking, Inputs screen will be displayed in General tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 51.2. The Inputs screen.
The screen can contain other tabs depending on the configuration made in System Settings screen. This is explained in the following section.
Inputs
Inputs Screen Folder Tabs

Inputs screen can contain the folder tabs shown in the figure below depending on the options selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 51.3. Inputs screen folder tabs.
a) General Tab b) Map Tab- The Map tab will be visible only when the Use Facility Maps feature is enabled in System Settings screen.
c) Remote Control Tab- This tab will be visible only when the Remote Control check box is selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 51.5. System Settings Using Remote Control checkbox.
d) DVR Tab - This tab will be visible only when Enable DVR Remote View option is selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 51.6. System Settings Enable DVR Remote View option.
e) CCTV Tab - This tab will be visible only when Enable SmartView CCTV-Full Control option is selected in System Settings screen.
4
Inputs
Fig. 51.7. System Settings Enable SmartView CCTV-Full Control option.
f) Location/Remarks Tab Each of the tabs and their controls are detailed below.
General Tab
This is the default tab in which Inputs screen will be displayed.
Fig. 51.8. Inputs screen General tab.
Panel An input must be associated with a panel before the operating parameters are set for that input. The Panel control is used to do this. The Panel control contains a list of all panels that were created in the Panels screen.
Fig. 51.9. The Panel control. 5
Inputs
To select a panel, click the arrow button to the right of Panel control, scroll up or down to locate the desired panel and click on it. If no panel names are seen in the list, you need to create them in Panels screen. Refer the manual section titled Panels to do this. Input # The Input # selection control allows you to select which numbered input you wish to activate on a given panel or any attached input expansion card.
Fig. 51.10. The Input # spin control.
By default, all on board and expansion card inputs are disabled. They must be activated by CardAccess software configuration. The configuration instructs the panel as to which hardware it should enable, and with what operating parameters. Note that some input numbers may have been pre-assigned in the Readers screen. When you create reader definitions in the Readers screen, some inputs are automatically assigned to doors (two inputs per door by default). If you elect to create an input record in the Inputs screen, that has the same input number as an input that has been assigned to a door in the Readers screen, you have created a duplicate input definition. When you create a duplicate input definition, the settings in the Inputs screen will override the system defaults for the door input. See the manual section titled Duplicate Definitions for more information. Input number can be set in the following two ways. o Clicking the white space of Input # field and typing a number of choice or o By using the up/down arrows to the right of Input # control and choosing a desired number.
Inputs
Note the following issues. o Each panel type has a different maximum number of inputs as follows.
Panel Type SuperTerm & Turbo SuperTerm SmarTerm MiniTerm MicroTerm
Onboard Inputs
Reader Inputs
Expansion Inputs
Tamper Input
1-24
1-16
25-73
81
1-16 1-8 1-2
1-8 1-4 1-2
17-80 None None
81 81 81
Table 51.11. Panel Onboard Input Numbers
Notice in the above table that the column marked Reader Inputs indicates the input number range that is automatically assigned to Reader ports if they are activated. All inputs on the panel can be used for any purpose, but if you create a door in the Readers screen, two inputs will be assigned to that door unless you manually override the automatic selection. The CardAccess software automatically assigns the next available, lowest numbered two inputs, to the next reader record that you create. Door 1 always gets inputs 1 & 2. Door 2 always gets inputs 3& 4, and so on. o The system has no way of determining which type of panel you are configuring. Thus, you must exercise caution that you do not attempt to create input numbers that do not exist on a given panel type. o Some input numbers are already (activated and) allocated to reader ports on the selected panel. If you dont want to override the default settings for inputs already allocated to reader ports, do not create input definitions in the Inputs screen with the same input numbers that were previously assigned to reader ports inputs (see Duplicate Definitions).
Inputs
o The SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm and SmartTerm panels can support input expansion cards. The MiniTerm and MicroTerm have no expansion capability. Name The Name field is meant for entering a descriptive name for the input. It is recommended to use names that describe the location or function of the input.
Fig. 51.12. An input name describing the location (Third Floor) and function (Fire Sensor) of an input.
The name entered in the Name field will be attached to all input event messages involving the selected input. The field will accept any combination of letters, numbers or symbols.
Figure. 51.13. Input Event Messages.
Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the current input to a group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
Fig.51.14. The Group control.
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign to the input. If there are no Groups visible in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen. Refer the section Groups to do this.
Inputs
Enable Schedule When an input definition is created and enabled (Enabled checkbox selected), that input will be operational 24 hours per day, and every day of the year by default. However, you can elect to have the inputs status ignored outside of a predefined schedule. When a schedule is selected in the Enable Schedule control, the input will report change of status (normal or abnormal) only while that schedule is in effect. Outside of the schedule, the panel will ignore the input contact status and will suppress all event reporting.
Fig. 51.15. The Enable Schedule control.
To select a schedule, click the arrow button to the right of Enable Schedule control, scroll up or down the list to locate the desired schedule and click on it. If no schedules are seen in the list, you need to create some schedules in the Schedules screen. Refer the section Schedules to do this.
Enabled The Enabled check box enables or disables the input at the panel. By default the box is enabled (checked). When an input is enabled, all events generated for that input are reported in CardAccess, whenever there is a change in the state of input contacts. When an input is disabled, the state of the input contacts is ignored by the panel and there will be no event reporting for that input.
Fig. 51.16. The Enabled checkbox.
To enable or disable the input, click the Enabled check box. Checked means enabled, unchecked means disabled.
Inputs
Normal Open
Fig. 51.17. The Normal Open checkbox.
Typically, input switches are normally closed (normally shorted together) dry contact, magnetically operated reed type switches. However, contact switches can be purchased in a normally open (normally not shorted) configuration as well. The panel hardware is set by default to use normally closed type switches for inputs, but can be set to use the normally open type as well. To set an input to normally open, click the Normal Open check box for a given input. Checked is normally open, unchecked (the default) is normally closed type.
Supervised
Fig. 51.18. The Supervised checkbox.
Inputs can typically be defined as some form of dry contact switch, connected to a pair of wires, which are ultimately brought back to two input contacts on a Continental Instruments designed access control panel. A small voltage is generated by the panel on each input two-wire circuit as a means to monitor the state of the input contacts. When the contacts are broken, the circuit is interrupted, causing an alert violation by the panel logic. The shortcoming of a simple switch at the end of a pair of wires is that the circuit can be easily bridged by a shorting wire strapped across the input contacts, allowing easy intrusion. A Supervised input modifies the electrical connection method between the dry contact and the panel in an attempt to prevent tampering. This is done by inserting two 1 Kilo-ohm resistors strategically in the circuit between the input contacts and the panel.
10
Inputs
Inserting resistors in the circuit changes the voltage levels being monitored by the panel and makes it harder for intruders to bridge the circuit. Thus, the panel needs to be notified as to which type of input circuit is being monitored, dry contact (unsupervised) or supervised, so the output voltages and input sensing can be modified. Note: You can only enable supervised inputs on panels or input expansion cards that support supervised inputs. Note that the SmartTerm panel does not have on board supervised input capability. If you wish to add supervised inputs to a SmartTerm, you must add one or more supervised input expansion boards. The SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm, MiniTerm and MicroTerm panels all support onboard supervised inputs. To set the input to supervised mode, click the check box. Checked is enabled and unchecked is disabled (the default).
Activate Console Relay
Fig. 51.19. The Activate Console Relay checkbox.
When the Activate Console Relay feature is enabled, the console relay will be fired each time the selected input changes state from normal to abnormal. However, the console relay (relay #73 on every panel type) must be configured in the Relays screen (refer the section on Relays). The console relay is a special relay to the system and a linkage can be made between any input and the console relay (perhaps) for the purpose of sounding an alarm of some type, to alert operations personnel to the input violation (fire sensor, glass break and the like). To enable the Activate Console Relay function for an input, click the check box. Checked is enabled and unchecked is disabled (the default).
11
Inputs
Dialup On Abnormal
Fig. 51.20. The Dialup on Abnormal checkbox.
The Dialup On Abnormal function is only applied when the panel hosting the input is connected to a dial node (see the section Dial Up). If Dialup On Abnormal is enabled, and the panel is on a dial up node, when the selected input changes status from Normal to Abnormal, the host computer will be dialed by the panel and the resulting Input Abnormal event message will be delivered to the Alerts or Events Grid. To enable Dialup On Abnormal, click the check box. Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default).
Dialup On Normal
Fig. 51.21. The Dialup on Normal checkbox.
The Dialup On Normal function is only applied when the panel hosting the input is connected to a dial node (see Dial Up). If Dialup On Normal is enabled, and the panel is on a dial up node, when the input changes status from Abnormal to Normal, the host computer will be dialed by the panel and the resulting Input Normal event message will be delivered to the Alerts or Events Grid. To enable Dialup On Normal, click the check box. Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default).
12
Inputs
Alerts Section The controls in the Alerts section are explained below.
Fig. 51.22. The Inputs Alerts section.
Alert Delay Time The Alert Delay Time control will set a delay on when the input will be reported as Input Abnormal. Typically, all event reporting as to the change of status of an input happens immediately. The Alert Delay Time control allows you to apply a delay to the change of status event message sent by the panel.
Fig. 51.23. The Alert Delay Time control.
The setting in this control is applied to the transition from Input Normal to Input Abnormal only. The ability to delay input event reporting may prove useful when the input is used to fire a link. To set the Alert Delay Time, click the arrow buttons to the right of Alert Delay Time control or click in the white space and type in a number. The minimum is 0 (no delay, the default) and the maximum is 255 seconds.
13
Inputs
Alert Reset Time The Alert Reset Time control will set a delay on when the input will be reported as Input Normal. Typically, all event reporting as to the change of status of an input happens immediately. The Alert Reset Time control allows you to apply a delay to the change of status event message sent by the panel.
Fig. 51.24. The Alert Reset Time control.
The setting in this control is applied to the transition from Input Abnormal to Input Normal only. The ability to delay input event reporting may prove useful when the input is used to fire a link. To set the Alert Reset Time, click the arrow buttons to the right of Alert Reset Time control or click in the white space and type in a number. The minimum is 0 (no delay, the default) and the maximum is 255 minutes.
Alert Priority The Alert Priority control sets the alert priority level for all event messages that are received from the selected input. Priority levels are used by the system as a way of sorting event messages.
Fig. 51.25. The Alert Priority control.
Typically, urgent alerts (priority level of 1-20) are placed in the Alerts grid of the CardAccess main screen. Less urgent events (priority levels of 21-98) are placed in the Events grid. The default Alert Priority for inputs is 50. If you wish a higher or lower priority for events from the selected input, click the arrow buttons to the right of Alert
14
Inputs
Priority control or click in the white space and type in a priority number. The usable priority number range is 1-98. Events and Alert priorities are explained in greater detail in the manual section titled Setting Up Priorities. Manual and Auto-Acknowledgement of alerts are explained in the manual section titled Alert Acknowledgement.
Response Required
Fig. 51.26. The Response Required checkbox.
The Response Required feature is used only when an input event appears in the Alerts grid of the CardAccess main screen. If an input has this feature enabled, then, automatic acknowledgement of all alerts from that input will be disabled. So, manual acknowledgement will be required to resolve the alerts upon occurrence. In manual alert acknowledgement, the operator will be forced to respond to alerts by typing in a Response Message in the Alert Acknowledge popup window and clicking the Acknowledge button to move the alerts from the Alerts Grid into the Events Grid. By default, Response Required checkbox is unchecked (disabled). To enable the feature, check the box by clicking it.
No Alert Reporting
Fig. 51.27. The No Alert Reporting checkbox.
Alert reporting of Input events is enabled by default. This means that each time there is a change of input status (normal to abnormal, or abnormal to normal), there will be an event message generated by the associated panel that indicates the type of status change as shown in the figure below.
15
Inputs
Fig. 51.28. Input Alert Messages.
When the No Alert Reporting check box is checked, the panel will be instructed to suppress all event messages for the selected input. To disable event reporting for an input, click the check box.
CCTV Tab
CCTV tab can be used to program the selected input for SmartView CCTV feature. CCTV tab will be visible only when the Enable SmartView CCTV-Full Control option is selected in System Settings screen.
Fig. 51.29. Enabling SmartView CCTV Full Control feature in System Settings screen.
Inputs screen in CCTV tab will appear as below.
16
Inputs
Fig. 51.30. Inputs screen in CCTV tab.
The controls in CCTV tab are explained below. Enabled The Enabled checkbox is used to enable/disable the SmartView CCTV feature for the selected input.
Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default).
17
Inputs
Assign as this PC The function of Assign as this PC button is to assign the current PC as a CCTV workstation.
Fig. 51.32. The Assign as this PC button.
For assigning, click on Assign as this PC button. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 51.33. Message box displayed after clicking Assign as this PC button.
Click on Yes button in the message box for workstation assignment. Note: After workstation assignment, a new control named CCTV Function will appear in the Abnormal Condition and Return to Normal Condition sections. See figure 51.34 below.
Abnormal Condition, Return to Normal Condition The controls in Abnormal Condition and Return to Normal Condition sections come into picture when the selected input changes its state from NormalAbnormal or Abnormal-Normal respectively.
18
Inputs
Fig. 51.34. The Abnormal Condition and Return to Normal Condition sections.
The controls in the two sections are explained below.
CCTV Function The CCTV Function control in the Abnormal Condition and Return to Normal Condition sections stores the default and, all of the CCTV functions that are defined in the Function Key Programming screen (refer SmartView Helpfile for details). A desired CCTV function can be selected in one/both of the sections for execution when the selected input changes its state from Normal-Abnormal or vice versa.
Fig. 51.35. The CCTV Function control.
To select a function, click the down arrow to the right of CCTV Function control and select a function of choice. Note: The CCTV Function control will be visible only after you click the Assign as this PC button, for assigning your computer as the SmartView workstation.
19
Inputs
Take CCTV Snapshot When Take CCTV Snapshot checkbox is selected in the two sections, the SmartView CCTV software will take snapshots of the input event when the state of the selected input changes from Normal-Abnormal or vice versa. By default, the checkbox is unchecked.
Fig. 51.36. The Take CCTV Snapshot checkbox.
Click the checkbox if you wish to take CCTV snapshots of input events whenever there is a change in status of the selected input. The snapshot taken will be stored in the database along with the event. An event having a CCTV snapshot will show a camera icon in the Photo column of the event record, in CardAccess main screen. Delay (ms) A few cameras such as the PTZ cameras need some time to move and position themselves before they can take snapshots. This time requirement is met by fixing what we call as the snapshot Delay time. The Delay field is used to set the amount of time you wish to allow for proper positioning of cameras before taking CCTV snapshots.
Fig. 51.37. The Delay field.
20
Inputs
Configuring CCTV SmartView for an Input

Following are the steps for configuring CCTV SmartView feature to an Input: 1. Open Inputs screen by clicking on Configuration->Inputs menu options in CardAccess main screen. 2. In the upper half of the screen, click on an input record. 3. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. 4. Click on CCTV tab. Note: CCTV tab will be visible only when Enable SmartView CCTV- Full Control option is selected in System Settings screen. The CCTV tab will look similar to the figure shown below.
Fig. 51.38. The CCTV tab.
5. Click the Enabled checkbox. 6. Click on Assign as this PC button for assigning your computer as the SmartView workstation and then click on Yes button in the message box that is displayed. Once this is done, the name of your computer will be shown against the label SmartView Workstation and a new control called CCTV Function will
21
Inputs
appear in the Abnormal and Return to Normal Condition sections as shown highlighted in the figure below.
Fig. 51.39. The CCTV Function control visible after ARUNLPT is assigned as the SmartView Workstation.
7. If you wish to take actions when the selected input changes its state from Normal-Abnormal, then, configure the controls in Abnormal Condition section as explained below. a) To execute a CCTV function when the selected input changes to abnormal state, click the down arrow to the right of CCTV Function control and select the desired function in the list. Note: The CCTV Function control will not be visible unless you assign your computer as the SmartView workstation. The CCTV Function drop down list will show the default function (VIDEO WINDOW ON/OFF) and all of the CCTV functions that you define in the Function Key Programming screen (refer SmartView Helpfile for defining functions). b) To take snapshots of events when the selected input changes to abnormal state, click the Take CCTV Snapshot checkbox to select it.
22
Inputs
c) To allow time for positioning of cameras before taking snapshots, click the white space of Delay field and type in a desired time value.
Fig. 51.40. The Delay field.
Note: The unit of measurement for Delay field is millisecond (1/1000 of a second). That is, in case you wish to allow 1 second for camera positioning, you will have to enter the value 1000.
8. Similarly, if you wish to take actions when the selected input changes its state from Abnormal-Normal, then, configure the controls in Return to Normal Condition section, as explained in step 7. 9. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings.
23
Inputs
Remote Control Tab

The Remote Control tab for a given input can be used if you wish to transmit CCTV command strings (that are previously created in the System Settings screen) when the input changes its state from normal to abnormal or vice versa. The Remote Control tab will be visible only when the Remote Control checkbox is checked in System Settings screen.
Fig. 51.41. The Inputs screen Remote Control tab.
The controls on the Remote Control folder tab are explained below.
Enabled The Enabled check box works in conjunction with the Abnormal Condition and the Return to Normal Condition sections mentioned below. If the Enabled check box is checked, the CCTV Command string (if selected in the Abnormal Condition and/or Return to Normal Condition sections) will be transmitted when there is a change in the status of the selected input.
24
Inputs
If unchecked, the command string selection(s) will be ignored and there will be no transmission. Click the checkbox to enable or disable it. Abnormal Condition If a command string is selected in the Abnormal Condition section, that string will be transmitted to the CCTV switch whenever the current inputs state changes from normal to abnormal. This requires the Enabled checkbox to be checked.
Fig. 51.43. The Abnormal Condition section.
If Enabled checkbox is not checked, the command string selection will be ignored and there will be no transmission. To select a command string, click the down arrow to the right of CCTV Command Name control, locate the desired CCTV string in the list and click on it. Note: In case no strings are seen in the list you must create some in System Settings CCTV tab. Refer the section System Settings to do this.
25
Inputs
Return to Normal Condition If a command string is selected in the Return to Normal Condition section, that string will be transmitted to the CCTV switch whenever the current inputs state changes from abnormal to normal. This requires the Enabled checkbox to be checked.
Fig. 51.44. The Return to Normal Condition section.
If Enabled checkbox is not checked, the command string selection will be ignored and there will be no transmission. To select a command string, click the down arrow to the right of CCTV Command Name control, locate the desired CCTV string in the list and click on it. Note: In case no strings are seen in the list you must create some in System Settings CCTV tab. Refer the section System Settings to do this.
DVR Tab
The DVR tab in Inputs screen is used for configuring a DVR Camera to the selected Input. The DVR tab will be visible only when Enable DVR RemoteView option is selected in System Settings screen.
26
Inputs
Fig. 51.45. Enabling DVR RemoteView in System Settings screen.
The steps for configuring DVR camera to a given input is explained in the document DVR RemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000.
Map Tab
The Map tab has controls that allow you to add or edit a map for the selected input. The Map tab is not visible unless the Use Facility Maps Option is enabled in System Settings screen.
Fig. 51.46. The Inputs Map tab.
27
Inputs
Facility Map for This Device This field displays the name of the map that is attached to the selected Input.
Size Image to fit
28
Inputs
View Maps
Remove Map
29
Inputs
The Location/Remarks tab can be used to mention the place of location and remarks (if any) on the selected input.
30
Inputs
Creating a Basic Input Definition

Note that when you create a new input definition the system provides the following default settings automatically (unless you override those settings by changing the settings in the appropriate controls): Input is enabled. Input is active 24 hours per day, every day of the year including holidays (default 24/7/365 enable schedule). Input is set to normally closed mode. Input is set to unsupervised mode. Input is set with no Alert Delay and no Alert Reset time. Response Required is disabled. Alert Reporting is enabled. Input Abnormal and Input Normal event messages will be sent by the panel. Set to not activate the console relay. Set not to dial up on any condition.
Follow the steps below to create a basic input definition: Open Inputs screen by clicking on Configuration->Inputs menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. Click on New button in the toolbar.
Click the down arrow to the right of Panel control and select a panel in the drop down list.
31
Inputs
Note: If no panel names are seen in the list, it means that panel definitions are not yet created. It is necessary that you define panels before you can proceed with input definitions. Number the input in the Input # control (See the section on the Input # explained above for detailed information). Input can be numbered in two ways as below.
Fig. 51.55. The input # control.
o Click the white space of Input # field and type in a number or o Use the up/down arrows to the right of Input # control and choose a desired number. Click the white space of Name field and enter a descriptive name for the Input. A name that can describe the input location/function is recommended.
Fig. 51.56. Input name describing the location (Third Floor) and function (Fire Sensor) of Input.
32
Inputs
You have just created an Input definition with all of the default operational settings as mentioned in the first part of this section.
Editing an Input Definition

Open Inputs screen by clicking on Configuration->Inputs menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the input record you wish to edit and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the controls in the folder tabs. Note: o The Input # field cannot be edited. Input # once set during Input creation is not subject to change. o It is not possible to associate the selected input with a different panel. In other words, an input once associated with a particular panel is permanently attached to that specific panel only. The system will not allow you to change the panel name in the Panel control. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
33
Inputs
Deleting an Input Definition

Open Inputs screen by clicking on Configuration->Inputs menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the input record you wish to delete and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 51.58. Message box displayed before deleting an input record.
Note: Delete action cannot be reversed. A record deleted once is lost forever. Make sure you have chosen the correct record for deleting. After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen. Note: Deleting an input record will disable that input at the concerned panel, thereby rendering the input inoperative.
34
Inputs
Inputs Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 51.59. Inputs screen navigation bar.
The Inputs screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked input records in the screen. In figure 51.59, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first input record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted input record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted input record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted input record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted input record.
35
Inputs
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last input record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted input record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked input record.
Virtual Inputs
A Virtual Input is an input that exists only in software. You would never wire to a virtual input. A virtual input can be programmed to go abnormal based on an event rather than on the change of state of a hardware input (open or closed). Essentially, the panel logic handles a virtual input in the same way as a hardware input. When the virtual input status changes, an input event message is generated, just like a hardware input. The CardAccess handles the virtual input in the same way it would a physical input. Thus, you can use virtual inputs in any of the same ways you would think of using a hardware input. For example virtual inputs (and inputs in general) are often used to fire links (see the manual section titled Links) that sound alarms or switch CCTV equipment. The real strength and usefulness of virtual inputs is that these inputs are attached to door event types. In other words, when a specific type of event occurs at a door, a virtual input can be made to go abnormal. This allows you to set up software macros (links) that can trigger hardware events, based on selected conditions at the door. There are four virtual input types. Each virtual input type can be enabled on any reader port, for any Continental panel. All panel types support virtual inputs. There are four available virtual input types per reader port, as listed below.
36
Inputs
Forced Door The Forced Door virtual input for given door will go abnormal if the door is forced open. Forced open is logically defined as breaking the door contact of a given door without a valid badge read prior to the door opening. Valid Tracked Card When the Tracked feature is enabled in the Personnel record for a given card holder, each time that card holder accesses any door, a special Badge Valid Tracked event message is generated (see Personnel for more information). A reader port can be set to trip the Valid Tracked Card virtual input, when any tracked card successfully accesses a given door An Input Abnormal event message (for the virtual input) is generated each time a valid tracked card is presented to a reader that has the Valid Tracked Card virtual input enabled. Denied Card/ Void Card Technically, a denial of entry can result from a denied card or a void card access attempt. A denied card is usually due to a CardAccess rules violation (time of day, unauthorized access, etc.). A void card is usually due to the fact that the card record is missing from the panels card database (the card record does not exist in the CardAccess Personnel database, or does not belong at any reader on the panel). Thus, (when enabled) the Denied/Void Card virtual input will go abnormal when a denied or void card is presented to the reader. Door Open Too Long Generally, the Door Open Too Long event is triggered at a given door when the door has been opened resulting from the presentation of a valid card, but the door was not closed before the Still Open Delay timer (in the Readers screen, Options tab) has expired. The Door Open Too Long virtual input will go abnormal when the Still Open Delay timer expires. The below section titled Virtual Input Mapping details the specific input numbers for the virtual inputs, for each panel type.
37
Inputs
Virtual Input Mapping

Virtual inputs are available for all panel types. You can elect to activate up to four virtual inputs for each Reader on any panel. With hardware inputs, a given input number always refers to the same physical input on a given panel PC board. This is not the case with virtual inputs on all panel types. The virtual input numbers assigned to a given reader port may change depending on how many input or relay expansion cards you have attached to the panel. Virtual input numbers are fixed on the SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm, MiniTerm and MicroTerm panels. Virtual inputs numbers will change on the SmartTerm panel depending on how many inputs are provided from expansion cards (see the charts below). Also note that if you add the maximum number of expansion cards to the SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm or SmartTerm panels, you consume all of the software input numbers that could potentially be allotted for virtual inputs. Thus, virtual inputs become unavailable if you use the maximum number of expansion cards for either panel type. Below are the input number mapping charts for each panel type. All Panels Note: Input #81 is always reserved as the Tamper Input for all panel types (SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm, SmartTerm, MiniTerm, MicroTerm and Super-Two). However, you must create and enable the input definition for input #81 on a given panel to activate the tamper input, since the tamper input is disabled by default.
38
Inputs
SuperTerm and Turbo SuperTerm

Virtual Inputs are fixed on the SuperTerm and Turbo SuperTerm starting with input 49. Reader Number 1 Category Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Input Number 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
7 8
Table-51.60. SuperTerm and Turbo SuperTerm Virtual Inputs.
39
Inputs
Note for SuperTerm and Turbo SuperTerm: Virtual inputs are lost if more than one expansion board is added.
Super-Two
Virtual Inputs are fixed on the Super-Two as well, starting with input 49. Reader Number 1 Category Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Input Number 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
7 8
Table-51.61. Super-Two Virtual Inputs. 40
Inputs
Turbo Super 4
Virtual Inputs are fixed on the Turbo Super 4 starting with input 49. Reader Number 1 Category Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Input Number 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
Table-51.62. Turbo Super 4 Virtual Inputs.
SmartTerm
The following table shows the virtual input mapping for a SmartTerm. Recall that the SmartTerm virtual input number assignments change depending on how many expansion cards are installed as shown in the chart below (the SmartTerm supports up to four expansion cards).
41
Inputs
Door Number
Category
Input # With 2 With 3 With 1 with No Expansion Expans ExpansiExpansion -ion on Board Boards Boards Boards 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Long Open Too
Table. 51.63. SmartTerm Virtual Inputs.
SmartTerm Note: Virtual inputs are lost if a fourth expansion board is added.
42
Inputs
MiniTerm and MicroTerm
Reader Number
Category Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long Forced Door Valid Tracked Card Denied/Void Card Door Open Too Long
Input Number 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Table. 51.64. MiniTerm and MicroTerm Virtual Inputs.
Virtual Inputs are fixed on both the MiniTerm and the MicroTerm, starting with input # 17.
43
Language Control
Language Control
The default language of CardAccess software is English. But the user has the privilege of choosing a desired language for using the software.
Choosing a Language
Follow the steps below to choose a desired language for CardAccess software: Click on System menu in CardAccess menu bar and select the Language menu item. Upon clicking, the Select Language dialog will be displayed as shown below.
Fig. 31.1. The Select Language dialog.
In the Select Language dialog, click on the desired language in which you like to use the CardAccess software, and then click on OK button.
Language Control
Upon clicking, CardAccess will access a language translation text file (explained in section Language Translation Files) and load the translation key for the selected language. The labels for all CardAccess controls will then be displayed in the selected language.
Fig. 31.2. CardAccess in Dutch language.
Note: Only the text labels of controls, message boxes and screen menus used in CardAccess will be displayed in the selected language (Dutch in above figure). The CardAccess transactions (Event/Alert messages) continue to be in English.
Language Control
Language Translation Files

There are four important files that contain the language translations for CardAccess software. All the four files are located in CardAccess3000 \Language folder as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 31.3. Language translation files provided in CardAccess 3000 folder.
The language translation files are explained below: TRANSLAT.txt This file contains the language translations for controls, message boxes and screen menus of the CardAccess GUI. TranslatHost.txt This file contains the language translations for the Host communications driver program. translatRpt.txt This file contains the language translations for all CardAccess reports. LanguageEditor.exe This is the language editor program. This program can be used to edit all language text files mentioned above.
Language Control
Editing Language Translation Files

CardAccess provides the Language Editor program that has a convenient user interface for editing language translation text files (explained in the section Language Translation Files). Follow the steps below to view/edit the language translations: Using Windows Explorer, navigate to CardAccess3000 \ Language folder.
Fig. 31.4. Language Editor program for editing language translations.
Double click on Language Editor.exe file (refer figure 31.4). Upon clicking, Language Translation Editor screen will be displayed as below.
Language Control
Fig. 31.5. The CardAccess Language Translation Editor screen.
The screen has three columns- Item, Reference Text and Language as shown in the above figure. Observe that the status bar at the bottom of the screen is empty at this point of time. Once a program is selected in the Program selection control, the status bar will display the directory Path corresponding to the language translation text file of the selected program. In the Language Translation Editor screen, click the down arrow of Program selection control and select a desired program in the list.
Language Control
Fig. 31.6. Selecting a program for language translation.
Upon clicking, control labels (in English) of the selected program will be displayed in the second column (Reference Text column) of the screen as shown below.
Fig. 31.7. Control names of CardAccess 3000 GUI.
Notice that the status bar now displays the directory path of the program selected. Click the down arrow of Language selection control and select a desired language in the drop down list.
6
Language Control
Fig. 31.8. Selecting a language for language translation.
Upon selection, the column on the right (language column) will display the translation for the control labels.
Fig. 31.9. Translation for controls in Dutch language.
It is possible that some controls in the screen may not have translations available by default. Also, the default translations in the screen can be edited as desired.
Language Control
Follow the steps below if you wish to edit an existing translation or enter a new translation in Language Translation Editor screen: o Click the Language column of the control for entering/editing the language translation.
Fig. 31.10. Clicking on Language column of Operator control.
o Type in the language translation for the control. o Click on Save button at the bottom of the screen (refer figure 31.10.) for saving the changes. o Click on Exit button (next to Save button) at the bottom for closing the screen. Note: For language translation changes to take effect, you must restart CardAccess software.
Language Control
Note: Clicking on Exit button directly without saving the changes will display the following message box.
Fig. 31.11. Message box displayed if Exit button is clicked without saving changes.
In the message box, click on Yes button if you do not wish to save the translation changes. Otherwise, click on Cancel button to return back to Language Translation Editor screen.
Links
Links
The Links screen is a configuration screen where you create configuration records that activate software links. All links have one main purpose to fire one or more relays. Thus, when a link is activated, one or more relays will typically be activated as a result. A link basically allows you to monitor the status of inputs or a time schedule, and cause relays to activate if any of those inputs change state, or if the time schedule goes into effect.
Link Activation Methods

There are four ways to activate a link. They are as explained below. Input Abnormal A link program can monitor the status of up to five inputs, selectable on Links screen Input tab. If any of those inputs goes abnormal, the link will be activated. Schedule You can select a track schedule in addition to, or instead of, using inputs to fire a link. The link will be activated when the schedule goes into effect, and deactivated when the schedule expires. From Another Link Any link can be made to activate one other link. The Link to Remote Link Prog control on Links screen General tab allows you to connect any link to one other link. Each time the selected link is activated, the link mentioned in the Link to Remote Link Prog control will also be activated. When two or more links are connected together in this way they are known as global links. Manually You can use the Manual Link Control screen (available by clicking Link button on CardAccess main toolbar) to activate a link.
Links
Link Functions
When a link activates, there are two things that could happen. Activate a Relay The Output tab of the Links screen allows you to select up to five relays for activation by the link. Any of those relays can be placed in one of the three states mentioned below. o Output On The relay will be changed from its normal state to the Output On state, then return to the Output Off state (pulsed relay). o Output Off The relay will be changed from the Output On state to the Output Off state, then return to the Output On state (pulsed relay). o Tracked The relay will remain in the Output On state until all inputs return to normal or the time schedule expires (tracking relay). Activate Another Link Any link can be set up to trigger another link using the Link to Remote Link Prog control of Links screen General tab. You can create a link which will fire local relays and activate another link or, you can create a link whose sole purpose is to activate a link on another panel.
Types of Links
Links are broadly classified into two types namely Local and Global. They are explained in detail below. Local Links Local linking means local to a specific panel. A local link links inputs to relays on the same panel only (all inputs and relays that are mounted on the same physical panel are said to be local to each other). Note: Local links are controlled exclusively by the panel logic. The CardAccess PC is not needed to operate a local link.
Links
Global Links Global Linking refers to two or more local links which have been connected together through software. If a local link is connected to another link (configured on a different panel) in the Link to Remote Link Prog control, then it is called a Global Link. An input on a given panel can fire a link on another panel. What happens when that second link is activated depends on the programming settings of that link. Note: Global links require communication with the CardAccess host PC. When a given panel is required to fire a global link, a message is sent to the CardAccess host PC, which forwards that message to the subject panel. The panels do not communicate with each other on a peer basis. The CardAccess host acts as the communications controller for all inter-panel communications. Global links will fail if the CardAccess PC is off-line during a remote link activation request. Global linking can be explained with the help of the schematic diagram below.
Panel 1 Link 1 Panel 2 Link 1
Panel 2 Prog# 1 Fig. Global Link
Panel Nbr Link Nbr
Fig. 54.1. Global Link Schematic Diagram.
In the above Global Link Schematic Diagram, Panel 1/Link 1 is globally connected to Panel 2/Link 1. When Link 1 on Panel 1 is activated (by an abnormal input or a track schedule), if there are any local relays programmed into Panel 1/Link 1 they will be activated. In addition, Panel 1 will send a message to the CardAccess communications driver that Panel 2/Link 1 needs to be activated. The CardAccess communications driver will relay that command to panel 2. Panel 2 will then activate Link 1. Panel 2/Link 1 will then activate any local relays programmed into that link. If a remote panel link is programmed into the Link to Remote Link Prog control of Panel 2/Link 1, a message will be sent to the CardAccess communications driver to activate that link. The link activations
Links
and the remote panel link activation messages will continue until the last link in the chain is reached. Note: It is possible to create a circular link that will activate indefinitely! In figure 54.1 above, if you enter Panel = 1 and Prog# = 1 in the Link to Remote Link Prog control of Panel 2, Panel 1/Link 1 will activate Panel 2/Link1. Panel 2/Link 1 will in turn activate Panel 1/Link 1, which will start the process over again. This is called an endless loop which will never stop activating these links and consume system resources. This condition is to be avoided.
Local Link Types

Local links can be of the following types based on the settings in the Input and Output folder tabs of a Link definition in the Links screen. Input Only If there are one or more selections on the Input tab, and no selections on the Output tab, this link will be activated when an input goes abnormal, but no local action will take place on the panel where this link resides (the link has no local relays programmed, so there is nothing to activate on the local panel). Since the link itself does activate when one of its selected inputs changes state, it can be used to activate another link by connecting it as a global link. Thus, the input(s) on one panel can be used to fire relays on another panel (one example is where an Input Only Link on one panel fires an Output Only link on another panel. See below). Input/Output The standard way to fire a link. One or more inputs are selected on the Input tab and one or more relays are selected on the Output tab. An input is used to fire the local link, the link becomes activated and in turn, the selected local relays are activated all on the same panel. Schedule Triggered When you select a Track Schedule to fire a link (with or without inputs configured), the relays selected in the Output tab will be changed to the Output On state during the schedule and they will be returned to the Output Off state when the schedule expires. You are permitted to configure inputs and a track schedule in the same link definition.
4
Links
Output Only The Output tab has relays selected for activation, but there are no inputs selected on the Input tab and no time schedule selected in the Track Schedule field. The only way to fire this type of link is from another link using the Global linking feature.
Accessing Links Screen
Click on Configuration menu in CardAccess main menu bar.
Click on Links option in the menu list. Upon clicking, Links screen will be displayed in General tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 54.2. The Links screen.
The screen may contain five tabs as listed below.
Fig. 54.3. Links screen folder tabs.
Links
a) The General Tab b) The Input Tab c) The Output Tab
d) The Maps Tab- This tab will be visible only when the Use Facility Maps feature is enabled in System Settings screen.
e) The Location/Remarks Tab Each of the tabs and their controls are detailed below.
General Tab
This is the default tab in which Links screen will be displayed.
Fig. 54.5. Links screen General tab. 6
Links
Panel Name A link must be associated with a panel before the operating parameters are set for that link. The Panel Name control is used to do this. The Panel Name control contains a list of all panels that are created in the Panels screen.
Fig. 54.6. The Panel Name control.
To select a panel, click the arrow button to the right of Panel Name control, scroll up or down to locate the desired panel and click on it. If no panel names are seen in the list, you need to create them in Panels screen. Refer the manual section titled Panels to do this. Once a panel is selected, the fields on the Input tab and the fields on the Output tab will have access to the inputs and relays (respectively) that are activated for the selected panel.
Prog. # The Prog. # control allows you to select which numbered link you wish to activate on a given panel.
Fig. 54.7. The Prog. # control.
Link program numbers are used by the system to identify the link. So link numbers cannot be duplicated on the same panel. Each panel can have its own set of link program numbers in the range 1-64.
Links
The Prog# field is not automatically incremented. Therefore you must keep track of the numbers that are used for numbering the links. To number a link, click the arrow buttons to the right of the Prog# field or click in the white space and type a number from 1 to 64.
Description The Description field is meant for entering a descriptive name for the link. It is recommended to use names that clearly describe the function of the link.
Fig. 54.8. The Description field showing the intended use of a link.
The name you enter will be attached to all link event messages involving the selected link. The field will accept any combination of letters, numbers or symbols.
Fig. 54.9. Link Event Messages.
Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the current link to a link group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
Links
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign to the link. If there are no Groups visible in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen. Refer the section Groups to do this.
Enable Schedule When you create a link definition and enable it, by default that link is available to be activated by input trigger or manually 24 hours per day, every day of the year. If you select a schedule in the Enable Schedule field, the selected link cannot be activated by an abnormal input outside of the schedule. However, the link can still be manually activated outside of the enable schedule.
Fig. 54.11. The Enable Schedule control.
To assign a link enable schedule, click the down arrow to the right of Enable Schedule control, scroll up or down to locate your selection, and click on it. If there are no selections available in the Enable Schedule control, you need to create some in the Schedules screen. Refer the manual section titled Schedules to do this.
Links
Enabled The Enabled check box activates or deactivates the link at the panel.
When a link is disabled, the link is effectively dead. The link cannot be activated by any means, including input abnormal, track schedule or manual activation. To enable the link (the default), click the check box. Checked is enabled and unchecked is disabled.
Report Activity Link status event messages (figure 54.14) are enabled by default. You can elect to suppress link event messages by un-checking the Report Activity check box.
Fig. 54.13. The Report Activity checkbox.
Fig. 54.14. Link Status Event Messages.
Report Activity box checked enables reporting of event messages, unchecked disables reporting for the selected link.
10
Links
Alert Requires Response
Fig. 54.15. The Alert Requires Response checkbox.
Alert Requires Response box is not checked by default. In case a link has this box checked, then all events from the selected link will appear in the Alerts grid of CardAccess main screen. Also, the Alert Acknowledge popup window will be displayed forcing the operator to manually acknowledge the alerts. Note: Automatic alert acknowledgement feature will be disabled when Alert Requires Response box is checked. The manual alert acknowledgement feature will require the operator to type a Response Message in the Alert Acknowledge popup window and click the Acknowledge button to move the alerts from the Alerts Grid into the Events Grid. Click the checkbox to enable or disable the Alert Requires Response feature. Checked means enabled, unchecked means disabled.
Dialup on Activation The Dialup on Activation option is only used with dial up panels.
Fig. 54.16. The Dialup on Activation checkbox.
Dial panels save event messages in a memory buffer and wait to be dialed (on a regular schedule). While the panel is off-line, links could be reporting potentially important event messages which the CardAccess computer would not be aware of until dialing in some time later. If you want the panel to dial the CardAccess PC each time the selected link is activated and reports an event message, click the Dial Up on Activation check box. Checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default).
11
Links
Alert Priority The Alert Priority control allows you to set the default event priority value for event messages from the selected link.
The alert priority is used by the system to route event messages to the Events or Alerts Grids (see the manual section titled Setting Up Priorities for more information). The default priority is 10. If you wish to change the Alert Priority, click the arrows to the right of the Alert Priority control or click in the white space and type a number. The usable priority number range is 1-98.
Manual Control Privilege The Links screen Manual Control Privilege control works in conjunction with the Manual Link Control screen shown in figure 54.19 below.
Fig. 54.18. Links screen Manual Control Privilege control.
Effectively, the Links screen Manual Control Privileges control assigns the link to a filter group. The filter group is intended to hide selected links from the view of selected operators, in the Manual Link Control screen. The effect is similar to database partitioning except that the object is to hide links from view in the Manual Link Control screen only, to prevent unauthorized manual activation of selected links.
12
Links
Fig. 54.19. The Manual Link Control screen.
The Manual Link Control screen allows operators to manually fire links from inside the CardAccess software (see the manual section titled Manual Control). Hiding selected links will prevent unauthorized activation of those links. The Manual Link Control screen uses the settings in the Operators screen, on the Privileges tab(Refer Device Control Privileges under Privileges Tab in the section Operators), of the currently logged in operator, to determine which of the link privilege groups to make visible and which links to hide, each time the Manual Link Control screen is opened.
13
Links
Link to Remote Link Prog
The Link to Remote Link Prog control allows you to set up Global links.
Fig. 54.20. The Link to Remote Link Prog control.
In the Links screen, when you create new links, you are exclusively creating local links only. That is, some number of links that reside locally in the memory of each panel of your CardAccess system. Once several local links have been created, it is then possible to connect two or more local links together using the Link to Remote Link Prog control, thereby forming global links. The Link to Remote Link Prog control stores all of the links that have been configured on different panels that are used in the CardAccess system. To connect the given link to another link globally, click the down arrow to the right of Link to Remote Link Prog control, locate the link of your choice (configured on a different panel), and click on it.
14
Links
Input Tab
The Input tab of Links screen contains the triggers that are used to activate a link.
Fig. 54.21. Links screen Input tab.
You can connect up to five inputs to fire the current link. If any one of those inputs goes abnormal, or if the schedule (if selected in Track Schedule control) goes into effect, the link will be fired. Inputs have two software states normal and abnormal. The software states are somewhat disconnected; from the hardware states open and closed. An input can be set up to be normally open or normally closed depending on the setting of the Normal Open check box in the Inputs screen. Thus, an input could be open but still be normal. Note that the panel software uses the normal and abnormal software states to describe the condition of the input, not the hardware condition. This is an important distinction, because a link program uses the software state of the input to trigger the link, not the hardware state. It is Input Abnormal that fires a link, not necessarily an open input, since open could be the normal state for the selected input. To select an input to fire a link, click the arrow to the right of any of the five selection controls in the Input tab (of Links screen), scroll up or down to locate the desired input and click on it.
15
Links
Fig. 54.22. Links screen input selection controls.
If you elect to use more than one input to trigger the link, note that it does not matter which of the five available fields are used. The input fields are not prioritized in any way. If you elect to fill all five fields, note that the fields are not logical and, they are logical or instead. This means that, any one input going abnormal will fire the link. Also note that you can create a link that does not have any input selections at all. The link can be activated by a time schedule alone. To select a time schedule, click the arrow to the right of Track Schedule control, scroll up or down to locate the desired schedule and click on it.
Fig. 54.23. Links screen Track Schedule control.
If you dont see any schedules in the list you need create some in the Schedules screen. Refer the manual section titled Schedules to do this.
16
Links
Output Tab
The Output tab is used to select relays that will be activated by the selected link.
Fig. 54.24. Links screen Output Tab.
You can select up to five relays. All five relays will be activated when the link is fired. There is no priority order for selecting a relay on this tab. You can select a relay from any control bank; the order is ignored by the system. Relays can be placed in any one of the states by a link. The states are: Output On When the input goes abnormal, the relay(s) will be placed in the Output On state for the period of time set in the Energize Time control of the relay record (in the Relays screen). Use this setting if you want the relay to be activated momentarily. Output Off When the input goes abnormal, the relay(s) will be placed in the Output Off state for the period of time set in the Energize Time control of the relay record (in the Relays screen). Use this setting if you want the relay de-activated momentarily and if the relay is currently tracking a schedule. Track When the input goes abnormal, the relay(s) will track the input. As long as the input is abnormal, the relay will remain in the Output On state. Use this setting if you want the relay held in the Output On state for as long as the input stays abnormal. To select a relay, click the arrow to the right of the selected control, scroll up or down to locate the desired relay, and click on it. If no relays are seen in the
17
Links
controls, you need create relays in the Relays screen. Refer the section Relays to do this.
Map Tab
The Map tab has controls that allow you to add or edit a map for the selected link. The Map tab is not visible unless the Use Facility Maps Option is enabled in System Settings screen.
Fig. 54.25. Links screen Map tab.
Facility Map for This Device This field displays the name of the map that is attached to the selected link.
18
Links
Size Image to fit
Image bitmaps come in all shapes and sizes. The CardAccess Maps image view control is set by default to stretch the image to fit the size of the image display window. If Size Image to fit checkbox is disabled, the image will be displayed in its native size format (wherein white space may appear on the sides, or top and on the bottom). The check box is enabled by default. View Maps
19
Links
Remove Map
The Location/Remarks tab can be used to mention the place of location and remarks (if any) on the selected link.
20
Links
Creating a Basic Link Definition

Note that when you create a new link definition, the system provides the following default settings automatically (unless you override those settings by changing the settings in the appropriate controls). Link is enabled. Link has no Enable Schedule assigned, but the link is available to be activated 24 hours per day, every day of the year (unless overridden by the enable schedule). If there is a change in link status, Link Activate and Link Deactivate event messages will be sent to the CardAccess host PC by the panel. The Alert Requires Response function is disabled. The Dial Up on Activation function is disabled. The alert priority is set to 10 by default. The link is not assigned to a group. The Manual Control Privilege is set to All. This means that all operators will have access to manually activate the link in Manual Link Control screen (available by clicking Links button in the CardAccess main toolbar). Remote Panel Linking is disabled. No inputs are assigned. No outputs are assigned. As stated previously, there are two kinds of links; Local and Global. Global links are actually comprised of two or more local links (from different panels) that have been cross-linked in the software. We will first explore how to create a local link, and then we will explore how to link two or more links together to create a global link. Firstly, you need to decide what function your links will perform. There are some questions to be answered as follows.
21
Links
Will your relays be normally energized or de-energized? Will your links fire local relays or only remote panel relays? How many relays will be fired for each link (maximum 5 permitted)? Should one or more relays track the input state (as opposed to being switched on momentarily, then being switched off) How many inputs should be capable of firing the link (maximum 5 permitted)? Would a track time schedule better suit the application?
Creating a Local Link

Since we are creating a local link, some of the questions above are automatically addressed. In a local link, local inputs (and/or time schedule) are used to fire local relays only. Follow the steps below to create a basic local link. 1. Open Links Open Links screen by clicking on Configuration->Links menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. 2. Click New Click on New button in the toolbar.
3. Select a Panel Click the down arrow to the right of Panel Name control and select a panel in the drop down list. The panel you select must have inputs created in the Inputs screen and relays created in the Relays screen (otherwise there will be nothing to link).
22
Links
Fig. 54.33. The Panel Name control.
Note: If no panel names are seen in the list, it means that panel definitions are not yet created. It is necessary that you define panels before you can proceed with link definitions.
4. Number the Link Number the link in Prog # control.
Fig. 54.34. The Prog. # control.
Link can be numbered in two ways as below. a) By clicking the white space of Prog # field and typing a number or b) By using the up/down arrows to the right of Prog # control and choosing a desired number.
Note: The Prog # field value is not automatically incremented. Therefore, you must set the link numbers manually and keep track of the numbers you use. The link program number of a particular link must be unique on the selected panel and should be set to the next available lowest number. 5. Enter a Name Type a descriptive name for the link in the Description field. A name that can describe the link function is recommended.
23
Links
Fig. 54.35. The Description field showing the function of a link.
6. Select an Input To select an input do the following. a) Click the Input folder tab. b) Click the arrow to the right of any of the five input fields, and select an input.
Fig. 54.36. The Links Input Selection Controls.
You can select up to five inputs. Only inputs that have been activated for the panel selected on the General tab, in the Panel Name field will be available for selection. 7. Select an Output To select a relay that will be fired by the input change of status do the following. a) Click the Output folder tab.
24
Links
Fig. 54.37. Links screen Output folder tab.
b) You need to decide how the relay will respond to the change of input status. You have three states to select from. The states are: On When the input goes abnormal, the relay(s) will be placed in the Output On state for the period of time set in the Energize Time field of the relay record (in the Relays screen). Use this setting if you want the relay activated momentarily Off When the input goes abnormal, the relay(s) will be placed in the Output Off state for the period of time set in the Energize Time control of the relay record (in the Relays screen). Use this setting if you want the relay de-activated momentarily and if the relay is currently tracking a schedule. Track When the input goes abnormal, the relay(s) will track the input. As long as the input is abnormal, the relay will remain in the Output On state. Use this setting if you want the relay held in the Output On state for as long as the input stays abnormal c) Click the arrow to the right of any of the five output fields, in the appropriate action type column, and select an output. You will only see outputs that have been activated for the panel you selected on the General tab, in the Panel Name field. 8. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings.
25
Links
You have just created a basic, local link definition with all of the default operational settings as mentioned in the first part of this section.
Creating a Global Link

A global link is simply a local link that has been connected to another local link through software. You simply take two or more local links and you link them together using the Link to Remote Link Prog control, found on the General tab of Links screen.
When creating a global link you have some decisions to make. First, we need to reinforce the following points. Links are chained together to form Global links. All links are triggered by inputs, time schedules or other links. The goal of all links, local or global, is to (ultimately) fire relays. Local links are fairly straightforward to deal with. But, with a global link you have a number of issues. Since the global link is created from two or more local links, what type of links should those local links be? For example, if you create two local links and then plan to connect those links globally, your first decision is what each of those links should do locally, at their respective panels. Here are some of the considerations. How many links will you connect together globally?
26
Links
What is the overall plan for the links? Will each link be able to operate independently? Will one of the links act as an Input Only link (see above) and the other act as the Output Only link? Remember that each link can be triggered by up to five inputs on a given panel. A link can also be triggered by a tracked time schedule. Any link can activate up to five relays. Any of those relays can be placed in any of the three modes On, Off or Track. You can see that there are a number of variations, so a plan needs to be created before attempting to connect your links. However, the process can be simplified. All global links will fall into two categories. Links that work independently and fire other links These will be links that are complete with input settings and output settings. So each of these links will operate on its own and be connected globally in addition. Links that exist to fire other links The Input Only and Output only links mentioned above are examples of links that are dependant on other links. An input will fire an Input Only link, but that link will not activate anything on its own. It requires a global connection to do any meaningful work. Thus, there are two classes of links that are used to create global links those links that activate local relays and fire other links, and those links that do not activate local relays but use a local input or time schedule to activate another link, which in turn fires relays that are local to the panel where that link resides. To Create a Global Link do the following. Create Local Links Create at least two local links of any type mentioned above (refer the steps explained under the heading Creating a Local Link). Decide as to which link will fire the remote link. Select the Remote Link Click the down arrow to the right of Link to Remote Link Prog control of the link that will activate the remote panel link, and select a remote link of your choice in the list.
27
Links
That is all that is needed to create a global link. The act of connecting links together using the Link to Remote Link Prog control is what makes any link global.
Editing a Link Definition

Open Links screen by clicking on Configuration->Links menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the link definition you wish to edit and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the controls in the folder tabs. Note: o The Prog # field cannot be edited. Prog # once set during Link creation is not subject to change. o It is not possible to associate the selected link with a different panel. In other words, a link once associated with a particular panel is permanently attached to that specific panel only. The system will not allow you to change the panel name in the Panel Name control. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
28
Links
Deleting a Link Definition

Open Links screen by clicking on Configuration->Links menu options in CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, select the link definition you wish to delete and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 54.42. Message box displayed before deleting a link definition.
Note: Delete action cannot be reversed. A record deleted once is lost forever. Make sure you have chosen the correct record for deleting. After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen. Note: Deleting a link definition will disable that link at the concerned panel, thereby rendering the link inoperative.
29
Links
Link Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 54.43. Links screen navigation bar.
The Links screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked link records in the screen. In figure 54.43, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first link record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted link record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted link record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted link record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted link record.
30
Links
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last link record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted link record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked link record.
31
Manual Door Control
Manual Door Control

The Manual Door Control screen can be used to manually control the doors (readers) that are used in the CardAccess system. All the electric door locks in the CardAccess system are ultimately controlled by relays on the Continental panels. Thus, manual control of any door will lead to activation or deactivation of the relay(s) associated with that door.
Accessing Manual Door Control Screen

The Manual Door Control screen can be opened in two ways as below. a) By clicking on Doors button in the CardAccess main toolbar.
Fig. 56.1. The Doors button in CardAccess main toolbar.
b) By highlighting the desired door Event/Alert in the CardAccess Events/Alerts grid, and clicking on Control button seen in the toolbar of the corresponding grid.
Fig. 56.2. The Control button in Events grid toolbar.
Fig. 56.3. The Control button in Alerts grid toolbar.
Both the methods (a and b above) will open the Manual Door Control screen.
Manual Door Control
Fig. 56.4. The Manual Door Control screen.
Note: If the Control button was used to open the screen, then, the Doors section of the screen will show automatic selection of the door associated with the Event/Alert that you highlighted in the CardAccess main screen. For more information on this, refer the heading Executing Manual Door Control Using Control Button. The various controls in the Manual Door Control screen are discussed below. Door Group The Door Group control can be used to apply a filter for the doors (represented by checkboxes) that are listed in the Doors section (see lower half of figure 56.4 above) of the Manual Door Control screen.
Manual Door Control
Fig. 56.5. The Door Group control.
The Door Group control will store all of the door groups that are defined in the Readers tab of the Groups screen (see the section Groups). The default option All Doors will be seen in the Door Group control every time the screen is opened. Thus, by default, all doors that are defined in the Readers screen will be displayed on the Manual Door Control screen. In case you wish to view doors that belong to a particular door group only, then, click the down arrow to the right of Door Group control and choose a desired door group. Note: Filtering will remain on for the group you selected until you turn it off, or close and reopen the Manual Door Control screen. If you want to remove filtering, click the Door Group control again and select the option none. This will turn filtering off. There are actually two sets of items that will appear in the Manual Door Control screen filtered list the items that belong to the selected group, and the items that have no group assigned (group = none). If you wish to see the items from a particular door group only, then, you must assign groups to every door that you create in the Readers screen. Do not leave any door, with a group = none.
Manual Door Control
Execute Door Action The Execute Door Action button will be grayed out when the Manual Door Control screen is opened. The button will be activated only when any door is selected in the Doors section of the screen.
Fig. 56.6. The Execute Door Action button grayed out by default.
The label seen on the button will change depending on enabling/disabling of the Door Action and/or the Reader Action checkboxes. Also, the function performed by clicking the button varies based on which checkbox is enabled. The label that can be displayed on the button and the function performed by clicking it are as follows. Execute Door Action- This is the default label visible on the button. This label will be seen when the Door Action checkbox is selected. Clicking this button will execute the door action (Lock, Unlock or Unlock Hold) you choose, on the selected doors. Execute Door and Reader Action- This label will be seen when both the Door Action and the Reader Action checkboxes are selected. Clicking this button will execute the door action (Lock, Unlock, or Unlock Hold) as well as the reader action (Enable or Disable) you choose, on the selected doors.
Fig. 56.7. The Execute Door and Reader Action button.
Execute Reader Action- This label will be seen when the Reader Action checkbox is selected. Clicking this button will execute the Reader Action (Enable or Disable) you choose, on the selected doors.
Manual Door Control
Fig. 56.8. The Execute Reader Action button.
Note: The buttons in figure 56.6, 56.7, 56.8 will be activated only if at least one door is selected in the Doors section of the screen. Door Action Section The Door Action section provides controls for choosing the action you wish to perform on the doors selected in the Doors section of Manual Door Control screen.
Fig. 56.9. The Door Action section.
The controls in the Door Action section are explained below. Door Action Checkbox The Door Action checkbox is checked by default. When checked, the door action you select (Lock, Unlock or Unlock Hold) will be executed on clicking the Execute Door Action button.
Fig. 56.10. The Door Action checkbox.
Note: The Lock, Unlock and Unlock Hold door actions are mutually exclusive. That is, only one of these actions can be performed on the doors you select. The Lock, Unlock or Unlock Hold action you select will be applied to all doors that are selected in the Doors section of the screen.
Manual Door Control
The Door Action checkbox must be checked if you wish to control the doors manually. If unchecked, the Lock, Unlock and Unlock Hold radio buttons will be grayed out and hence manual door control will not be feasible. Remember that door locks are activated and deactivated by relays on the Continental Instruments control panels. When we say open a door, we actually refer to the latching and unlatching of relays that are assigned to doors. Also remember that relays can be off state energized which means that the relay is energized until the door is unlocked, which is the opposite of the normal state of off state deenergized. Lock Choosing this option will lock the doors selected in the Doors section of Manual Door Control screen. This could mean energizing or de-energizing the door relays. The relays will be normalized. This depends on the Off-State Energized setting of the relays, in the Relays screen.
Fig. 56.11. The Lock radio button.
Locking will not be not persistent. That is, it is not a lock and hold that prevents future access. The next badge or manual open (unlock) command will open the doors as normal.
Unlock Unlock is the default door action selected in the Manual Door Control screen. This option will unlock the doors selected in the Doors section of the screen.
Fig. 56.12. The Unlock radio button.
Manual Door Control
The door relays will be energized for the time duration set in their respective Door Strike Time control found in the Readers screen.
Unlock Hold Choosing this option will unlock the doors selected and keep the relays energized (or de-energized) until you send a manual lock command to the doors.
Fig. 56.13. The Unlock Hold radio button.
Reader Action Section The Reader Action section provides controls for choosing the action you wish to perform on the readers (doors) selected in the Doors section of the Manual Door Control screen. The radio button controls in this section will be grayed out by default.
Fig. 56.14. The Reader Action section disabled by default.
The controls in the Reader Action section are explained below. Reader Action Checkbox By default, the Reader Action checkbox will be unchecked and the radio button controls (Enable/Disable) will be grayed out. When the box is checked, the reader action you select (Enable/Disable) will be executed on clicking the Execute Reader Action button.
Manual Door Control
Fig. 56.15. The Reader Action checkbox.
Note: The Enable and Disable actions are mutually exclusive. That is, only one of the reader actions can be performed on the selected doors. The Enable or Disable action you select will be applied to all doors that you select in the Doors section of the screen. Enable Selecting this option will turn on the readers doors) selected in the Doors section of the screen. Readers turned on will read the badges.
Fig. 56.16. The Enable radio button.
Enable will be the default selection when the Reader Action checkbox is selected.
Disable Selecting this option will turn off the readers selected in the Doors section of the screen. Readers turned off will ignore all badge reads.
Fig. 56.17. The Disable radio button.
Note: Once a reader is switched off, you must manually turn it on before it will read badges again.
Manual Door Control
Alpha Sort The default sort order for the readers (Doors) in the Manual Door Control screen is the number entered order. That is, the reader names will be displayed in the panel number numeric order where, the readers on panel one appear before those on panel two, and the lowest numbered reader on panel one appears before the highest numbered reader, etc. Selecting the Alpha Sort checkbox will allow you to re-sort the readers in the alphabetical order.
Fig. 56.18. The Alpha Sort checkbox.
But, the sort order will revert back to number entered order (the default) every time the screen is opened. Hence, you will be required to select the Alpha Sort checkbox each time the screen opens, in case you wish alphabetical order. Doors Section The Doors section of the screen contains checkboxes. Each checkbox represents a reader (door) that has been created in the Readers screen.
Fig. 56.19. The Doors section.
Manual Door Control
To execute manual door and/or reader actions, you must select the doors of your choice in this section. Door selections can be made Individually by clicking the door checkboxes or Collectively by clicking on Select All button (see below). Doors that are selected will contain a tick mark in the checkbox. Note: Every door you select in Doors section will be subjected to the door action (Lock, Unlock or Unlock Hold) and/or the reader action (Enable or Disable) you choose. Therefore, make sure that you select the correct doors for the door/reader action you intend to perform. Select All Clicking the Select All button will select all doors that are listed in the Doors section of Manual Door Control screen.
Fig. 56.20. The Select All button.
Clear All Clicking the Clear All button will deselect the door selections that are made in the Doors section of Manual Door Control screen.
Fig. 56.21. The Clear All button.
10
Manual Door Control
Exit Clicking the Exit button will close the Manual Door Control screen.
Executing Manual Door Control

Follow the steps below to execute manual door control of select doors. Open Manual Door Control screen by clicking the Doors button on CardAccess main toolbar. If you wish to control doors that belong to a particular group only, then, click the down arrow to the right of Door Group control and select a desired group.
Fig. 56.23. Door Group control showing door group names.
Note: The Door Group control will show door group names only if they are created earlier in the Groups screen Readers tab. Refer the section Groups to learn about creating groups. In the Doors section of the screen, select the required doors for manual control. The doors seen in this section are those that are created and enabled earlier in the Readers screen.
11
Manual Door Control
Fig. 56.24. Selecting desired doors by clicking the checkboxes.
Selection of door(s) will enable the Execute button (see figure 56.26 below). Decide on what action (door/reader action) you wish to perform on the selected doors. Accordingly, click on the Door Action and/or the Reader Action checkboxes, to enable their respective radio button controls.
Fig. 56.25. Door and Reader Action checkboxes and their radio button controls.
The checkbox you select will govern the text displayed on the Execute button (see figure 56.26). Decide on the door action (Lock, Unlock or Unlock Hold) and/or Reader Action (Enable or Disable) you wish to perform on the selected doors, and click on the corresponding radio button(s). Note: o The radio button controls for both the door and the reader actions are mutually exclusive. That is, you can select only one radio button for each action.
12
Manual Door Control
o The door/reader action you select will apply to all doors selected in the Doors section. Click on Execute button. This button can have the label Execute Door Action or Execute Reader Action or Execute Door and Reader Action depending on which checkbox (Door Action and/or Reader Action checkbox) you have enabled.
Fig. 56.26. The Execute button activated on door selection.
Also, the Execute button will be enabled only if you have selected at least one door in the Doors section (see figure 56.24). On clicking Execute, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 56.27. Message box displayed after clicking Execute button.
Note: This message box does not mean that the selected door or reader action has been performed. It just means that the action command is queued in the database waiting to be sent to the panel. If communications is down between the computer and the panel, the queued command will be dropped after a timeout period. Click OK button in the message box. Click Exit button to close the Manual Door Control screen.
13
Manual Door Control
Executing Manual Door Control Using Control Button

The CardAccess Events and the Pending Alerts grids contain a button named Control that can be used to open the Manual Door Control screen. The advantage of using the Control button to manually control a given door is that, you will be saved from searching that particular door in a list of possibly several other doors. Because, the Manual Door Control screen opened by means of Control button will have, the door of your interest selected automatically. Follow the step below if you wish to control only a particular door of your interest manually. 1. In the CardAccess main screen, click the desired Event or Alert message generated for the door in question.
Fig. 56.28. Clicking an event generated at First Floor Executive Chamber door.
Click the Control button of the corresponding grid.
14
Manual Door Control
Fig. 56.29. Clicking Control button of Events grid.
Upon clicking, the Manual Door Control screen will be displayed with the door in question selected automatically in the Doors section of the screen.
Fig. 56.30. The First Floor Executive Chamber door selected automatically.
Decide on what action (door/reader action) you wish to perform on the door in question. Accordingly, click on the Door Action and/or the Reader Action checkboxes, to enable their respective radio button controls.
15
Manual Door Control
Fig. 56.31. Door and Reader Action checkboxes and their radio button controls.
The checkbox you select will govern the text displayed on the Execute button (see figure 56.32 below). Decide on the door action (Lock, Unlock or Unlock Hold) and/or Reader Action (Enable or Disable) you wish to perform on the door in question, and click on the corresponding radio button(s). Note: The radio button controls for both the door and the reader actions are mutually exclusive. That is, you can select only one radio button for each action. Click on Execute button. This button can have the label Execute Door Action or Execute Reader Action or Execute Door and Reader Action depending on which checkbox (Door Action and/or Reader Action checkbox) you have enabled.
On clicking Execute, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 56.33. Message box displayed after clicking Execute button.
Note: This message box does not mean that the selected door or reader action has been performed. It just means that the action command is queued in the
16
Manual Door Control
database waiting to be sent to the panel. If communications is down between the computer and the panel, the queued command will be dropped after a timeout period. Click OK button in the message box. Click Exit button to close the Manual Door Control screen.
17
Manual Link Control
Manual Link Control

The Manual Link Control screen can be used to manually control the links that are used in the CardAccess system. A link can be programmed to fire a relay(s) depending on the change of state of an input(s). The ultimate goal of any link is to fire at least one relay. Thus, manual control of any link will lead to activation or deactivation of the relay(s) associated with that link.
Accessing Manual Link Control Screen

The Manual Link Control screen can be opened in two ways as below. a) By clicking on Links button in the CardAccess main toolbar.
Fig. 58.1. The Links button in CardAccess main toolbar.
b) By highlighting the desired link Event/Alert in the CardAccess Events/Alerts grid, and clicking on Control button seen in the toolbar of the corresponding grid.
Both the methods (a and b above) will open the Manual Link Control screen.
Manual Link Control
Fig. 58.4. The Manual Link Control screen.
Note: If the Control button was used to open the screen, then, the Links section of the screen will show automatic selection of the link associated with the Event/Alert that you highlighted in the CardAccess main screen. For more information on this, refer the heading Executing Manual Link Control Using Control Button. The various controls in the Manual Link Control screen are discussed below.
Manual Link Control
Link Group The Link Group control can be used to apply a filter for the links (represented by checkboxes) that are listed in the Links section (see lower half of figure 58.4 above) of the Manual Link Control screen.
Fig. 58.5. The Link Group control.
The Link Group control will store all of the link groups that are defined in the Links tab of the Groups screen (see the section Groups). The default option All Links will be seen in Link Group control every time the screen is opened. Thus, by default, all links that are defined in the Links screen will be displayed on the Manual Link Control screen. In case you wish to view links that belong to a particular link group only, then, click the down arrow to the right of Link Group control and choose a desired link group. Note: Filtering will remain on for the group you selected until you turn it off, or close and reopen the Manual Link Control screen. If you want to remove filtering, click the Link Group control again and select the option none. This will turn filtering off. There are actually two sets of items that will appear in the Manual Link Control screen filtered list the items that belong to the selected group, and the items that have no group assigned (group = none). If you wish to see items from a particular link group only, then, you must assign groups to every link that you create in the Links screen. Do not leave any link with a group = none.
Manual Link Control
Execute Link Action The Execute Link Action button will be grayed out when the Manual Link Control screen is opened. The button will be activated only when any link is selected in the Links section of the screen.
Fig. 58.6. The Execute Link Action button grayed out by default.
Clicking this button will execute the link action (Activate, De-Activate or Set to Normal) you choose, on the selected links. Link Action Section The Link Action section provides controls for choosing the action you wish to perform on the links selected in the Links section of the screen.
Fig. 58.7. The Link Action section.
The controls in the Link Action section are explained below. Activate
Fig. 58.8. The Activate button.
Activate is the default link action selected in the Manual Link Control screen. Choosing this option will fire the links selected in the Links section of the screen.
Manual Link Control
De-Activate
Fig. 58.9. The De-Activate button.
Choosing this option will turn off the links selected in the Links section of the screen. The links will no longer be active. Note: If you wish to re-activate the links you must select the Set to Normal option (see below). Set to Normal
Fig. 58.10. The Set to Normal button.
The Set to Normal button control must be used to re-activate the link(s) after the De-Activate function has been used.
Alpha Sort The default sort order for the links in the Manual Link Control screen is the number entered order. That is, the link names will be displayed in the panel number numeric order where, the links on panel one appear before those on panel two, and the lowest numbered link on panel one appears before the highest numbered link, etc. Selecting the Alpha Sort checkbox will allow you to re-sort the links in the alphabetical order.
Fig. 58.11. The Alpha Sort checkbox.
Manual Link Control
But, the sort order will revert back to the number entered order (the default) every time the screen is opened. Hence, you will be required to select the Alpha Sort checkbox each time the screen opens, in case you wish alphabetical order. Links Section The Links section of the screen contains checkboxes. Each checkbox represents a link that has been created in the Links screen.
Fig. 58.12. The Links section.
To execute a manual link action, you must select the links of your choice in this section. Links selections can be made Individually by clicking the link checkboxes or Collectively by clicking on Select All button (see below). Links that are selected will contain a tick mark in the checkbox. Note: Every link you select will be subjected to the link action (Activate, De-Activate or Set to Normal) you choose. Therefore, make sure that you select the correct links for the link action you intend to perform.
Manual Link Control
Select All Clicking the Select All button will select all links that are listed in the Links section of the screen.
Clear All Clicking the Clear All button will deselect the link selections that are made in the Links section of the screen.
Exit Clicking the Exit button will close the Manual Link Control screen.
Manual Link Control
Executing Manual Link Control

Follow the steps below to execute manual link control of select links. Open Manual Link Control screen by clicking the Links button on CardAccess main toolbar. If you wish to control links that belong to a particular group only, then, click the down arrow to the right of Link Group control and select a desired group.
Fig. 58.16. Link Group control showing link group names.
Note: The link Group control will show link group names only if they are created earlier in the Groups screen Links tab. Refer the section Groups to learn about creating groups. In the Links section of the screen, select the required links for manual control. The links seen in this section are those that are created and enabled earlier in the Links screen.
Manual Link Control
Fig. 58.17. Selecting desired links by clicking the checkboxes.
Selection of link(s) will enable the Execute Link Action button (see figure 58.19 below). Decide on the link action (Activate, De-Activate or Set to Normal) you wish to perform on the selected links, and click on the corresponding radio button.
Fig. 58.18. The link action radio buttons.
Note: o The radio button controls for link action are mutually exclusive. That is, you can select only one radio button among the three. o The link action you select will apply to all links selected in the Links section. Click on Execute Link Action button. The button will be enabled only if you have selected at least one link in the Links section (see figure 58.17).
Fig. 58.19. The Execute Link Action button activated on link selection.
Manual Link Control
On clicking the button, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 58.20. Message box displayed after clicking Execute Link Action button.
Note: This message box does not mean that the selected link action (Activate, De-Activate or Set to Normal) has been performed. It just means that the action command is queued in the database waiting to be sent to the panel. If communications is down between the computer and the panel, the queued command will be dropped after a timeout period. Click OK button in the message box. Click Exit button to close the Manual Link Control screen.
10
Manual Link Control
Executing Manual Link Control Using Control Button

The CardAccess Events and the Pending Alerts grids contain a button named Control that can be used to open the Manual Link Control screen. The advantage of using the Control button to manually control a given link is that, you will be saved from searching that particular link in a list of possibly several other links. Because, the Manual Link Control screen opened by means of Control button will have, the link of your interest selected automatically. Follow the step below if you wish to control only a particular link of your interest manually. 1. In the CardAccess main screen, click the desired Event or Alert message generated for the link in question.
Fig. 58.21. Highlighting an event generated from Panel 1 Link 1 link.
Fig. 58.22. Clicking Control button of Events grid.
11
Manual Link Control
Upon clicking, the Manual Link Control screen will be displayed with the link in question selected automatically in the Links section of the screen.
Fig. 58.23. The Panel 1 Link 1 link selected automatically.
Decide on the link action (Activate, De-Activate or Set to Normal) you wish to perform on the link in question, and click on the corresponding radio button.
Fig. 58.24. The link action radio buttons.
Note: The radio button controls for link action are mutually exclusive. That is, you can select only one radio button among the three. Click on Execute Link Action button.
12
Manual Link Control
Fig. 58.25. The Execute Link Action button.
Fig. 58.26. Message box displayed after clicking Execute Link Action button.
Note: This message box does not mean that the selected link action (Activate, De-Activate or Set to Normal) has been performed. It just means that the action command is queued in the database waiting to be sent to the panel. If communications is down between the computer and the panel, the queued command will be dropped after a timeout period. Click OK button in the message box. Click Exit button to close the Manual Link Control screen.
13
Manual Relay Control

The Manual Relay Control screen can be used to manually control the relays that are used in the CardAccess system.
Accessing Manual Relay Control Screen

The Manual Relay Control screen can be opened in two ways as below. a) By clicking on Relays button in the CardAccess main toolbar.
Fig. 57.1. The Relays button in CardAccess main toolbar.
b) By highlighting the desired relay Event/Alert in the CardAccess Events/Alerts grid, and clicking on Control button seen in the toolbar of the corresponding grid.
Both the methods (a and b above) will open the Manual Relay Control screen.
Fig. 57.4. The Manual Relay Control screen.
Note: If the Control button was used to open the screen, then, the lower section of the screen will show automatic selection of the relay associated with the Event/Alert that you highlighted in the CardAccess main screen. For more information on this, refer the heading Executing Manual Relay Control Using Control Button. The various controls in the Manual Relay Control screen are discussed below. Relay Group The Relay Group control can be used to apply a filter for the relays (represented by checkboxes) that are listed in the lower half of the Manual Relay Control screen (see figure 57.4 above).
Fig. 57.5. The Relay Group control.
The Relay Group control will store all of the relay groups that are defined in the Relays tab of the Groups screen (see the section Groups). The default option All Relays will be seen in Relay Group control every time the screen is opened. Thus, by default, all relays that are defined in the Relays screen will be displayed on the Manual Relay Control screen. In case you wish to view relays that belong to a particular relay group only, then, click the down arrow to the right of Relay Group control and choose a desired relay group. Note: Filtering will remain on for the group you selected until you turn it off, or close and reopen the Manual Relay Control screen. If you want to remove filtering, click the Relay Group control again and select the option none. This will turn filtering off. There are actually two sets of items that will appear in the Manual Relay Control screen filtered list the items that belong to the selected group, and the items that have no group assigned (group = none). If you wish to see items from a particular relay group only, then, you must assign groups to every relay that you create in the Relays screen. Do not leave any relay with a group = none.
Execute Relay Action The Execute Relay Action button will be grayed out when the Manual Relay Control screen is opened. The button will be activated only when any relay checkbox is selected in the lower half of the screen.
Fig. 57.6. The Execute Relay Action button grayed out by default.
Clicking this button will execute the relay action (Momentary ON, Hold Energized or De-Energize) you choose, on the selected relays. Relay Action Section The Relay Action section provides controls for choosing the action you wish to perform on the relays selected in the lower half of the Manual Relay Control screen.
Fig. 57.7. The Relay Action section.
The controls in the Relay Action section are explained below. Momentary ON
Fig. 57.8. The Momentary ON radio button.
Momentary ON is the default relay action selected in the Manual Relay Control screen. This option will activate the relays selected in the screen, for the duration of time equal to their respective Energize Time, which is set in the Relays screen.
Hold Energized
Fig. 57.9. The Hold Energized radio button.
Choosing this option will activate the relays selected in the Manual Relay Control screen, and hold those relays in that state, until they are DeEnergized. Note: If any relay is set to Off State Energized, this control will de-energize that particular relay.
De-Energize
Fig. 57.10. The De-Energize radio button.
Choosing this option will deactivate the relays selected in the Manual Relay Control screen Note: If any relay is set to Off State Energized, this control will energize that particular relay.
Relay Checkboxes The lower half of the Manual Relay Control screen consists of checkboxes. Each checkbox represents a relay that has been created in the Relays screen.
Fig. 57.11. Relay Checkboxes in Manual Relay Control screen.
To execute a manual relay action, you must select the relay checkboxes of your choice. Relay selections can be made Individually by clicking the relay checkboxes or Collectively by clicking on Select All button (see below). Relays that are selected will contain a tick mark in the checkbox. Note: Every relay you select will be subjected to the relay action (Momentary ON, Hold Energized or De-Energize) you choose. Therefore, make sure that you select the correct relays for the relay action you intend to perform.
Select All Clicking the Select All button will select all relays that are listed in the lower half of the Manual Relay Control screen.
Clear All Clicking the Clear All button will deselect the relay selections that are made in the lower half of the Manual Relay Control screen.
Exit Clicking the Exit button will close the Manual Relay Control screen.
Executing Manual Relay Control

Follow the steps below to execute manual relay control of select relays. Open Manual Relay Control screen by clicking the Relays button on CardAccess main toolbar. If you wish to control relays that belong to a particular group only, then, click the down arrow to the right of Relay Group control and select a desired group.
Fig. 57.15. Relay Group control showing relay group names.
Note: The Relay Group control will show relay group names only if they are created earlier in the Groups screen Relays tab. Refer the section Groups to learn about creating groups. In the lower half of the screen, select the desired relays for manual control. The relays seen are those that are created and enabled earlier in the Relays screen.
Fig. 57.16. Selecting desired relays by clicking the checkboxes.
Selection of relay(s) will enable the Execute Relay Action button (see figure 57.18 below). Decide on the relay action (Momentary On, Hold Energized or De-Energize) you wish to perform on the selected relays, and click on the corresponding radio button.
Fig. 57.17. The relay action radio buttons.
Note: o The radio button controls for relay action are mutually exclusive. That is, you can select only one radio button among the three. o The relay action you select will apply to all relays selected in the lower half of the screen. Click on Execute Relay Action button. The button will be enabled only if you have selected at least one relay in the lower half of the screen (see figure 57.16).
Fig. 57.18. The Execute Relay Action button activated on relay selection.
Fig. 57.19. Message box displayed after clicking Execute Relay Action button.
Note: This message box does not mean that the selected relay action (Momentary ON, Hold Energized or De-Energized) has been performed. It just means that the action command is queued in the database waiting to be sent to the panel. If communications is down between the computer and the panel, the queued command will be dropped after a timeout period. Click OK button in the message box. Click Exit button to close the Manual Relay Control screen.
10
Executing Manual Relay Control Using Control Button

The CardAccess Events and the Pending Alerts grids contain a button named Control that can be used to open the Manual Relay Control screen. The advantage of using the Control button to manually control a given relay is that, you will be saved from searching that particular relay in a list of possibly several other relays. Because, the Manual Relay Control screen opened by means of Control button will have, the relay of your interest selected automatically. Follow the step below if you wish to control only a particular relay of your interest manually. 1. In the CardAccess main screen, highlight (click) the desired Event or Alert message generated for the relay in question.
Fig. 57.20. Highlighting an event generated by Panel 1 Relay 2 relay.
Fig. 57.21. Clicking Control button of Alerts grid.
Upon clicking, the Manual Relay Control screen will be displayed with the relay in question selected automatically in the lower half of the screen.
11
Fig. 57.22. The Panel 1 Relay 2 relay selected automatically.
Decide on the relay action (Momentary ON, Hold Energized or DeEnergize) you wish to perform on the relay in question, and click on the corresponding radio button.
Fig. 57.23. The relay action radio buttons.
Note: The radio button controls for relay action are mutually exclusive. That is, you can select only one radio button among the three. Click on Execute Relay Action button.
Fig. 57.24. The Execute Relay Action button.
12
Fig. 57.25. Message box displayed after clicking Execute Relay Action button.
Note: This message box does not mean that the selected relay action (Momentary ON, Hold Energized or De-Energize) has been performed. It just means that the action command is queued in the database waiting to be sent to the panel. If communications is down between the computer and the panel, the queued command will be dropped after a timeout period. Click OK button in the message box. Click Exit button to close the Manual Link Control screen.
13
Maps
Maps
A Map as defined in the CardAccess software is a static bitmap background, with a flashing cursor icon, which indicates the relative position of the hardware device being represented. The mapping engine does not allow dynamic control of hardware objects from a map control surface. Maps in the CardAccess are used for visual location verification only. The mapping engine is disabled by default. The following section explains how to enable it.
Enabling Maps
The map engine can be enabled in the System Settings screen. Follow the steps below. 1. Open System Settings screen by clicking on System System Settings menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab. 2. Click on Edit button in System Settings screen toolbar. 3. (In System Settings General tab), Click on Use Facility Maps checkbox to select it.
Fig. 64.1. Checkbox to be selected for enabling Maps in CardAccess software.
4. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the setting. Once this checkbox is selected and saved, the following screen changes can be observed in CardAccess.
Maps
The CardAccess Events and Alerts grid toolbars display a new button called Map.
Fig. 64.2. The Events grid toolbar showing Map button after selecting the Use Facility Maps checkbox. .
Fig. 64.3. The Alerts grid toolbar showing Map button after selecting the Use Facility Maps checkbox. .
Clicking the Map button will display the map pop up window for those events/alerts, whose hardware devices have a map assigned to them previously, in the Configure Maps screen.
Fig. 64.4. Map pop up window obtained by clicking the Map button for a door event, whose reader device has been assigned a map in the Configure Maps screen.
The Administration menu in the CardAccess main menu bar will offer a new menu option called Maps.
Maps
Fig. 64.5. The Maps menu option seen in Administration menu list after selecting the Use Facility Maps checkbox.
Clicking this menu option will open the Configure Maps screen (see figure 64.7 below), where you can create/edit maps. o The CardAccess hardware screens (Panels, Readers, Inputs, Relays and Links screens) will contain a new folder tab called Maps (or Map). In the figure below, we have shown the Map tab, of Readers screen.
Maps
Fig. 64.6. The Map tab seen in Readers screen after enabling the Use Facility Maps checkbox.
The Maps tab controls in the other hardware screens look exactly similar to the Readers screen Map tab controls, seen in the above figure. Clicking the View Maps button (highlighted in the above figure) in the Map tab of the hardware screens, will open the Configure Maps screen (see figure 64.7 below), where you can create/edit maps.
Creating a Map
Follow the steps below if you wish to create a map for a given hardware device. 1) Open the Configure Maps screen. This screen can be opened in two ways as below. a) By clicking on Administration Maps menu options in the CardAccess main screen (see figure 64.5). b) By opening the concerned hardware screen (Panels, Readers, Inputs, Relays or Links screen), clicking on Maps tab in that screen, and then clicking on View Maps button in the Maps tab (see figure 64.6 above).
Maps
Both the methods will open the Configure Maps screen as shown below.
Fig. 64.7. The Configure Maps screen for creating/editing maps.
2) Click on New button in Configure Maps screen toolbar, to create a new map. On clicking the New button, you will see the cursor control in the New Name field. 3) In the New Name field, type in a name for the map you are creating.
Fig. 64.8. The New Name field.
Maps
4) In the Description field, enter a description for the map you are creating.
Fig. 64.9. The Description field.
5) Click on Import button seen on the bottom left side of the screen.
Fig. 64.10. The Import button.
On clicking, you will see the CardAccess Alert Maps floating toolbar (see the highlight at the bottom left corner of the figure below) and the Windows Explorer Open dialog.
Fig. 64.11. The Windows Explorer Open dialog and the CardAccess Alert Maps floating toolbar.
The Open dialog is a standard Windows type file search tool that will allow you to search your local hard drive and network shares for a suitable import image file.
Maps
The CardAccess Alert Maps floating toolbar has a number of buttons that offer additional methods for importing image files. You can use either of the dialogs for importing the required map image. First, let us learn how to import a map image from the Open dialog. Then, we shall discuss the CardAccess Alert Maps button functions. 6A. Importing a Map Image from Open Dialog Following are the steps to import an image from the Open dialog. a. In the Open dialog, double click the folder where you have previously saved the map image. You will see a list of all file names stored in that folder. b. Click on the file name of the required map image (bitmap or jpeg file).
Note: o The image file you select will generally be the bitmap or jpeg image of a floor plan. Or, the image could be a digitized photograph of a doorway, a building, or a section of a building. Any image that would assist an operator in identifying the area of a building where a hardware device alarm is taking place would be suitable. o Although other files like .ico, .emf and .wmf files are also supported by the Image Open dialog, it is best to limit your map images to .jpg or .bmp files. Icons and Windows Meta Files are not supported as map images. On clicking the filename of the required map image, you will see a small picture of that map on the right side of the Open dialog (see the highlight in the figure below). The size of the selected image is indicated immediately above the image (see the highlight in the figure below).
Maps
Fig. 64.12. Small picture of the selected map visible on clicking the file name, and size of the map indicated above the picture.
c. You may click on the Preview button (on the top right corner of the dialog) to see an enlarged Preview of the map image, before finally selecting it.
Fig. 64.13. The Preview button on Open dialog.
Maps
Fig. 64.14. Enlarged Preview of the selected map image seen on clicking the Preview button.
d. (Close the Preview Window if you opened it) Click on Open button seen at the bottom of the dialog.
Fig. 64.15. The Open button.
You will now see the selected map image, on the Configure Maps screen. The next step is to associate the imported map, with a hardware device (see step 7 below). Before that, let us look at the functions of a few buttons in the CardAccess Alert Maps floating toolbar, that can also be used to import maps.
Maps
6B. CardAccess Alert Maps Floating Toolbar We just finished discussing about importing maps from the Open dialog. The CardAccess Alert Maps floating toolbar has a number of buttons that offer additional methods for the importation of image files.
Fig. 64.16. The CardAccess Alert maps floating toolbar.
The buttons on the floating toolbar and the image import methods they support are as below. Importing From Scanner The Scanner Select button allows you to connect directly to a scanner for the importation of a scanned image. To import from a scanner, do the following a) Click the Scanner Select button.
Fig. 64.17. The Scanner Select button.
b) Select a Source After you click the Scanner Select button, the Select Source box appears as in the figure below. You are expected to select one of the sources in this box. If there are no sources listed, you need to install TWAIN or scanner drivers for the devices you are trying to scan from.
Fig. 64.18. The Select Source box.
10
Maps
c) At this point, the CardAccess program will relinquish control to your scanner software. The scanner software typically starts up and performs the scan. The scanner software may not automatically upload the scan to the CardAccess. You may need to click an upload button in order for that to take place. In any case, the object is to have your scanner software hand off the image to the CardAccess Maps engine. The Maps software will then display that image in the Configure Maps screen. Importing From File The New Image (Edit) button (see figure below) offers a way to manually open the Windows Explorer Open dialog (figure 64.11) discussed earlier. The Open dialog opens automatically when you click the Import button in the Configure Maps screen. But if you close the Open dialog, the New Image Edit button offers you a way to reopen it without having to close down the entire import session and re-press the Import button.
Fig. 64.19. The New Image (Edit) button.
Copy & Paste Buttons The Copy button is used to copy an image from one map to a second map. The Paste button is used to paste that image into the second map. Open the map that you want to use the image from. Click the copy button. Then open the map that you wish to paste the image to (or click the New button to create a completely new map), and click the Paste button
Fig. 64.20. The Copy and Paste buttons.
7) Select a Device After a map image is imported into the Configure Maps screen (using either the Open dialog or the CardAccess Alert Maps floating toolbar), it has to be associated with a hardware device (or more than one hardware device). Until some linkage is made between the map and at least one hardware device, the map is just a static bitmap that has little practical use.
11
Maps
The Devices control panel is the toolbar that you will use to create linkages between the map and hardware devices.
Fig. 64.21. The Devices control panel in Configure Maps screen.
The Devices control panel uses drag and drop operation. You click on an icon button, hold down the left mouse button, drag the icon to the desired location on the map and click where you want to drop the hardware reference. You will note that the Devices control panel has five icons available. The function of those icons is shown in table 64.22 below. Button Function Connected to the Readers screen. This button will display a list of every reader in the system. Connected to the Inputs screen. This button will display a list of every input in the system. Connected to the Relays screen. This button will display a list of every relay in the system. Connected to the Links screen. This button will display a list of every link in the system. Connected to the Panels screen. This button will display a list of every panel in the system.
Table- 64.22. The buttons in Devices control panel.
To link a hardware device to a map, do the following.
12
Maps
o Click the Hardware Button Click any of the hardware icon buttons (see table 64.22 above), and hold down the left mouse button. o Drag the Icon Drag the hardware item to the desired location on the map. o Drop the Icon Release the left mouse button. Once the icon is dropped, you will obtain the Select the Device box, for the hardware device chosen. In the figure below, we have shown the box for Reader hardware device, whose icon we dropped.
Fig. 64.23. The Select the Device box for Reader hardware device.
6) Select a Device Click the down arrow to the right of the hardware device field (Reader shown in figure 64.24 below) seen in Select the Device box, and click on a desired device in the list.
Fig. 64.24. Selecting a desired hardware device in Select the Device box.
You are permitted to assign a given hardware device to one map only. Once a hardware device has been assigned to a map, it cannot be assigned to a second map unless you delete the first map. If you try to assign a hardware device to more than one map, you will get an error message informing you that the device has already been assigned a map (see figure below).
13
Maps
Fig. 64.25. Message box displayed in case you attempt to assign a second map to a hardware device.
7) Save the Map Note that the system permits you to add more than one icon per map. This option will allow you to create one map that will be linked to several hardware devices. So you can click the Save button now, or you can repeat the process of dragging and dropping hardware devices as explained above, add as many device icons as you require, and then click the Save button. Or, you can add one icon per map, and dedicate each map to one hardware device.
Fig. 64.26. Map with several devices attached.
14
Maps
Editing a Map
a) Open Configure Maps screen by clicking on Administration menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Maps
b) To select the map you wish to edit, click the down arrow to the right of Select Map field, use the scrollbar to scroll the list of maps, and click on a desired map name. c) Click on Edit button in the toolbar. d) Make the required changes to the selected map, using the controls in the screen. e) Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes.
Deleting a Map
To delete a map, do the following. a. Open Configure Maps screen by clicking on Administration menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Maps
b. To select the map you wish to delete, click the down arrow to the right of Select Map field, use the scrollbar to scroll the list of maps, and click on a desired map name. c. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. On clicking the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 64.27. Message box displayed before deleting a map.
15
Maps
Note: Delete action cannot be reversed. A map deleted once is lost forever. Make sure you have chosen the correct map for deleting. d. After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box to delete the selected map.
Finding a Map
Open Configure Maps screen by clicking on Administration menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Maps
The map you are searching for can be found in two methods as explained below. Method 1- Using the Select Map control The Select Map control can be used if you wish to view a particular map that was created in the Configure Maps screen. All you have to do is, click the down arrow to the right of the Select Map control, and click on the name of the map you wish to view.
Fig. 64.28. Finding a map using the Select Map control.
On clicking, the map you selected will be displayed on the Configure Maps screen. Method 2- Using the Find button If you wish to view the map assigned to a particular hardware device, you may use the Find button instead. Follow the below steps. o Click on Find button located on the lower left side of the Configure Maps screen
Fig. 64.29. The Find button.
16
Maps
On clicking, you will obtain the Select the Device box as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 64.30. Select the Device box displayed on clicking the Find button.
o Click the down arrow to the right of the first control seen in the Select the Device box, and click on the desired hardware device category in the list.
Fig. 64.31. Selecting a hardware device category in the first control of the Select the Device box.
Upon device category selection, the second control in the box will provide the list of all hardware devices in the selected category. o Click the down arrow to the right of the second control in the Select the Device box, and click on a desired hardware device in the list.
Fig. 64.32. Selecting a hardware device in the second control of the Select the Device box.
o Click on Ok button in Select the Device box.

17
Maps
Fig. 64.33. The OK button.
The map that is assigned to the selected hardware device will now be displayed on the Configure Maps screen.
Displaying Maps
Once maps have been created and linked with hardware devices, they are ready to be utilized. The primary use for a map is to allow an operator to bring up a map in response to some alert or event, and to be able see a graphic representation of the alarm point. This would assist him or her in locating an alarm in a given building or complex. Note that the actual displayable map is primarily a static bitmap with a flashing icon that represents an alarm point (see figure below).
18
Maps
Fig. 64.34. The Maps Pop Up Window.
Thus, the bitmap can be anything of your choosing. It can be a floor plan, picture of the area, or even written text instructions that have been saved as a bitmap file. Your image options are open to whatever type of image is useful to you and your organization. There are two ways to display maps, manually and automatically. Manual viewing of maps involves clicking a button and causing the Maps Pop Up screen to open with the requested map. Automatic viewing of maps, also called Pop Up maps, is accomplished by setting the map controls to display a map automatically, every time an event or alert appears that has a map associated with it. Both methods are further explained below.
19
Maps
Manual Map Display

You can manually view a map in the following ways. A. Using Events Grid or Alerts Grid, Map Buttons There are two buttons labeled Map available on the CardAccess main screen. One button is located on the Events Grid toolbar (figure 64.35), and the other Map button is located on the Alerts Grid toolbar (figure 64.36). Clicking either button will open the Maps Pop Up window, and display the map that is associated with the event or alert that is highlighted.
Fig 64.35. The Map button in Events grid toolbar.
Fig. 64.36. The Map button in Alerts grid toolbar.
Note the following special properties of the Events and Alerts Grids Map buttons. If you highlight an Event, click the Map button above the Events Grid to manually bring up the map associated with that event (see figure 64.4 above). If you highlight an Alert, click the Map button above the Alerts Grid to manually bring up the map associated with that alert. The Pending Alerts toolbar Map button can be grayed out when there are no alerts in the Alerts Grid B. Using Hardware Screens, View Maps Button When maps are enabled in the System Settings, a Map tab becomes visible in each of the hardware screens. As a convenience, you can open the Configure Maps screen from inside any hardware screen. To view or edit a
20
Maps
map from the Panels, Readers, Inputs, Relays or Links screens, do the following. o Open Panels, Readers, Inputs, Relays or Links screen, available from the Configuration menu. o Click on Map tab. If a map is assigned to that hardware device, you will see a thumbnail view of the assigned map on the Map tab, as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 64.37. Readers screen Map tab.
o You may click the View Maps button seen on the right side of the Maps tab. This will open the Configure Maps screen with an enlarged view of the thumbnail view you saw on the Maps tab.
C. Using Administration menu, Maps shortcut The standard way to open the Configure Maps screen is to click on Administration Maps menu options in the CardAccess main screen (see figure 64.5 above).
21
Maps
Pop Up Maps
You can set maps to automatically display when alerts appear in the Alerts grid. It is an important point that maps will pop up only for alerts, and not for events. Once you enable the feature, you will not see any maps pop up unless you have some alerts rolling into the Alerts Grid of the CardAccess main screen. If a given alert has a map and the pop up feature is enabled, once that alert makes its way to the top of the alerts grid, the pop up map for that alert is displayed. The maps pop up display is closed down when that alert is acknowledged out of the Alerts Grid and moved into the Events Grid. If there is another alert to move into the topmost position of the Alerts Grid, and that alert too has a map, then the maps pop up screen is reopened with the new map image belonging to the current alert. This will happen until the alerts grid has been emptied of all alerts. Automatic map display (Pop Up Maps) can be enabled or disabled by rightclicking on Alerts grid Map button. On right-clicking, a menu will be displayed with three choices as explained below.
Fig. 64.39. Right-click options for Alerts grid Map button.
Auto-Show Off: This is the default option. This option will disable the automatic pop up of the map window for all alert types. But map pop up window can still be opened manually by clicking the Map button, on the toolbar. Auto-Show All Selecting this option will enable automatic pop up of the map window for all alerts. Auto-Show This Area Selecting this option will enable automatic pop up of map window only for the device mentioned in the Location field of the currently highlighted alert. Once activated, maps will only pop up if there is activity at the specific hardware device mentioned in the highlighted alert.
22
Maps
Example: Select a given door alert. Right click on the Map button, select the 'Auto-Show This Area option. From that point onwards, each alert that appears in the Alerts Grid for that door will open the map window (if a map is stored in the reader record).
Hardware Screen Map Controls

The controls found on the Map tab of each of the hardware screens are identical. So, we will use the Readers screen Map tab as our example.
Fig. 64.40. Readers Screen Map Tab.
Every control in figure 64.40 is explained below. Facility Map for This Device The name in this field is taken from the New Name field (visible in Edit mode) of the Configure Maps screen. This is the name of the map.
Map Description The information in this field is taken from the Description field of the Configure Maps screen. This is a note describing the map.
23
Maps
Size Image to Fit This control allows you to stretch an image to fit the thumbnail view window in the hardware screen. When unchecked, the image window will display the image in its native size format, even if the fit in the image window is not exact. When the Size Image to Fit feature is enabled, the entire view window is filled with the image. The image is stretched to fill the window. Use this feature if you want to eliminate white borders around the map images.
Fig. 64.43. The Size Image to Fit checkbox.
View Maps Clicking this button opens the Configure Maps screen.
Remove Map Clicking this button deletes the map from the CardAccess database.
24
NAPCO Alarm Panel Integration with CardAccess 3000
Introduction
Scope
This document deals with the integration of NAPCO Alarm Panels with CardAccess (CA) 3000. The entire configuration for this integration program is done within the CA 3000 software only. Note: The NAPCO Alarm Panel must be programmed in advance using the NAPCO Quickloader for Windows program.
Purpose
NAPCO Alarm Panels are integrated with CA 3000 for the following reasons: 1. To Manually Arm/Disarm the Napco Alarm Panels. 2. To receive all NAPCO event information in CA 3000. 3. To Know the Arm/Disarm status of the NAPCO Areas in CardAccess software.
Prerequisites
The following must be made available for the integration program: NAPCO Gem-X255, Gem-P9600 or Gem-P3200 Alarm Panel with Home Automation software. At least one of the supporting Alarm Panel Keypads listed in the table below.
NAPCO Panel Gem-X255 Gem-X255 Gem-P9600 Gem-P9600 Gem-P9600 Gem-P9600 Gem-P9600 Gem-P9600 Gem-P9600 Gem-P9600 Gem-P9600
NAPCO Keypad RP1CAe2 K1CA RP1CAe2 K1CA RP2ASe2 K2AS RP3DGTL K3DGTL RP4 K4 K4RF
Min. Keypad Version V 8C V 8C V 8C V 8C V 6D V 6D V 2E V 2E V1C V1C V1C
Fig. 8.1. NAPCO Keypad Compatibility for Napco Alarm Panel Integration with CardAccess 3000 software.
Note: Gem-P3200 panels will have the same compatibility as that of Gem-P9600 panels shown in the above table. PCI-Mini PC to Panel serial interface. Continental Security Key that is programmed to allow the NAPCO Alarm Panel Integration with CardAccess 3000 software to run. To verify the Security Key values, open the About Card Access 3000 dialog by clicking on Help About CardAccess menu options in the CardAccess main screen. Use the scroll bar on the right to view all the values. Without the correct security key, you will not be able to setup the Napco integration program. CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0.x or later running on Windows 2000 Professional, Windows 2000 Server (All versions) or Windows XP Professional Operating System. Do not use CardAccess on Windows XP Home Edition.
Note: o Napco panel integration program should not be used simultaneously with the Quickloader for Windows program. o If multiple alarm panels are being used, a separate PC communication port needs to be made available for each alarm panel. o You can have more than one Napco Integration Server in a CardAccess 3000 configuration. The integration program requires the NAPCO Alarm Panels and the associated NAPCO Areas, Zones and Relays to be configured. We have explained how to configure these in separate sections below.
NAPCO Alarm Panels

There are three types of NAPCO Alarm Panels that can be integrated with the CardAccess 3000 software. They are: 1. Gem-X255 Panels, 2. Gem-P9600 Panels and 3. Gem-P3200 Panels. Each of these panel types has certain number of NAPCO Areas, Zones and Relays. The NAPCO integration program requires the given NAPCO Panel, as well as, all of its Areas, Zones and Relays to be configured. Once the entire configuration is completed, the (enabled) NAPCO Areas of the given Alarm Panel can be Armed/Disarmed. Arm/Disarm event messages can then be obtained in the CardAccess software, thus bringing about the integration between the Alarm Panels and the CardAccess. It will also be possible to know the Arm/Disarm status of NAPCO Areas in the CardAccess. The first step in the integration process is to identify or add a NAPCO server in the CardAccess that will communicate with the NAPCO Alarm Panels. The following section explains how to do this.
Adding a Napco Server in CardAccess

Follow the steps below to add a NAPCO Server that will communicate with the NAPCO Alarm Panels. 1. In the CardAccess main screen, click on System menu to display the menu item list.
Fig. 8.2. System menu in CardAccess 3000.
2. Click on System Settings menu item to open the System Settings screen.
Fig. 8.3. Clicking System Settings menu item.
By default, the screen opens in the General tab.
Fig. 8.4. System Settings screen in General tab.
3. In System Settings screen, click on NAPCO tab.
Fig. 8.5. System Settings screen in NAPCO tab.
4. Click the Edit button in System Settings tool bar.
Fig. 8.6. Edit button in System Settings tool bar.
5. Select the Use NAPCO Panels check box. On selection, the Add NAPCO Server button will be enabled.
Fig. 8.7. The Add NAPCO Server button enabled after selecting the Use NAPCO Panels check box.
6. Click on Add NAPCO Server button to open the Add NAPCO Server dialog.
Fig. 8.8. The Add NAPCO Server dialog.
7. In the Add NAPCO Server dialog, type in the UNC Name of the computer you wish to reserve for communication with the NAPCO panel being configured. In the figure below, ARUNHOME is entered as the UNC name of the computer that will communicate with the NAPCO panel.
Fig. 8.9. Entering UNC Name of the computer that will communicate with the NAPCO Panel in question.
8. Click the OK button in the dialog. 9. Click the Save button in the System Settings tool bar to save this setting. 10. Click the Close button to close the screen.
Once a NAPCO server is added, you are ready to configure the given NAPCO Alarm Panel. This can be done in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen. The following section explains this.
NAPCO Panel Configuration

The NAPCO Alarm panel in question for the NAPCO integration program can be configured in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen, available in the CardAccess software. Firstly, the CardAccess software has to know what type of Alarm Panel you will be using in the integration program. This can be specified as below.
Specifying the Panel Type

1. Open NAPCO Panel Configuration screen by clicking on Configuration NAPCO Panels NAPCO Panels menu options in the CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in the General tab. Note: The NAPCO Panels menu item will be seen in the Configuration menu only if the Use NAPCO Panels check box is enabled in the System Settings screen NAPCO tab.
10
Fig. 8.10. The NAPCO Panel Configuration screen.
2. Click the New button on the toolbar to create a new NAPCO Panel record.
Fig. 8.11. New button in NAPCO Panel Configuration tool bar.
On clicking New, the Select NAPCO Panel Type dialog will be displayed.
11
Fig. 8.12. The Select Napco Panel Type dialog.
The default panel type selection will be Gem X255. 3. If the given NAPCO Alarm Panel is of a different (panel) type, then click the down arrow to the right of the control seen in the Select Napco Panel Type dialog, choose the correct panel type in the drop down list, and click the OK button in the dialog.
Fig. 8.13. The available panel types.
For explanation purposes in this document, we will be using the default panel type (Gem X255). Once the panel type is selected, the new panel will be created with some default settings as shown in the figure below.
12
Fig. 8.14. The Default settings of a newly created panel.
(By default) The system will choose Net.Link Connection Type and Socket Number 10081 for the new panel. In addition, the new panel will have a few other default selections which we will discuss in the following section. Note: The system will automatically assign a number for every new panel you create. This number will be seen under the Panel Number column.
13
Fig. 8.15. Panel Number column showing the automatically assigned Panel Numbers.
This number will be used to reference the concerned NAPCO Panel of any selected NAPCO Area or NAPCO Relay, in the respective screen. Below we discuss the folder tabs of the screen which will help you in the further configuration of the NAPCO Alarm Panel.
Folder Tabs
The NAPCO Panel configuration screen has two tabs. They are: 1. General and 2. Event Definitions The tabs are explained below.
14
General Tab
Fig. 8.16. General tab with default settings of a new panel.
The following are the details of General tab. Panel Name The Panel Name field of every new panel will show the default name New Panel (see above figure). Change the default name by typing in a name of your choice. In the figure below, we have named the new panel as Panel 1.
Fig. 8.17. Naming a panel.
Note: We will be using Panel 1 NAPCO Alarm Panel for the rest of the explanation in this document.
15
Panel Type By default, the Panel Type indicated will correspond to the type of panel that was chosen earlier in figure 8.13.
Fig. 8.18. Panel Type shown as Gem-X255 as a result of selection made in figure 8.13.
Enabled By default, the Enabled checkbox will be selected for every new panel you create. Arming/Disarming action can be performed only if this checkbox is selected for the given NAPCO Panel.
Panel Security Code In this field, enter the code that was used to program the selected NAPCO panel type. Make sure that the code you enter matches the value that was used to program the Gem X255 panels, using the Windows Quickloader.
Fig. 8.20. The Panel Security Code field.
16
Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the panel in question to a Napco Panel group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign the selected NAPCO Panel to. If there are no Groups visible in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen, on the NAPCO Panels tab. Refer the section Groups to do this.
Workstation The Workstation control will contain the names of all NAPCO Servers that are added in the Add NAPCO Server dialog (figure 8.9) accessible in the System Settings screen. You may click the down arrow to the right of Workstation control, and choose a NAPCO Server of your choice. The server you select here will be used to communicate with the NAPCO Panel in question.
Fig. 8.22. List of NAPCO Servers added in the System Settings screen.
17
Connection Type Two connection types are possible for every NAPCO Alarm Panel. By default, the system chooses Net.Link connection type for any new panel you create. The other possible connection type is Serial. Click the down arrow to the right of Connection Type control to view these options, and click on the connection type you desire.
Fig. 8.23. Available Connection Types for NAPCO Alarm Panels.
Each of these connection types (when selected) will display the control(s) related to the selected connection type. The controls related to the two connection types are discussed below. Control Related to Serial Connection Type Port Number This control will be displayed when you choose Serial connection type. When a new panel is created, the Port Number edit box will show the default value 10081.
Fig. 8.24. Default port selected for Serial connection.
The default port number can be changed by using the spin buttons. You need to change it to the port number to which the selected panel is physically connected.
18
Note: The Port used for integrating a NAPCO Alarm Panel cannot be used by any other application. Controls Related to Net.Link Connection Type
Fig. 8.25. Controls related to Net.Link connection.
Network Address In the Network Address field, you need to enter the (static) IP Address that was assigned to the NL-MOD device using the NL-MODCONFIG software. Note: NL-MOD is a device that allows the reporting of NAPCO alarms over a TCP/IP based (Intranet or Internet) network. The NL-MOD is one part of a larger system which includes a software package to allow its configuration (NL-MODCONFIG), a software package to allow the receipt of alarms, status and supervisory data (NL-CSRCV) and a small NL-MOD transient protection device (NL-ULBD). Please refer the NAPCO documents OI294A, WI1242, WI1243A for exhaustive information on NL-MOD devices.
Fig. 8.26. The Network Address field (in NAPCO Panel Configuration screen) meant for entering the static IP Address assigned to the NL-MOD device.
You can find the static IP Address entered in the NL-Mod tab of the NLModConfig screen (refer the NAPCO document WI1243A for more details).
19
IP address is the one that renders positive identification to the concerned NL-MOD device. The example figure below show the static IP Address we have entered in the NL-ModConfig screen for our NL-MOD device.
Fig. 8.27. Noting the static IP Address of a NL-MOD device in the NL-ModConfig screen.
20
Socket Number Every newly created panel will be assigned the socket number 10081.
Fig. 8.28. Default Socket selection for Net.Link connection.
It is recommended to retain the default Socket Number. The Socket Number represents the port used for communicating over Ethernet Network. Note: The Socket Number used for integrating a NAPCO alarm panel cannot be used by any other application. Net.Link Information Section
Fig. 8.29. The Net.Link Information section.
The Net.Link Information section provides controls for entering the PC Security Code assigned to the NL-MOD device in question. You can obtain this code from the NL-MOD tab of the NL-ModConfig screen.
21
Fig. 8.30. Noting the PC Security Code of a NL-MOD device in the NL-ModConfig screen.
Note: The PC Security Code is required to prevent unauthorized access to the NL-MOD device. The code will be defaulted to 0-0-0 in the NLModConfig screen. It is recommended that you change the default value for security purposes.
22
This completes the General tab settings for the given NAPCO Alarm Panel. Click the Save button on NAPCO Panel Configuration screen tool bar to save these settings. Let us now move on to the Event Definitions tab of NAPCO Panel Configuration screen.
Event Definitions Tab

A click on the Event Definitions tab will display the list of all event definitions that can be generated by the NAPCO Alarm Panel in question.
Fig. 8.31. Event Definitions for NAPCO Alarm Panels.
The event definitions can be edited if you desire. This is explained under the following heading. Editing a NAPCO Panel Event Definition Follow the below steps to edit a NAPCO Panel event definition: 1. Open NAPCO Panel Configuration screen by clicking on Configuration NAPCO Panels NAPCO Panels menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab by default. 2. Click on Event Definitions tab. 3. Click the Edit button on the toolbar.
23
4. Locate the event definition you wish to edit, and double-click the row containing that definition. On double-clicking, the NAPCO Panel Event Definition dialog will be displayed for the selected definition.
Fig. 8.32. Event Definition dialog box for NAPCO Panel Event OA (KP Fail).
5. The definition for the event KP Fail (as well as all other NAPCO
Panel events) can be edited in the above dialog by
Enabling/disabling the Generate Event check box (as desired) or by Enabling/disabling the Response Required check box (as desired) or by
Changing the Event Priority value using the spin buttons. The usable Event Priority range is 1-98.
24
Fig. 8.33. Definition of Event (0A) edited by enabling the check boxes.
Note: o Do not overlook the warning message in red color, in the above dialog. Changes made to an event definition cannot be reversed even by employing the Cancel button found on NAPCO Panel Configuration screen toolbar. o Changes made to an event definition of a NAPCO Panel will affect that particular panel only. The same definition for other panels will remain unaffected.
6. Click the OK button in the dialog to save the changes made to the
selected Event Definition. 7. Click the Save button on the NAPCO Panel configuration screen toolbar to save the settings. 8. Click the Close button to close the screen. Similarly, you can configure all other NAPCO Alarm Panels you intend to use in the integration program.
25
Navigation Bar
Fig. 8.34. Navigation bar in NAPCO Panel Configuration screen.
The NAPCO Panel Configuration screen provides a navigation bar in the middle of the screen. The buttons of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked NAPCO Panel records in the screen. In figure 8.34, we have numbered the buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the buttons are as follows: Button 1: Placing the mouse cursor on button 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the very first NAPCO Panel record in the screen. Button 2: Placing the mouse cursor on button 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted NAPCO Panel record. Button 3: Placing the mouse cursor on button 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted NAPCO Panel record. Button 4: Placing the mouse cursor on button 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted NAPCO Panel record. Button 5: Placing the mouse cursor on button 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight
26
the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted NAPCO Panel record. Button 6: Placing the mouse cursor on button 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking this button will highlight the last NAPCO Panel record in the screen. Button 7: Placing the mouse cursor on button 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking this button will bookmark the highlighted NAPCO Panel record. Button 8: Placing the mouse cursor on button 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking this button will highlight the previously bookmarked NAPCO Panel record. Note: The same navigation bar is also seen in the NAPCO Area/Zone and Relay Configuration screens. The buttons of the bar in these screens serve the same purpose of viewing older/newer/bookmarked configuration records in the respective screens. Next, we deal with configuration of NAPCO Areas.
27
NAPCO Areas
All NAPCO Alarm Panels have certain number of NAPCO Areas that need to be configured. The Gem-X255 and the Gem-P9600 Panels have eight NAPCO Areas each, while Gem-P3200 Panels have two NAPCO Areas. The NAPCO Areas must be configured in the NAPCO Area Configuration screen, available in the CardAccess software. Note: Configuration of Napco Areas in the CardAccess must coincide with the programming done using the Quickloader for Windows program.
Accessing NAPCO Area Configuration Screen

Follow the steps below: 1. In the CardAccess main screen, click on Configuration menu. Move the mouse cursor over NAPCO Panels menu item to display the submenu.
Fig. 8.35. NAPCO Panels submenu.
28
2. Click on NAPCO Areas submenu item to open the NAPCO Area Configuration screen.
Fig. 8.36. Clicking the NAPCO Areas submenu item.
On clicking, the NAPCO Area Configuration screen will be displayed. The screen will show the NAPCO areas of all NAPCO Alarm Panels (irrespective of the Panels Enabled checkbox values) that are created in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen. The figure below shows the NAPCO Areas of Panel 1 that we created earlier in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen.
29
Fig. 8.37. NAPCO Area Configuration screen showing NAPCO Areas of a panel.
Below we explain how to configure the NAPCO Areas.
30
Configuring NAPCO Areas

When the NAPCO Area Configuration screen is opened (see figure 8.37 above), the row containing Area Number 1 will be selected by default. Note: All NAPCO Areas of a selected NAPCO Panel have to be configured. It is also necessary that the Areas are configured sequentially. No area can be skipped from configuration. The following sections explain the folder tabs of the screen, which will give you a picture of how to configure your NAPCO Areas.
Folder Tabs
The NAPCO Area configuration screen has two tabs. They are: 1. General and 2. Event Definitions The tabs are explained below.
General Tab
Fig. 8.38. Default General tab settings of a NAPCO Area.
To configure a NAPCO Area, select the area by clicking the row containing the area, and click the Edit button on the toolbar. Following are the details of NAPCO Area Configuration screen General tab.
31
Alarm Panel Against the words Alarm Panel, you will see the automatically assigned Panel Number of the NAPCO panel whose areas you are currently configuring. This number can be found in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen, under the Panel Number column. The above figure shows the number 1. In our example, # 1 corresponds to Panel 1 Gem-X255 panel that we created earlier in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen.
Fig. 8.39. Panel Number column (in NAPCO Panel Configuration screen) showing the automatically assigned panel numbers.
Area Number Against the words Area Number, you will see the Area Number assigned the NAPCO Area that is currently highlighted in NAPCO Area Configuration screen. This number will match with the number in the Area Number column of the highlighted NAPCO Area.
Fig. 8.40. Area Number column of NAPCO Area Configuration screen showing the numbers assigned to NAPCO Areas.
Figure 8.38 shows # 1 against the words Area Number as we have selected the first area of Panel 1 (see figure 8.37) for our example.
32
Area Name This field will show the default selection- Area Not Configured (see figure 8.38 above). You may type a name of choice in this field for the Area you are configuring. In the figure below, we are naming Area Number 1 as Front Lobby.
Fig. 8.41. A NAPCO Area named as Front Lobby.
Configured By default, this check box will not be enabled. Click the check box if you wish to enable the selected area.
Fig. 8.42. Selecting the Configured check box.
Arming/Disarming action can be performed only on those Areas that have the Configured box checked. Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the selected NAPCO Area to a NAPCO Area group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
33
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign the selected NAPCO Area to. If there are no Groups visible in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen, on the NAPCO Areas tab. Refer the section Groups to do this.
Manual Control Privilege This control is used for setting user privileges on NAPCO Area records. It is similar to setting CardAccess user privileges on a Reader. By default, the field will show the default selection None. You may select a specific privilege if desired. Click the down arrow to the right of the field to view the available privileges, and click on a desired privilege.
Fig. 8.44. The available Manual Control Privileges.
This completes the General tab settings for the selected NAPCO Area. Click the Save button on NAPCO Area Configuration screen tool bar to save these settings. Let us now move on to the Event Definitions tab of NAPCO Area Configuration screen.
34

A click on the Event Definitions tab will display the list of event definitions that can be generated by the NAPCO Area in question.
Fig. 8.45. Event Definitions for NAPCO Areas.
The event definitions can be edited if desired. This is explained under the following heading. Editing a NAPCO Area Event Definition Follow the steps below: 1. Open NAPCO Area Configuration screen by clicking on Configuration NAPCO Panels NAPCO Areas menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab by default. 2. Click on Event Definitions tab. 3. Click the Edit button in the toolbar. 4. Locate the event definition you wish to edit, and double-click the row containing that definition. On double-clicking, the NAPCO Area Event Definition dialog will be displayed for the selected definition.
35
Fig. 8.46. Event Definition dialog box for NAPCO Area event 02 (Trouble). 5.
The definition for the event Trouble ( as well as all other NAPCO Area events) can be edited in the above dialog by
Enabling/disabling the Generate Event check box (as needed) or by Enabling/disabling the Response Required check box (as needed) or by Changing the Event Priority value using the spin buttons. The usable Event Priority range is 1-98.
Fig. 8.47. Definition of Event 02 edited by enabling the check boxes.
36
Note: o Do not overlook the warning message in red color, in the above dialog. Changes made to an event definition cannot be reversed even by employing the Cancel button found on the NAPCO Area Configuration screen toolbar. o Changes made to an event definition of a selected NAPCO Area will affect that particular Area only. The same definition for other Areas will remain unaffected.
6. Click the OK button in the dialog to save the changes made to the
selected Event Definition. 7. Click the Save button on the NAPCO Area configuration tool bar to save the settings. 8. Click the Close button to close the screen. Note: Similarly, all the other areas of the selected NAPCO Panel must be configured in succession. After all of the NAPCO areas are configured, configuration of NAPCO zones must be undertaken.
37
NAPCO Zones
All NAPCO Alarm Panels have certain number of NAPCO Zones that need to be configured. A Gem-X255 panel has 255 Zones; a Gem-P9600 panel has 96 zones, while a Gem-P3200 panel has 32 zones. Every Zone that is used in the NAPCO Alarm Panel must be configured. This depends on the number of Zones configured in advance for the Alarm Panel using the Quickloader for Windows program. The NAPCO Zones must be configured in the NAPCO Zone Configuration screen. Configuration of Napco Zones in the CardAccess must coincide with the programming done using the Quickloader for Windows program.
Accessing NAPCO Zone Configuration Screen

1. In the CardAccess main screen, click on Configuration menu. Move the mouse cursor over NAPCO Panels menu item to display the submenu.
Fig. 8.48. NAPCO Panels submenu.
38
2. Click on NAPCO Zones submenu item to open the NAPCO Zone Configuration screen.
Fig. 8.49. Selecting NAPCO Zones submenu item.
On clicking, the NAPCO Zone Configuration screen will be displayed. The screen will show the NAPCO Zones of all NAPCO Alarm Panels (irrespective of the Panels Enabled checkbox values) that are created in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen. The figure below shows the NAPCO Zones of Panel 1 that we created earlier in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen. To view all the Zone records, use the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side of the screen.
39
Fig. 8.50. NAPCO Zone Configuration screen showing NAPCO Zones of a panel.
Below we explain how to configure the NAPCO Zones.
40
Configuring NAPCO Zones

When the NAPCO Zone Configuration screen is opened (see figure 8.50 above), the row containing Zone Number 1 will be highlighted. The following sections explain the folder tabs of the screen, which will give you a picture of how to configure your NAPCO Zones.
Folder Tabs
The NAPCO Zone configuration screen has two tabs. They are: 1. General
2. Event Definitions
The tabs are explained below.
General Tab
The General tab has two areas. General and DVR
Fig. 8.51. The default General tab settings of a NAPCO Zone.
41
To configure a NAPCO Zone, highlight that zone in the upper half of the screen, and click the Edit button in the tool bar. You may please read the explanation below for the various controls in this tab, and configure your NAPCO Zones accordingly.
General Area
Fig. 8.52. Default General area settings in the NAPCO Zone General tab.
The following are the details of the General area in General tab: Zone Number Against the words Zone Number, you will see the Zone Number assigned to the NAPCO Zone that is currently highlighted in NAPCO Zone Configuration screen. This number will match with the number seen in the Zone Number column of the highlighted NAPCO Zone record.
42
Fig. 8.53. Zone Number column of NAPCO Zone Configuration screen showing the numbers assigned to NAPCO Zones.
Figure 8.52 shows # 1 against the words Zone Number as we have selected the first Zone of Panel 1 (see figure 8.50) for our example. Zone Name This field will show the default selection- Zone Not Configured (see figure 8.52 above). You may type a name of choice in this field for the Zone you are configuring. In the figure below, we are naming Zone Number 1 as Door 1.
Fig. 8.54. A NAPCO Zone named as Door 1.
43
Area Using the Area control, you need to select the NAPCO Area to which selected zone belongs. Click the down arrow to the right of the control and select the correct NAPCO Area. The list will show the names of all NAPCO Area that are entered in the NAPCO Area Configuration screen.
Fig. 8.55. Selecting a NAPCO Area for the Zone in question.
The Area you select here must match the programming done using the Quickloader for Windows. Note: Common zones, zones included in multiple areas are not supported in this release. Zone Configured By default, this check box will not be enabled. Click the check box if you wish to enable the Zone in question.
Fig. 8.56. Selecting the Zone Configured checkbox.
44
Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the selected NAPCO Zone to a NAPCO Zone group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign the selected NAPCO Zone to. If there are no Groups visible in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen, on the NAPCO Zones tab. Refer the section Groups to do this. This completes the basic configuration of the selected NAPCO Zone. Click the Save button in the tool bar to save these settings. A NAPCO Zone can also be configured for the special features such as DVR Recorded Video and Force Recording. The controls in the General tab DVR Area must be used to enable these features. Let us learn how to configure the selected NAPCO Zone for special features by employing the DVR area controls.
45
DVR Area
Fig. 8.58. The DVR area in NAPCO Zone General tab.
Fields of the DVR area can be used to configure the selected NAPCO zone for the following: 1. DVR Recorded Video and 2. Force Recording Note: The DVR area (and its controls) in NAPCO Zone Configuration screen will be visible only when the Enable DVR caRemoteView-Integral or the Enable DVR caCompleteView- Salient option is selected in the System Settings screen. See figure below.
Fig. 8.59. Enable DVR caRemoteView-Integral or DVR caCompleteView option to configure a NAPCO zone for DVR.
Below, we learn how to configure a NAPCO Zone for DVR Recorded Video.
46
Configuring a NAPCO Zone for DVR Recorded Video

A NAPCO Zone can be configured to support DVR Recorded Videos (of the Events/Alerts it can generate), by making use of the controls in the NAPCO Zone Configuration screen, on the General tab DVR area. Note: This feature requires proper setup of the DVR system. The DVR cameras need to be set to Free Run working mode for the Start and End times to apply. Please refer the Continental Instruments document DVR CaRemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000 for more details. Follow the steps below to configure the selected NAPCO Zone for DVR Recorded Video. 1. Open NAPCO Zone Configuration screen by clicking on Configuration NAPCO Panels NAPCO Zones menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab by default. 2. In the upper half of the screen, select the NAPCO Zone to which you wish to associate a DVR camera, and click on that record. 3. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. 4. In the General tab DVR Area, click the down arrow to the right of DVR Server Name control, and click on a desired Integral/Salient server.
Fig. 8.60. Selecting an Integral server or Salient server.
On selection, the Camera control will be populated with the names of all cameras that are connected to the selected server.
47
5. Click the down arrow to the right of Camera control, and select the DVR camera you wish to associate with the NAPCO Zone selected in step 2.
Enter the Pre Event Time in its edit box either by typing a number of choice, or by using the up/down arrow to choose a desired number. (Pre-event time is the view time before the occurrence of an event, from the selected NAPCO Zone).
Enter the Post Event Time in its edit box either by typing a number of choice, or by using the up/down arrow to choose a desired number. (Post-event time is the view time after the occurrence of an event, from the selected NAPCO Zone).
Enter the lower limit of the priority range in the Priority From edit box. The lowest number you can enter in this edit box is 1.
Fig. 8.64. The Priority From control.
48
Note: Priority range is the range in which events of different priorities fall into. The DVR recorded video of only those events falling within this range can be viewed in CardAccess. Enter the upper limit of the priority range in the Priority To edit box. The highest number you can enter in this edit box is 98.
Fig. 8.65. The Priority To control.
Click the Save button on the toolbar to save these settings. From now onwards, you will be able to view the DVR recorded video of any Event/Alert generated by the selected NAPCO Zone, provided, the Event/Alert falls within the specified priority range. Refer the section Viewing DVR Recorded Video of CardAccess Events/Alerts in the document DVR CaRemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000 to learn the various methods of viewing DVR Recorded videos. Next, let us learn the configuration of NAPCO Zones for Force Recording.
Force Recording for NAPCO Zone Events/Alerts

You may be interested in the DVR of Events/Alerts generated by certain NAPCO Zones in the CardAccess. This can be achieved by forcing a DVR camera (connected to a DVXi server) to record video whenever there are Event/Alert occurrences from those zones. This kind of video recording can be termed as force recording. For force recording to take place, the concerned Napco Zones must be configured for force recording.
49
Note: The DVR CaRemoteView application MUST be kept running for force recording to take place. Refer the heading Running DVR CaRemoteView in CardAccess in the document DVR CaRemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000 to learn how to run the application. Force recording is also possible for Reader and Input Event/Alert occurrences. Configuring Readers and Inputs for force recording is explained in the document DVR CaRemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000.
Configuration for Force Recording

Configuration for force recording is done in two steps. They are as follows. Step 1: Firstly you need to identify the computer that will send the command for force recording. This is done in the System Settings screen. Step 2: Secondly, you need to configure the Napco Zones for whose Event/Alert occurrences you wish to enforce video recording. The steps are discussed below.
Identifying the Computer

The first step in force recording is to identify the computer that will send the command required to enforce DVR. This is done in the System Settings screen. Follow the below steps: 1. In the CardAccess main screen, click on System System Settings menu options to open the System Settings window. 2. In the System Settings window, click on the CCTV tab.
50
3. Make sure the third radio button is selected in the CCTV/DVR Control section, with the DVR caRemoteView- Integral option selection in the corresponding drop down box. 4. Click the Edit button in the toolbar. 5. In the UNC Name field, enter the UNC name of that computer in the CardAccess system, you wish to reserve for sending the command required for force recording. In our example, we will use CONTARUN for sending the command to force record.
Fig. 8.66. Entering UNC name of the computer that will send the command for force recording.
6. Click the Save button in the toolbar to save this setting. Once this is done, force recording will be enabled.
Configuring a NAPCO Zone for Force Recording

A NAPCO Zone can be set up to facilitate force recording of video for the Events/Alerts it can generate. This is done by using the controls in the NAPCO Zone Configuration screen, on the General tab DVR area. Make sure that the particular NAPCO Zone is configured to support DVR Recorded Videos as well. The concept is to enable force recording (which we explain below) for the given NAPCO Zone, and then view the recorded video of the Event/Alert occurrences from that Zone. To configure a NAPCO Zone for DVR Recorded Videos, please refer the section Configuring a NAPCO Zone for DVR Recorded Video above.
51
Below we discuss the steps to configure a NAPCO Zone for force recording. 1. Open NAPCO Zone Configuration screen by clicking on Configuration NAPCO Panels NAPCO Zones menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab by default. 2. In the upper half of the screen, select the NAPCO Zone for whose Events/Alerts you wish to enforce DVR, and click on that NAPCO Zone record. In our example, we have selected the NAPCO Zone Door 1 for force recording feature.
Fig. 8.67. Selecting a NAPCO Zone whose Event/Alert occurrences will be subjected to force recording.
3. Make sure the first six controls in the General tab DVR area (see the highlight in figure below) are configured for DVR Recorded videos.
52
In case they are not configured, refer the section Configuring a NAPCO Zone for DVR Recorded Video above, and do the necessary configuration.
Fig. 8.68. First six controls in the DVR area configured to allow the selected NAPCO Zone to have DVR Recorded videos.
The camera selected in the Camera control will enforce DVR of the Events/Alerts that the selected NAPCO Zone may generate. This happens when the Computer specified in the System Settings screen (in the UNC Name field) sends a command to do so. In our example, Front Door Camera 1 connected to Engg Office DVXi server (see figure 8.68 above) will enforce DVR of any Event/Alert generated by Door 1 when CONTARUN (see figure 8.66 above) sends the command for force recording. 4. Click the Edit button on the toolbar. 5. Click the Enable DVR Recording checkbox to select it.
Fig. 8.69. Selecting the Enable DVR Recording checkbox.
6. In the No. of seconds to record edit box, enter the number of seconds for which you wish to enforce DVR of the Events/Alerts that can be generated by the selected NAPCO Zone.
53
Fig. 8.70. Entering the number of seconds for force recording.
7. Click the Save button in the tool bar to save these settings. From now onwards, whenever the selected NAPCO Zone generates an Event/Alert, the computer specified in the System Settings screen (in the UNC Name field) will send a command to the DVR Camera (selected in the Camera control, on General Tab DVR area) to enforce DVR of the particular Event/Alert occurrence. This aspect will be reflected almost immediately in the Audit Trail screen accessible by System Audit Trail menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The Audit Trail screen below shows that CONTARUN sent a command to Front Door Camera 1 connected to 172. 16.100.208 (the IP address of Engg Office DVXi server) to enforce DVR for an alert generated on 3/26/2005 at 2:44:40 PM, for a period of 65 Seconds.
54
Fig. 8.71. Audit trail screen showing the details of force recording for a CardAccess Alert.
Once, the number of seconds fixed for force recording (as specified in the DVR area, see figure 8.70) has elapsed, you are ready to view the DVR Recorded video of the Event/Alert. Refer the heading Viewing DVR Recorded Video of CardAccess Events/Alerts in the document DVR CaRemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000 to learn the various methods of viewing the DVR recorded video. This completes the General tab settings for the special features- DVR Recorded Video and Force Recording, for the selected NAPCO Zone. Let us now move on to the Events Definitions tab of NAPCO Zone Configuration screen.
55

A click on the Event Definitions tab will display the list of event definitions that can be generated by the NAPCO Zone in question.
Fig. 8.72. Event Definitions for NAPCO Zones.
The event definitions can be edited if desired. This is explained below. Editing a NAPCO Zone Event Definition Follow the steps below: 1. Open NAPCO Zone Configuration screen by clicking on Configuration NAPCO Panels NAPCO Zones menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab by default. 2. Click on Event Definitions tab. 3. Click the Edit button in the toolbar. 4. Locate the event definition you wish to edit, and double-click the row containing that definition. On double-clicking, the NAPCO Zone Event Definition dialog will be displayed for the selected definition.
56
Fig. 8.73. Event Definition dialog for NAPCO Zone event with status code 6A (RF TX Supv Fail).
5. The definition for the event RF TX Supv Fail ( as well as all other NAPCO Zone events) can be edited in the above dialog by
Enabling/disabling the Generate Event check box as necessary or by Enabling/disabling the Response Required check box as necessary or by
Changing the Event Priority value using the spin buttons. The usable Event Priority range is 1-98.
Fig. 8.74. Event definition of 6A edited by enabling the check boxes.
57
Note: o Do not overlook the warning message in red color, in the above dialog. Changes made to an event definition cannot be reversed even by employing the Cancel button found on the NAPCO Zone Configuration screen toolbar. o Changes made to an event definition of a selected NAPCO Zone will affect that particular Zone only. The same definition for other Zones will remain unaffected.
6. Click on OK button to save the Event Definition changes.
7. Click the Save button on the NAPCO Zone configuration tool bar to save the settings. 8. Click the Close button to close the screen. Note: Similarly, you can configure the other NAPCO zones of the selected NAPCO panel. Next, we deal with configuration of NAPCO Relays.
58
NAPCO Relays
All NAPCO Panels have certain number of NAPCO Relays that need to be configured. The Gem-X255 and the Gem-P9600 Panels have 96 NAPCO Relays each, while Gem-P3200 Panels have 24 NAPCO Relays. The NAPCO Relays must be configured in NAPCO Relay Configuration screen. Configuration of Napco Relays in the CardAccess must coincide with the programming done using the Quickloader for Windows program.
Accessing NAPCO Relay Configuration Screen

1. In the CardAccess main screen, click on Configuration menu. Move the mouse cursor over NAPCO Panels menu item to display the submenu.
Fig. 8.75. NAPCO Panels submenu. 2. Click the NAPCO Relays submenu item to open the NAPCO Relay Configuration screen.
59
Fig. 8.76. Selecting NAPCO Relays submenu item.
On clicking, the NAPCO Relay Configuration screen will be displayed. The screen will show the NAPCO Relays of all NAPCO Panels (irrespective of the Panels Enabled checkbox values) that are created in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen. The figure below shows the NAPCO Relays of Panel 1 that we created earlier in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen. To view all the Relay records, use the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side of the screen.
60
Fig. 8.77. The NAPCO Relay Configuration screen showing the NAPCO Relays of a panel.
61
Configuring NAPCO Relays

When the NAPCO Relay Configuration screen is opened, the row containing Relay Number 1 will be highlighted. The following sections explain the folder tabs of the screen, which will give you a picture of how to configure your NAPCO Relays.
Folder Tabs
The NAPCO Relay configuration screen has two tabs. They are: 1. General and 2. Events The tabs are explained below.
General Tab
Fig. 8.78. Default General tab settings of a NAPCO Relay.
To configure a NAPCO Relay, highlight that Relay in the upper half of the screen, and click the Edit button on the toolbar. Following are the details NAPCO Relay Configuration screen General tab.
62
Alarm Panel Against the words Alarm Panel, you will see the automatically assigned Panel Number of the NAPCO Panel whose Relays you are currently configuring. This number can be found in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen, under the Panel Number column. The above figure shows the number 1. In our example, # 1 corresponds to Panel 1 Gem-X255 panel that we created earlier in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen.
Fig. 8.79. Panel Number column (in NAPCO Panel Configuration screen) showing the automatically assigned panel numbers.
Relay Number Against the words Relay Number, you will see the Relay Number assigned to the NAPCO Relay that is currently highlighted in NAPCO Relay Configuration screen. This number will match with the number seen in the Relay Number column of the highlighted NAPCO Relay.
63
Fig. 8.80. Relay Number column of NAPCO Relay Configuration screen showing the numbers assigned to NAPCO Relays.
Relay Name This field will show the default selection- Relay Not Configured (see figure 8.78 above). You may type a name of choice in this field for the Relay you are configuring. In the figure below, we are naming Relay Number 1 as Panel 1 Relay 1.
Fig. 8.81. A NAPCO Relay named as Panel 1 Relay 1.
64
Relay Configured By default, this check box will not be enabled. Click the check box if you wish to enable the Relay in question.
Fig. 8.82. Selecting the Relay Configured check box.
Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the selected NAPCO Relay to a NAPCO Relay group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign to the selected NAPCO Relay to. If there are no Groups visible in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen, on the NAPCO Relays tab. Refer the section Groups to do this. This completes the General tab settings for the selected NAPCO Relay. Click the Save button on NAPCO Relay Configuration screen tool bar to save these settings. Let us now move on to the Events tab of NAPCO Relay Configuration screen.
65
Events Tab
A click on the Events tab will display the list of event definitions that can be generated by the selected NAPCO Relay.
Fig. 8.84. Event definitions for NAPCO Relays.
The event definitions can be edited if desired. This is explained under the following heading. Editing a NAPCO Relay Event Definition Follow the steps below: 1. Open NAPCO Relay Configuration screen by clicking on Configuration NAPCO Panels NAPCO Relays menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The screen will open in the General tab by default. 2. Click on Events tab. 3. Click the Edit button in the toolbar. 4. Locate the event definition you wish to edit, and double-click the row containing that definition. On double-clicking, the NAPCO Relay Event Definition dialog will be displayed for the selected definition.
66
Fig. 8.85. Event Definition dialog for NAPCO Relay event with status code OE (Relay On). 5. The definition for event Relay On ( as well as all other NAPCO
Relay events) can be edited in the above dialog by
Enabling/disabling the Generate Event check box as necessary or by Enabling/disabling the Response Required check box as necessary or by
Changing the Event Priority value using the spin buttons. The Event Priority range is 1-98.
Fig. 8.86. Event definition of OE edited by enabling the check boxes.
67
Note: o Do not overlook the warning message in red color, in the above dialog. Changes made to an event definition cannot be reversed even by employing the Cancel button found on the NAPCO Relay Configuration screen toolbar. o Changes made to an event definition of a selected NAPCO Relay will affect that particular Relay only. The same definition for other Relays will remain unaffected. 6. Click the OK button in the dialog save the Event Definition changes. 7. Click the Save button in the NAPCO Relay configuration tool bar to save the settings. 8. Click the Close button to close the screen. Note: Similarly, the other relays of the selected panel can be configured. After the entire configuration is thus completed, the given NAPCO Alarm Panel is ready to be Armed/Disarmed.
68
Arming/Disarming a NAPCO Alarm Panel

NAPCO Alarm Panel integration can be demonstrated by arming/disarming the alarm panel manually, and receiving the event information in the CardAccess software. To arm/disarm a given NAPCO Panel, make sure all of its Areas, Zones and Relays are configured. Please refer the individual sections explained earlier in this document, and do the necessary configuration. You may proceed to the following steps once the entire configuration is complete. Following are the steps to arm/disarm a given NAPCO Alarm Panel. 1. Click on NAPCO Panels button in the CardAccess main tool bar.
Fig. 8.87. Clicking the NAPCO Panels button on CardAccess main toolbar.
On clicking, the NAPCO Panel Control screen will be displayed.
69
Fig. 8.88. Manual NAPCO Panel Control screen.
Observe that the Arm radio button is selected by default in the NAPCO Panel Action section. Also note that the middle portion of the screen shows a few checkboxes. These checkboxes represent the NAPCO Areas of the selected NAPCO Panel. Only those areas whose Configured checkbox is selected in the NAPCO Area Configuration screen will find a place in the list of checkboxes. 2. In the NAPCO Panels drop down box, select the Panel you wish to Arm or Disarm. In the figure below, we have selected Panel 1.
70
Fig. 8.89. Selected a panel for arming/disarming action.
3. Decide on the action (Arm or Disarm) you wish to perform on the selected panel. In case you wish to disarm the selected panel, the click the Disarm radio button in the NAPCO Panel Action section. 4. Select the desired NAPCO Area checkboxes for the chosen alarm action. You can select the Areas in two ways. You can click the desired NAPCO Area checkboxes one by one or You can select all of the NAPCO Areas by clicking on Select All button seen at the bottom left side of the screen.
71
The Execute NAPCO Alarm Action button will be enabled after the selection of a NAPCO area. In the figure below, we have selected Front Lobby (a NAPCO Area belonging to Panel 1) check box.
Fig. 8.90. The Execute NAPCO Alarm Action button enabled after selecting a NAPCO Area.
Note: In case you wish to cancel your selections, click on Clear All button.
5. Click the Execute NAPCO Alarm Action button for the selected Alarm Action (arm/disarm) to take place. On clicking, a message box will be displayed indicating that the Manual NAPCO Control has been queued up.
72
Fig. 8.91. Message box displayed on clicking the Execute NAPCO Alarm Action button.
6. Click the OK button in the message box. 7. Check the Alarm Panel Keypad for the intended alarm action. There may be a short delay in the arming/disarming of the panel. 8. Click the Exit button seen at the bottom right side to close the NAPCO Panel Control screen. You will now obtain the arm/disarm event message on the CardAccess main screen.
73
Fig. 8.92. Arm/Disarm event messages displayed on CA main screen after Arming/Disarming Alarm Panel 1 Area 1.
74
Status of NAPCO Areas

It is possible to check the Arm/Disarm status of NAPCO Areas in the CardAccess. This can be done in the NAPCO Status tab. In order to go to NAPCO Status tab, first click the Status button on CA main toolbar, and then click on NAPCO Status tab. The figure below shows the Arm/ Disarm status of NAPCO Areas that are used in our CardAccess system.
Fig. 8.93. NAPCO status tab showing the Arm/Disarm status of NAPCO Areas in CA 3000.
75
Operator Instruction Links

Operator instructions created in the Operator Instructions screen (see section Operator Instructions) must be linked to CardAccess Event types. This is done in the Operator Instruction Links screen.
Accessing Operator Instruction Links Screen

Click on Administration menu in CardAccess main screen. Click on Operator Instruction Links menu item in the list. Operator Instruction Links screen will be opened as below.
Fig. 45.1. The Operator Instruction Links screen.
Observe that all toolbar buttons except the Close button are grayed out. Note: The New button required for creating a new operator instruction link will be enabled only when an Event type is selected. Steps to arrive at Event type selection are explained under the heading Linking Operator Instruction to an Event Type. By default, the left hand side of the screen will list the names of the panels that are previously created in CardAccess software. Note: Before using Operator Instruction Links screen, panel records must be created in CardAccess. Refer the section Panels and the document on NAPCO Alarm Panel Integration with CardAccess 3000.
The first panel (Bldg 1 Superterm 1 as in figure 45.1) will be expanded by default and its contents (Readers, Inputs, Relays and Links as in figure 45.1) will be revealed. Each of these hardware items will again be provided with nodes (+ marks). Note: Nodes will be seen for only those hardware items for which records have been created previously in CardAccess software. For example, in the figure below, there are no Input, Relay and Link records created for Bldg 2 SuperTerm 1 panel. Hence these items do not show nodes.
Fig. 45.2. No node seen for Inputs, Relays, Links of Bldg 2 SuperTerm 1 panel.
In order to link operator instructions to Event types generated from a hardware item (Reader/Input/Relay/Link), make sure records are created for the item in CardAccess. Refer the sections Readers, Inputs, Relays, Links to create hardware item records.
Linking Operator Instruction to an Event Type

Follow the steps below: Open Operator Instruction Links screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Instruction Links menu options in CardAccess main screen. Operator Instruction Links screen will be opened as below.
Fig. 45.3. The Operator Instruction Links screen.
Observe that the left hand side of the screen shows the list of panels previously created in CardAccess software.
Note: The New button essential for the linking process is grayed out. It can be enabled by following the steps below. Click on a desired panel name that is connected to the hardware item of interest, whose Event type you wish to link with an operator instruction. Upon clicking, the hardware items connected to the panel will be revealed. Each of these items will be provided with nodes (+ marks).
Fig. 45.4. Clicking on Bldg 1 Superterm 1 panel to reveal the hardware items connected to it.
Note: If a hardware item does not show a node, it means that no records are created for that item in CardAccess software. If you wish to link an Event type of that item with an instruction, you must first create records for the hardware item. Click on the desired hardware item node. Doing this will reveal the various records created for selected hardware item.
Fig. 45.5. Clicking on Readers node.
Click on a desired hardware item record. Doing this will offer you the Events node.
Fig. 45.6. Clicking on First Floor Lobby Elevator node.
Click on Events node. Doing this will show the list of all of the Event types associated with the selected hardware item record.
Fig. 45.7. List of First Floor Lobby Elevator Event types.
Click on a desired event type to which you wish to link an operator instruction. Observe that the new button in the toolbar is enabled after Event type selection.
Fig. 45.8. An Event type selection enabling the New button in toolbar.
Click on New button in the toolbar. Doing this will enable the Instruction to use for this event and Link Enabled controls in the Instruction Link tab seen at the bottom of the screen. The Instruction to use for this event control will show the default selection of the first option available in the drop down list, and the Link Enabled check box will be selected by default. Click the down arrow of Instruction to use for this event control for viewing the list of the available operator instructions. Locate the instruction you wish to link to the selected Event type and click on it.
Fig. 45.9. Selecting an operator instruction in the drop down list.
Click on Save button to save the settings in the screen. Click on Close button to close the screen. Similarly, other Event types can be linked with the required operator instructions by following the above steps.
Advantages of Operator Instruction Links

A few screen changes that are advantageous to the operator are resulted by linking Event types with operator instructions: When an Alert attached with an operator instruction occurs, a sliding window is displayed on the right hand side of CA main screen for a brief period of time. This window contains the operator instruction for that alert type. The operator can read the instruction in the window, and take proper action against the alert.
Fig. 45.10. Sliding window displayed for an Alert linked with operator instruction.
The Alert Acknowledge/Event Response windows of Alerts/Events that are attached with operator instructions contain a folder tab called Operator Instructions. The user can click on the tab and read the attached instruction to take proper action against the Alert/Event.
Fig. 45.11. Operator instruction seen in Operator Instructions tab of Alert Acknowledge window, for an Alert linked with an operator instruction.
Editing an Operator Instruction Link

Follow the steps below if you wish to change the operator instruction linked to an Event type: Open Operator Instruction Links screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Instruction Links menu options in CardAccess main screen. Navigate to Event type of the hardware item record, for which you wish to link a different operator instruction. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the Instruction to use for this event and Link Enabled controls in the Instruction Link tab seen at the bottom of the screen will be enabled.
10
Click the down arrow of Instruction to use for this event control, and select a different operator instruction of choice for linking to the selected Event type. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the change. Click on Close button to close the screen.
Deleting an Operator Instruction Link

Follow the steps below if you wish to delete an operator instruction link: Open Operator Instruction Links screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Instruction Links menu options in CardAccess main screen. Navigate to Event type of the hardware item record, whose operator instruction link you wish to delete. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 45.12. Message box displayed before deleting an operator instruction link.
After confirming, click on Yes button in the message box to delete the selected operator instruction link. Click on Close button to close the screen.
11
Operator Instructions
An operator may require instructions to take proper action against the Events/Alerts generated in CardAccess software. This requirement can be met by creating instructions in the Operator Instructions screen. Creation of operator instructions will be explained in detail below. Once operator instructions are created, they must be linked to the corresponding Event types in CardAccess. Without linking, the instructions have no meaning. Linking is done in Operator Instruction Links screen. Refer the section Operator Instruction Links for details. Once linked, the operator can obtain the instructions for CardAccess Events/Alerts upon their occurrence.
Accessing Operator Instructions Screen

Click on Administration menu in CardAccess main screen. Click on Operator Instructions menu item in the list. Operator Instructions screen will be opened as below.
Fig. 44.1. The Operator Instructions screen.
Creating an Operator Instruction

Follow the steps below to create a new operator instruction. Open Operator Instructions screen by clicking Administration->Operator Instructions menu options in CardAccess main screen. Click on New button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the Instruction Name field will show the words New Instruction, and the keyboard cursor will be seen blinking in the text area of the screen. New Instruction is the default name given to every new instruction you create. The default instruction name can be changed if desired. To do this, click the Instruction Name field and type in a name of your choice.
Click in the white space of the text area, and type in the instruction you want the operator to follow, upon the occurrence of a particular Event/Alert.
Fig. 44.2. The text area of Operator Instructions screen.
Note: There are no restrictions on the type of content that can be included in an operator instruction. A maximum of 256 characters (including special characters) can be typed in the text area, for a particular instruction. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the instruction. Click on Close button to close the screen.
Editing an Operator Instruction

Open Operator Instructions screen by clicking Administration->Operator Instructions menu options in CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, click on the instruction you wish to edit. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the keyboard cursor can be seen blinking in the text area of the screen.
Fig. 44.3. Editing an operator instruction.
Make the desired changes to the instruction seen in the text area. Click on Save button to save the changes. Click on Close button to close the screen.
4
Deleting an Operator Instruction

Open Operator Instructions screen by clicking Administration->Operator Instructions menu options in CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, click on the instruction you wish to delete. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 44.4. Message box displayed before deleting an operator instruction.
After confirming, click on Yes button in the message box to delete the selected operator instruction. Click on Close button to close the screen.
Operator Instructions Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 44.5. The Operator Instructions screen navigation bar.
The Operator Instructions screen navigation bar can be found above the text area of the screen where you type in the instructions. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked instructions in the screen. In figure 44.5, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first operator instruction in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last instruction in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted operator instruction. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the instruction previous to the currently highlighted operator instruction. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the instruction appearing after the currently highlighted operator instruction. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will
highlight the first instruction in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted operator instruction. Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last operator instruction in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted operator instruction.
Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked operator instruction.
Operator Responses
Operator Responses
The Operator Response screen is used to create and store pre-defined operator response strings. These strings are stored in the database and will be available for selection in the other CardAccess screens. The operator has the choice of attaching these strings as his responses (see section Event response) to CardAccess Events/Alerts upon their occurrence.
Accessing Operator Responses Screen

In CardAccess main screen, click on Administration menu to display the menu items. Click on Operator Responses menu item in the list.
Fig. 43.1. The Operator Responses screen.
Operator Responses
Creating an Operator Response String

Follow the steps below to create an operator response string: Open Operator Responses screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Responses menu options in CardAccess main screen. Click on New button in the toolbar. Type in a response string of choice in the Response Text field provided at the bottom of the screen.
Fig. 43.2. The Response Text field.
Note: There are no restrictions on the type of content that can be included in an operator response string. The Response Text field allows a maximum character 256 characters (including special characters). Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the response string. Click on Close button to close the screen. Similarly, other pre-defined operator response strings can be created. All of the strings created will be available as selection options for Response message control in Events Response screen.
Operator Responses
Editing an Operator Response String

Follow the steps below to edit an operator response string: Open Operator Responses screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Responses menu options in CardAccess main screen. Under Response Text area, click on the response string you wish to edit. Upon clicking, the response string you selected will be displayed in the Response Text field. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the response string will be highlighted in the Response Text field, and keyboard cursor can be seen blinking at the end of the highlighted string.
Fig. 43.3. Editing an operator response string.
Operator Responses
Make the desired changes to the response string. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button to close the screen.
Deleting an Operator Response String

Open Operator Responses screen by clicking on Administration->Operator Responses menu options in CardAccess main screen. Under Response Text area, click on the response string you wish to delete. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 43.4. Message box displayed before deleting an operator response string.
After confirming, click on Yes button in the message box to delete the selected operator response string. Click on Close button to close the screen.
Operator Responses
Operator Responses Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 43.5. The Operator Responses screen navigation bar.
The Operator Responses screen navigation bar can be found above the Response Text field in the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked records in the screen. In figure 43.5, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first operator response string in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last string in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted operator response string. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the string previous to the currently highlighted operator response string. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the string appearing after the currently highlighted operator response string. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first string in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted operator response string.
Operator Responses
Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last operator response string in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted operator response string. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked operator response string.
Relays
Relays
The Relays screen is a configuration screen where you create configuration records that activate panel on-board hardware relays and expansion relays. It is important to note that relays have a physical operation and a software operation. The software operation of a relay is somewhat detached from the actual hardware that performs relay switching functions. There are two software states of any CardAccess relay; Output On and Output Off. The Output On and Output Off states are very similar to the Input Normal and Input Abnormal states mentioned in the Inputs section of this manual. Output Off would logically be considered the normal or resting state of the relay and Output On would be considered the abnormal or active state of the relay. Note that when you fire a relay manually, the relay is switched from Output Off to Output On as far as the CardAccess logic is concerned. There are also two physical states of any relay; energized and de-energized. The association between energized/de-energized and Output On/Off is software selectable. By default, the logical Output On corresponds to the energized state of the relay and the logical Output Off condition corresponds to the deenergized state of the relay. The relationship between logical Output On/Off and energized/de-energized can be reversed by changing the default setting of the Off State Energized control mentioned later in this section. It is important for you to note for the moment that it is the logical Output On or Output Off state that the CardAccess uses to determine the state of the relay, not the physical state of the relay hardware. Note that Output On could mean relay energized or de-energized depending on settings in the Relays screen.
Relays
Note the following additional issues regarding relays. Each panel type has a fixed number of on-board relays. Relay expansion cards can be attached to the SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm, and SmartTerm panels to increase the total number of available relays. The lowest odd numbered (on-board) relays are automatically assigned to reader ports in the Readers screen. You dont need to redefine those relays in the Relays screen. The lowest numbered even numbered (on-board) relays are available for shunting functions. Actually two relays are allocated per door, a door strike relay (odd numbered) and a shunting relay (even numbered). The door relay is enabled by default, the shunting relay is optional and is not enabled. Once enabled and assigned to a door, the shunting relay fires a few milliseconds before the door strike relay. The shunting relay would typically be used to bridge the door contacts of another manufacturers alarm system to prevent it from triggering when its door contact is broken. Each panel has a console relay, which is relay #73 on all panel types. The console relay is a special relay often used to connect to a horn alarm. There are settings to specifically activate the console relay in the inputs screen.
Accessing Relays Screen
Click on Relays option in the menu list. Upon clicking, Relays screen will be displayed in General tab as shown in the figure below.
Relays
Fig. 52.1. The Relays screen.
The screen may contain three tabs as listed below.
Fig. 52.2. Relays screen folder tabs.
a) The General Tab b) The Maps Tab- This tab will be visible only when the Use Facility Maps feature is enabled in System Settings screen.
c) The Location/Remarks Tab Each of the tabs and their controls are detailed below.
Relays
General Tab
This is the default tab in which Relays screen will be displayed.
Fig. 52.4. Relays screen General tab.
The various controls in General tab are explained below. Panel A relay must be associated with a panel before the operating parameters are set for that relay. The Panel control is used to do this. The Panel control contains a list of all panels that were created in the Panels screen.
To select a panel, click the arrow button to the right of Panel control, scroll up or down to locate the desired panel and click on it. If no panel names are seen in the list, you need to create them in Panels screen. Refer the manual section titled Panels to do this.
Relays
Relay # The Relay # selection control allows you to select which numbered relay you wish to activate on a given panel or any attached relay expansion cards.
Fig. 52.6. The Relay # control.
By default, all on board and expansion card relays are disabled. They must be activated by a CardAccess software configuration that is downloaded to the panel. The configuration instructs the panel as to which hardware it should enable, and with what operating parameters. Note that some relay numbers may have been pre-assigned in the Readers screen. When you create reader definitions in the Readers screen, some relays are automatically assigned to doors (one odd numbered on-board relay per door, by default). If you elect to create a relay record in the Relays screen that has the same relay number as a relay that has been assigned to a door in the Readers screen, you will be creating a duplicate relay definition. When you create a duplicate relay definition, the settings in the Relays screen will override the system defaults for the door relay. See the manual section titled Duplicate Definitions for more information. To select a relay number, click either of the arrow keys to the right of the Relay # field, or click in the white space and type a number.
Relays
Note the following issues: o Each panel type has a different maximum number of onboard relays as follows. Onboard Relays Reader Relays (odd) Expansion Relays Console Relay
Panel Type
SuperTerm & Turbo SuperTerm SmartTerm MiniTerm MicroTerm 1-16 + 73 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15 17-65 73
1-8 + 73 1-4 + 73 1-2 + 73
1,3,5,7 1,3 1 (2)*
9-72 None None
73 73 73
Table 52.7. Panel Onboard Relay Numbers.
(* in the above table indicates that the MicroTerm can be configured with two readers as an option). Notice in Table 52.7 that the column marked Reader Relays indicates the relay number range that is automatically assigned to Reader ports if they are activated. Remember though, that all relays on the panel can be assigned to any purpose that you choose, but if you create a door in the Readers screen, one (odd numbered) relay will be assigned to that door unless you manually override the automatic selection. The CardAccess software automatically assigns the next available, lowest odd numbered relay (on the same panel), to the next reader record that you create. Door 1 always gets relay 1. Door 2 always gets relay 3, and so on. o The system has no way of determining which type of panel you are configuring. Thus, you must exercise caution that you do not attempt to create relay numbers that do not exist on a given panel type.
6
Relays
o Some relay numbers may already be activated and allocated to reader ports on the selected panel. If you dont want to override the default settings for relays already allocated to reader ports, do not create relay definitions in the Relays screen with the same relay numbers that were previously assigned to reader ports relays (see Duplicate Definitions for more information). o The SuperTerm, Turbo SuperTerm and SmartTerm panels can support relay expansion cards. The MiniTerm and MicroTerm cannot support expansion cards.
Name The Name field is meant for entering a descriptive name for the relay. It is recommended to use names that describe the location or function of the relay.
Fig. 52.8. A relay name describing the function of a relay.
The name entered in the Name field will be attached to all relay event messages involving the selected relay. The field will accept any combination of letters, numbers or symbols.
Fig. 52.9. Relay Event Messages.
Group The Group selection control allows you to assign the current relay to a relay group. Groups are used for database partitioning and for manual control list filtering. For more information see the manual section titled Groups.
Relays
To select a Group, click the arrow button to the right of Group control and click on the Group you wish to assign to the relay. If there are no Groups visible in the list, you need to create some in the Groups screen. Refer the section Groups to do this.
Times Section The controls in Times section are explained below.
Fig. 52.11. Relays screen Times section.
Track Schedule When you create a relay definition and enable it, that relay becomes operational. That is, the relay is activated by the panel logic and you now have the ability to energize the relay at some later time. The relay can be activated from a number of sources inside the CardAccess software (manual control button, link, time schedule, card read, etc.). One of the available ways to activate a relay is to set a Track Schedule.
Fig. 52.12. The Track Schedule control.
The term Track Schedule, when it refers to a relay, means to have the action of the relay follow the action of the schedule (the relay tracks the schedule).
Relays
When the schedule is in effect, the relay is activated. When the schedule expires, the relay is deactivated (or the opposite behavior can be true, depending on the setting of Off-State Energized control). Thus, you can use a track schedule to hold a relay in an energized or deenergized state (output on) for some period of time, and then release the relay (output off) when the time schedule expires. The track schedule can be applied to any relay, regardless of what function it is assigned to. To assign a track schedule, click the arrow to the right of the Track Schedule control, scroll up or down to locate the desired schedule and click on it. If there are no selections available in the Track Schedule control, you need to create some in the Schedules screen. Refer the section Schedules to do this.
Energize Time The Energize Time control selects the length of time that the relay will remain energized, before returning to normal.
Fig. 52.13. The Energize Time control.
The default time is 0 seconds. When set to 0 seconds, the relay will not activate. The Energize Time must be set to a value greater than 0 seconds if you wish the relay to fire. The maximum Energize Time is 10,000 seconds (about 2.7 hours). To set the Energize Time, click the arrow buttons to the right of the Energize Time control or click in the white space and type a number.
Relays
Manual Control Privilege The Relays screen Manual Control Privilege control works in conjunction with the Manual Relay Control screen shown in figure 52.15 below.
Fig. 52.14. Relays screen Manual Control Privilege control.
Effectively, the Relays screen Manual Control Privileges control assigns the relay to a filter group. The filter group is intended to hide selected relays from the view of selected operators, in the Manual Relay Control screen. The effect is similar to database partitioning except that the object is to hide relays from view in the Manual Relay Control screen only, to prevent unauthorized manual activation of selected relays.
Fig. 52.15. The Manual Relay Control screen.
10
Relays
The Manual Relay Control screen allows operators to manually fire relays from inside the CardAccess software (see the manual section titled Manual Control). Hiding selected relays will prevent unauthorized activation of those relays. The Manual Relay Control screen uses the settings in the Operators screen, on the Privileges tab(Refer Device Control Privileges under Privileges Tab in the section Operators), of the currently logged in operator, to determine which of the relay privilege groups to make visible and which relays to hide, each time the Manual Relay Control screen is opened.
Enabled The Enabled check box activates or deactivates the relay at the panel.
When a relay is disabled, the relay is effectively dead. The relay cannot be activated by any means, including a time schedule or link. When relays are not enabled, they rest in a relaxed (un-powered), deactivated state. To enable or disable the relay, click the Enabled check box. Checked means enabled, unchecked means disabled.
Off-State Energized Effectively, relays have two hardware states; powered and un-powered. The default state for all newly created relay definitions is un-powered. When you create a new relay definition, the relay is enabled but no power is applied to the energizing coils of the relay by default. Further, the CardAccess software recognizes two software states for a relay; Output On and Output Off. By default Output On (the on-state) correlates to the energized state of the relay, and Output Off (the off-state) correlates to the de-energized state of the relay.
11
Relays
The Off-State Energized check box allows you to reverse the resting state of the relay from un-powered to powered.
Fig. 52.17. The Off-State Energized checkbox.
Fig 52.18 below graphically shows the electrical difference between off state de-energized (the normal state is un-powered) and off-state energized (the normal state becomes powered instead of un-powered).
Common Common
N.O. Normal
N.C.
N.O. N.C. Off-State Energized
Fig. 52.18. Relay Pin Out Connections (N.O. = Normally Open; N.C. = Normally Close)
Note that an Output On event message from a relay always means that the relay has been changed from its normal state. If you have enabled off-state energized, Output On means that the relay has been de-energized. If you have not enabled off-state energized, Output On means that the relay has been energized. To set the relay to Off-State Energized, click the check box. Checked is off-state energized and unchecked is off-state de-energized (the default).
Alert on Change By default, relay event messages are not reported. If you wish to enable the reporting of Output On and Output Off event messages for a selected relay, click the Alert on Change check box.
Fig. 52.19. The Alert on Change checkbox.
Checked is enabled and unchecked is disabled (the default).
12
Relays
Fig. 52.20. The Alert Requires Response checkbox.
Alert Requires Response box is not checked by default. In case a relay has this box checked, then all events from the selected relay will appear in the Alerts grid of CardAccess main screen. Also, the Alert Acknowledge popup window will be displayed forcing the operator to manually acknowledge the alerts. Note: Automatic alert acknowledgement feature will be disabled when Alert Requires Response box is checked. The manual alert acknowledgement feature will require the operator to type a Response Message in the Alert Acknowledge popup window and click the Acknowledge button to move the alerts from the Alerts Grid into the Events Grid. Click the checkbox to enable or disable the Alert Requires Response feature. Checked means enabled, unchecked means disabled.
Dialup on Change The Dialup on Change option is used only with dial up panels.
Fig. 52.21. The Dialup on Change checkbox.
Dialup panels save event messages in a memory buffer and wait to be dialed (on a regular schedule). While the panel is off-line, relays could be reporting potentially important event messages which the CardAccess computer will not be aware of until dialing in to pick up event messages at some time later. If you want the panel to dial the CardAccess PC each time the selected relay reports an Output On or Output Off event message, click the Dial Up on change check box.
13
Relays
Alert Priority The Alert Priority selection control allows you to set the default event priority value for relay type event messages from the selected relay.
The alert priority is used by the system to route event messages to the Events or Alerts Grids (see the manual section titled Setting Up Priorities for more information). To set the Alert Priority, click the arrows to the right of the Alert Priority control or click in the white space and type a number. The usable priority number range is 1-98.
Map Tab
The Map tab has controls that allow you to add or edit a map for the selected relay. The Map tab is not visible unless the Use Facility Maps Option is enabled in System Settings screen.
Fig. 52.23. The Relays Map tab.
For details on creation of maps, see the manual section titled Maps.
14
Relays
The controls in Map folder tab are explained below.
Facility Map for This Device This field displays the name of the map that is attached to the selected relay.
Size Image to fit
Image bitmaps come in all shapes and sizes. The CardAccess Maps image view control is set by default to stretch the image to fit the size of the image display window.
15
Relays
If Size Image to fit checkbox is disabled, the image will be displayed in its native size format (wherein white space may appear on the sides, or top and on the bottom). The check box is enabled by default. View Maps
Remove Map
16
Relays
The Location/Remarks tab can be used to mention the place of location and remarks (if any) on the selected relay.
Creating a Basic Relay Definition

Note that when you create a new relay definition, the system provides the following default settings automatically (unless you override those settings by changing the settings in the appropriate controls). Relay is enabled, Relay is available to be activated 24 hours per day, every day of the year. Relay is set to be normally de-energized. If there is a change in relay status, Output On and Output Off event messages will not be sent to the CardAccess host PC by the panel (you must enable them, if preferred). The Alert Requires Response function is disabled.
17
Relays
The Dial Up on Change function is disabled. The alert priority is set to 1 by default. Relay is not assigned to a group. Relay has no Track Schedule assigned. The relay Energize Time is set to 0 seconds. This means that the relay will not activate, even if it has been enabled and all other settings are correct. You must manually set the energize time to a value greater than 0. The Manual Control Privilege is set to All. This means that all operators will have access to manually activate the relay in the Manual Relay Control screen. Follow the steps below to create a basic relay definition: Open Relays screen by clicking on Configuration->Relays menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. Click on New button in the toolbar.
Click the down arrow to the right of Panel control and select a panel in the drop down list.
Note: If no panel names are seen in the list, it means that panel definitions are not yet created. It is necessary that you define panels before you can proceed with relay definitions.
18
Relays
Number the relay in the Relay # control (See the section on the Relay # explained above for detailed information).
Fig. 52.32. The Relay # control.
Relay can be numbered in two ways as below. o Click the white space of Relay # field and type in a number or o Use the up/down arrows to the right of Relay # control and choose a desired number. Click the white space of Name field and enter a descriptive name for the relay. A name that can describe the relay location/function is recommended.
You have just created a relay definition with all of the default operational settings as mentioned in the first part of this section.
19
Relays
Editing a Relay Definition

Open Relays screen by clicking on Configuration->Relays menu options in CardAccess main screen. By default, the screen will open in General tab. In the upper half of the screen, select the relay definition you wish to edit and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Make the desired changes to the controls in the folder tabs. Note: o The Relay # field cannot be edited. Relay # once set during Relay creation is not subject to change. o It is not possible to associate the selected relay with a different panel. In other words, a relay once associated with a particular panel is permanently attached to that specific panel only. The system will not allow you to change the panel name in the Panel control. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
Deleting a Relay Definition

Open Relays screen by clicking on Configuration->Relays menu options in CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, select the relay definition you wish to delete and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar. Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
20
Relays
Fig. 52.35. Message box displayed before deleting a relay record.
Note: Delete action cannot be reversed. A record deleted once is lost forever. Make sure you have chosen the correct record for deleting. After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen. Note: Deleting a relay definition will disable that relay at the concerned panel, thereby rendering the relay inoperative.
Relays Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 52.36. Relays screen navigation bar.
The Relays screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked relay records in the screen. In figure 52.36, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first relay record in the screen.
21
Relays
Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted relay record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted relay record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted relay record. Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted relay record. Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last relay record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted relay record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked relay record.
22
Scheduled Changes
Scheduled Changes
The Scheduled Changes screen is a utility screen where you can create schedules that can temporarily override standard schedules that were created using the Schedules screen. (Time) Schedules created in the Schedules screen can be applied to CardAccess hardware items such as Readers, Inputs, Relays and Links. These time schedules modify the behavior of the concerned hardware items (for more information, see the section on Schedules). Technically speaking, override schedules work identical to the schedules discussed in the Schedules section. The main difference between an override schedule and a standard schedule is that, an override schedule will preempt the standard schedule, if set up to do so. In fact, that is the main purpose of an Override Schedule, to preempt any other schedule that has been applied to the given hardware item.
Accessing Scheduled Changes Screen

Click on Control menu in CardAccess main menu bar. Click on Scheduled Changes menu option in the list. Upon clicking, the Scheduled Changes screen will be displayed as below.
Scheduled Changes
Fig. 61.1. The Scheduled Changes screen.
The controls in the screen are explained below. Description The Description field is meant for entering a descriptive name for the new schedule being defined in the Scheduled Changes screen. The new schedule is intended to override the time schedule that is currently applied to the given hardware item.
Scheduled Changes
Device to Change In the Device to Change section, you will be selecting the hardware item (in question), whose current time schedule you wish to change.
Fig. 61.3. The Device to Change section
The Device control is one control that governs all other controls in this section. This control is used for specifying the hardware device category of the hardware item (in question), whose time schedule you wish to change.
Fig. 61.4. The Device control.
The Device control and all other controls in this section will be grayed out by default (see figure 61.3 above). Only the control labels will be visible; but, control options will not be available for selection. The controls will be activated only in the New/Edit modes. One of the four options- Reader, Input, Relay or Link is selectable in the Device control, while you are in the New/Edit Mode.
Fig. 61.5. Options offered by Device control in New/Edit modes.
Scheduled Changes
The option you select here will govern the label of the control found immediately below the Device control, as well as, the options offered by every other control in this section (that is, Device to Change section). For example, if you select the option Reader in the Device control (as in the figure below), the control immediately below the Device control will display the label Reader (see figure below). The Reader control will now offer a list of all Reader hardware items that are created in the CardAccess Readers screen. So also, the Group control will offer Reader groups that are created in the Groups screen, and the Field control will offer the list of all Reader time schedule fields as available in the Readers screen.
Fig. 61.6. Reader time schedules listed in Field control on selecting Reader hardware device.
Similarly, selection of Input, Relay or Link hardware device will offer the respective hardware items, groups and time schedule fields, in these controls.
Scheduled Changes
Change to be Made In the Change to be Made section, you will be defining a new schedule that will override the (current) time schedule set for the hardware item, selected in the Device to Change section.
Fig. 61.7. The Change to be Made section.
The controls in this section are explained below. New Time Schedule The New Time Schedule control stores all of the time schedules that are defined in the Schedules screen. A click on the down arrow will show a list of all the time schedules.
Fig. 61.8. The New Time Schedule control.
You can choose a schedule of your choice to, temporarily override the time schedule currently set for the hardware item, that is selected in the Device to Change section.
Scheduled Changes
Effective Date Range The Effective Date Range area has two calendar controls- From and To. Clicking the calendar button (marked as 15) of these controls, will open up the calendar window, that can be used for setting the Start Day and the End Day of the new time schedule, being defined in the Scheduled Changes screen.
Fig. 61.9. The Effective Date Range area for setting the Start Day and End Day of the override time schedule.
Note: Unlike the Schedules screen, the Scheduled Changes screen only allows you to set the Start Day and the End Day of the override schedule, but not the Start Time and the End Time for that schedule. Thus, the shortest duration the new schedule can have is, one day. That day starts at midnight of the From day, and ends at midnight of the To day. But, there is no limit on the number of days that the override time schedule can span.
Scheduled Changes
Defining a Scheduled Change

Follow the steps below if you wish to override the time schedule that is currently set for the given hardware item. 1. Decide on which time schedule of the given hardware item you wish to change, go to the corresponding CardAccess hardware screen and note down the schedule set for the same in the corresponding time schedule field. 2. Open Scheduled changes screen by clicking on Control Scheduled Changes menu options in the CardAccess main screen. 3. Click on New button in Scheduled Changes screen toolbar for defining a new schedule. The new schedule is intended to override the time schedule currently set for the given hardware item. On clicking New, all of the controls in the Device to Change section will be activated. 4. In the Description field, enter a descriptive name for the new time schedule.
5. Click the down arrow to the right of Device control and choose the hardware device category, of the given hardware item.
Fig. 61.11. Hardware device categories available.
Scheduled Changes
Now, the control found immediately below the Device control will display the same label as the hardware device category you have selected. Figure 61.12 below shows the label Reader as a result of choosing Reader option in the Device control. 6. Click the down arrow to the right of the control below Device control, locate the name of the given hardware item, and click on it.
Fig. 61.12. Selecting the hardware item in question.
7. (If necessary) Click the down arrow to the right of Group control, and choose a group for the hardware item selected.
Fig. 61.13. Selecting a group for the hardware item.
8. Click the down arrow to the right of Field control and click on the time schedule field of interest, whose current time schedule you wish to change.
Scheduled Changes
Fig. 61.14. Selecting a time schedule field.
You will be overriding the time schedule currently set for this particular field, as noted in step 1. 9. Click the down arrow to the right of the New Time Schedule field and choose a time schedule of your choice in the list. Note: The time schedule you select here must be different from the schedule you have noted in step 1.
Fig. 61.15. Selecting a new time schedule to override the schedule noted in step 1.
10. In the From control, specify the Start Day of the new time schedule. There are two methods to do this. a) Type the date of the Start Day in MM/DD/YY or MM/DD/YYYY date format, in the From control.
Fig. 61.16. The From control.
b) Choose the date of the Start Day using the calendar window. The following steps are involved:
Scheduled Changes
o Click on the calendar button (marked as 15) to the right of From field. Upon clicking, a calendar window of the current month and year will be opened, with the current date in highlight.
Note: Double left/right arrows and single left/right arrows are provided at the top of the screen to scroll backward/forward through the dates/months of any year, in order to aid in the selection of a desired date. o Click on a desired date in the calendar window. The scheduled change starts at midnight (12 AM) of the date you specify in the From control. 11. Similarly, in the To control, specify the End Day of the new time schedule.
Fig. 61.18. The To control.
The scheduled change ends at midnight (12 AM) of the date you specify in the To control. 12. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the settings. 13. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
10
Scheduled Changes
Editing a Scheduled Change

Only scheduled changes that are not in effect can be edited. The following steps may be followed to edit such records. Open Scheduled changes screen by clicking on Control Scheduled Changes menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, locate the scheduled change record you wish to edit, and click on it. Click on Edit button in the toolbar. On clicking, all of the controls in the Device to Change section will be activated. Note: In case you are accidentally attempting to edit a scheduled change that is in effect, you will see the following message box on clicking the Edit button.
11
Scheduled Changes
Fig. 61.19. Message box displayed on clicking Edit button in case the selected scheduled change record is in effect.
Make desired changes to the controls in the screen. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes. Click on Close button to close the screen.
12
Scheduled Changes
Deleting a Scheduled Change

Two buttons can perform the delete function in the Scheduled Changes screen. The buttons and their operating conditions are as follows. The Delete button- The Delete button can only delete a scheduled change that is not in effect.
Fig. 61.20. The Delete button for deleting a scheduled change that is not in effect.
The Cancel Active button- The Cancel Active button can be used to delete a scheduled change that is in effect. A scheduled change while in effect will blink a message in red color, in the lower half of the screen.
Fig. 61.21. The Cancel Active button for deleting a scheduled change in effect.
Note: The Delete button (although enabled) will not serve to delete a scheduled change that is in effect. In case you use the Delete button for deleting such a record, the message box shown in the figure below will be displayed.
13
Scheduled Changes
Fig. 61.22. Message box displayed if Delete button is used (clicked) to delete a scheduled change that is in effect.
The following sections detail the usage of these buttons.
14
Scheduled Changes
Deleting a Scheduled Change (Not In Effect) Follow the steps below if you wish to delete a scheduled change that is not in effect. Open Scheduled changes screen by clicking on Control Scheduled Changes menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, locate the (not in effect) scheduled change record you wish to delete, and click on it. Click on Delete button in the toolbar.
Fig. 61.23. Clicking on Delete button to delete a scheduled change that is not in effect.
Upon clicking, the following message box will be displayed.
Fig. 61.24. Message box displayed on clicking Delete button, for deleting a scheduled change not in effect.
15
Scheduled Changes
Deleting a Scheduled Change (In Effect) Follow the steps below if you wish to delete a scheduled change that is in effect. Open Scheduled changes screen by clicking on Control Scheduled Changes menu options in the CardAccess main screen. In the upper half of the screen, locate the scheduled change record (in effect) you wish to delete, and click on it. A scheduled change that is in effect will blink a message in red color, in the lower half of the screen. Click on Cancel Active button in the toolbar.
Fig. 61.25. Clicking on Cancel Active button to delete a scheduled change that is in effect.
On clicking, the Confirm message box shown in the figure below will be displayed.
16
Scheduled Changes
Fig. 61.26. Message box displayed on clicking Cancel Active button, for deleting a scheduled change in effect.
Note: Delete action cannot be reversed. A record deleted once is lost forever. Make sure you have chosen the correct record for deleting. After confirmation, click on Yes button in the message box. On clicking Yes, another message box will be displayed as below.
Fig. 61.27. The last message box displayed before deleting. 17
Scheduled Changes
Read the message in the box and click on OK button. Click on Close button in the toolbar to close the screen.
Scheduled Changes Screen Navigation Bar

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 61.28. The Scheduled Changes screen navigation bar.
The Scheduled Changes screen navigation bar can be found in the middle of the screen. The arrows of the bar can be used for viewing older/newer/bookmarked scheduled change records in the screen. In figure 61.28, we have numbered the arrow buttons of the bar to provide simpler explanation. The functions of the arrow buttons are as follows: Arrow 1: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 1 will display the message First record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the very first scheduled change record in the screen. Arrow 2: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 2 will display the message Prior page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last record in the page previous to the current page, containing the highlighted scheduled change record. Arrow 3: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 3 will display the message Prior record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record previous to the currently highlighted scheduled change record. Arrow 4: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 4 will display the message Next record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the record appearing after the currently highlighted scheduled change record.
18
Scheduled Changes
Arrow 5: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 5 will display the message Next page. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the first record in the page appearing after the current page, containing the highlighted scheduled change record. Arrow 6: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 6 will display the message Last record. Accordingly, clicking on this arrow will highlight the last scheduled change record in the screen. Arrow 7: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 7 will display the message Save Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will bookmark the highlighted scheduled change record. Arrow 8: Placing the mouse cursor over arrow 8 will display the message Goto Bookmark. Clicking on this arrow will highlight the previously bookmarked scheduled change record.
19
Script Editor
Script Editor
Scripts generated using the Script Wizard can be customized in the Script Editor. Scripts are written in Pascal programming language. Most users will not need to use the Script Editor; this screen is for advanced users only. For more details on the commands that can be executed, please see the section titled Scripting Language below.
Accessing the Script Editor

In the CardAccess main screen, click on Configuration menu and move your mouse over the Scripting menu option to display the submenu.
Fig. 65.1. Scripting menu option under Configuration menu.
Note: The Scripting menu option will be seen under Configuration menu only if the Use Scripting checkbox is selected in the System Settings screen, on the Scripting tab. Click on Script Editor option in the sub-menu.
Script Editor
Fig. 65.2. The Script Editor sub-menu option.
On clicking, you will see the Script Editor screen as below. The upper half of the screen will show the list of scripts that were generated using the Script Wizard. The lower half of the screen will show the script in Pascal programming language for the script highlighted in the view window.
Script Editor
Fig. 65.3. The Script Editor.
The lower half of the screen has a few controls. The controls are explained below.
Script Editor
Script Editor Screen Controls
Fig. 65.4. The Script Editor Controls.
Script Name The Script Name control will show the name of the highlighted script as entered in the Script Wizard. If you wish to change this name, you need to click the Edit button on the toolbar, and type in a desired name in the field.
Fig. 65.5. The Script Name control.
Generate Event on Execute By default the Generate Event on Execute checkbox will be checked for all scripts in the Script Editor.
Fig. 65.6. The Generate Event on Execute checkbox.
When checked, the system will generate an event whenever the selected script is executed. If you do not wish to see an event message for the selected script, click the Edit button on the toolbar, and click the checkbox to uncheck it.
Script Editor
Event Priority The Event Priority spin control will show the default value 50 for all scripts in the Editor. This means that the event message when generated for a selected script will be assigned the default value 50. This value (along with the settings on the Alerts tab of System Settings screen) will determine whether the event will be shown on the Events grid or the Pending Alerts grid of the CardAccess main screen.
Fig. 65.7. The Event Priority control.
In case you wish to change the default priority value, click the Edit button on the toolbar, and enter a number of your choice. This can be done in two ways as below. o Clicking the white space of the spin control, deleting the default value, and entering a new priority number. You can enter any number in the range 1-98. o Using the up/down arrows of the spin control to choose the desired number.
Script Editor
Scripting Language
The script server provides an object that facilitates several advanced calls to be executed in a script. This object is called ScriptControl. Below is a list of various properties and methods of the ScriptControl. The syntax for scripting is in Pascal language. Only advanced users familiar with Pascal programming language must attempt to modify the existing scripts or create new scripts. Properties of ScriptControl Cat (integer): Category of the event Seqno (string): Unique identifier used to identify the event Priority (integer): Priority of the event Pending (Boolean): If true, then the event is currently a pending alert EventDate (Double): Date and Time of the event PanelNumber (integer): Panel number of the event DeviceNumber (integer) Reader, relay, etc. of the event (Cat is used to determine what type this is. Status (integer): Status code of the event EventClass (string): Text for Class column on the Events grid EventDescription (string): Text for Description column on the Events grid. EventName (string): Text for Location column in the event grid ResponseRequired (Boolean): Determines whether an operator must enter a response message for the selected event
Script Editor
FacilityCode (integer): Facility code of the badge that generated the event BadgeNumber (string): Badge number of the badge that generated the event TagNumber (integer): Tag number (Badge Number) associated with the event Methods of ScriptControl procedure alarmArmArea(iPanelNum: integer; iAreaNum: integer; iUserNum: integer); procedure alarmDisarmArea(iPanelNum: integer; iAreaNum: integer; iUserNum: integer); procedure performRelayCommand(iPanelNum: integer; iRelayNum: integer; iRelayAction: integer); procedure performDoorCommand(iPanelNum: integer; iDoorNum: integer; iDoorAction: integer; iDoorEnableAction: integer); procedure performLinkCommand(iPanelNum: integer; iLinkNum: integer; iLinkAction: integer); function getInListCount: integer; procedure disableBadge(facilityCode: integer; badgeNumber: string); procedure enableBadge(facilityCode: integer; badgeNumber: string); procedure trackBadge(facilityCode: integer; badgeNumber: string);
Script Editor
procedure untrackBadge(facilityCode: integer; badgeNumber: string); procedure setBadgeAPB(facilityCode: integer; badgeNumber: string; APBSetting: integer); procedure executeSQLCommand(sqlText: string);
Script Links
Script Links
In the section Script Wizard, we learnt how to create a script for an event type of choice. A typical script (created in the Wizard) will include a set actions that will execute for the chosen event type only. In case you wish to execute the same set of actions on other event type(s) (belonging to the same or different hardware device) of choice, you can choose to link the existing script to the other event type(s) as well. This can be done in the Script Links screen. Script linking proves to be a time saving feature as you can conveniently load the settings of an existing script (generated for a particular event type) onto other event type(s), with the help of a single screen. If this feature was absent, you would have to visit the Script Wizard again and encounter all of its screens to create the required script. We shall now let us look at how to access the Script Links screen and how to link an existing script to other event types.
Accessing Script Links Screen

Fig. 66.1. Scripting menu option under Configuration menu. 1
Script Links
Note: The Scripting menu option will be seen under Configuration menu only if the Use Scripting checkbox is selected in the System Settings screen, on the Scripting tab. Click on Script Links option in the sub-menu.
Fig. 66.2. The Script Links sub-menu option.
On clicking, you will see the Script Links screen as below. The screen will show a list of all Continental and NAPCO Alarm Panels that are created previously in the Panels and NAPCO Panel Configuration screens respectively.
Script Links
Fig. 66.3. The Script Links screen.
What you will be doing in this screen is navigating to the event type (associated with a hardware device of choice) for which you wish to link an existing script. This will be explained in detail below. Notice that in figure 66.3, all toolbar buttons (except the Close button) are grayed out by default. The New button required to create a script link will be activated only after you select a script server to run the script for the selected event type. The steps to arrive at selecting a script server are explained below.
Script Links
Script Link to an Event Type

Follow the steps below to link a script to an event type of choice. 1. Open Script Links screen by clicking on Configuration Scripting Script Links menu options in the CardAccess main screen. The Script Links screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 66.4. The Script Links screen.
Observe that the left hand side of the screen shows the list of panels previously created in the CardAccess software. Note: The New button essential for the linking process is grayed out by default. It can be enabled by following the below steps.
Script Links
2. Click on a desired panel name that is connected to the hardware item of interest, whose Event type you wish to link with an existing script. On clicking, the hardware items connected to that panel will be revealed. Each of these items will be provided with nodes (+ marks).
Fig. 66.5. Clicking on Panel 5 panel to view the hardware items connected to it.
Note: If a hardware item does not show a node (Inputs, Relays and Links as in the above figure), it means that no records are created for that item in the CardAccess. If you wish to link an Event type of such an item with a script, you must first create records for that item in the corresponding hardware screen. Please refer the sections Panels, Readers, Inputs, Relays and Links to learn about creating hardware item records. 3. Click on a desired hardware item node. Doing this will reveal the various records created for that item.
Fig. 66.6. Clicking on Readers node.
4. Click on a desired hardware item record. Doing this will offer you the Events node.
Script Links
Fig. 66.7. Clicking on Reader 5 node.
5. Click on Events node. Doing this will show the list of all Event types associated with the selected hardware item record.
Fig. 66.8. List of Reader 5 event types.
6. Select a desired event type to which you wish to link a script, and click on the event type node. Doing this will show the available script servers in the system.
Script Links
Fig. 66.9. List of Script Server that can run a script for Door Manual Control event type.
Note: o The servers seen in the list are those that are added previously in the System Settings screen, on the Scripting tab. If none are seen in the list, you need to add them first. Refer the section System Settings to do this. o Each script server will operate independent of the others. In other words, suppose a particular script is stored on two servers say, each server will run the script for the event type specified on the individual server instance. 7. Click on the server you wish to run the script from.
Script Links
Fig. 66.10. Selecting a server to run the script required for Door Manual Control events at Reader 5.
After server selection, you will see the New button enabled on the toolbar. 8. Click the New button for linking a script to the selected event type. On clicking New, a few controls will be displayed on the lower half of the screen.
Fig. 66.11. Controls displayed on lower half of the screen after clicking on New button.
You will see the default name New Script in the Script Link Name field. The default name can be changed appropriately after a desired script is selected for linking. The Script Link Enabled checkbox will be selected by
Script Links
default. It is necessary that this box remains checked if you want the script link to function. 9. Click the down arrow to the right of Script Name control to view the list of existing scripts, and click on a desired script. Note: The scripts shown are those that are created previously using the Script Wizard. If none are shown, you need to generate the scripts first. Please refer the section Script Wizard to learn how to generate scripts.
Fig. 66.12. Selecting a script for linking.
10. You can now enter a meaningful name for the script link in the Script Link Name control. 11. In case you want to execute the selected script for a particular badge only, you may enter the Facility Code and Badge Number of that badge in the Facility Code and Badge Number fields respectively. Note: When the specified script server receives a badge event from the mentioned hardware device, the server will search for a script with a matching facility code and badge number. If such a script is found, then the server will run the particular script. In case no matching script is found, the server will look for a script with facility code and badge number that equal zero, and run that script. 12. Click the Save button on the toolbar to save the settings. 13. Click on Close button to close the screen. A script thus linked will not only run for the event type specified here on the Script Links screen, but also on the event type for which the script was originally generated in the Script Wizard. Please note that the event types are hardware specific. Similarly, you can link scripts for all other event types specific to the hardware devices of your choice.
9
Script Wizard
Introduction
caScriptServer
In the section System Settings, we learnt how to add caScriptServers (commonly referred to as script servers) on the Scripting tab. The script servers provide a method of linking events in the CardAccess system to a pre-defined set of actions. The actions can be as simple as firing a relay or arming a NAPCO alarm panel, or as complex as adjusting the badge settings or modifying the database fields.
Scope
This document explains how scripts can be generated using the Script Wizard.
Terminology
A Script Server contains several key areas that need to be configured for proper working. Please review these terms before you continue further with the document. We will make use of these terms through the entire document. caScriptServer: This is the application that runs the scripts. Script Wizard: This is a tool in the CardAccess 3000 GUI that will help automate the creation of scripts and links. Script: A script is a series of instructions that will be interpreted and executed by the caScriptServer. Scripts are written in Pascal programming language. A script can be reused in multiple script links. Script Link: This is a reference between a particular event and a script.
1
Script Wizard
Script Editor: This allows the user to customize the scripts that are created using the Script Wizard. It also helps in creating new scripts.
Script Wizard
The Script Wizard is designed to make the initial setup of scripts quick and easy. Many users will only use this feature, and will not need to create custom scripts using the Script Editor. Several steps are involved in using the Script Wizard. These steps will be used to identify what event to associate the script with (Script Link) as well as what actions the script should contain. Not all of the actions that can be performed are in the Script Wizard. Only the most commonly used actions are included in the wizard. For more advanced scripts, please refer the section Scripting Language. Let us look at the Script Wizard in detail.
Accessing the Script Wizard

Fig. 64.1. Scripting menu option under Configuration menu.
Script Wizard
Note: The Scripting menu option will be seen under Configuration menu only if the Use Scripting checkbox is selected in the System Settings screen, on the Scripting tab. Click on Script Wizard option in the sub-menu.
Fig. 64.2. The Script Wizard sub-menu option.
On clicking, you will see the Welcome screen of Script Wizard as in figure 64.3 below.
Script Wizard
Creating a Script
Below we look at the steps for creating a script using the Script Wizard. 1. Open the Script Wizard screen by clicking on Configuration Scripting Script Wizard menu options in the CardAccess main screen. On clicking, you will see the welcome screen as below.
Fig. 64.3. Welcome screen of Script Wizard.
2. In the Welcome screen, you will be specifying the event type and its sub-type for which the current script will be executed. Below are the steps to do this. a. Click the down arrow of the first drop down box, and select the event type you wish to script.
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.4. Commonly used event types for scripting.
Note: In case you select the Card Read event type in figure 64.4, you will see one screen in the Wizard (figure 64.11 below) that is unique to only this event type. The screen can be used if you wish the current script to change the badge settings of cards, or to dedicate the current script to one particular badge. b. Click the down arrow of the second drop down box, and select the desired sub-type of the selected event type. Note: The event sub-type list is dependant on the event type selected in step a.
Fig. 64.5. Selecting a sub-type of the selected event type.
c. Click the Next button after selecting the event sub-type. On clicking Next, you will see the second wizard screen.
5
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.6. The second screen of Script Wizard.
Note: In all of the wizard screens, the Previous button can be used to view the settings made in the previous screen. The Cancel button can be used if you wish to exit from the Script Wizard at any point of time. 3. In the second wizard screen, you will be specifying a Panel and a hardware device for which the current script will execute. Below are the steps to do this. a. Click the down arrow of the first drop down box, and select a Panel of interest. Note: o The Panels list can show either Continental panels or NAPCO Alarm Panels. This depends on the event type selected in figure 64.4. o Only panels that are Enabled (Enabled checkbox selected in the concerned hardware screen) will be seen in the list.
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.7. List of Panels.
b. Click the down arrow of the second drop down box, and select a device of your choice. The Script being created will be executed for events occurrences at the hardware device you select here. Note: o The devices seen in the list depend on the event type and the panel selected in step 2a and step 3a respectively. Suppose the selections are NAPCO Zone Event type and Alarm Panel 2 say, the devices list will show all Enabled NAPCO Zones that belong to Alarm Panel 2. o Only devices that are Enabled (that is, Enabled checkbox selected in the corresponding hardware screen) will be seen in the list. o The device selection control will not be shown in case the event type selected in figure 64.4 is NAPCO Panel Event.
Fig. 64.8. Selecting a hardware device.
c. Click the Next button after device selection. On clicking Next, you will see the third wizard screen.
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.9. The third screen of Script Wizard.
4. In the third wizard screen, click the down arrow of the control, and select a desired Script Server. The server selected here will run the current script.
Fig. 64.10. Selecting a Script server.
Note: The servers seen in the list are those that are previously added in the System Settings screen, on the Scripting tab. If none are seen in the list, you need to add them first. Refer the section System Settings to do this. Click the Next button after server selection. 5. The screen shown in figure 64.11 below will be displayed only if Card Read event type was selected in figure 64.4. In case your
Script Wizard
selection is not Card Read, please skip this step and proceed to step 6.
Fig. 64.11. Wizard screen for Card Read event type.
This screen can be used to have the current script change the badge settings of all card reads once the script is executed, or dedicate the current script to one particular badge. Note: In case you neither wish to change the badge settings nor dedicate the current script to any single badge, you may leave this screen in its default state, and click the Next button to continue further with the Wizard. The purposes of the wizard screen in figure 64.11 are detailed below. Purpose 1 The first purpose is to have the current script change select badge settings of all badge reads. The settings that can be subjected to change after script execution are: - Tracked status, Enabled status and APB settings of the badges. The first three checkboxes in the screen are concerned with these settings. The default options chosen for these settings are Tracked, Enabled and In respectively (see figure 64.11 above).
Script Wizard
If you wish the current script to change any/all of these badge settings, please follow the below steps. o Decide on the badge setting (Tracked, Enabled or APB) you wish to change on script execution. o Click the checkbox provided for the chosen badge setting. This will enable the corresponding edit control on the right.
Fig. 64.12. Edit control on the right activated after checkbox selection.
o Click the down arrow of the edit control to see the options available for that badge setting, and click on a desired option.
Fig. 64.13. Options available for Tracked status of badges.
o Similarly, you can change the other two badge settings also, if desired. When the script is executed, the chosen badge settings will change according to the specifications in their edit controls. Purpose 2 In case you wish the current script to execute for one particular badge read only, then you need to check the fourth checkbox and enter the Facility Number and Badge Number of that badge, in the fields provided.
Fig. 64.14. Facility Number and Badge Number controls activated after checking the fourth checkbox.
10
Script Wizard
Note: In case the other three checkboxes are checked, the settings specified in their edit controls will be apply for the badge number mentioned here in the Badge Number field. Click the Next button once you have defined your purpose (Purpose 1 or 2) as explained above. On clicking Next, you will see the NAPCO arming/disarming actions screen. This screen is meant for selecting the arm/disarm action for the NAPCO Areas you wish to include in the current script. 6. The arming/disarming actions screen will show a list of *Enabled NAPCO Alarm Panels that have at least one NAPCO Area *Configured. The NAPCO Panels will be seen with nodes (- sign). The default option No Action will be selected for all items in the screen.
Fig. 64.15. List of Enabled NAPCO Alarm Panels and Configured NAPCO Areas in CardAccess 3000. * Enabled- A NAPCO Alarm Panel is enabled when the Enabled checkbox is checked for that panel in the NAPCO Panel Configuration screen.
11
Script Wizard * Configured- A NAPCO Area is functional only when the Configured checkbox is checked for that NAPCO Area in the NAPCO Area Configuration screen.
You can choose to arm/disarm the NAPCO Areas of your interest. Note: If you do not intend to perform arm/disarm action on any of the listed NAPCO Areas, you may click the Next button at this stage to proceed to step 7. You may follow the below steps if you wish to arm/disarm the NAPCO Areas. a. Click the default option No Action corresponding to the NAPCO Area of interest. Doing this will show a down arrow to the right of the default option.
Fig. 64.16. Down arrow displayed on clicking No Action option of a desired NAPCO Area.
b. Click the down arrow to see the possible NAPCO actions.
12
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.17. The possible NAPCO Alarm actions.
c. Click on arm/disarm action for the selected NAPCO Area. Note: In case you wish to execute a particular NAPCO action for all areas under a NAPCO Panel, the selection process can be eased by choosing the action for the concerned NAPCO Panel itself. This will cause all Areas under the panel to have automatic and simultaneous selection of the chosen NAPCO action.
Fig. 64.18. Disarm action applied to all NAPCO Areas after the action is selected for the NAPCO Alarm Panel named Alarm Panel 1.
This serves as a time saving feature when several NAPCO Areas are involved. d. Repeat steps a-c above for other NAPCO Areas you wish to arm/disarm. e. Click on Next button to continue further with the Script Wizard. On clicking Next, you will see the Relay Commands screen. This screen is meant for selecting Relay commands for the Relays you wish to include in the current script. 7. In the Relay Commands screen, you will see a listing of all Continental Relays that are created in the CardAccess Relays screen. The (Continental) Panels that those Relays are connected to are shown by
13
Script Wizard
nodes (- sign). The default option No Action will be selected for all items in the screen.
Fig. 64.19. The Relay Commands screen.
You can choose commands for the relays of your choice. Note: If you do not intend to execute relay commands on any of the listed relays, you may click the Next button at this stage to proceed to step 8. You may follow the below steps if you wish to choose a relay command. a. Click the default option No Action corresponding to the relay of choice. Doing this will show a down arrow to the right of the default option.
14
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.20. Down arrow displayed on clicking No Action option of a desired Relay item.
b. Click the down arrow to see the possible Relay commands.
Fig. 64.21. The possible Relay commands.
c. Click on a desired command for the selected Relay. Note: In case you wish to execute a particular command on all Relays under a Panel, the selection process can be eased by choosing the command for the concerned Panel itself. This will cause all relays under the panel to have automatic and simultaneous selection of the chosen command.
15
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.22. Momentary On command automatically applied to all Relays after the command is selected for Panel 1.
This will save you from having to select the command individually for each relay. d. Repeat steps a-c above if you wish to execute relay commands for other Relays of interest. e. Click on Next button to continue. On clicking Next, you will see the Door Commands screen. This screen is meant for selecting Door and/or Reader commands for the Readers you wish to include in the current script.
16
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.23. The Door Commands screen.
8. In the Door Commands screen, you will see a listing of all Continental Panels and Readers that are created in the CardAccess Panels and Readers screens respectively. The panels are seen with nodes (- sign). Each panel and Reader item will have the default option No Action selected. If desired, you can choose Door and/or Reader commands for the Readers of your choice. Note: In case you do not intend to execute door/Reader commands on any of the listed Readers, you may click the Next button at this stage to proceed to step 9. You may follow the below steps if you wish to choose a door and/or Reader command.
17
Script Wizard
a. For executing a door command on a particular Reader, click the first No Action option corresponding to the Reader, click the down arrow that appears, and then click on a desired door command in the list.
Fig. 64.24. Selecting a door command for a desired Reader.
b. For executing a reader command on a particular Reader, click the second No Action option corresponding to the Reader, click the down arrow that appears, and then click on a desired reader command in the list.
18
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.25. The available Reader commands.
Note: In case you wish to execute a particular door/reader command on all readers under a Panel, the selection process can be eased by choosing the command for the concerned Panel itself. This will cause all Readers under the panel to have automatic and simultaneous selection of the chosen command.
19
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.26. Unlock door command automatically applied to all Readers after the command is selected for Panel 1.
c. Repeat steps a and b above if you wish to execute door/reader commands on other Readers of interest. d. Click on Next button to continue. On clicking Next, you will see the Link Actions screen. This screen is meant for selecting Link actions for the links you wish to include in the current script.
20
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.27. The Link Actions screen.
9. In the Link Actions screen, you will see a listing of all Continental Links that are created in the CardAccess Links screen. The (Continental) Panels that those Links are connected to are shown by nodes (- sign). The default option No Action will be selected for all items in the screen. If desired, you can choose Link actions for the Links of your choice. Note: If you do not intend to perform link actions on any of the listed links, you may click the Next button at this stage to proceed to step 10. You may follow the below steps if you wish to choose a link action. a. Click the default option No Action corresponding to the link of choice. Doing this will show a down arrow to the right of the default option.
21
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.28. Down arrow displayed on clicking No Action option of a desired link item.
b. Click the down arrow to see the possible Link actions.
Fig. 64.29. The possible Link actions.
c. Click on a desired link action in the list. Note: In case you wish to execute a particular action on all Links under a Panel, the selection process can be eased by choosing the action for the concerned Panel itself. This will cause all Links under the panel to have automatic and simultaneous selection of the chosen action.
22
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.30. Activate action automatically applied to all Links after the action is selected for Panel 1.
d. Repeat steps a-c above if you wish to execute link actions on other links of interest. e. Click on Next button to continue. On clicking Next, you will see the last screen of Script Wizard.
23
Script Wizard
Fig. 64.31. The last screen of Script Wizard.
10. The final wizard screen will show the auto-generated names for the current script and script Link. It is suggested that you replace the default names with descriptive naming as in the sample below.
Fig. 64.32. Descriptive names entered for the script and script link.
Lastly, you need to click on Finish button to generate the script. If you wish to execute the same set of actions (included in the generated script) for other event type(s), you can link the script to the other event type(s) of interest. A separate screen named Script Links is provided for this purpose. Please refer the section Script Links for more details on script linking. In case the script generated needs to be edited for some reason, it can be done so in the screen named Script Editor. Beware that only advanced
24
Script Wizard
users having a sound knowledge in Pascal programming language must attempt script editing. Refer the section Script Editor for more details.
25
Contents
Setting Up Priorities....................................................................... 2
Panels...................................................................................................... 2 Controls for Alert Acknowledgement ............................................... 3 Panel Event Priorities......................................................................... 3 Changing Default Priority Value ....................................................... 4 Requires Operator Response.............................................................. 4 Readers................................................................................................... 5 Priority Settings section ..................................................................... 6 Controls for Alert Acknowledgement ............................................... 6 Priority ............................................................................................... 7 Changing Default Priority Value ....................................................... 7 Requires Alert Response.................................................................... 7 Miscellaneous Priorities..................................................................... 8 Controls for Alert Acknowledgement ............................................... 8 Enable Oper Acknowledge ................................................................ 9 Priority ............................................................................................... 9 Changing Default Priority Value ....................................................... 9 Requires Alert Response.................................................................. 10 Inputs.................................................................................................... 11 Controls for Alert Acknowledgement ............................................. 11 Alert Priority .................................................................................... 12 Changing Default Priority Value ..................................................... 12 Response Required........................................................................... 12 Relays ................................................................................................... 13 Controls for Alert Acknowledgement ............................................. 14 Alert Priority .................................................................................... 14 Changing Default Priority Value ..................................................... 15 Alert on Change ............................................................................... 15 Alert Requires Response.................................................................. 15 Links ..................................................................................................... 16 Controls for Alert Acknowledgement ............................................. 16 Alert Priority .................................................................................... 17 Changing Default Priority Value ..................................................... 17 Alert Requires Response.................................................................. 18
Setting Up Priorities
Every event generated in the CardAccess system has a programmable priority value setting. By design, the CardAccess main screen is divided into two grids for receiving normal (low priority) and abnormal (high priority) events. Attaching priority numbers to the events will allow the system to route high priority events to Alerts grid and low priority Events to the Events grid of CardAccess main screen. The Priority Number range is 1-99, where 1 is the highest priority and 99 is the lowest priority number in the range. However 99 is a special number. Events set to Priority value 99 will never report in the CardAccess system. In other words, they are suppressed. Thus, the actual usable Priority Number range is 198. Note: Auto acknowledgement feature for Alerts requires that, alerts are attached to specific priority numbers previously. This section mainly explains those controls in the hardware device screens that you must configure, if you want to enable auto-acknowledgement of alerts. The hardware device screens that have controls for setting up priorities in CardAccess are: Panels Readers Inputs Relays Links Setting up alert priorities in each of the screens is explained below.
Panels
Open Panels screen by clicking Configuration menu and Panels menu item in CardAccess main screen. By default, Panels screen will open in General tab. Priority values for CardAccess Panel events can be set in Priorities tab. A click on Priorities tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 15. Panels screen in Priorities tab.
Controls for Alert Acknowledgement

The Priorities tab in Panels screen provides the following controls for acknowledgement of panel alerts.
Panel Event Priorities The Panel Event Priorities section shows four labeled spin controls as shown in figure 15. The labels describe the panel event types in CardAccess. By default, the system loads default priority values to each of the event types as shown in figure 15. The system loaded priority values can be changed as desired. The priority values aid in routing of the events to one of the two grids (Events/Alerts) in the CardAccess main screen. Priority values set for the events in Panels screen will be overridden by Auto Ack Priority Set-Point value set in the System Settings screen. The Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control is explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings.
Changing Default Priority Value The system loaded default priority values can be changed as desired. The usable Priority Number range is 1-98, where 1 is the highest priority and 98 is the lowest priority number in the range. Follow the steps below to change the default priority number: Click on Edit button in the toolbar. Change the default priority number. This can be done by o Typing in a desired number in Priority spin control or o Using up/down arrows of the spin control to choose a desired number. Click on Save button in the toolbar to save the changes.
Requires Operator Response Each of the Alert priorities has a check box labeled Requires Operator Response as shown in figure 15. By default this box is unchecked. If a priority has this check box selected, automatic acknowledgement of the concerned alert type will be disabled. Manual acknowledgement will be required to resolve the alert upon its occurrence. In manual alert acknowledgement, the operator is forced to respond to an alert by typing in a Response Message in the Alert Acknowledge popup window and clicking the Acknowledge button to move the alert from the Alerts Grid to the Events Grid. Note: The check box to control the method of alert acknowledgement (manual or automatic) can have different labels like Requires Operator Response, Requires Alert Response, Response Required, Alert Requires Response in the different hardware device screens. All these labels have the same meaning and they all control the Alert Acknowledgement method.
Readers
Open Readers screen by clicking Configuration menu and Readers menu item in CardAccess main screen. By default, Readers screen will open in General tab. Priority values for CardAccess Reader events can be set in Priorities tab. A click on Priorities tab will display the screen below.
Fig. 16.1. Readers screen in Priorities tab.
Figure 16.1 shows the Priorities folder tab being divided into two sections Priority Settings and Miscellaneous Priorities. The reader priorities listed in the Priority Settings section are serious door events while those listed in the Miscellaneous Priorities are normal door events. The segregation of event types on the screen is by design. The violation events are treated quite differently from normal events. The two sections are detailed below.
Priority Settings section

The Priority Settings section consists of controls for serious door alerts like door break-ins, doors not closed on time, bad badges etc.
Fig. 16.2. Priority Settings section showing controls for serious door alerts

Controls for acknowledgement of door alerts in Priority Settings section are explained below.
Fig. 16.3. Controls for acknowledgement of door alerts in Priority Settings section highlighted.
Priority Every Door Alert seen in Priority Settings section has a corresponding spin control for setting the priority value. CardAccess loads default priority values for each of the door alerts as shown in figure 16.3. The system loaded priority values can be changed as desired. Priority values set for the events in Readers screen will be overridden by Auto Ack Priority Set-Point fixed in the System Settings screen. Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control is explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings.
Changing Default Priority Value Apply the same steps explained under the heading Changing Default Priority Value in the section Panels. Requires Alert Response Every door alert in Priority Settings section has a check box labeled Requires Alert Response as shown in figure 16.3. Requires Alert Response check box in Readers screen has the same function as Requires Operator Response check box in Panels screen. Refer the heading Requires Operator Response explained in the section Panels.
Miscellaneous Priorities
The Miscellaneous Properties section has controls for normal door alerts, when the door is being accessed normally with permission.
Fig. 16.4. Miscellaneous Priorities section showing controls for normal door alerts

Controls for acknowledgement of door alerts in Miscellaneous Priorities section are explained below.
Fig. 16.5. Controls for acknowledgement of door alerts in Miscellaneous Priorities section highlighted.
Enable Oper Acknowledge Every Alert mentioned in the Miscellaneous Priorities section has an Enable Oper Acknowledge check box as shown in figure 16.5. The value in this box controls where the alert will be displayed in CardAccess main screen (Events/Alerts grid). Occurrence of an alert when Enable Oper Acknowledge box is unchecked, will display the alert in Events grid. Priority setting of the Alert will be ignored in this case. When an alert has the Enable Oper Acknowledge box checked one of the following can take place depending on the controls in System Settings screen: The alert will be displayed in Alerts Grid provided Enable AutoAcknowledge box is unchecked in the System Settings screen. If Enable Auto-Acknowledge box is checked, the alert can be displayed either in Events, or in the Alerts grid, depending on Auto Ack Priority Set-Point value in the System Settings screen. The Enable Auto-Acknowledge and Auto Ack Priority Set-Point controls are explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings.
Priority Every Door Alert seen in Miscellaneous Priorities section has a corresponding spin control for setting the priority value. CardAccess loads default priority values for each of the door alerts as shown in the figure 16.5. The system loaded priority values can be changed as desired.
Changing Default Priority Value

Apply the same steps explained under the heading Changing Default Priority Value in the section Panels.
Requires Alert Response Every door alert in Miscellaneous Priorities section has a check box labeled Requires Alert Response as shown in figure 16.5. Requires Alert Response check box in Readers screen has the same function as Requires Operator Response check box in Panels screen. Refer the heading Requires Operator Response explained in the section Panels.
10
Inputs
Open Inputs screen by clicking on Configuration menu and Inputs menu item in CardAccess main screen. By default, Inputs screen will open in General tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 17.1. Inputs screen in General tab.

Controls for acknowledgement of Input alerts are explained below.
Fig. 17.2. Controls in Inputs screen for acknowledgement of Input alerts.
11
Alert Priority
Fig. 17.3. The Alert Priority Selection Control.
The Alert Priority control is used to set the priority level for all event messages that are received from a particular Input. There are only two events associated with inputs Normal and Abnormal. A single alert priority is set for both event messages in this control. The priority set is used by the system to route event messages to the Events or Alerts Grid. The default Alert Priority loaded by the system for Inputs is 50. System loaded priority values can be changed as desired. Priority values set for the events in Inputs screen will be overridden by Auto Ack Priority Set-Point value fixed in the System Settings screen. Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control is explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings.
Changing Default Priority Value Apply the same steps explained under the heading Changing Default Priority Value in the section Panels. Response Required
Fig. 17.4. The Response Required Check Box.
Response Required check box in Inputs screen has the same function as Requires Operator Response check box in Panels screen. Refer the heading Requires Operator Response explained in the section Panels.
12
Relays
Open Relays screen by clicking on Configuration menu and Relays menu item in CardAccess main screen. By default, Relays screen will open in General tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 18.1. Relays screen in General tab.
13

Controls for acknowledgement of Relay alerts are explained below.
Fig. 18.2. Controls in Relays screen for acknowledgement of Relay alerts.
Alert Priority
The Alert Priority control is used to set the priority value for relay type event messages from a particular relay. There are only two events associated with Relays Output On and Output Off. A single alert priority is set for both event messages in this control. The priority set is used by the system to route event messages to the Events or Alerts Grid. The default Alert Priority loaded by the system for Relays is 1. System loaded priority values can be changed as desired.
14
Priority values set for the events in Relays screen will be overridden by Auto Ack Priority Set-Point value set in the System Settings screen. Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control is explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings.
Changing Default Priority Value Apply the same steps explained under the heading Changing Default Priority Value in the section Panels. Alert on Change
Fig. 18.4. The Alert on Change check box.
By default, relay event messages are not reported in CardAccess. To enable the reporting of Output On and Output Off event messages for a particular relay, click the Alert on Change check box. Box checked is enabled, unchecked is disabled (the default). Alert Requires Response
Fig. 18.5. The Alert Requires Response check box.
Alert Requires Response check box in Relays screen has the same function as Requires Operator Response check box in Panels screen. Refer the heading Requires Operator Response explained in the section Panels.
15
Links
Open Links screen by clicking on Configuration menu and Links menu item in CardAccess main screen. By default, Links screen will open in the General tab as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 19.1. Links screen in General tab.

Controls for acknowledgement of Link alerts are explained below.
Fig. 19.2. Controls in Links screen for acknowledgement of Link alerts.
16
Alert Priority
The Alert Priority selection control is used to set the priority value for the event messages from a particular link. There are only two events associated with Links Link Activate and Link Deactivate. A single alert priority is set for both event messages in this control. The priority set is used by the system to route event messages to the Events or Alerts Grid. The default priority loaded by the system for Links is 10. System loaded priority values can be changed as desired. Priority values set for the events in Links screen will be overridden by Auto Ack Priority Set-Point value fixed in the System Settings screen. Auto Ack Priority Set-Point control is explained under the heading Alerts tab in the section System Settings.
Changing Default Priority Value Apply the same steps explained under the heading Changing Default Priority Value in the section Panels.
17
Fig. 19.4. The Alert Requires Response Check Box
Alert Requires Response check box in Links screen has the same function as Requires Operator Response check box in Panels screen. Refer the heading Requires Operator Response explained in the section Panels.
18

The CardAccess Events History screen allows viewing of archive event data. The typical use of this screen is to scan archive events from past months or years to look for some notable event(s). The screen will only allow the review of events. It is not possible to review database information such as configuration or System Settings. The screen has controls that allow connection to any CardAccess SQL database.
Accessing CardAccess Events History Screen

Click on System menu in CardAccess menu bar. Click on View History option in the menu list. Upon clicking, the CardAccess Events History screen will be displayed as below.
Fig. 30.1. The CardAccess Events History screen showing events history of CardAccess main database.
By default, the Events History screen will display the archive event data of the CardAccess main database (CIDATA in the above figure). Hence, the Events History screen will be displaying the same data as in CardAccess Events Grid. The status bar at the bottom of the screen will display the currently connected CardAccess SQL server and database names.
Viewing Events history of an archive database is explained in the section titled Viewing Events History of an Archive Database.
Note: The Events History can be filtered to view only specific event types that are generated during a specific time period. Controls for filtering events are explained in the section titled Event History Filters.
Events History Columns
Fig. 30.3. CardAccess Events History Columns.
The Events History columns are explained below. Date/Time: This column shows the date and time at which the highlighted event occurred. Acknowledged: If the highlighted Event is an Alert that was acknowledged, the Acknowledged column will show the date and time at which the Alert was acknowledged. If the highlighted Event is a normal Event in CardAccess, the Acknowledged column will show exactly the same date and time as that displayed in the Date/Time column. Event Class: Events are grouped into pre-defined classes like Badges, Doors, Inputs, System, Relays, etc. The Event Class column will display the predefined class names of the Events. Description Text: This column gives a brief description of the highlighted event. Location: This column shows the name of the place where the highlighted Event occurred. Priority: This column displays the priority value of the highlighted Event as fixed in the various configuration screens of CardAccess.
Show Video Right-Click Option

The Show Video option is displayed by right-clicking on/under any of the Events History columns, when DVR RemoteView is enabled in CardAccess.
Fig. 30.4. Show Video option available by right-clicking on/under any of the Events History columns.
Clicking on this option will display the DVR Recorded Video of the highlighted Event. For more information on DVR recorded video, refer the document DVR RemoteView Integration with CardAccess 3000
Column Relocation
Columns can be relocated if desired. Steps for relocating a column: 1. Select the column: Select the column to be relocated. 2. Position the Cursor: Position mouse cursor on the column name. 3. Click and Hold: Hold down the left mouse button. 4. Drag the Column: Drag the column to the required position.
5. Release: Release the mouse button. The columns will revert back to their default positions when the screen is reopened.
Events Sorting Order

By default, the events are sorted according to Acknowledged column. This column allows the events to be sorted according to the time at which the events are acknowledged. However, any column can be used for sorting. The sort criterion can be changed by clicking on the column name desired to be used for sorting. The sort column will be highlighted in yellow color. A column can be sorted in ascending/descending orders alternately by clicking on the column name. Upward/downward arrows seen in a column name (in yellow highlight) represent ascending/descending sort orders respectively.
Fig. 30.5. Event Class column used for sorting in descending order.
Viewing Events History of an Archive Database

By default, the CardAccess Events History screen will display events data of CardAccess main database (refer figure 30.1). In order to view events data of an archive database, follow the step below. Click the down arrow of Server control to display the list of CardAccess SQL server names. Among the names, click the server name of the archive database whose Events History data you wish to view.
Click the down arrow of Database control to display the list of archive databases. Note: Database names will be seen in the drop down list only when a server is selected in the Server control. Among the names, click the database name whose Events History you wish to view.
Fig. 30.7. Selecting a database name to view Events History.
Upon clicking, the screen will display the Events History of the archive database selected.
Fig. 30.8. Events History of archive database selected.
Note: After connecting to an archive database, the status bar will display the archive database name as highlighted in the above figure.
Event History Filters

A number of filter controls are provided in the Events History screen. These controls aid in filtering the Events displayed on the screen to help view only specific event types, generated during a specific time period. The filter controls are explained below.
Date Filter
Fig. 30.9. Date selection controls.
Date selection controls act as filters. When a date range is set, the Events History screen will filter out any events from view that do not fall within the date range specified. Note that the date selection controls default to the previous month every time View History screen is reopened. Setting Date Range Two calendar controls are provided to set the date range. The Time From control on the left is used for setting the start date and the Time Thru control on the right is used for setting the end date. Follow the steps below to set the date range: a) Click the down of Time From control. Upon clicking, a calendar window will be displayed as shown below.
Fig. 30.10. Calendar window displayed by clicking down arrow of Time From control.
By default, the current date will be highlighted in the calendar. b) Click on a date of your choice (for start date) in the calendar window.
Note: o The Today button (refer figure 30.10) can be used to choose the current date. o The Clear button (refer figure 30.10) can be used to remove a date entered. o The left/right arrows at the top of the calendar window (refer figure 30.10) can be used to scroll backward/forward through the months of a year. c) Repeat steps a) and b) to select a desired end date in the Time Thru control.
Events Filter
Fig. 30.11. Radio button controls for filtering events.
The Events Selected area of CardAccess Events History screen provides radio buttons controls to allow selection of specific Event types to view. Selection of the radio button provided for a particular event type will filter out all other events that do not match the selected type. By default, System radio button will be selected as shown in figure 30.11. To change the default selection, click on the button control of the event type you wish to view. The button controls are explained below: All radio button: Selecting this button control will display all events types of the CardAccess database. Badges radio button: Badges radio button can be selected for viewing badge type events. Selecting this button control will display the following additional controls:
9
Badge Event Type Badge Search Columns o Badge # o Last Name o First Name o Group o Dept These additional controls aid in filtering of badge events.
Fig. 30.12. Additional controls for filtering badge events displayed by clicking on Badges radio button.
If no changes are made to the additional controls, then all badge events will be displayed on CardAccess Events History screen. Note: It is necessary to click on Run button (refer figure 30.12) to refresh the screen for displaying the badge events. The additional badge controls are explained below: Badge Event Type It is possible to view specific badge events using the options provided by the Badge Event Type control. Click on down arrow of the control to view the available options.
10
Fig. 30.13. The Available badge event types for selection.
Scrolling down you can see that there are fourteen badge event types available. Each of these options acts as a filter, and when selected, will display only those badge events that match the specific type. For example, selection of Valid Access option in the list will display only valid access badge events on the CardAccess Events History screen. If none of the options are selected in the drop down list, the screen will display all badge events (the default), which is the same as selecting All option in the list.
Badge Search Columns
Fig. 30.14. Badge search columns for filtering badge events.
Note the following points for all badge search columns shown in figure 30.14. Column entries are case insensitive. To specify a search criterion in any field, click in the white space and type the name of the item you like to search. A badge search column can be used individually or in combination with other column(s) for filtering the events.
11
If none of the columns are used for filtering, the CardAccess Events History screen will display all badge event types (unless a specific event type is selected in the Badge Event Type drop down list). The badge search columns are explained below: Badge #: If a badge number is entered, only events specific to that badge number will be displayed. Last Name: If a last name is entered, only events containing the specified last name will be displayed. First Name: If a first name is entered, only events containing the specified first name will be displayed. Group: If a group name is entered, only events specific to that group will be displayed. Dept: If a department name is entered, only events specific to that department will be displayed.
Run Button For Badge events filtering to take effect, you must click on Run button after making change(s) to the filter control(s)
Fig. 30.15. The Run Button.
The CardAccess Events History screen will display the filtered badge events if matching records are found for the selected filter type. The screen will be blank if there are no matching records. Readers radio button: Selecting this button control will display all door related messages (bypass, door open too long, forced door, etc.) on CardAccess Events History screen. Inputs radio button: Selecting this button control will display all Input related messages (normal, abnormal) on CardAccess Events History screen.
12
Relays radio button: Selecting this button control will display all Relay related messages (Output on/off) on CardAccess Events History screen. Links radio button: Selecting this button control will display all Link related messages (Link activate/deactivate) on CardAccess Events History screen. System radio button: Selecting this button control will display all system related event messages (download started/complete, power fail etc) on CardAccess Events History screen. NAPCO radio button: Selecting this button control will display all NAPCO event messages on CardAccess Events History screen.
Printing Events History

Follow the steps below to print the Events History data: Open the CardAccess Events History screen by clicking on System->View History. Click on Print/Preview button in Events History screen toolbar. Note: The Print button will be enabled only when a Report Printer is selected in the System Settings screen. To select a Report Printer, refer Printers tab under the section CardAccess 3000 System Settings.
13

CA3000V2 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CA3000V2 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CA3000V2 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CardAccess 3000 GUI Guide Version 2

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Alerts Grid, Events Grid................................................................. 14

CardAccess Working Modes .......................................................... 45

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Log In, Log Out

Fig. 1.1. CardAccess Log In screen.

Default Login Identity

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Personal Login Identity

Fig. 1.2. Change Password button displayed after password entry.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Fig. 1.4. The CardAccess main screen.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Logging Out of CardAccess

Fig. 1.5. Log Out button in CardAccess tool bar.

Fig. 1.6. Log Out menu item in System menu.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Shutting down CardAccess

Clicking the Shutdown button will display the Logout dialog.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Fig. 1.9. Confirm dialog displayed if CardAccess is running on Host PC.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Fig. 8.5. Yellow icon representing CICDataServer Launcher in System Tray.

Upon clicking, a pop-up menu will be displayed as below.

Fig. 8.7. Confirm dialog to shutdown CICDataServer.

o Click on Yes button in the Confirm dialog to shutdown CICDataServer.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Message box displayed on CardAccess workstations.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Alerts Grid, Events Grid

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Fig. 2.2. Events grid of CardAccess main screen.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Events Grid Column Bar

Column Width Adjustability

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Events Grid Columns

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

The options are explained below.

Fig. 2.5. Right click options for Description column.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Fig. 2.6. Right click options for Location column.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Events Sorting Order

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

Events Grid Buttons

Fig. 2.7. Events grid buttons.

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide

CardAccess 3000 Version 2.0 User Guide